TestingMethodsForFertilizers2018 PDF

Note: This is an unofficial translation.
Only the original Japanese texts have effect

and the translation is to be used solely as reference material.
This center assumes no responsibility whatever for any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, consequential damages and any other damages resulting from the use
of these contents.
No part of this text may be reproduced in any form without permission.
Testing Methods for Fertilizers

(2018)
Incorporated Administrative Agency

Food and Agricultural Materials Inspection Center
Testing Methods for Fertilizers (2018)
Introduction
“The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers” stipulated by the Ministry of

Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries is the only analysis method to assess main
components and harmful components in fertilizers in Japan and contributes to
maintaining quality and securing safety of fertilizers. However, no new revision has
been issued since “The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers 1992” was issued.
Some quarters such as fertilizer manufacturers and inspection instruction agencies
have requested a revised edition of “The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers”
since new kinds of fertilizers and its new components were added into the public
standard, and analysis instruments and technologies have progressed during the period.
Incorporated Administrative Agency, Food and Agricultural Materials Inspection
Center (FAMIC) has revised the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers by
introducing the analysis conditions and the analysis methods, etc. which meet the latest
situation. Additionally, FAMIC tried to study how to introduce the analysis methods or
the new analysis instruments to cope with new effective components or harmful
components and new fertilizers which are not documented in the Official Methods of
Analysis of Fertilizers, and established new testing methods. At the same time, FAMIC
conducted a validity test according to the requirements of ISO/IEC 17025 and opened
the results and new testing methods which were discussed and approved by “the
Technical Committee for Fertilizers etc.” including outside experts on FAMIC’s web
site in 2008 as “The Testing Methods for Fertilizers 2008”. Since then, the contents
have been annually added and updated. In this year, High Performance Liquid
Chromatograph, etc. for uric acid within fluid fertilizers which have been studied anew
in FY2017 were merged, and the “Testing Methods for Fertilizes 2018” was opened on
FAMIC’s web site.
The “Testing Methods for Fertilizes” uses reagents and instruments which are
stipulated in JIS standards, etc. and its validity of the testing method is checked by
referencing IUPAC protocols and it is listed as an analysis method whose validity is
checked in “The Management Handbook of Heavy Metal in Sludge Fertilizers”
published by the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries in August 2010.
Therefore, FAMIC would like people engaged in the quality control and analysis of
fertilizes to use this as a practical document.
June , 2018
Incorporated Administrative Agency
Food and Agricultural Materials Inspection Center
General Director
Makoto Kimura
The members of The Technical Committee

for the Testing Methods for Fertilizers (2017)
(Without honorifics, as of March, 2018)
Mayumi AIZAKI National Federation of Agricultural Cooperative
Associations
Satoshi ISAGAWA Japan Food Research Laboratories
Toshiaki IMAGAWA Japan Fertilizer and Feed Inspection Association
Akira KAWASAKI National Research and Development Agency: National
Agriculture and Food Research Organization
Takayoshi KUROIWA National Research and Development Agency: National
Metrology Institute of Japan
Shigehiro NAITO National Research and Development Agency: National
Akira NOGUCHI Incorporated Educational Institution: Nihon
University
Kazuyuki YAZIMA Corporate Juridical Person: Niigata Prefectural
Institute of Public Health and Environmental
Sciences
Akemi YASUI National Research and Development Agency: National
Contents
1. General Rule .... 1

1.1 Common Items .... 1
1.2 Validity check of testing methods .... 6
1.3 Adoption of testing methods .... 8
1.3.1 Competence evaluation of laboratory .... 8
1.3.2 Evaluation of test result .... 8
2. Handling of samples .... 9

2.1 Sampling .... 9
2.2 Storage of samples .... 10
2.3 Preparation of test samples .... 11
2.3.1 Pre-drying .... 12
2.3.2 Reduction (Separation) .... 14
2.3.3 Grinding .... 15
3. General tests .... 17

3.1 Moisture or moisture content .... 17
3.1.a Loss on drying method with drying apparatus .... 17
3.1.b Loss on drying method by moisture analyzers .... 20
3.2 Ash content .... 23
3.2.a Ignition residue method .... 23
3.3 pH .... 24
3.3.a Glass electrode method .... 24
3.4 Electrical conductivity .... 26
3.4.a Measurement method with an electrical conductivity meter .... 26
3.5 Granularity .... 28
3.5.a Dry-type sieving testing method .... 28
3.6 Oil content .... 30
3.6.a Diethyl ether extraction method .... 30
4. Main components, guaranteed components, etc .... 32

4.1 Nitrogen .... 32
4.1.1 Total nitrogen .... 32
4.1.1.a Kjeldahl method .... 32
4.1.1.b Combustion method .... 38
4.1.1.c Devarda’s alloy – Kjeldahl method .... 43
4.1.1.d Reduced iron– Kjeldahl method .... 50
4.1.1.e Calculation with ammoniac nitrogen and nitrate nitrogen .... 56
-i-
4.1.2 Ammoniac nitrogen .... 57

4.1.2.a Distillation method .... 57
4.1.2.b Formaldehyde method .... 63
4.1.3 Nitrate nitrogen .... 68
4.1.3.a Devarda’s alloy - distillation method .... 68
4.1.3.b Reduced iron- distillation method .... 73
4.1.3.c Phenol sulfuric acid method .... 78
4.2 Phosphoric acid .... 82
4.2.1 Total phosphoric acid .... 82
4.2.1.a Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis .... 82
4.2.1.b Quinoline gravimetric analysis .... 91
4.2.2 Soluble phosphoric acid .... 95
4.2.2.b Quinoline gravimetric analysis .... 101
4.2.3 Citrate-soluble phosphoric acid .... 105
4.2.3.b Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis (Fertilizers containing
phosphorous acid or phosphite) .... 111
4.2.3.c Quinoline gravimetric analysis .... 118
4.2.3.d ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry .... 122
4.2.4 Water-soluble phosphoric acid .... 128
phosphorous acid or phosphite) .... 136
4.2.4.c Quinoline gravimetric analysis .... 143
4.3 Potassium .... 151
4.3.1 Total potassium .... 151
4.3.1.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry or flame photometry .... 151
4.3.1.b Sodium tetraphenylborate gravimetric analysis .... 157
4.3.2 Citrate soluble potassium .... 162
4.3.2.c Sodium tetraphenylborate volumetric analysis .... 170
4.3.3 Water-soluble potassium .... 177
4.3.3.c Sodium tetraphenylborate volumetric analysis .... 188
- ii -
4.4 Silicic acid .... 195

4.4.1 Soluble silicic acid .... 195
4.4.1.a Potassium fluoride method .... 195
4.4.1.b Potassium fluoride method (Silica gel fertilizers, etc.) .... 199
4.4.1.c Potassium fluoride method (Fertilizers containing silica gel fertilizers) .... 203
4.4.1.d Perchloric acid method .... 209
4.4.2 Water-soluble silicic acid .... 212
4.4.2.a Potassium fluoride method .... 212
4.5 Lime, calcium and alkalinity .... 216
4.5.1 Total lime .... 216
4.5.1.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry .... 216
4.5.2 Soluble lime .... 222
4.5.3 Water-soluble calcium .... 225
4.5.3.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry .... 228
4.5.4 Alkalinity .... 231
4.5.4.a Ethylenediamine tetraacetate method .... 231
4.5.4.b Calculation with soluble lime and soluble magnesia .... 237
4.6 Magnesia .... 238
4.6.1 Total magnesia .... 238
4.6.2 Soluble magnesia .... 243
4.6.3 Citrate-soluble magnesia .... 246
4.6.4 Water-soluble magnesia .... 256
4.7 Manganese .... 263
4.7.1 Soluble manganese .... 263
4.7.2 Citrate-soluble manganese .... 266
4.7.3 Water-soluble manganese .... 275
4.8 Boron .... 285
- iii -
4.8.1 Citrate-soluble boron .... 285

4.8.1.a Azomethine-H method .... 285
4.8.2 Water-soluble boron .... 295
4.8.2.a Azomethine-H method .... 295
4.9 Zinc .... 303
4.9.1 Total zinc .... 303
4.9.2 Water-soluble zinc .... 311
4.10 Copper .... 318
4.10.1 Total copper .... 318
4.10.2 Water-soluble copper .... 326
4.11 Organic carbon and carbon-nitrogen ratio .... 333
4.11.1 Organic carbon .... 333
4.11.1.a Dichromate oxidation .... 333
4.11.1.b Combustion method .... 337
4.11.2 Carbon-nitrogen ratio .... 342
4.11.2.a Calculation with organic carbon and total nitrogen .... 342
4.12 Sulfur .... 343
4.12.1 Total sulfur content .... 343
4.12.1.a Potassium permanganate analysis .... 343
4.12.1.b Barium chloride gravimetric analysis .... 345
4.12.1.c Transmitted light analysis .... 350
4.13 Iron .... 355
4.13.1 Water-soluble iron .... 355
4.14 Molybdenum .... 362
4.14.1 Water-soluble molybdenum .... 362
4.14.1.a Sodium thiocyanate absorptiometric analysis .... 362
4.15 Cobalt .... 369
- iv -
4.15.1 Water-soluble cobalt .... 369

5. Harmful components .... 374

5.1 Mercury .... 374
5.1.a Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry .... 374
5.1.b Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers) .... 378
5.2 Arsenic .... 382
5.2.a Hydride generation atomic absorption spectrometry .... 382
5.2.b Silver diethyl dithiocarbamate absorptiometric analysis .... 388
5.2.c ICP Mass Spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers) .... 393
5.3 Cadmium .... 398
5.3.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry .... 398
5.3.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry .... 402
5.3.d ICP Mass Spectrometry .... 411
5.4 Nickel .... 415
5.5 Chromium .... 428
5.5.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers containing organic matters) .... 428
5.5.b Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers mainly containing molten matters, slag,
etc.) .... 432
5.5.c Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers not containing organic matters). 438
5.5.d ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry .... 444
5.5.e ICP Mass Spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers) .... 447
5.6 Lead .... 452
5.7 Sulfamic acid (amidosulfuric acid) .... 465
5.7.a Ion Chromatography .... 465
5.7.b High Performance Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometry .... 469
5.8 Ammonium thiocyanate (Sulfurized cyanide) .... 475
5.8.b High Performance Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometry .... 479
5.9 Nitrous acid .... 486
5.9.a High Performance Liquid Chromatography .... 486
-v-
5.10 Biuret nitrogen .... 493

5.11 Titan .... 499
5.11.a ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (1) .... 499
5.11.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (2) .... 503
5.12 Sulfurous Acid .... 507
6. Testing relating to the other limitations .... 508

6.1 Dicyandiamide nitrogen .... 508
6.1.a High Performance Liquid Chromatography (1) .... 508
6.1.b High Performance Liquid Chromatography (2) .... 512
6.2 Chlorine .... 518
6.2.b Silver nitrate method .... 523
6.3 Urea nitrogen .... 526
6.3.a Urease method .... 526
6.3.b High Performance Liquid Chromatography .... 534
6.3.c p-dimethylaminobenzaldehide absorptiometry .... 541
6.4 Guanidine nitrogen .... 544
6.5 Cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen (water-soluble nitrogen) .... 550
6.5.a Cold buffer solution method .... 550
6.6 Heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen (hot-water soluble nitrogen) .... 556
6.6.a Heat buffer solution method .... 556
6.7 Activity coefficient of nitrogen .... 562
6.7.a Buffer solution method .... 562
6.8 Initial elution rate .... 570
6.8.a Standing-in-water method .... 570
6.9 Humic acid (Acid insoluble - alkali soluble component) .... 573
6.9.a Gravimetric analysis .... 573
6.10 Sulfate .... 577
6.11 Carbon dioxide .... 578
7. Nitrification inhibitor .... 579

7.1 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine (AM) .... 579
7.2 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) .... 583
7.3 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC) .... 587
- vi -
7.4 N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) .... 590

7.5 Dicyandiamide (Dd) .... 594
7.6 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST) .... 600
8. Others .... 604

8.1 Melamine and its degradation products .... 604
8.1.a Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry .... 604
8.1.b .... 611
8.1.c High Performance Liquid Chromatography (Fertilizers not containing organic matters)
.... 612
8.1.d High Performance Liquid Chromatography （Fertilizers containing organic matters）
.... 618
8.2 Melamine and its degradation products .... 622
8.2.a High Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry
(1: Simultaneous analysis of three components for clopyralid, etc.) .... 622
8.2.b High Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry
(2: Microanalysis for clopyralid) .... 631
8.3 Residue agrichemicals (multicomponent) .... 641
8.3.1 Residue agrichemicals multicomponent analysis (1) .... 641
8.3.1.a High Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry .... 641
8.3.2 Residue agrichemicals multicomponent analysis (2) .... 650
8.3.2.a Gas Chromatography .... 650
8.4 Sodium .... 657
8.5 Guanylurea nitrogen .... 661
8.6 Uric acid .... 667
Appendix. The procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods .... 672
- vii -
1. General Rule±
1.1 Common Items
(1) Applicable range
The Testing Methods for Fertilizers stipulate the official method of analysis of fertilizers and
fertilizer materials. The type of samples in the tests is shown in the summary of respective test
items.
(2) General matters in common, procedures and terms

(2.1) Terms related to laws and ordinances
a) Main components or major components: The main components or major components in
fertilizers in Table 1 are stipulated as components to be calculated by a public notice of the
Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries.
Table 1 Components to be calculated as main component

or major component in fertilizers
Main component or major
Component to be calculated
component
Phosphate Phosphorus pentoxide (P2O5 )
Potassium Potassium oxide (K2 O)
Silicate Silicon dioxide (SiO2)
Magnesium Magnesium oxide (MgO)
Manganese Manganese oxide (MnO)
Boron Diboron trioxide (B2 O3)
Sulfur content Sulfur trioxide (SO3 )
Lime Calcium oxide (CaO)
(2.2) General matters and terms that cite Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)
a) General notices: General matters common to analysis are according to JIS K 0050.
b) Definition: The definitions of major terms used in the Testing Methods for Fertilizers are
according to JIS K 0211, JIS K 0214, JIS K 0215, JIS Z 8101-1, JIS Z 8101-2 or JIS Z
8101-3.
c) Laboratory sample: A sample transferred to a laboratory. Laboratory sample as specified in
JIS K 0211.
d) Test sample: A sample obtained from a laboratory sample after pretreatment such as grinding.
Test sample as specified in JIS K 0211.
e) Analytical sample: A sample measured from a laboratory sample or a test sample and to be
used in one test. Test sample or analytical sample as specified in JIS K 0211.
f) Sample: A sample in the testing methods indicates e) a laboratory sample, f) a test sample or
g) an analytical sample.
g) Rounding numbers: Methods of rounding the numbers are according to JIS Z 8401.
h) Absorptiometric analysis: General rules for absorptiometric analysis are according to JIS K
0115.
i) Atomic absorption spectrometry: Atomic absorption spectrometry includes flame atomic
absorption spectrometry, electrically heated atomic absorption spectrometry (hereinafter
1
referred to as “electrically heated atomic absorption spectrometry”) and other atomic

absorption spectrometry. General matters common to these are according to JIS K 0121.
j) Gas chromatography: General matters common to gas chromatography are according to JIS
K 0114.
k) Gas chromatography/Mass spectrometry: General matters common to Gas
chromatography/Mass spectrometry are according to JIS K 0123.
l) Electrical conductivity measuring method: General matters common to electrical
conductivity measuring methods are according to JIS K 0130.
m) Test sieving: General matters common to test sieving are according to JIS Z 8815.
n) High Performance Liquid Chromatography: General matters common to High
Performance Liquid Chromatography are according to JIS K 0124.
o) High Performance Liquid Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry: General matters
common to High Performance Liquid Chromatography/mass spectrometry are according to
JIS K 0136.
p) ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry: General matters common to ICP Optical Emission
Spectrometry are according to JIS K 0116.
q) ICP Mass Spectrometry: General matters common to ICP Mass Spectrometry are according
to JIS K 0133.
r) Ion Chromatography: General matters common to Ion Chromatography are according to JIS
K 0127.
(2.3) Description methods, procedures and terms in testing methods for fertilizers.
a) Reagent name: Unless otherwise specified, conform to the names by the chemical
nomenclature established by the Chemical Society of Japan [in accordance with the
International Union of Pure and Applicable Chemistry (IUPAC) nomenclature of inorganic
chemistry and nomenclature of organic chemistry] and the names of JIS reagents.
b) Organic matters: Fertilizers such as Organic fertilizers, sludge fertilizers and compost and
fertilizer materials. However, organic compounds such as urea and urea compounds are
excluded.
c) Actual article: A laboratory sample in original state.
d) Drying matter: The matter which remains after drying the actual article.
e) Notes, comments, figures, tables and formulae: Serial numbers for each test item should be
recorded in notes, comments, figures, tables and formulae.
f) Dilution of solution: “Transfer accurately a predetermined amount (to a vessel)” means the
procedure to measure any volume of solution with a measuring instrument specified in JIS K
0050 (into a vessel).
Also, “dilute accurately a predetermined amount (with solvent or solution)” means the
procedure to measure any volume of solution with a measuring instrument specified in JIS K
0050 into a volumetric flask of arbitrary volume and fill up to the marked line (with solvent or
solution) (1).
g) Description of mixture solution: Mixture solutions are described as shown in 1) - 4).
1) Reagent + reagent: Describe as reagent name 1−reagent name 2 (V1 + V2). In this case, V1
volume of reagent name 1 is mixed with V2 volume of reagent name 2.
Example: acetonitrile−water (1+1), hexane−ethyl acetate (2+1), methanol−buffer solution
(3+1)
2) Reagent + water: Describe as reagent name 1 (V1+V2). In the case of reagents described in
Table 1 in JIS K 0050, it means V1 volume of reagent name 1 is diluted by mixing with V2
volume of water.
Example: hydrochloric acid (1+1), sulfuric acid (1+2), ammonia solution (1+3)
2
3) Solution + reagent: Describe as solution name a (concentration) - reagent name b [V1+V2].

In this case, it means V1 volume of solution name a of a certain concentration is mixed with V2
volume of reagent name b.
Example: sodium hydroxide solution (4 g/L)−methanol [1+4]
4) Diluted reagent + reagent: Describe as reagents name a (V1+V2) - reagent name b [V3+V4].
In this case, V3 volume of the solution in which V1 volume of reagent name a described in
Table 1 in JIS K 0050 diluted by mixing with V2 volume of water, is mixed with V4 volume of
reagent name b.
Example: hydrochloric acid (1+100)−methanol [2+3]
h) Preparation of a calibration curve: “Transfer A mL - B mL of the standard solution to
volumetric flasks step-by-step.” means the procedure to transfer a volume of 4 - 6 steps (2) in
the range from A mL to B mL of the standard solution to respective volumetric flasks
step-by-step.
Prepare a calibration curve every time a test is conducted. Also, when the same test item is
measured under the same conditions for multiple samples continuously, measure the standard
solution at regular intervals to check the indicated value.
i) Washing of apparatus: Wash containers with a detergent and tap water before usage and
wash sufficiently with water of A2 specified in JIS K 0577 or water that is confirmed not to
affect a quantification value. In case of sampling a sample to test a metallic element and
organic materials, after previous washing, dip with nitric acid (1+9) or hydrochloric acid
(1+9) as appropriate and further wash sufficiently with water of A2, A3 or A4.
j) Handling of reagents and liquid waste, etc.: Handle with care and in compliance with
relevant laws and regulations. When treatment methods are specified in respective test items,
comply with the methods.
k) Referential matters related to the validity of testing methods: Information related to the
validity of respective testing methods such as quantification range (minimum limits of
quantification, etc.), mean recovery, repeatability, intermediate precision and reproducibility
is described in a Comment, etc. Note that the numerical values such as Minimum Limit of
Quantification, etc. are not standards to be targeted but examples.
Note (1) When the dilution factor is large, accuracy should be secured by procedures such as
repeating the dilution procedure.
(2) Set according to the specification and operation method of the measurement instrument
used. There is no need to include the minimum and the maximum values of the
calibration curb range described in the Testing Methods for Fertilizers.
(3) Water
a) Water: Water used in the Testing Methods for Fertilizers herein is water of A2 specified in JIS
K 0557 or water that is confirmed not to affect a quantitation value. However, when otherwise
specified in respective test items, use the specified water.
(4) Reagents
a) Reagents: When the reagent is JIS-specified, use one of highest quality among those marked
with the JIS symbol; when none of the reagent is marked with the JIS symbol, use one of
quality that will not cause a problem in the test. Use reference materials for volumetric
analysis specified in JIS K 8005 for the standardization of titration solutions.
b) Reference materials: The preparation of standard solutions or standardization of titration
solutions using reference materials 1) - 2) below other than materials specified in respective
testing items is possible.
3
1) Reference materials provided by National Metrology Institute: Reference materials

traceable to International System of Unit (SI) provided by National Metrology Institute (NMI:
National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology NMIJ, NIST, BAM, etc.)
which signed CIPM MRA (Global Mutual Recognition Arrangement based on the Meter
Convention)
2) Reference materials for volumetric analysis: Reference materials for volumetric analysis
specified in JIS K 8005.
c) Standard Solutions: In the cases of specifying in the comment in respective testing items, the
preparation of standard solutions for a calibration curve using the solution which is traceable
to the National Metrology of 1) - 3) below other than specified in respective testing items is
possible. However, use standard solutions which do not cause a problem in the test with the
kinds and concentration of chemical compounds or added acid used. In addition, in (2.1) a)
Main components or major components, calculate main components or major components
using conversion factors specified in the comment of respective items.
1) Standard Solutions provided by National Metrology Institute: Standard solutions
traceable to International System of Unit provided by National Metrology Institute (NMI:
National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology NMIJ, NIST, BAM, etc.)
which signed CIPM MRA.
2) JCSS (Japan Calibration Service System) Standard Solutions: Standard solutions
prepared by JCSS (Japan Calibration Service System) the registered provider for Chemical
Analysis, Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, ICP or Ion Chromatography traceable to specific
reference materials based on Measurement Act Article 134. In addition, it is recommended to
use standard solutions which indicate the uncertainty of concentration and factors.
3) Standard Solutions traceable to National Metrology: Standard Solutions traceable to
National Metrology (National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology NMIJ,
NIST, BAM reference materials, etc. traceable to International System of Unit) provide by
National Metrology Institutes which signed CIPM MRA, but at the same time they are
standard solutions for Chemical Analysis, Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, ICP or Ion
Chromatography prepared by the providers who obtained the certification of ISO Guide
34(JIS Q 0034： General requirements for the competence of reference material producers).
In addition, it is recommended to use standard solutions which indicate the uncertainty of
concentration and factors.
d) Titrant: A Titrant described in 1) is usable if it is specified in the comment of a testing item.
In addition, the titrant may be diluted to a predetermined concentration as necessary. In this
case, however, dilution treatment should be conducted when it is used and factors of the
titrant before dilution should be applied.
1) Titrant conforming to ISO/IEC 17025: A Titrant which is prepared and standardized and
whose factors are calculated by a laboratory which obtained an accreditation (accredited
range: JIS K 8001 JA.5 solutions for titration) based on ISO/IEC 17205. In addition, it is
recommended to use titrant which indicates the uncertainty of concentration and factors.
e) Concentration of reagent solution: Unless otherwise specified, the mass concentration is
expressed as g/L or mg/L, while the molar concentration is expressed as mol/L or mmol/L.
The concentration of the standard solution is expressed as the mass in 1 mL (mg/mL, µg/mL
or ng/mL) except for the ion-selective electrode method.
f) Concentration in parenthesis shown after the name of reagent solution: It indicates that
the solution is about that concentration except the standard solution. For example, sodium
hydroxide solution (0.1 mol/L) means that it is about 0.1 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution.
Also, the concentration shown in front of the name of solution means that it is the accurate
concentration. However, the concentration is generally expressed as a round figure; calculate
the factor separately.
4
(5) Apparatus
a) Glass apparatus: Unless otherwise specified, use glass apparatus specified in JIS R 3503 and
JIS R 3505. Also, when a heating procedure is involved, use borosilicate glass-1 specified in
JIS R 3503.
b) Non-glass apparatus: Unless otherwise specified, use plastic apparatus.
c) Desiccants for desiccators: Unless otherwise specified, use silica gel.
d) Porcelain crucibles and porcelain evaporating dishes: Use ones specified in JIS R 1301
and JIS R 1302.
e) Platinum crucibles and platinum evaporating dishes: Use ones specified in JIS H 6201 and
JIS H 6202.
f) Filter paper: Use that specified in JIS P 3801. However, the type of filter paper is specified in
respective test items.
g) Absorbance measurement (absorptiometric analysis) absorbance cells: Unless otherwise
specified, use ones of 10 mm in optical path length.
5
1.2 Validity check of testing methods

The Testing Methods for Fertilizers are methods which have been discussed and approved by the
Technical Committee for Fertilizers etc. or methods in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992) whose style was rewritten according to the Testing Methods for Fertilizers. The
Testing Methods for Fertilizers will be revised by adding, modifying, or deleting testing methods
with the approval of the Technical Committee for Fertilizers etc. due to the needs such as progress
in analytical techniques and changing social situation.
The procedure for the testing methods validity check is shown in the Appendix of this Testing
Methods for Fertilizers. This procedure was made based on 5.4.5 Validation of methods in JIS Q
17025 “General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories” or 2.4
Tests for validation requirements in “Guidelines for the design and implementation of surveillance
and monitoring and for the evaluation and publication of the results” which was issued by the
Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries and with reference to the guideline of Codex
Alimentarius Commission (CAC), IUPAC protocol and the guideline of AOAC INTERNATIONAL,
etc. Validated testing methods are methods which are conducted according to this procedure and
confirmed to conform to the standards such as required accuracy (trueness and precision),
quantification range (maximum and minimum limits of quantitation) and so on.
In addition, according to the validation levels in Table 1, an individual testing method is
classified from Type A to Type E in Table 2.
Table 1　　Testing method validation level

Symbol of Validation, etc. Validation method, etc.
Procedures of a testing method define measurement items. No
　Def-M （Defining method）
relation to a validation level.
Only calculation methods in a testing method define measurement
　Def-C （Defining calculation）
items. The part of the definition has no relation to a validation level.
Only extraction procedures in a testing method define measurement
　Def-E （Defining extraction）
items. The part of the definition has no relation to a validation level.
Evaluation by a collaboration test using samples of no less than 5
　HCV （Harmonized collaborative concentrations in no less than 8 laboratories with a testing method
validation） validation method regarded as an international standard (Guideline of
AOAC-International, IUPAC protocol, etc.).
Evaluation of validation using multiple laboratories, though it does not
　MLV （Multi laboratory validation）
satisfy HCV criteria.
Evaluation in a single laboratory using a testing method validation
SLV （SingleLaboratory validation） method regarded as an international standard (IUPAC/ISO/AOAC-
International harmonized guideline, etc.).
A testing method that does not carry out the validation by SLV or
　RNV （Research non validated）
higher level.
6
Table 2　　Classification of an individual testing method

Symbol of
Validation level
Classification
Type A A defined testing method
A testing method whose evaluation results by HCV and SLV satisfies the requirements of
Type B
"Appendix: The procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods".
A testing method whose evaluation results by MLV and SLV satisfies the requirements of
Type C
"Appendix: The procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods".
A testing method whose evaluation results by SLV satisfies the requirements of "Appendix: The
Type D
procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods".
Type E A testing method that does not carry out the validation by SLV or higher level.
7
1.3 Procedure of testing methods

1.3.1 Competence evaluation of laboratory
When an individual testing method is used, it is recommended that the following competence
evaluation of a laboratory is conducted.
As for the testing methods of Type A, Type B and Type C, conduct a replicate testing with five
samples, whose measured component concentration is known and to which certified reference
materials or standard solutions are added, to confirm trueness and precision in advance. As for the
testing methods of Type D and Type E, conduct a validity check in a single laboratory anew.
In order to ensure the reliability of a series of testing, conduct internal quality control (internal
quality assurance control, internal precision control) for each testing by a duplicate testing with
samples, whose measured component concentration is known, to confirm trueness and precision.
If it is possible, participate in an external quality assessment (external precision control,
competence test) in order to evaluate the consistency with testing results of other laboratories and
confirm the evaluation by z score.
1.3.2 Evaluation of test result

The results of a testing method which substitutes for the Testing Methods for Fertilizers can be
used if it conforms to criteria required in validation of a testing method. However, in case where the
result of the testing method does not agree with the result of the Testing Methods for Fertilizers (1),
the testing result of the latter is used to make a final judgement. In addition, if multiple methods are
described for a testing component, it is recommended that the result of a testing method for final
judgement is adopted in the following order: Type A, Type B, Type C, Type D and Type E.
Note (1) Refer to the separate sheet: “Target of trueness and criteria of precision in respective
concentration levels” or the reproducibility of respective testing methods” in order to
determine if there is mutual agreement.
8
2. Handling of samples
2.1 Sampling
Sampling is according to “2.1 Sampling in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992)”.
References
1) National Institute for Agro-Environmental Sciences, the Ministry of Agriculture,
Forestry and Fisheries: The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers 1992, p.4 - 5,
Japan Fertilizers Analysis Association, Tokyo (1992)
2) Masayoshi KOSHINO: Second Revision of The Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers
(Details), p. 12 - 17, Yokendo, Tokyo (1988)
9
2.2 Storage of samples

(1) Summary
Put a sample in a container suitable for its characteristics and form and seal it tightly, and then store
the sample at room or cold temperature. Care should be taken not to freeze it when it is stored at
cold temperature.
(2) Apparatus and instruments: Apparatus and instruments are shown below.
a) Refrigerator: A refrigerator that can be adjusted to 1 ºC - 8 ºC.
b) Storage container for a sample: A storage container for a sample should be clean, strong and
completely sealed airtight. In particular, in case it contains sludge for raw materials, the
container should be made of non-degradable, non-absorbable material. Additionally, it should
be airtight, water-proof, vapor-proof and non-corrosive.
(3) Procedure: Conduct storage as shown below.

a) Store a relatively stable sample in a tightly sealed container to avoid direct sunlight.
b) Store a sample in a desiccator, etc. by tightly sealing it if test results are affected by moisture
absorption.
c) Store a sample in a tightly sealed container in a dark place at 1 ºC - 8 ºC if it is easily
deteriorated by moisture.
10
2.3 Preparation of test samples

(1) Summary
a) Prepare a test sample by pre-drying, reducing, and grinding laboratory samples as necessary.
b) Conduct pre-drying if a laboratory sample is moist and hard to grind.
c)A laboratory sample made from such fertilizers as a fluid fertilizer or a particle-fertilizer, etc.
that is sufficiently homogeneous can be used as a test sample.
d) If contamination by apparatus affects a test result, procedures such as pre-drying, reduction
and grinding are prohibited
e) Note that part of a test sample should not scatter, nor should surrounding fine particles or
other alien substances be mixed with the test sample being prepared
References
1) JIS M 8100: Particulate materials - General rules for methods of sampling (1992)
2) JIS K 0060: Sampling method of industrial wastes (1992)
11
2.3.1 Pre-drying
(1) Summary
This procedure is applicable to fertilizers whose laboratory sample is moist and hard to grind.
The symbol of the procedure is 2.3.1-2017 or PD.-1.
Conduct pre-drying using a drying apparatus, and measure the loss on drying in this procedure.
In addition, calculate a conversion factor (actual article), if necessary, to convert the component
content obtained in respective tests to the component content in a laboratory sample (actual article).
a) Drying apparatus: A drying apparatus that can be adjusted to the pre-drying temperature at
± 2 ºC.
b) Sample drying dish: Measure the mass to the order of 0.1g in advance. Additionally, use
materials of a quality that do not affect the measurement of test components.
(3) Procedure: Conduct pre-drying as shown below.

a) Transfer 250 g - 1 kg of a laboratory sample to a sample drying dish, spread uniformly and
measure the mass to the order of 0.1g.
b) Place a sample drying dish containing a laboratory sample in a drying apparatus and dry (1).
c) Remove a sample drying dish from a drying apparatus and leave at rest at room temperature
until it is balanced with atmospheric temperature (2).
d) After leaving at rest, measure the mass of c) to the order of 0.1 g.
e) Calculate loss on drying in the pre-drying by the following formula (1). If necessary, calculate
a conversion factor (actual article) by the following formula (2).
Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) = ((W1 - A)/W1) × 100 ………. (1)
Conversion factor (actual article) = A/W1 ………… (2)
W1： Mass (g) of the sampled laboratory sample

A： Mass (g) of the sampled laboratory sample
Note (1) Examples of drying temperature and drying time: About 70 hours at 40 ºC, no less than
5 hours at 65 ºC.
(2) An example of time to leave at rest: About 20 minutes
Comment 1 When calculating major components in a laboratory sample (actual article) such as
compost and sludge fertilizers, etc. where the test sample is prepared conducting
pre-drying, convert component contents in the analytical sample obtained in
respective tests by the following formula.
Component content in a laboratory sample (actual article) = B ×C
B： Component content in an analytical sample obtained in each test

C： Conversion factor (actual article)
References
1) Mariko AIZAWA, Yuji SHIRAI, Yasushi SUGIMURA, Yuichi TAKAHASHI, Jun OKI,
Yukio FUKUCHI and Norio HIKICHI: Evaluation of Pre-drying Procedure to Prepare
Test Samples from Sludge Fertilizer, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 122 - 128
(2008)
12
(4) Flow sheet for pre-drying The flow sheet for the pre-drying of a moist laboratory sample is
shown below.
250 g – 1 kg of Transfer to a sample drying dish and spread uniformly.

Laboratory sample Measure the mass to the order of 0.1 g
Drying Example: About 70 hours at 40 ºC, no less than 5 hours at 65 ºC
Standing to cool Room temperature
Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 0.1 g
Figure Flow sheet for pre-drying
13
2.3.2 Reduction (Separation)

(1) Summary
This procedure is applicable to fertilizers. The symbol of the procedure is 2.3.2-2017 or Red.-1.
In order to distinguish a test sample from a sample for granularity test and physical characteristics
test, etc., reduce (separate) a laboratory sample with an increment reduction method, a riffle sampler
method or a conical quartering method.
(2) Apparatus
a) Scoop for increment reduction: A scoop for increment reduction specified in the attached
chart 1 of JIS M 8100.
b) Riffle sampler: A riffle sampler specified in the attached chart 3 of JIS M 8100.
(3) Procedure: Conduct reduction (separation) as shown below.

a) Increment reduction method: Conduct as indicated in 6.5.2 of JIS M 8100.
b) Riffle sampler method: Conduct as indicated in 6.5.3 of JIS M 8100.
c) Conical quartering method: Conduct as indicated in 6.5.4 of JIS M 8100.
14
2.3.3 Grinding
(1) Summary
This procedure is applicable to fertilizers. The symbol of the procedure is 2.3.3-2017 or GRD.-1.
In order to prepare a homogeneous test sample, grind a laboratory sample with an adequate grinder
until it completely passes through the designated granularity.
a) Grinder: Use a grinder (3) of a type and suitability for the granularity and the physical
characteristics (1) of a laboratory sample. In addition, the grinder apparatus which come into
contact with a laboratory sample should be made of materials (2) which do not affect the
analytical value.
b) Primary grinder: A grinder (3) that can primarily grind a large lump.
c) Cutter machine: A cutter that can cut long stems, etc.
d) Sieve: A sieve for the test specified in JIS Z 8801-1 or JIS Z 8801-2 or equivalents.
Note (1) The physical characteristics of a laboratory sample are defined by their solidity,
toughness, specific gravity and adhesiveness.
(2) (Ex.) Do not use stainless steel apparatus when preparing a test sample for chromium
or nickel.
(3) A centrifuging type grinder, a cutting mill, a vibration mill type grinder, etc.
(4) A blender with an attachable blade, etc.
(3) Procedure: Conduct grinding as shown below.

(3.1) Fertilizers except ones specified in (3.2): Conduct as specified in 6.4 of JIS M 8100 and as
shown below.
a) Break or cut a laboratory sample with a primary grinder or a cutting machine as necessary.
b) Grind with a grinding machine until it completely passes through a sieve of 500 µm - 1 mm
aperture.
c) Mix ground samples to make the test sample.
Comment 1 If the sampling amount of an analytical sample is less than 1 g, use a test sample
which will completely pass through 500 µm aperture sieve. In addition, in case a test
sample which suits the aforementioned condition cannot be obtained due to a
deliquescent laboratory sample, etc., make one by crushing a test sample with a
mortar and pestle, which completely passes through 1 mm aperture sieve.
(3.2) Fused phosphate fertilizer, slag silicate fertilizer, etc.: Conduct as specified in 6.4 of JIS M
8100 and as shown below.
a) Grind a laboratory sample with a vibration mill type grinder.
b) Transfer the ground laboratory sample to a sieve of 212 µm apertures.
c) Incline the sieve about 20 degrees, supporting it with one hand or a bent arm, and tap the
sieve frame with the other hand at the rate of about 120 times per minute. During the
procedure, place the sieve in a horizontal position at the rate of 4 times per minute, rotate it 90
degrees and tap the sieve frame firmly one or two times.
d) When fine powder attaches to the back side of a sieve screen, remove it gently from the back
side to make minus sieve.
e) Regarding the plus sieve of a sample, make them pass through by repeating the procedure in
a) - d).
f) Combine and mix the sample passed to make the test sample.
15
Comment 2 Conduct the procedures in (3.2) to obtain observed value of citric acid-soluble main
components in a stable manner. For examples of applicable laboratory samples, fused
matters such as fused phosphate and slag silicate fertilizer, fertilizers made from
fused materials and calcined phosphate, etc. are listed.
Comment 3 The procedures in b) - d) are the procedures in 6.1.3 (1.4) of JIS Z 8815.
16
3. General tests
3.1 Moisture or moisture content
3.1.a Loss on drying method with drying apparatus
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type A (Def-M)
and its symbol is 3.1.a-2017 or Mois.a-1.
Use drying apparatus under conditions suitable for the kind of fertilizers to be measured to heat
analytical samples to measure loss on drying and obtain moisture in an analytical sample or the
moisture content of a quality labeling standard of a special fertilizer (herein after referred to as
“moisture”). Additionally, calculate a conversion factor (drying matter) to convert component
content obtained by respective tests to component content in a drying matter as necessary.
This testing method corresponds to loss on heating in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers
(1992).
a) Drying apparatus: Drying apparatus that can be adjusted to the test temperature ± 2 ºC.
b) Ground-in stoppered weighing bottles (1): Low-form weighing bottles, 50 mm × 30 mm,
specified in JIS R 3503. Dry by heating in advance in a drying apparatus at 75 ºC - 130 ºC,
stand to cool in a desiccator, and measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Note (1) Aluminum weighing dishes described in the Handbook of the Feed Analysis Standards
-2009- can also be used.
(3) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below.

a) Transfer 2 g-5 g of an analytical sample to a ground-in stoppered weighing bottle, spread so
that the thickness is no more than 10 mm, and measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
b) Place the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle containing the analytical sample in a drying
apparatus at 100 ºC ± 2 ºC, and heat for 5 hours (2).
c) After heating, fit the stopper into the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle, and immediately
transfer to a desiccator to let it stand to cool.
d) After standing to cool, remove the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle from the desiccator,
and measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
e) Calculate loss on drying in the analytical sample by the following formula (1) as moisture. If
necessary, calculate a conversion factor (actual article) by the following formula (2).
Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) = ((W1 - A)/W1) × 100 ………. (1)
Conversion factor (drying matter) = W1/A………………………… (2)
W1： Mass (g) of the sampled analytical sample

A： Mass (g) of the analytical sample after drying
Note (2) Heat simultaneously the slightly moved or removed stopper of the ground-in stoppered
weighing bottle.
Comment 1 When pre-drying a laboratory sample such as compost and sludge fertilizers to
prepare a test sample, calculate the moisture of the laboratory sample (actual
article) by the following formula:
17
Moisture (% (mass fraction)) in the laboratory sample (actual article) = B + C × ((100 -

B)/100)
B： Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) of the laboratory sample (actual article) by the
pre-drying procedure
C： Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample by moisture
measurement
Comment 2 When calculating harmful content in a drying matter of sludge fertilizers, etc.,
convert component content in a test sample obtained from respective tests by the
following formula.
Component content in a drying matter = D ×E
D： Component content in an analytical sample obtained in each test

E： Conversion factor (drying matter)
Comment 3 Use drying conditions in Table 1 for fertilizers of the types shown below:
Table 1 Drying conditions

Sampling
amount of Drying
Type of fertilizers Drying time
analytical temperature
samples
Superphosphate of lime, triple
superphosphate of lime, or fertilizers About 5 g 100 ºC ± 2 ºC 3 hours
containing these
Until a constant
Ammonium sulfate, sodium nitrate, and
2 g- 5g 130 ºC ± 2 ºC weight is
potassium salts
achieved.
Urea and urea-containing fertilizers About 5 g 75 ºC ± 2 ºC 4 hours
Silica gel fertilizer and fertilizer
containing silica gel, and silica hydrogel About 5 g 180 °C±5 °C 3 hours
fertilizer
Comment 4 For samples containing volatile matters, subtract the volatile matter content by the
following a) and b) from loss on drying to obtain moisture.
a) Fertilizers containing guano or diammonium hydrogen phosphate, etc.: Determine
total nitrogen in the test sample, and in the analytical sample after the drying
procedure; convert the difference between the quantitation values into ammonia
(NH3) to make the volatile matter content.
b) Potassium hydrogen carbonate: Determine carbon dioxide in the test sample, and in
the analytical sample after the drying procedure; the difference between the
quantitation values is the volatile matter content.
18
References
2) Society for the Study of Feed Analysis Standards: Methods of Analysis of Feeds and
Feed Additives-2009-I, p. 37 - 39, Incorporated Administrative Agency Food and
Agricultural Materials Inspection Center, Saitama (2009)
3) JIS Z 0701： Silica gel desiccants for packaging (1997)
(4) Flow sheet for moisture: The flow sheet for moisture in fertilizers is shown below:
2 g -5 g Transfer to a ground-in stopper weighing bottle, spread so that the
analytical sample thickness is no more than 10 mm. Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Heating 100 ºC ± 2 ºC, 5 hours
Standing to cool Desiccator
Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Figure Flow sheet for moisture in fertilizers by loss on drying with drying apparatus.
19
3.1.b Loss on drying method by moisture analyzers

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to sludge fertilizers, compost, and organic fertilizers, etc. This
testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 3.1.b-2017 or Mois.b-1.
Use a moisture analyzer in the heat drying method to measure loss on drying and obtain moisture
in an analytical sample or the moisture content of a quality labeling standard of a special fertilizer
(herein after referred to as “moisture”). Additionally, calculate a conversion factor (drying matter)
to convert component content obtained by respective tests to component content in a drying matter
as necessary.
In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 3.
(2) Instruments: Instruments are as shown below:

a) Moisture analyzer: A moisture analyzer consisted of a heat source to heat an analytical
sample (halogen lamp, infrared heater, ceramic heater, etc.) and a balance (1) with calibration
function.
Note (1) There is a method to calibrate with calibration weights or a method to calibrate
automatically with built-in weights.
(3) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below. However, conduct in advance a

comparative test with 3.1.a Loss on drying with drying apparatus using sludge fertilizers,
compost, and organic fertilizers, etc., to confirm that there is no difference in the quantitation
value of moisture.
a) Transfer 2 g-5 g of an analytical sample to a ground-in stoppered weighing bottle, spread so
that the thickness is no more than 10 mm, and measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
b) Heat at 100 ºC (2), until a constant weight is achieved.
c) After the end of heating (2), measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
d) Calculate loss on drying in the analytical sample by the following formula (1) as moisture. If
necessary, calculate a conversion factor (drying matter) by the following formula (2).
Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) = ((W1 - A)/W1) × 100 …. (1)
Conversion factor (drying matter) = W1/A …. (2)

A： Mass (g) of the analytical sample after drying
Note (2) The setup of the drying program and the determination parameter for the end of heating
(constant weight) is according to the specification and the operation method of the
moisture analyzer used.
Comment 1 When pre-drying is conducted, calculate the moisture of the laboratory sample
(actual article) by the following formula:
Moisture (% (mass fraction)) in the laboratory sample (actual article) = B + C × ((100 -

B)/100)
B： Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) of the laboratory sample (actual article) by the
pre-drying procedure
C ： Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample by moisture
20
measurement
Comment 2 When calculating harmful content in a drying matter of sludge fertilizers, etc.,
convert component content in a test sample obtained from respective tests by the
following formula.
Component content in a drying matter = D × E
D： Component content in an analytical sample obtained in each test

E： Conversion factor (drying matter)
Comment 3 Table 1 shows the results of the comparison of the measurement values by loss on
drying method with drying apparatus and the measurement values by loss on drying
method with a moisture analyzer using organic fertilizers, compost and sludge
fertilizers in order to evaluate trueness.
Table 2 shows results and analysis results from a collaborative study for testing
method validation.
Table 1　　Analysis results of the comparison test results of respective methods

Symbol of measurement value Sample Range of Regression coefficient Correlation
Drying apparatus Moisture Kind Number of yi～yj (y ＝ a ＋bx ) coefficient
1) 2) 3)
method method samples (%) a b r
4)
xi yi Sludge fertilizer 26 5.50～90.61 0.188 0.998 0.999
5)
xj yj Organic fertilizer 25 2.96～12.33 0.185 0.986 0.994
1）　3.1.a Loss on drying method with drying apparatus
2）　3.1.b Loss on drying method with a moisture analizer
3）　Mass fraction
4）　Sewage sludge fertilizer, Human waste sludge fertilizer, Industrial sludge fertilizer, Composted sludge fertilizer
5）　Fish meal, Byproduct organic fertilizer of vegetable origin, Compost, Steamed leather meal,
Rape seed meal and powdered rape seed meal
21
Table 2　　Results and analysis results from a collaborative study

for the validation of the moisture test method.
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Number of Mean sr RSD r sR RSD R
Sample name 1) 3) 3) 3)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Sewage sludge
9 21.93 0.32 1.4 0.47 2.1
fertilizer
Human waste
8 13.36 0.14 1.1 0.37 2.8
sludge fertilizer
Industrial sludge
9 34.28 0.21 0.6 0.50 1.5
fertilizer
Calcined sludge
9 38.75 0.59 1.5 0.59 1.5
fertilizer
Composted sludge
9 27.1 0.26 0.9 0.60 2.2
fertilizer
1) Number of laboratories used in analysis
2) Mean (n = number of laboratories number of samples (2))
3) Mass fraction
4) Repeatability standard deviation
5) Repeatability relative standard deviation
6) Reproducibility standard deviation
7) Reproducibility relative standard deviation
References
1) Takeshi UCHIYAMA and Chiyo SAKASEGAWA: Validation of a Heating Method
Using a Moisture Analyzer for Moisture Content in Sludge Fertilizer. Research Report
of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 1- 5 (2008)
2) Takeshi UCHIYAMA and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Moisture Content in Sludge
Fertilizer by a Heating Method Using Moisture Analyzer: A Collaborative Study.
Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 6 - 11 (2008)
3) Satono AKIMOTO and Sakiko TAKAHASHI: Validation of a Heating Method Using a
Moisture Analyzer for Moisture Content in Sludge Fertilizer. Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol.2, p. 1 - 5 (2009)
(4) Flow sheet for moisture: The flow sheet for moisture in sludge fertilizers, compost, and
organic fertilizers, etc. is shown below:
About 5 g Transfer to a weighing dish, spread so that the thickness is

analytical sample no more than 10 mm. Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Heating 100 ºC
End of drying Constant weight
Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg

Figure Flow sheet for moisture in sludge fertilizers, compost, and organic fertilizers, etc.
by the loss on drying method with a moisture analyzer.
22
3.2 Ash content

3.2.a Ignition residue method
(1) Summary
The method is applicable to organic fertilizers and fertilizers containing organic matters. This
testing method is classified as Type A (Def-M) and its symbol is 3.2.a-2017 or Ash.a-1.
The method ignites an analytical sample with an electric furnace and measures residue on ignition
to obtain ash content in an analytical sample.
a) Electric furnace: Electric furnace that can be adjusted to 550ºC ± 5 ºC.
b) Crucible: After heating a porcelain crucible for chemical analysis specified in JIS R 1301
with an electric furnace at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC, stand to cool in a desiccator in advance and measure
the mass to the order of 1 mg.

a) Transfer about 2 g of an analytical sample into a crucible, and measure the mass to the order
of 1 mg.
b) Place it into an electric furnace, heat gently until carbonized (1).
c) Heat at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC for no less than 4 hours (1).
d) After heating, move the crucible into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
e) After standing to cool, remove the crucible from the desiccator and measure the mass to the
order of 1 mg.
f) Calculate the residue on ignition in the analytical sample by the following formula to make
ash content.
Residue on ignition (% (mass fraction)) = (A/W) × 100
W： Mass (g) of the sampled analytical sample

A： Mass (g) of the ignited analytical sample
Note (1) Example of carbonizing and incineration procedure: After raising the temperature
from room temperature to about 250 °C in 30 minutes to 1 hour, continue heating
for about 1 hour and further raise to 550 °C in 1 to 2 hours.
(4) Flow sheet for ash content: The flow sheet for ash content in fertilizers is shown below:
About 2 g of Transfer to a crucible.

analytical sample Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Charred Heating gently with an electric furnace

Incineration No less than 4 hours at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC

Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 1mg
Figure Flow sheet for ash content in fertilizers.
23
3.3 pH
3.3.a Glass electrode method
(1) Summary
and its symbol is 3.3.a-2017 or pH.a-1.
Measure the pH of fertilizers with a pH meter using a glass electrode.
(2) Reagent: Reagents are as shown below.

a) Oxalate pH standard solution: Oxalate pH standard solution class 2 traceable to National
Metrology.
b) Phthalate pH standard solution: Phthalate pH standard solution class 2 traceable to
National Metrology.
c) Neutral phosphate pH standard solution: Neutral phosphate pH standard solution class 2
traceable to National Metrology.
d) Borate pH standard solution: Borate pH standard solution class 2 traceable to National
Metrology.
e) Carbonate pH standard solution: Carbonate pH standard solution class 2 traceable to
National Metrology.
Comment 1 Respective pH standard solutions stored for long time should not be used since the
pH value may change during storage period. In particular, note that borate pH
standard solution and carbonate pH standard solution easily absorb carbon dioxide in
the air, so that the pH values deteriorate.
The pH standard solution that was used once or left exposed to the air should not be
used.

a) pH meter: Use type II specified in JIS Z 8802.
Comment 2 Conduct the calibration of a pH meter as indicated in JIS Z 8802. Actual calibration
operation is according to the operation procedure of the pH meter used for
measurement.
When the pH of a sample solution is no more than 7, use neutral phosphate pH
standard solution and oxalate pH standard solution, or phthalate pH standard solution.
When it exceeds 7, use neutral phosphate pH standard solution and borate pH
standard solution, or carbonate pH standard solution.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Preparation of sample solution: Conduct preparation of a sample solution as shown below.
(4.1.1) Fertilizers except inorganic fertilizers
a) Transfer a predetermined amount of an analytical sample (1) into a ground-in stopper flask and
add water 5 - 10 times the volume.
b) Mix with a magnetic stirrer, filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (1) In the case of a moist laboratory sample, it is recommended to use a sample that is not
pre-dried.
(4.1.2) Inorganic fertilizers

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of an analytical sample (1) into a ground-in stopper flask and
24
add water 100 times the volume.

Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as 3.4.a (4.1). Additionally, the sample
solution prepared in 4.2.4.a (4.1) can be used instead of the sample solution
prepared by (4.1.2).
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below. Actual calibration operation is

according to the operation procedure of the pH meter used for measurement.
a) Wash the read station of a calibrated pH meter repeatedly no less than 3 times with water and
wipe out with clean and soft paper, etc.
b) Transfer a sample solution into a beaker (2), dip the read station in the solution and measure
the pH value.
Note (2) It is necessary to transfer sufficient volume of sample solution to keep a measurement
value stable.
Comment 4 If a pH meter has a temperature correction dial or a digital switching, measure the pH
value after adjusting the graduation of the pH meter with the temperature of a
sample.
References
1) JIS Z 8802： Methods for determination of pH of aqueous solutions (2011)
(5) Flow sheet for pH value: The flow sheet for pH value in fertilizers is shown below.
Predetermined volume
Ground-in stopper flask.
of analytical sample
← Water 5 -10 times or 100 times the volume
Stirring
Filtration Type 3 filter paper
Measurement pH meter
Figure Flow sheet for pH in fertilizers.
25
3.4 Electrical conductivity

3.4.a Measurement method with an electrical conductivity meter
(1) Summary
and its symbol is 3.4.a-2017 or EC.a-1.
Measure the electrical conductivity of organic fertilizers such as compost or sludge fertilizers with
an electrical conductivity meter.

a) Potassium chloride: Grind potassium chloride used for measurement of electrical
conductivity specified in JIS K 8121 with an agate mortar to powder and heat for 4 hours at
500 ºC ± 5 ºC, and then stand to cool in a desiccator.
b) Potassium chloride standard solution (1): Measure predetermined volume (2) of potassium
chloride of a) on a weighing dish, dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer it into a
1000-mL volumetric flask, and add up to the marked line with water.
Note (1) Store potassium chloride standard solution in a polyethylene or borosilicate glass bottle
and seal the bottle.
(2) The volume that is recommended for an instrument or a cell used.
Comment 1 Potassium chloride standard solution used once or left in the air should not be used.

a) Electrical conductivity meter: An electrical conductivity meter specified in JIS K
0130
Comment 2 Check the indicated value as shown in 6.2 in JIS K 0130 as necessary. Actual
procedure to check is according to the operation procedure of the electrical
conductivity meter used for measurement.
(4) Test procedures

a) Transfer the predetermined volume of an analytical sample (3) into a ground-in stopper flask
and add water 10 times the equivalent volume of dry matter (4).
Note (3) In the case of a moist laboratory sample, it is recommended to use a sample that is not
pre-dried.
(4) If the sample solution becomes hard to measure because it is gelled by the influence of
flocculants in sludge fertilizer, etc., increase the volume of water added. However, this
fact should be expressed in the test result.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as 3.3.a (4.1.1).
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct the measurement as indicated in JIS K 0130 and as shown below.
Actual measurement operation is according to the operation procedure of the electrical
conductivity meter used for measurement.
a) Wash the read station of an electrical conductivity meter repeatedly no less than 3 times with
water.
b) Transfer a sample solution into a beaker (5), dip the read station and measure electrical
26
conductivity.
Note (5) It is necessary to transfer sufficient volume of sample solution to keep a measurement
value stable.
References
1) JIS K 0130：General rules for electrical conductivity measuring method (2008)
(5) Flow sheet for electrical conductivity: The flow sheet for electrical conductivity is showed
below.
Predetermined volume
Ground-in stopper flask.
of analytical sample
← Water ,10 times the volume
Stirring
Measurement Electrical conductivity meter
Figure Flow sheet for electrical conductivity in fertilizers.
27
3.5 Granularity
3.5.a Dry-type sieving testing method
(1) Summary
and its symbol is 3.5.a-2017 or P-size.a-1.
Measure the particle diameter distribution of solid fertilizers with a dry-type sieving analysis.
(2) Apparatus: Apparatus are shown below.

a) Sieve: A sieve for testing specified in JIS Z 8815
b) Clogging removal brush: A brush which is adequately hard for the apertures and does not
damage the sieving screen.
c) Weighing dish: A container that can contain about 250 g of a sample. Measure the mass to
the order of 0.1g in advance.
(3) Dry-type sieving analysis procedure: Conduct sieving analysis corresponding to the aperture
size of a sieve used as indicated in JIS Z 8815 and as shown below.
(3.1) More than 1mm and no more than 4mm
a) Stack a large aperture sieve on an acceptor so that the large sieve is on top.
b) Measure a laboratory sample to the order of 0.1g and transfer it to the sieve at the top section.
c) After putting a stopper on it, hold the stacked sieves with both hands, and vibrate (1) them
back and forth along a unidirectional and horizontal plane at about 60 times per minute with
about 70 mm amplitude.
d) Transfer respective plus and minus sieves to a weighing dish (2).
Note (1) Conduct more circular motion at the rate of about 3 revolutions per minute as
necessary.
(2) Turning over the back side of a sieve, remove the clogged particles from the sieve
screen with a clogging removal brush and combine them with the plus sieve.
(3.2) Less than or equal to 1mm

a) Stack a large aperture sieve on an acceptor so that the large sieve is on top.
b) Measure the laboratory sample or minus sieve of (3.1) c) to the order of 0.1g and transfer it to
the sieve at the top section.
c) After putting a stopper on it, incline the stacked sieves about 20 degrees, supporting with one
hand or a bent arm, and tap the sieve frame with the other hand at the rate of about 120 times
per a minute.
d) During the procedure in c), place the sieve in a horizontal position at the rate of 4 times per
minute, rotate it 90 degrees and tap the sieve frame firmly one or two times.
e) Transfer respective plus and minus sieves (3) to a weighing dish (2).
Note (3) When fine powder attaches to the back side of a sieve screen, remove them gently from
the back side with a clogging removal brush and combine them with the minus sieve
(4) Measurement of granularity distribution: Calculate the granularity distribution in an

analytical sample as shown below.
a) Measure respective mass of plus and minus sieves to the order of 0.1g.
b) Calculate “plus sieve percentage” and “integrated minus sieve percentage” with the following
formula and round the results to the first decimal place.
c) Confirm that the sum of the mass of the plus sieve and the mass of the minus sieve with the
smallest aperture is in the range of ± 2 % of the mass of sample measured in (3.1) b) or (3.2)
28
b).
Mass percentage of plus sieve or minus sieve (%) (R) = (A/T) × 100
A： Mass of plus sieve or minus sieve (g)

T： Sum of the mass of plus and minus sieve (g)
References
1) JIS Z 8815： Test sieving - General requirements (1994).
2) JIS K 0069： testing methods for sieving of chemical products (1992).
(5) Flow sheet for granularity: The flow sheet of granularity of solid fertilizers is shown below.
Laboratory sample
Measure the mass to the order of 0.1g
or Test sample
Dry-type sieving
Mass measurement of
respective plus sieve Measure the mass to the order of 0.1g
and minus sieve
Figure Flow sheet for granularity of solid fertilizers
29
3.6 Oil content

3.6.a Diethyl ether extraction method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to organic fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type A
(Def-M) and its symbol is 3.6.a-2017 or Oil.a-1.
Extract an analytical sample with diethyl ether using a Soxhlet extractor and measure the extract to
obtain oil content in an analytical sample. The oil content contains not only fat but also fat-soluble
pigments (carotenoid, chlorophyll, etc.), wax, and free fatty acids, etc.

a) Diethyl ether: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
a) Drying apparatus: Drying apparatus that can be adjusted to the test temperature ± 2 ºC.
b) Soxhlet extractor: An inter-changeable Soxhlet extractor, cooling apparatus and weighing
bottles (Example: JIS R 3503, attached figure 71)
c) Water bath A water bath that can be adjusted to about 60 ºC
d) Weighing bottle: A flat bottle flask connectable to a Soxhlet extractor. After heating with a
drying apparatus at 100 ºC - 105 ºC in advance, stand to cool in a desiccator and measure the
mass to the order of 1mg.
e) Cylindrical filter paper: A cylindrical filter paper made of cellulose. Example: 22 mm
external diameter, 20 mm internal diameter, 90 mm total length (1).

a) Weigh 2 g - 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1mg, and transfer it into a cylindrical
filter paper.
b) Place absorbent cotton on the upper end of an analytical sample (2), as if gently pushing it, and
heat it at 100 ºC - 105 ºC for 2 hours.
c) As soon as heating is complete, move the cylindrical filter paper to a desiccator and stand to
cool.
d) After standing to cool, transfer it into a Soxhlet extractor and connect it to a cooling
apparatus.
e) Transfer adequate volume of diethyl ether (3) into a weighing bottle, connect it to the Soxhlet
extractor and heat (4) it for 8 hours to extract.
f) Recover the diethyl ether (5).
g) Disconnect the weighing bottle from the Soxhlet extractor and vaporize the diethyl ether (6).
h) Heat the weighing bottle (7) at 100 ºC - 105 ºC for 3 hours.
i) As soon as heating is complete, move the weighing bottle to the desiccator and stand to cool.
j) After standing to cool, remove the weighing bottle from the desiccator and measure the mass
to the order of 1mg.
k) Calculate oil content with the following formula.
Oil content (% (mass fraction)) = (B/A) × 100
A： Mass (g) of the sampled analytical sample

B： Mass of extract of diethyl ether (g)
Note (1) Select a scale according to the volume of a Soxhlet extractor.
30
(2) The purpose is to prevent overflow at the upper end of an analytical sample.
(3) The amount of diethyl ether depends on the volume of a weighing bottle.
(4) Adjust the temperature for diethyl ether to circulate 16 - 20 times per hour. (Target
temperature is about 60 ºC)
(5) Remove the cylindrical filter paper from the Soxhlet extractor. In the case of a cock
attached Soxhlet extractor, open the cock and recover it.
(6) It is dangerous if diethyl ether resides in a weighing bottle when the bottle is
transferred to a drying apparatus.
(7) Wipe the outside of a weighing bottle since there is a risk of garbage or stain sticking
to it.
References
1) Japan Oil Chemist ‘Society: Standard Method for the Analysis of Fats, Oils and Related
Materials (2003), 1.5 Oil content p. 1 - 2, Incorporated Foundation Japan Oil Chemist
‘Society, Tokyo (2009)
2) Feed Analysis Standard Task Force: Feed Analysis Method/Handbook -2009 - I, p. 37 -
39, Incorporated Administrative Agency, Food and Agriculture Materials Inspection
Center, Saitama (2009)
(5) Flow sheet for oil content: The flow sheet for oil content in organic fertilizers is shown
below:
2 g- 5 g
Weigh to the order of 1mg to a cylindrical filter paper
analytical sample
Pre-drying 100 ºC - 105 ºC, for 2 hours
Soxhlet extractor
Extraction Diethyl ether, heating, for 8 hours
Weighing bottle
Heating 100 ºC - 105 ºC, for 3 hours
Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 1mg
Figure Flow sheet for oil content in organic fertilizers.
31
4. Main components, guaranteed components, etc

4.1 Nitrogen
4.1.1 Total nitrogen
4.1.1.a Kjeldahl method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no nitrate nitrogen. This testing method is
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.1.1.a-2017 or T-N.a-1.
Add sulfuric acid, potassium sulfate and copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate to an analytical sample,
pretreat by Kjeldahl method to change total nitrogen (T-N) to ammonium ion, and add a sodium
hydroxide solution to subject to steam distillation. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25 mol/L
sulfuric acid and measure surplus sulfuric acid by (neutralization) titration using a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2
mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. Or
collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization)
titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample.
This testing method corresponds to the sulfuric acid method in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992). In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 8.

a) 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (1): Transfer about 30 mL of water to a
polyethylene bottle, dissolve about 35 g of sodium hydroxide specified in JIS K 8576 by
adding in small portions while cooling, seal tightly and leave at rest for 4-5 days. Transfer 5.5
mL -11 mL of the supernatant to a ground-in stoppered storage container, and add 1000 mL of
water.
Standardization: Dry sulfamic acid reference material for volumetric analysis specified in
JIS K 8005 by leaving at rest in a desiccator at no more than 2 kPa for about 48 hours, then
transfer about 2.5 g to a weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask, and add water
up to the marked line (1). Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution to a 200-mL -
300-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add a few drops of bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL) as
an indicator, and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the
color of the solution becomes green. Calculate the factor of a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium
hydroxide solution by the following formula:
Factor of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (f1)

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)
W1： Mass (g) of sulfamic acid sampled

A： Purity (% (mass fraction)) of sulfamic acid
V1： Volume (mL) of sulfamic acid solution transferred
V2： Constant volume (250 mL) of sulfamic acid solution
V3： Volume (mL) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution needed for
titration
C1： Set concentration (mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
b) Sulfuric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
c) 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid (1) (2): Add about 14 mL of sulfuric acid to a beaker containing 100
mL of water in advance, stir well, and add water to make 1000 mL.
Standardization: Transfer a predetermined amount (3) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to a 200-mL
- 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add a few drops of methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution,
32
and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L -0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the
solution becomes gray-green (4). Calculate the volume of a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium
hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula
(1). Or, calculate the factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula (2):
Volume (B) of 0.1 mol/L -0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL of 0.25
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)
Factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid (f2)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
V5： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid subjected to standardization
C2： Set concentration (0.25 mol/L) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
d) Boric acid solution (40 g/L): Dissolve 40 g of boric acid specified in JIS K 8863 in water to
make 1000 mL.
e) Catalyst (5): Mix potassium sulfate specified in JIS K 8962 and copper (II) sulfate
pentahydrate (6) specified in JIS K 8983 in the ratio of 9 to 1.
f) Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (1): Dissolve 100 g - 250 g of sodium
hydroxide specified in JIS K 8576 in water to make 500 mL.
g) Bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of bromothymol blue specified
in JIS K 8842 in 20 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102, add water to make 100 mL.
h) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896 in
100 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102.
i) Methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methylene blue specified in JIS K
8897 in 100 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102.
j) Methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution: To 2 volumes of methyl red solution (0.1
g/100 mL), add 1 volume of methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL).
k) Bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.5 g of bromocresol green specified
in JIS K 8840 in 100 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102.
l) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL),
add equal volume of bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL).
Note (1) This is an example of preparation; prepare an amount as appropriate.

(2) This corresponds to the standard sulfuric acid solution 0.5 M (1/2 sulfuric acid)
solution in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992).
(3) 5 mL -10 mL
(4) The endpoint is reached when the color becomes gray-green via dark blue from
blue-purple.
(5) A tablet is commercially available.
(6) Crush into powder as appropriate.
Comment 1 A 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution in (2) a) can be replaced with a
0.1 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution or a 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
conforming to ISO/IEC 17025.
Comment 2 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid in (2) c) can be replaced with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
33
a) Steam distillation apparatus
b) Digestion flask: Kjeldahl flask
c) Distillation flask: A Kjeldahl flask or round bottom flask that can be connected to a steam
distillation apparatus.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Kjeldahl method: Conduct digestion as shown below.
a) Weigh 0.5 g - 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL -
500-mL digestion flask.
b) Add 5 g - 10 g of catalyst, and further add 20 mL - 40 mL of sulfuric acid, shake to mix (7) and
heat gently.
c) After bubbles cease to form, heat until white smoke of sulfuric acid evolves.
d) Ignite until organic matters are completely digested (8).
e) After standing to cool, add a small amount of water, mix well by shaking, transfer to a
250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water (9), and further mix by shaking.
f) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line to make the digestion solution.
Note (7) Leaving at rest overnight is preferable.

(8) When the solution has finished changing color, heat further for no less than 2 hours.
(9) When the entire sample solution volume is used in measurement, it is not necessary to
transfer it to a volumetric flask.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as that in (4.1.1) a) - f) in 4.2.1.a.

Comment 4 In the case of fish meal containing amino acids that are not easily digested, use 0.5 g
-1 g analytical sample, 10 g catalyst and 30 mL - 40 mL sulfuric acid.
Comment 5 In the case of nitrolime, moisten by adding a small amount of water before the
procedure in (4.1) b). Care should be taken because bubbles are produced by the
addition of sulfuric acid.
(4.2) Distillation: Conduct distillation as shown below. Specific distillation procedures are
according to the operation method of the steam distillation apparatus used in measurement.
a) Transfer a predetermined amount (10) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to an acceptor (11), add a few
drops of methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution, and connect this acceptor to a steam
distillation apparatus. Or, transfer a predetermined amount (10) of boric acid solution (40 g/L)
to an acceptor (11), add a few drops of methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution, and
connect this acceptor to a steam distillation apparatus.
b) Transfer a predetermined amount of the digestion solution to a 300-mL distillation flask, add a
proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (12), and immediately
connect this distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
c) Send steam to the distillation flask to heat the solution in the distillation flask, and distill at a
distillation rate of 5 mL/min - 7 mL/min.
d) Stop distilling when the distillate has reached 120 mL - 160 mL.
e) Wash the part of the steam distillation apparatus that came in contact with the solution in the
acceptor with a small amount of water, and pool the washing with the distillate.
Note (10) 5 mL - 20 mL
(11) As an acceptor, use a 200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask or a 200-mL - 300-mL
34
beaker with which the distillate outlet of the steam distillation apparatus can be
immersed in 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid or a boric acid solution (40 g/L).
(12) An amount sufficient to make the solution strong alkalinity. A blue color will appear.
(4.3) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below.

(4.3.1) When 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid is used in (4.2):
a) Titrate the distillate with a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of
the solution becomes gray-green (4).
b) Calculate the total nitrogen (T-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:
Total nitrogen (T-N) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W3)
B： Volume of 0.1 mol/L -0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL

of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V6： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid transferred to the acceptor in (4.2) a)
titration
f1： Factor of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
V8： Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) f)
V9： Transferred amount (mL) of the digestion solution subjected to distillation in
(4.2) b)
W3： Mass (g) of the analytical sample
(4.3.2) When a boric acid solution (40 g/L) is used in (4.2):

a) Titrate the distillate with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid until the color of the solution becomes light
red (13).

= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W2) × (100/1000)
V10：Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration

C2 ：Set concentration (0.25 mol/L) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
f2 ：Factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V11：Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) f)
V12：Transferred amount (mL) of the digestion solution subjected to distillation in
(4.2) b)
Note (13) The endpoint is reached when the color changes from green to light red.
Comment 6 The titration procedures in (2) a) Standardization, (2) c) Standardization and (4.3)
can be conducted by an automatic titrator. The setup of the titration program, the
determination parameter for the endpoint and vessels such as acceptors are according
to the specification and the operation method of the automatic titrator used.
Comment 7 The nitrogen content in the analytical sample can be measured by using an automatic
35
nitrogen analyzer (Kjeldahl method) instead of the test procedure in (4). The setup of
the program and the parameter of the analyzer as well as vessels etc. are according to
the specification and the operation method of the automatic nitrogen analyzer used.
However, conduct in advance a comparative test with the test procedure in (4) using
fertilizers containing no nitrate nitrogen, to confirm that there is no difference in the
quantitation value of total nitrogen.
Comment 8 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using a preparation sample. As a
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 10 % (mass fraction) -
20 % (mass fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) - 5 % (mass fraction) are 98.5 % -
100.6 % and 97.1%-99.2 % as total nitrogen (T-N) respectively.
The results of the collaborative study (limited to reported values with the Kjeldahl
method) to determine a certified reference material fertilizer were analyzed by using
a three-level nesting analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of
reproducibility, intermediate precision and repeatability.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is about
0.2 % (mass fraction) for solid fertilizers, and 0.02 % (mass fraction) for fluid
fertilizers.
Table 1 Analysis results of the collaborative study to determine a certified reference material fertilizer
Name of Number of Repeatabllity Intermediate precision Reproducibility
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
certified reference laboratory Average sr RSD r s I(T) RSD I(T) sR RSD R
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
material fertilizer p (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
FAMIC-A-10 11 14.68 0.07 0.5 0.07 0.5 0.13 0.9
1）　The number of laboaratories used 6）　Intermediate standard deviation
for analysis conducting Kjeldahl method
2）　Average （the number of laboratory（p ）×test days（2） 7）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
×the number of replicate testing（3））
3）　Mass fraction 8）　Reproducibility standard deviation
4）　Repeatability standard deviation 9）　Reproducibility relative standard deviation
5）　Repeatability relative standard deviation
References
2) Feed Analysis Standard Task Force: Feed Analysis Method/Handbook -2009 - I, p. 28 -
33, Incorporated Administrative Agency, Food and Agriculture Materials Inspection
Center, Saitama (2009)
3) Takashi KUBOTA, Tomoko OSHIDA, Kozue YANAI, Yuzuru INOUE, Seiji MATSUI,
Takaharu MATSUMOTO, Eiichi ISHIKURO and Akemi YASUI: Improvement of the
Conditions for the Determination of Total Nitrogen in Fish Meal in Kjeldahl Method
and Its Comparison with Dumas Method, Bunsekikagaku, 60, p. 67 - 74 (2011)
4) Kimie KATO, Masaki CHIDA and Erina WATANABE: Verification of Performance
Characteristics of Testing Method for Total Nitrogen Content in Fertilizer by Kjeldahl
method, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 5, p. 156 - 166 (2012)
36
(5) Flow sheet for total nitrogen: The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers is shown below:
0.5 g - 5 g
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL digestion flask.
analytical sample
← 5 g - 10 g catalyst
←20 mL - 40 mL sulfuric acid
Heating Gently
After foam no longer evolves, ignite

Heating
until organic matters are completely digested.
Standing to cool
← small amount of water
Transfer 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask, water
Cooling
← Water (up to the marked line)
Digestion
solution
Figure 1　　The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Kjeldahl method procedure)
Digestion
solution
Aliquot 300-mL distillation flask

(predetermined volume)
← Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L)
Receiver: 200-mL - 300 - mL Erlenmeyer flask or beaker
A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and
Steam distillation
a few drops of methyl red-methylene blue mixture solution,
apparatus
or boric acid solution (40 g/L), several drops of
methyl red - bromocresol green mixture solution
Steam distillation Distillation rate: 5 mL/min -7 mL/min
Stop distilling 120 mL – 160 mL distillate

←　Water (wash the part of the distillation apparatus
that came in contact with the solution in the receiver)
0.1 mol/L-0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (until the
Titration solution becomes gray-green), or
0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid (until the solution becomes light red)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Distillation and mesurement procedure)
37
4.1.1.b Combustion method

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type B and its
symbol is 4.1.1.b-2017 or T-N.b-1.
Thermally decompose nitrogen compounds in an analytical sample using a total nitrogen analyzer
by the combustion method to produce nitrogen gas and nitroxide gas. Reduce the nitroxide gas to
nitrogen, and measure the nitrogen gas content with a thermal conductivity detector to obtain the
total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. This testing method is also referred to as a modified
Dumas’ method. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 4.

a) Total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method: A total nitrogen analyzer configured
on the basis of the principle of the combustion method (modified Dumas’ method).
1) Turn on the total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method (1), and adjust so that stable
indicated values can be obtained.
(i) Combustion gas: Oxygen having purity no less than 99.99 % (volume percentage)
(ii) Carrier gas: Helium having purity no less than 99.99 % (volume percentage)
(3) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below. However, confirm in advance using
an analytical sample that there is no difference from the measured value of total nitrogen
obtained according to 4.1.1.a, 4.1.1.c, 4.1.1.d or 4.1.1.e.
a) Measurement conditions for the total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method: Set
up the measurement conditions for the total nitrogen analyzer considering the following:
Combustion temperature: No less than 870 ºC
b) Calibration curve preparation
1) Turn on the total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method (1), and adjust so that stable
indicated values can be obtained.
2) Weigh a predetermined amount of the standard for calibration curves (2) to the order of 0.1 mg
into a combustion vessel.
3) Insert the combustion vessel into the total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method, and
read the indicated value.
4) Conduct the procedure in 3) for another combustion vessel for a blank test, and read the
indicated value.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the nitrogen content and the indicated value of
the standard for calibration curves and the blank test for calibration curves.
c) Sample measurement
1) Weigh a predetermined amount of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg into a
combustion vessel.
2) Insert the combustion vessel containing the analytical sample to the total nitrogen analyzer by
the combustion method, and read the indicated value.
3) Obtain the nitrogen content from the calibration curve, and calculate total nitrogen in the
analytical sample.
Note (1) The setup of the program and the parameter of the analyzer are according to the
specification and the operation method of the total nitrogen analyzer by the
combustion method used.
(2) Standard for calibration curves: DL-Aspartic acid (purity no less than 99 % (mass
fraction)), EDTA (purity no less than 99 % (mass fraction)), hippuric acid (purity no
less than 98 % (mass fraction)) or other reagents having equivalent purity
recommended by the total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method used.
38
Comment 1 Sample an analytical sample from a test sample prepared in 2.3.3 Grinding (3.1) by
grinding with a mill until it completely passes through a sieve of 500 µm aperture or
from a test sample prepared in 2.3.3 Grinding Comment 1. Additionally, the
sampling amount of an analytical sample is as shown in Table 1. In addition, set the
sampling amounts of analytical samples considering the estimated content of total
nitrogen in the test sample and the measurement range of the total nitrogen analyzer
by the combustion method.
Table 1 Sampling amount of analytical samples
Type of fertilizers Sampling amount (g)
Mixed fertilizers and designated
0.02 - 0.5
blended fertilizers
Organic fertilizers and compost 0.05 - 0.5
Sludge fertilizers 0.05 - 0.5
Comment 2 Compound fertilizers, designated blended fertilizers and nitrolime may have high
contents of phosphoric acid (P2O5), alkali metals (Na, K), alkaline earth metals (Ca,
Mg), etc., causing contamination of packing or damage in quartz parts, etc. To avoid
their influences, it is recommended to add tungsten oxide (elemental analysis reagent
or heat-treated reagent) to completely cover the analytical sample.
Comment 3 When a sample with a low content of organic compounds, such as mixed fertilizers
and designated blended fertilizers etc., and thus with low combustion efficiency is
measured, it is recommended to add sucrose to the analytical sample so that the
carbon content will be comparable to the standard for calibration curves. Additionally,
confirm in advance that sucrose to be used has a nitrogen content that does not affect
the measured value of total nitrogen of the analytical sample.
Comment 4 Table 2, in order to evaluate trueness, shows the results of the comparison of
measurement values by the Combustion method and the Kjeldahl method with sludge
fertilizers, organic fertilizers, and inorganic fertilizers, etc.
method validation.
0.01 % (mass fraction) for fluid fertilizers for home gardening, and 0.05 % (mass
fraction) for the other fertilizers.
39
Table 2　　Analysis results of comparison test results between methods

Symbol of measurement value Sample Range of Regression coefficient Correlation
Kjaeldahl Combustion Kind Number of yi - yk (y ＝ a ＋bx ) coefficient
1) 2) 3)
method method samples (%) a b r
4)
xi yi Sludge fertilizers 81 0.31～8.35 -0.006 1.018 0.999
5)
xj yj Organic fertilizers, etc. 31 1.10～12.90 0.009 1.012 1.000
xk yk Inorganic fertilizers, etc. 36 0.60～46.35 0.000 1.004 1.000
1）　4.1.1.a Kjeldahl method
2）　4.1.1.b Combustion method
4）　Sewage sludge fertilizers, Human waste sludge fertilizers, Industrial sludge fertilizers,
Calcined sludge fertilizers, Composted sludge fertilizers
5）　Fish meal, Byproduct organic fertilizer of vegetable origin, Compost, Crustose fertilizer meal,
Rape seed meal and powdered rape seed meal, etc.
6）　Nitrogenous fertilizers, Compound fertilizers, Blended fertilizers, Fluid fertilizers
Table 3 Results and analysis results from a collaborative study

for total nitrogen testing method validation
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Compound fertilizer (containing
11 9.32 0.07 0.8 0.25 2.7
nitrate nitrogen)
Compound fertilizer (containing
11 18.34 0.06 0.3 0.45 2.5
urea)
Designated blended fertilizer
12 14.06 0.12 0.9 0.42 3.0
(containing organic fertilizer)
Nitrolime 8 19.96 0.07 0.4 0.17 0.8
Fish meal 10 8.34 0.04 0.4 0.10 1.3
Steamed wool waste 11 13.42 0.10 0.7 0.26 2.0
Rape seed meal and powdered rape
11 6.21 0.07 1.1 0.25 4.0
seed meal
Composted sludge fertilizer A 13 6.20 0.02 0.3 0.09 1.4
Composted sludge fertilizer B 12 2.36 0.01 0.6 0.04 1.8
Human waste sludge fertilizer 11 4.44 0.02 0.4 0.06 1.3
Industrial sludge fertilizer 11 8.06 0.03 0.4 0.07 0.9
Calcined sludge fertilizer 13 0.80 0.02 2.8 0.03 4.3
2) Mean (n = number of laboratories x number of samples (2))
3) Mass fraction
40
References
1) Mariko AIZAWA, Yasushi SUGIMURA, Yuichi TAKAHASHI, Jun OKI, Yukio
FUKUCHI, Yuji SHIRAI and Norio HIKICHI: Validation of a Combustion Method for
Determination of Total Nitrogen Content in Sludge Fertilizer. Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 12 - 17, (2008)
2) Mariko AIZAWA and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Total Nitrogen content in Sludge
Fertilizer by a Combustion Method: A Collaborative Study. Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 18 - 24, (2008)
3) Mariko AIZAWA and Yuji SHIRAI: Validation of a Combustion Method for
Determination of Total Nitrogen Content in Organic Fertilizer. Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol.2, p. 6 - 11, (2009)
4) Mariko AIZAWA and Yuji SHIRAI: Validation of a Combustion Method for
Determination of Total Nitrogen Content in Inorganic Fertilizer. Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol.3, p. 1 - 10, (2010)
5) Mariko AIZAWA, Yuko SEKINE and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Total Nitrogen
Content in Fertilizer by a Combustion Method: A Collaborative Study. Research Report
of Fertilizer Vol.3, p. 11 - 18, (2010)
6) Kazumi UCHIYAMA and Yoshio MAEBASHI: Effective Analysis of Organic Trace
Element, p. 99, Mimizuku-sha, Tokyo (2008)
(4) Flow sheet for total nitrogen: The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
Analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a combustion vessel
Measurement Total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method
Figure Flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers by the combustion method.
41
Reference: Chromatograms of the standard for calibration curves and an analytical sample are
shown below:
1) Standard for calibration curves (DL-aspartic acid)
2) Analytical sample (sludge fertilizer)
Reference figures Chromatograms of total nitrogen.
Measurement conditions for total nitrogen analyzer by the combustion method

Combustion gas: Highly pure oxygen, purity no less than 99.9999 % (volume
fraction), flow rate 200 mL/min
Carrier gas: Highly pure helium, purity no less than 99.9999 % (volume fraction),
flow rate 80 mL/min
Separation column: A silica gel stainless column (1m)
Detector: Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
Measurement cycle: Purge time = 60 seconds, circulation combustion time = 200
seconds, measurement time = 100 seconds
Current value of Detector: 160 mA
Temperature conditions: Reaction furnace temperature: 870 ºC
Reaction furnace temperature: 600 °C
Column oven temperature: 70 °C
Detector temperature: 100 °C
42
4.1.1.c Devarda’s alloy – Kjeldahl method

(1) Summary
The method is applicable to the fertilizers that contain nitrate nitrogen (N-N) and guarantee total
nitrogen. This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.1.1.c-2017 or T-N.c-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+1) and tin (II) chloride dihydrate to an analytical sample and further add
devarda’s alloy to reduce nitrate nitrogen (N-N), and then add sulfuric acid (1+1), pretreat by
Kjeldahl method to change total nitrogen (T-N) to ammonium ion and add sodium hydroxide to
subject to steam distillation. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and measure
surplus sulfuric acid by (neutralization) titration using a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide
solution to obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with
a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L
sulfuric acid to obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. This testing method
corresponds to the devarda’s alloy - sulfuric acid method in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).

water.
Standardization: Dry sulfamic acid reference material for volumetric analysis specified in JIS
K 8005 by leaving at rest in a desiccator at no more than 2 kPa for about 48 hours, then
transfer about 2.5 g to a weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve
in a small amount of water, transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask, and add water up to the
marked line (1). Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution to a 200-mL - 300-mL
Erlenmeyer flask, add a few drops of bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL) as an
indicator, and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of
the solution becomes green. Calculate the factor of a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide
solution by the following formula:

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
Standardization: Transfer a predetermined amount (3) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to a 200-mL -
300-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add a few drops of methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution,
and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the
43
hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula (1).
Or, calculate the factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula (2):
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
e) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
f) Tin (II) chloride dihydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8136 or a reagent
of mercury analysis grade or equivalent quality.
g) Devarda’s alloy: A reagent of nitrogen analysis grade specified in JIS K 8653 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
h) Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (1): Dissolve 100 g - 250 g of sodium
i) Bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of bromothymol blue specified
j) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896 in
k) Methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methylene blue specified in JIS K
l) Methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution: To 2 volumes of methyl red solution (0.1
m) Bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.5 g of bromocresol green specified
n) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL),

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
44
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Reduction and Kjeldahl method: Conduct reduction and digestion as shown below:
a) Weigh 0.5 g - 1 g (no more than the equivalents of N-N 50 mg) of an analytical sample to the
order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL- 500-mL digestion flask (5)
b) Add 60 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+1) and 2 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate, and shake to mix
and leave at rest for about 20 minutes.
c) Add 3.5 g of devarda’s alloy and leave at rest for about 40 minutes while sometimes shaking
to mix.
d) Add 70 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1) and one boiling stone as necessary, and heat at low
temperature (6).
e) As soon as white smoke start evolving, strengthen heating gradually and further continue
heating for about 90 minutes.
f) After standing to cool, add 100 mL - 200 mL of water, mix well by shaking, transfer to a
250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water, and further mix by shaking (7).
g) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line to make the digestion solution.
Note (5) In the case of direct distillation, a 500-mL Kjeldahl flask connectable to a steam
distillation apparatus is preferable.
(6) If the bubbles foam strongly and excessively, suspend heating for a little while.
precisely adjust.
a) Transfer a predetermined amount (8) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to an acceptor, (9) add a few
distillation apparatus. Or, transfer a predetermined amount (8) of boric acid solution (40 g/L) to
an acceptor (9), add a few drops of methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution, and
proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (10), and connect this
distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
Note (8) 5 mL - 20 mL
45


= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W2)

titration
V8： Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) g)
(4.2) b)

red (11).

= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W3)
V10： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration
f2： Factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V11： Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) g)
(4.2) b)
References
46

(Details), p.31- 33, Yokendo, Tokyo (1988)
47
(5) Flow sheet for total nitrogen: The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
0.5 g – 1 g
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL - 500-mL digestion flask.
analytical sample
← 60 mL of hydrochloric acid　(1+1)
← 2 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate
Leaving at rest About 20 minutes
←　3.5 g devardar's alloy
← 70 mL sulfuric acid (1+1)
← 1 boiling stone
Heat at low temperature, and as soon as white smoke evolves,
Heating
strengthen heating gradually and further heat for about 90 minutes.
Standing to cool
← 100 mL - 200 mL Water
Cooling
←　Water (up to the marked line)
Digedtion
Solution
Figure 1　　The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Reduction and Kjeldahl method procedure)
48
Digestion
Solution

← Sodium hydroxide (200 g/L - 500 g/L)
Receiver: 200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask or beaker
Steam distillation A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and a few drops of
apparatus methyl red-methylene blue mixture solution, or boric acid solution (40 g/L),
several drops of methyl red - bromocresol green mixture solution
Steam distillation Distillation rate: 5 mL/min - 7 mL/min

0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the
Titration solution becomes gray-green, or
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Distillation and measurement procedure).
49
4.1.1.d Reduced iron - Kjeldahl method

(1) Summary
The method is applicable to the fertilizers that contain nitrate nitrogen (N-N) and guarantee total
nitrogen. This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.1.1.d-2017 or T-N.d-1.
Add water, reduced iron and sulfuric acid (1+1) to an analytical sample to reduce nitrate nitrogen
(N-N) and heat at low temperature, and then add sulfuric acid and pretreat by Kjeldahl method to
change total nitrogen (T-N) to ammonium ion, and add a sodium hydroxide solution to subject to
steam distillation. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and measure surplus
sulfuric acid by (neutralization) titration using a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to
obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric
acid solution and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
to obtain the total nitrogen (T-N) in an analytical sample. This testing method corresponds to the
reduced iron - sulfuric acid method in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992).

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
50
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2×2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
e) Reduced iron: Nitrogen content is no more than 0.005 % (mass fraction)
f) Catalyst (5): Mix potassium sulfate specified in JIS K 8962 and copper (II) sulfate
g) Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (1): Dissolve 100 g - 250 g of sodium
h) Bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of bromothymol blue specified
i) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896 in
j) Methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methylene blue specified in JIS K
k) Methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution: To 2 volumes of methyl red solution (0.1
l) Bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.5 g of bromocresol green specified
m) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100
mL), add equal volume of bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL).

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.

51
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Reduction and Kjeldahl method: Conduct reduction and digestion as shown below:
a) Weigh 0.5 g - 1 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL -
500-mL digestion flask.
b) Add 30 mL of water and mix well.
c) As soon as 5 g of reduced iron and 30mL of sulfuric acid (1+1) are added, insert a long stem
funnel to a digestion flask and shake to mix gently while cooling the outside of the container
under flowing water (7).
d) Leave at rest for about 5 minutes (8), boil in a low flame for about 15 minutes.
e) After standing to cool, add 5 g - 10 g of catalyst, 30 mL of sulfuric acid and, if necessary, one
boiling stone, heat gradually until water evaporates and white smoke of sulfuric acid evolves
(9)
.
f) Ignite until it is completely digested (10).
g) After standing to cool, add a small amount of water, mix well by shaking, transfer to a
250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water, and further mix by shaking.
h) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line to make the digestion solution.
Note (7) A sudden reaction generates heat, and unreacted nitric acid vaporizes or digests to make
nitrogen oxide etc. through which process losses occur easily. Careful and efficient
operation should be taken
(8) Until a sudden reaction is settled.
(9) If the bubbles foam strongly and excessively, suspend heating for a little while.
(10) When the solution has finished changing color, heat further for no less than 2 hours.
proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (13), and connect this
Note (11) 5 mL - 20 mL
52
(13) An amount sufficient to make the solution strong alkalinity. A blue or reddish-brown
color will appear.


= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W2)

titration
V8： Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) h)
(4.2) b)

red (14).

= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W3)
V10：Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration

C2 ：Set concentration (0.25 mol/L) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
f2 ：Factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V11：Predetermined volume (mL) of the digestion solution in (4.1) h)
V12：Transferred amount (mL) of the digestion solution subjected to distillation in
(4.2) b)
53
References
(5) Flow sheet for total nitrogen: The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers is shown below:
0.5 g - 1 g Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL digestion flask.

← 30 mL water
← 5 g reduced iron
← 30 mL sulfuric acid (1+1)
Immediately insert a long stem funnel to the flask and shake to mix
Mixture
while cooling outside the container with flowing water.
Leaving at rest For about 5 min (Until a sudden reaction is settled.)
Heating Boil in a low flame for about 15 minutes.
Standing to cool
←　5 g - 10 g catalyst
← 30 mL sulfuric acid
Heat gradually until water evaporates and the white smoke
Heating
of sulfuric acid evolves and ignite to digest completely
Standing to cool
←　A small amount of water
Cooling
Digestion
Solution
Figure 1　　The flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Reduction and Kjeldahl method procedure)
54
Digestion
Solution
Aliquot
Distillation flask
← Sodium hydroxide (200 g/L - 500 g/L)

0.1mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (until the
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total nitrogen in fertilizers (Distillation and measurement procedure).
55
4.1.1.e Calculation with ammoniac nitrogen and nitrate nitrogen

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to the fertilizers that contain ammoniac nitrogen (A-N) and nitrate
nitrogen (N-N), and that does not contain the fertilizers guaranteeing total nitrogen (T-N). This
testing method is classified as Type A (Def-C) and its symbol is 4.1.1.e-2017 or T-N.e-1.
Calculate total nitrogen (T-N) by adding the ammoniac nitrogen (A-N) obtained in 4.1.2 to the
nitrate nitrogen (N-N) obtained in 4.1.3.
(2) The calculation of total nitrogen

a) Calculate the total nitrogen (T-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:

= (A-N) ＋ (N-N)
A-N： Ammoniac nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample (1) obtained
by 4.1.2
N-N： Nitrate nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample (1) obtained by
4.1.3
Note (1) A-N and N-N use raw data without rounding numerical value
56
4.1.2 Ammoniac nitrogen

4.1.2.a Distillation method
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to the fertilizers that contain ammonium salt. However, in some
cases, it is not applicable to the fertilizers that contain such compounds as nitrolime that digests by
heating. This testing method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.1.2.a-2017 or A-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample, further add magnesium oxide or a sodium hydroxide solution to
make the solution alkalinity and subject it to steam distillation. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25
mol/L sulfuric acid and measure surplus sulfuric acid by (neutralization) titration using a 0.1 mol/L
- 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in an analytical sample.
Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by
(neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in an
analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 7.

water.
transfer about 2.5g to a weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
b) Magnesium oxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8432 or a reagent of

equivalent quality.
c) Sulfuric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid (1) (2): Add about 14 mL of sulfuric acid to a beaker containing 100
57
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2×2) ………. (2)
titration
e) Boric acid solution (40 g/L): Dissolve 40 g of boric acid specified in JIS K 8863 in water to
make 1000 mL.
l) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
Comment 2 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid in (2) d) can be replaced with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
b) Distillation flask: A Kjeldahl flask or round bottom flask that can be connected to a steam
58
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Sample solution preparation: Prepare a sample solution as shown below:
a) Weigh 0.25 g - 2g (5) (the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N) of an analytical sample to the
order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL - 500-mL distillation flask
b) Add about 25 mL of water to make a sample solution.
Note (5) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 5 g when there is less nitrogen content
in the fertilizers such as a home garden-use fertilizer.
Comment 3 When it is a fertilizer which contains uric ammonium acid, humus acid ammonium or
nitrate nitrogen, etc., or when it is not a fertilizer in which phosphate, ammonium and
magnesium coexist, conduct the procedure in (4.1.1) a) - c) in 4.2.4.a or the
procedure in (4.1.2) a) - c) in 3.2.4.a and transfer a predetermined amount of
suspension (the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N) to a 300-mL - 500-mL
distillation flask to make a sample solution.
distillation apparatus. Or, transfer a predetermined amount (6) of boric acid solution (40
(7)
g/L) to an acceptor , add a few drops of methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution,
and connect this acceptor to a steam distillation apparatus.
b) Add (9) no less than 2 g of magnesium oxide (8) to the distillation flask, and connect this
distillation flask to a steam distillation apparatus.
Note (6) 5 mL - 20 mL
(8) An amount sufficient to make the solution strong alkalinity.
(9) Add a small amount of silicone oil as necessary.
Comment 4 When the sample does not contain organic matters or urea, a proper amount of
sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (8) can be added instead of
magnesium oxide.

b) Calculate the ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:
59
Ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (1.4007/W2)
B： Volume of 0.1 mol/L -0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1

mL of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V6： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid transferred to the acceptor in (4.2)
a)
titration
C1： Set concentration (mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide
solution

red (10).
b) Calculate the ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:

= V8 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
= V8 × C2 × f2 × (2.8014/W3)
C2 ： Set concentration (0.25 mol/L) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
f2 ： Factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
Comment 5 If it is hard to confirm the endpoint due to the carbon dioxide resulting from
carbonate in the extract when magnesium oxide is used, it is recommended to boil
the extract for 1-2 minute(s) after distilling and cool, and then titrate.
Comment 6 The titration procedures in (2) a) Standardization, (2) d) Standardization and
(4.3) can be conducted by an automatic titrator. The setup of the titration program,
the determination parameter for the endpoint and vessels such as acceptors are
according to the specification and the operation method of the automatic titrator
used.
Comment 7 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using a preparation sample. As
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 10 % (mass fraction) -
21 % (mass fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) are 102.2 % - 100.8 % and 102.5 %
as ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) respectively.
The results of the collaborative study (limited to reported values with Distillation
method) to determine a certified reference material fertilizer were analyzed by
using a three-level nesting analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation
results of reproducibility, intermediate precision and repeatability. Additionally, the
minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is about 0.1 % (mass
fraction) for solid fertilizers, and 0.01 % (mass fraction) for fluid fertilizers.
60
Name of Number of Repeatability Intermediate precision Reproducibility
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-B-10 11 8.38 0.09 1.0 0.11 1.3 0.15 1.8
FAMIC-B-14 11 8.06 0.03 0.4 0.05 0.6 0.07 0.9
1）　The number of laboaratories used 6）　Intermediate standard deviation
for analysis conducting Distillation method
References
Characteristics of Testing Method for Ammonia Nitrogen Content in Fertilizer by
Distillation Method, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 6, p. 130 - 138 (2013)
61
(5) Flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen: The flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen in fertilizers is
shown below.
0.25 g - 2 g Weigh the equivalents of 20 mg – 100 mg as N

analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL distillation flask
← About 25 mL water
← 2 g Magnesium oxide to a distillation flask
← A small amount of defoaming agent as necessary

0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (until the
Figure Flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen in fertilizers.
62
4.1.2.b Formaldehyde method

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to the fertilizers which do not contain a large amount of flora and
fauna sample. This testing method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.1.2.b-2017 or A-N.b-1.
After adding water or hydrochloric acid (1+20) to an analytical sample to extract ammonium ion,
add an aluminum chloride solution, drop a potassium hydroxide solution and precipitate phosphate
and excessive aluminum to make a sample solution. Adjust the sample solution to slight acidity, add
a formaldehyde solution and measure ammonium ion by complexometric titration with 0.1 mol/L -
0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain the ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in an analytical
sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 8.

water.
Factor of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution (f)

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C)

titration
C： Set concentration (mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
b) Potassium chloride solution (1 mol/L) (1): Dissolve 75 g of potassium chloride specified in

JIS K 8121 in water to make 1000 mL.
c) Aluminum chloride solution (1 mol/L) (1): Dissolve 240 g of aluminum chloride (III)
hexahydrate specified in JIS K 8114 in water to make 1000 mL.
d) Potassium hydroxide solution (170 g/L) (1): Dissolve 170 g of potassium hydroxide in water
to make 1000 mL.
e) Formaldehyde solution: Add one volume of water to one volume of the 36 % (mass
fraction) - 38 % (mass fraction) formaldehyde specified in JIS K 8872.
f) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
in JIS K 8842 in 20 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102, and add water to make 100
63
mL.
i) Bromothymol blue solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of bromothymol blue specified in
JIS K 8842 in 20 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102, and add water to make 100 mL.
Comment 2 Thymol blue can be dissolved if it is sodium salt. The thymol blue specified in JIS K
8643 is slightly hard to dissolve in ethanol and hard to dissolve in water. Therefore,
add about 2.15 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (0.1 mol/L) per 0.1 g of thymol
blue to neutralize, and then prepare the thymol blue solution (1 g/100 mL) through
the same procedure as (2) i).

a) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 500-mL volumetric flask upside down at 30
- 40 revolutions/min.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below.
(4.1.1) Ammonium salts
a) Weigh 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 500-mL volumetric
flask.
b) Add about 400 mL of water, and shake to mix at 30-40 revolutions/min for about 30 minutes.
c) Add water up to the marked line.
d) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1) in 4.2.4.a.
(4.1.2) Mixed fertilizers

flask.
b) Add about 300 mL of hydrochloric acid (1 + 20) and shake to mix at the rate of 30 - 40
revolutions/min for about 30 minutes.
c) Add an aluminum chloride solution (1 mol/L) (2) to the solution and add a few drops of methyl
red solution (1mol/L) as an indicator. After that, add immediately potassium hydroxide (170
g/L) while shaking the flask until the color of the solution changes to light yellow (3).
d) Add water up to the marked line.
e) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (2) Add 3 mL of aluminum chloride per 0.04 g of P or 0.1 g of P2O5 in the sample
solution.
(3) Form precipitate of aluminum hydroxide and aluminum phosphate to separate the
phosphate.
Comment 4 In the procedure of (4.1.1) a) and (4.1.2) a), it is also allowed to weigh 2.5g of an
analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 250-mL volumetric flask
64
Comment 5 When it is not a fertilizer in which phosphate, ammonium and magnesium coexist,
about 400 mL of potassium chloride solution (1 mol/L) can be used instead of about
300 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+20) in the procedure of (4.1.2) b).
Comment 6 In the case of the mixed fertilizers containing bentonite, after shaking to mix using
about 300 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+20) or about 400 mL of potassium chloride
solution (1 mol/L) according to Comment 5 in (4.1.2) b), add water to the marked
line, filter with Type 3 filter paper and transfer 50 ml - 100 mL to a 250-mL
volumetric flask, and then conduct the procedure in (4.1.2) c) - e).

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution (the equivalents of 50 mg as A-N) to a
300-mL volumetric flask (4).
b) Add water to the solution to make about 100 mL.
c) Add one or two drop(s) of methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL) and add hydrochloric acid
(1+200) until the color of the solution changes to light pink.
d) Add 10 mL of formaldehyde solution.
e) Add one or two drop(s) of thymol blue solution (1 g/100 mL) and titrate with 0.1 mol/L - 0.2
mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the solution changes to blue (5).
f) As a blank test, transfer 100 mL of water to another 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask and conduct the
procedure in c) - e).
g) Calculate the ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:

= (VS － VB) × C × f × (V1/V2) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (VS － VB) × C × f × (V1/V2) × (1.4007/W2)
VS： Volume (mL) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution needed for
titration in (4.2) e)
VB： Volume (mL) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution needed for
titration of the blank test in (4.2) f)
C： Set concentration (mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide
solution
f： Factor of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
V1： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1.1) c) or (4.1.2) d)
V2： Transferred amount (mL) of the sample solution in (4.2) a)
Note (4) The volume to be transferred should be up to 100 mL.

(5) The endpoint is reached when the color changes from green to light red. It is easy to
observe the change of color under fluorescent light.
Comment 7 The titration procedures in (2) a) Standardization and (4.2) e) - f) can be conducted
by an automatic titrator. The setup of the titration program, the determination
parameter for the endpoint and vessels such as acceptors are according to the
specification and the operation method of the automatic titrator used.
21 % (mass fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) are 100.4 % - 101.0 % and 100.1 % as
ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) respectively.
The results of the collaborative study (limited to reported values by Formaldehyde
65
method) to determine a certified reference material fertilizer were analyzed by using

a three-level nesting analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of
reproducibility, intermediate precision and repeatability.
fertilizers.
certified reference laboratory Average2) sr
4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8)
RSD R
9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 10 10.66 0.07 0.7 0.09 0.8 0.16 1.5
FAMIC-A-13 9 10.36 0.06 0.5 0.08 0.8 0.21 2.0
1）　The number of laboaratories used for analysis 6）　Intermediate standard deviation
conducting Formaldehyde method
References
Characteristics of Testing Method for Ammonia Nitrogen Content in Fertilizer by
Formaldehyde Method, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 139 - 147 (2013)
(5) Flow sheet for ammoniacal nitrogen: The flow sheet for ammoniacal nitrogen in fertilizers
is shown below.
5 g analytical sample
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 500-mL volumetric flask
(ammonium salts)
← About 400 mL of water
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/minute), 30 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 The flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen in fertilizers (Extraction procedure (4.1.1))
66
(compound fertilizer)
←　About 300 mL of hydrochloric acid (1 + 20)
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/minute), 30 minutes
←　Aluminum chloride solution (1 mol/L)
← One or two drop(s) of methyl red
← Potassium hydroxide solution (170 g/L)
(Until the solution changes to light yellow)
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 The flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen in fertilizers (Extraction procedure (4.1.2))
Sample solution
Up to the equivalents of 50 mg as A-N

Aliquot
,300-mL Erlenmeyer flask
←　Add water to make about 100 mL of solution
←　One or two drop(s) of methyl red
←　Hydrochloric acid (1+200) [light pink]
←　10 mL of formaldehyde solution
←　One or two drop (s) of thymol blue solution (1 g/100 mL)
0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution
Titration
(until the solution becomes blue)
Figure 2 The flow sheet for ammoniac nitrogen in fertilizers (Measurement solution)
67
4.1.3 Nitrate nitrogen

4.1.3.a Devarda’s alloy - distillation method
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to the fertilizer containing nitrate. However, it is not applicable to
fertilizers containing urea, nitrolime and organic matters that digest by heating and isolate ammonia.
This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.1.3.a-2017 or N-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to dissolve ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) and nitrate nitrogen
(N-N), and further add devarda’s alloy and sodium hydroxide to subject it to steam distillation. In
this process, nitrate nitrogen (N-N) is reduced to ammonia. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25
mol/L sulfuric acid and measure surplus sulfuric acid by (neutralization) titration using 0.1 mol/L -
0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) in an analytical sample.
Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by
(neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) in an
analytical sample. Subtract separately obtained the ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) by 4.1.2 to calculate
nitrate nitrogen (N-N). This testing method corresponds to the devarda’s alloy method in the
Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992).

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
68
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
e) Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (1): Dissolve 100 g - 250 g of sodium
f) Devarda’s alloy: A reagent of nitrogen analysis grade specified in JIS K 8653 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
mL.

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
69
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 0.25 g - 1 g (5) (the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N) of an analytical sample to the
b) Add about 25 mL of water to make a sample solution.
Note (5) Conduct the procedure in Comment 3 when there is much nitrogen content in the
fertilizers such as simple salt fertilizers.
Comment 3 In the case of nitrate fertilizer, etc. containing much nitrogen content, weigh 2 g - 5g
of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, put it into a 250- mL volumetric flask,
dissolve it in water, and further add water up to the marked line. Put predetermined
volume of suspension (the equivalents of 20 mg -100 mg as N) into a 300- mL -
500-mL distillation flask.
b) Add (10) no less than 3 mg of devarda’s alloy and adequate volume of sodium hydroxide (200
g/L - 500 g/L) (8) (9) and connect this distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
Note (6) 5 mL - 20 mL
(8) Sudden reaction makes bubbles foam drastically and the bubbles overflow from a
distillation flask. Therefore, it is required to add an alkali solution gradually and mix
quietly.

70
b) Calculate nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) in the analytical sample by the following formula:
c) Subtract the ammoniac nitrogen (A-N) separately obtained in 4.1.2 from the obtained nitrogen
content (N-N+A-N) to calculate nitrate nitrogen (N-N) (11) (12).
Nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (1.4007/W2)
B： Volume of 0.1 mol/L -0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1

mL of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
V6： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid transferred to the acceptor in (4.2)
a)
titration in (4.3) a)
C1： Set concentration (mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide
solution
Note (11) The nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) and ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) use raw data
without rounding the numerical value.
(12) When no ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) is contained, the nitrogen content (N-N+A-N)
calculated in (4.3) b) is regarded as nitrate nitrogen (N-N).

red (13).

= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W3)
References
71
(5) Flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen: The flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below.
0.25 g - 1 g Weigh the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N to the order of 1 mg

analytical sample into a 300-mL distillation flask.
← 25 mL of water
← No less than 3 g of devarda's alloy
← A small amount of silicone oil as necessary
Stop distilling 120 mL - 160 mL distillate

Figure The flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen in fertilizers
72
4.1.3.b Reduced iron- distillation method

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to the fertilizer containing nitrate. However, it is not applicable to
fertilizers containing urea, nitrolime and organic matters that digest by heating and isolate ammonia.
This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.1.3.b-2017 or N-N.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to dissolve ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) and nitrate nitrogen
(N-N), and add reduced iron and a sulfuric acid solution to boil lightly. In this process, nitrate
nitrogen (N-N) is reduced to ammonia. And further add a sodium hydroxide solution to distillate.
Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and measure surplus sulfuric acid by
(neutralization) titration using 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain nitrogen
content (N-N+A-N) in an analytical sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution
and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain
nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) in an analytical sample. Subtract separately obtained the ammoniacal
nitrogen (A-N) by 4.1.2 to calculate nitrate nitrogen (N-N). This testing method corresponds to the
reduced iron method in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992).

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
73
mol/L sulfuric acid
=V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
f) Reduced iron: Nitrogen content is no more than 0.005 % (mass fraction)
mL.
l) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.

74

(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 0.5 g - 1 g (5) (the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N) of an analytical sample to the
b) Add about 30 mL of water and mix well.
c) As soon as adding 5 g of reduced iron and 10 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1), insert a long stem
funnel to a distillation flask and shake to mix gently while cooling the outside of the container
under flowing water (6).
d) After leaving at rest for about 5 minutes (7), heat gradually by low temperature and boil in a
low flame for about 15 minutes, and then stand to cool to make a sample solution.
Note (5) Conduct the procedure in Comment 3 when there is much nitrogen content in the
fertilizers such as simple salt fertilizers.
(6) Sudden reaction generates heat, and unreacted nitric acid vaporizes or digests to make
nitrogen oxide etc. through which process losses occur easily. Careful and efficient
operation should be taken
(7) Until a sudden reaction is settled.
Comment 3 In the case of nitrate fertilizer, etc. containing much nitrogen content, weigh 2 g - 5g
of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, put it into a 250- mL volumetric flask,
dissolve it in water, and further add water up to the marked line. Put predetermined
volume of suspension (the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg as N) into a 300-mL -
500-mL distillation flask.
b) Add adequate volume of sodium hydroxide (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (10) and connect this
Note (8) 5 mL - 20 mL

75
(4.3.1) When 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid is used in (4.2) a),


= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (1.4007/W2)

titration
Note (11) The nitrogen content (N-N+A-N) and ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) use raw data
without rounding the numerical value.
(12) When no ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N) is contained, the nitrogen content (N-N+A-N)
calculated in (4.3) b) is regarded as nitrate nitrogen (N-N).
(4.3.2) When a boric acid solution (40 g/L) is used in (4.2) a):
red (13).

=V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (14.007/W3) × (100/1000)
=V10 × C2 × f2 × (2.8014/W3)
References
76
below.
0.5 g – 1 g Weigh the equivalents of 20 mg - 100 mg of N to the order of 1 mg,

analytical sample and put it into a 300-mL distillation flask.
←About 30 mL of water
←5 g of reduced iron
←About 10 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1)
Insert a long stem funnel immediately to a distillation flask and shake
Mixture
to mix gently while cooling the outside of the container under flowing water
Leaving at rest For about 5 minutes (until a strong reaction is settled)
Heating Boil in a low flame for about 15 minutes
Standing to cool
←Sodium hydroxide (200 g/L - 500 g/L)
A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
Steam distillation
and a few drops of methyl red-methylene blue mixture solution,
apparatus
or boric acid solution (40 g/L),

Figure The flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen in fertilizers
77
4.1.3.c Phenol sulfuric acid method

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to the fertilizer containing nitrate. It is also applicable to the
fertilizers containing chemical compounds such as urea, nitrolime and organic matters that digest by
heating and isolate ammonia. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is
4.1.3.c-2017 or N-N.c-1.
Add a copper sulfate - silver sulfate solution, calcium hydroxide and basic magnesium carbonate to
an analytical sample, extract nitrate nitrogen (N-N) as well as removing chloride and organic
matters, and measure the absorbance of nitro phenol ammonium sulfate formed by the reaction with
phenol sulfuric acid and an ammonia solution to calculate nitrate nitrogen (N-N) in an analytical

a) Nitrate standard solution (N-N 5 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium nitrate (no less than 99.9 (%)
(mass fraction) in purity) at 110 ºC for no less than 1 hour, and after standing to cool in a
desiccator, transfer 36.09 g to a weighing dish. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer
to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, and add water up to the marked line.
b) Nitrate standard solution (N-N 0.01 mg/mL): Dilute predetermined volume of nitrate
standard solution (N-N 5 mg/mL) with water to prepare a nitrate standard solution (N-N 0.01
mg/mL).
c) Copper sulfuric - silver sulfuric solution (1): Dissolve 5 g of copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate
specified JIS K 8983 in 900 mL of water, and dissolve while adding 4 g of silver sulfate
specified in JIS K 8965 to make 1000 mL (2).
d) Phenol sulfuric acid: Dissolve 15 g of phenol specified in JIS K 8798 in 100 mL of sulfuric
acid specified in JIS K 8965, heat in a water bath at 80 ºC - 100 ºC for two hours and then let
it stand to cool (2).
e) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS
K 8085 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
f) Calcium hydroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8575 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
g) Basic magnesium carbonate: Basic magnesium carbonate that contains no nitrate nitrogen.

(2) Store in an amber bottle.
Comment 1 Instead of the nitrate standard solution in (2), a nitrate standard solution for a
calibration curve can be prepared using nitrate nitrogen (NO3-N 0.1 mg/mL or 1
mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

b) Spectrophotometer: A spectrophotometer specified in JIS K 0115
c) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to no less than 80 ºC
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add about 200 mL of copper sulfuric - silver sulfuric solution and shake to mix at 30 - 40
78
revolutions /min for about 20 minutes.

c) Add about 1 g of calcium hydroxide and about 1 mg of basic magnesium carbonate and shake
to mix at 30 - 40 revolutions /min for about 10 minutes.
d) Add water up to the marked line.
e) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution (3).
Note (3) As soon as the sample solution is prepared, conduct the procedure in (4.2) a).
Comment 2 If the filtrate of (4.1) e) is colored, add no more than 0.5 g of active carbon and
filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
(4.2) Coloring: Conduct coloring as shown below.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution (the equivalents of 0.01 mg - 0.1 mg as
N-N) into a small evaporating dish (4).
b) Evaporate water until dry on a water bath at no less than 80 ºC.
c) After standing to cool, swiftly add 2 mL of phenol sulfuric acid (5) and then rotate the
evaporating dish so that the whole residue comes in contact with the acid.
d) After leaving at rest for about 10 minutes, add 20 mL of water (6).
e) After standing to cool, transfer it with water to a 100- mL volumetric flask.
f) Add an ammonia solution (1+2), until the color of a solution changes to light yellow, to allow
it to be weak alkalinity, and further add 3 mL of ammonia solution (1+3) (7).
g) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line and leave at rest for 30 minutes.
Note (4) A round-bottom glass or porcelain evaporating dish is preferable.

(5) Add at the center of a small evaporating dish with Komagome pipet.
(6) If residue does not dissolve easily, grind it with a glass rod.
(7) As no color appears from a blank test solution for a calibration curve preparation, add
almost the same volume of ammonia solution (1+2) as the nitrate standard solution.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the
spectrophotometer used for the measurement.
a) Measurement conditions of spectrophotometer: Set up the measurement conditions of
spectrophotometer considering the following.
Detection wavelength: 410 nm
1) Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of nitrate standard solution (N-N 0.01 mg/mL) to small evaporating
dishes (4) step-by-step.
2) Conduct the same procedure as (4.2) b) - g) to make the nitrate standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation.
3) Transfer 40 mL of water to a 100-mL volumetric flask, and shake to mix while gently adding
2 mL of phenol sulfuric acid. Let it stand to cool and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) f) -
g) to make the blank test solution for calibration curve.
4) Measure absorbance at wavelength 410 nm of the nitrate standard solution for the calibration
curve preparation using the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation as the
control.
5) Prepare the calibration curve of concentration of the nitrate nitrogen and absorbance of the
nitrate standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) g), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4).
79
2) Obtain the nitrate nitrogen (N-N) content from the calibration curve and calculate nitrate
nitrogen (N-N) in the analytical sample.
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 16 % (mass fraction) and
1 % (mass fraction) - 3% (mass fraction) are 103.4 % and 101.1 % - 100.9 % as
nitrate nitrogen (N-N) respectively.
fertilizers.
References
2) Kimie KATO, Sakiko TAKAHASHI and Yuji SHIRAI: Validation of a Color metric
Method for Determination of Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Boron: Evaluation of
Calibration curve, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 2, p. 137 - 144 (2009)
Characteristics of Testing Method for Nitrate Nitrogen Content in Fertilizer by Phenol
Sulfuric Acid Method, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 148 - 155 (2013)
below.
1 mg
Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 250-mL volumetric flask
analytical sample
← About 200 mL of copper sulfate - silver sulfate solution
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min) for 20 minutes
← About 1 g of calcium hydroxide
← About 1 g of basic magnesium carbonate
Sample solution
Figure 1 The flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
80
Sample solution
Aliquot
(predetermined Small evaporating dish
volume)
No less than 80 ºC Water bath

Evaporation to dryness
← 2 mL of phenol sulfuric acid

About 10 minutes after making phenol sulfuric acid
Leaving at rest
contact with residue
← 20 mL of water
Standing to cool
Transfer 100-mL volumetric flask

← Ammonia solution (1+2) ( until the color of a solution changes to light yellow)
← Ammonia solution (1+3) 3 mL
Leaving at rest For about 30 minutes
Measurement Spectrophotometer (410 mm)
Figure Flow sheet for nitrate nitrogen in fertilizers (Coloring and measurement procedure)
81
4.2 Phosphoric acid

4.2.1 Total phosphoric acid
4.2.1.a Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing organic matters. This testing method is
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.2.1.a-2017 or T-P.a-1.
Add sulfuric acid, potassium sulfate and copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate to an analytical sample.
Pretreat by Kjeldahl method or incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling to convert total phosphorus to
phosphate ion, and measure the absorbance of phosphovanadomolybdate salt formed by the reaction
with ammonium vanadate (V), hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid, to obtain total
phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing
method is shown in Comment 6.

a) Sulfuric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
b) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed (HNO3 60 % (mass fraction)) Reagent specified in JIS K 8541
or a reagent of equivalent quality.
d) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS K
8085 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
f) Coloring reagent solution (3) (4): Dissolve 1.12 g of ammonium vanadate (V)(5) specified in
JIS K 8747 in water, add 250 mL of nitric acid, then add 27 g of hexaammonium
heptamolybdate tetrahydrate (6) specified in JIS K 8905 dissolved in water, and further add
water to make 1000 mL (7).
g) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K
h) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (3): Heat potassium dihydrogen
phosphate specified in JIS K 9007 at 105 ºC ± 2 ºC for about 2 hours, let it stand to cool in a
desiccator, and weigh 19.17 g to a weighing dish. Dissolve in a small amount of water,
transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add 2 mL-3 mL of nitric acid, and add water up to the
marked line.
i) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.5 mg/mL) (3): Transfer 50 mL of phosphoric acid
standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add 2 mL - 3 mL of nitric
acid, and add water up to the marked line.
Note (1) A tablet is commercially available.

(3) This is an example of preparation; prepare an amount as appropriate.
(4) This corresponds to reagent “a” reagent solution in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).
(5) This corresponds to ammonium metavanadate in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).
(6) This corresponds to ammonium molybdate in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).
82
Comment 1 Instead of the phosphoric acid standard solution in (2), a phosphoric acid standard
solution for a calibration curve can be prepared using a phosphoric acid standard
solution (P 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In
this case, calculate the total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) in an analytical sample by
multiplying the concentration (P) of a phosphoric acid standard solution for a
calibration curve or a measured value obtained in (4.3) by a conversion factor
(2.2914).
a) Spectrophotometer: A spectrophotometer specified in JIS K 0115
b) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be adjusted to 550 ºC ± 5 ºC.
c) Hot plate or sand bath: A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
Adjust the amounts of gas and silica sand of a sand bath so that the sand bath temperature can
be set to 250 ºC.
d) Digestion flask: Kjeldahl flask
(4) Test procedures

(4.1.1) Kjeldahl method
a) Weigh 0.5 g - 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL
digestion flask.
b) Add 5 g - 10 g of catalyst, and further add 20 mL - 40 mL of sulfuric acid, shake to mix and
heat gently.
250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water, and further mix by shaking.
f) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line
g) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (8) When the solution has finished changing color, heat further for no less than 2 hours.
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) in 4.2.1.b. Also, the
procedures in (4.1.1) a) - f) are the same as in (4.1) in 4.1.1.a.
(4.1.2) Incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling

a) Weigh 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 200-mL - 300-mL tall
beaker.
b) Put the tall beaker in an electric furnace, and heat gently to char (9).
c) Ignite at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC for no less than 4 hours to incinerate (9).
d) After standing to cool, moisten the residue with a small amount of water, gradually add about
10 mL of hydrochloric acid, and further add water to make 20 mL.
e) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, and heat on a hot plate or a sand bath to boil for
about 5 minutes.
f) After cooling is complete, transfer to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water.
g) Add water up to the marked line.
h) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (9) Example of charring and incineration procedure: After raising the temperature from
room temperature to about 250 °C in 30 minutes to 1 hour, continue heating for about
83
1 hour and further raise to 550 °C in 1 to 2 hours.
Comment 3 The procedures in (4.1.2) are the same as the procedures in (4.1.1) in 4.3.1.a, (4.1.1)
in 4.5.1.a, (4.1.1) in 4.6.1.a and (4.1) in 8.4.a.
(4.1.3) Incineration-aqua regia digestion

beaker.
c) Ignite at 450 ºC ± 5 ºC for 8 - 16 hours to incinerate (10).
d) After standing to cool, moisten the residue with a small amount of water, and add about 10
mL of nitric acid and about 30 mL of hydrochloric acid.
e) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, and heat on a hot plate or a sand bath to digest.
f) Slightly move the watch glass (11), and continue heating on the hot plate or sand bath to
concentrate until nearly dried up (12).
g) After standing to cool, add 25 mL - 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5) (13) to the digest, cover
the tall beaker with the watch glass, and heat quietly to dissolve.
h) After standing to cool, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask with water, add water up to the
marked line, and filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
room temperature to about 250 °C in 30 minutes to 1 hour, continue heating for
about 1 hour and further raise to 450 °C in 1 to 2 hours.
(11) The watch glass can be removed.
(12) When drying and hardening it, phosphoric acid may not dissolve completely and the
concentration may become a low value in the procedure in g).
(13) Add hydrochloric acid (1+5) so that the hydrochloric acid concentration of the
sample solution will be hydrochloric acid (1+23). For example, when a 100-mL
volumetric flask is used in the procedure in h), about 25 mL of hydrochloric acid
(1+5) should be added.
Comment 4 The procedures in (4.1.3) are the same as in (4.1.2) in 4.3.1.a, (4.1.2) in 4.5.1.a,
(4.1.2) in 4.6.1.a, (4.1) in 4.9.1.a, (4.1) in 4.9.1.b, (4.1) in 4.10.1.a and (4.1) in
4.10.1.b. And also, the same as (4.1) a) - h) in 5.3.a, (4.1) a) - h) in 5.3.b, (4.1) a) -
h) in 5.4.a, (4.1) a) - h) in 5.4.b, (4.1) a) - h) in 5.5.a, (4.1) a) - h) in 5.5.d, (4.1) a) -
h) in 5.6.a and (4.1) a) - h) in 5.6.b.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.5 mg - 6 mg as
P2O5) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add 1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL), and neutralize by adding
ammonia solution (1+1) until the color of the solution becomes light red-purple (14).
c) Add nitric acid (1+10) until the light red-purple color of the solution disappears to make it
slightly acidic, and add a proper amount of water (15).
d) Add 20 mL of coloring reagent solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
leave at rest for about 30 minutes.
Note (14) It is not necessary to add a phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) when determination
can be done by the color change of copper ion (light blue → blue-purple).
(15) Without the addition of water, precipitate may be produced when a coloring reagent
84
solution is added.
1) Transfer 1 mL - 12 mL of phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.5 mg/mL) to 100-mL
volumetric flasks step-by-step.
2) Add a proper amount of water (15), and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) d) to make the
P2O5 0.5 mg/100 mL - 6 mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
3) Conduct the same procedures as 2) for another 100-mL volumetric flask to make the blank
test solution for the calibration curve preparation.
4) Measure absorbance at a wavelength of 420 nm of the phosphoric acid standard solutions for
the calibration curve preparation using the blank test solution for the calibration curve
preparation as the control (16).
5) Prepare the calibration curve of the phosphoric acid concentration and absorbance of the
phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) d), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4) (16).
2) Obtain the phosphoric acid (P2O5) content from the calibration curve, and calculate total
phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) in the analytical sample.
Note (16) Measure within 6 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution in the procedure in
(4.2) d).
Comment 5 After the procedure in (4.2) a), it is also possible to measure soluble phosphoric acid
at the same time by adding 4 mL of nitrate acid (1+1) and 2 mL of Petermans citrate
solution and by conducting the procedures from (4.2) d) to (4.3) in 4.2.2.a (using b
reagent solution in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992)).
Further after the procedure in (4.2) a), it is also possible to measure citrate soluble
phosphoric acid at the same time by adding 4 mL of nitrate acid (1+1) and 17 mL of
citrate solution and by conducting the procedures from (4.2) d) to (4.3) in 4.2.3.a
(using b reagent solution in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992)).
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 10 % - 20 % (mass
fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) - 5 % (mass fraction) are 99.4 % - 100.2 % and
101.0 % - 105.7 % as total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) respectively.
The results of the collaborative study to determine a certified reference material
fertilizer were analyzed by using a three-level nesting analysis of variance. Table 1
shows the calculation results of reproducibility, intermediate precision and
repeatability.
fertilizers.
85
4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8)
RSD R
9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-C-12 9 8.62 0.03 0.4 0.04 0.4 0.08 0.9
conducting Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis
References
3) Kimie KATO, Masayuki YOSHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: Systematization of
Determination Methods of Major Components in Sludge Fertilizer, Compost and
Organic Fertilizer, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.3 p. 107 - 116 (2010)
4) Yoshiyuki SUNAGA, Yasushi SUGIMURA, Ichiro YOSHIDA and Hidenori KONISHI:
Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Methods for Phosphorus Content
in Fertilizer by Ammonium Vanadomolybdate Absorption Photometry, Research Report
of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 167 - 179 (2012)
86
(5) Flow sheet for total phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for total phosphoric acid in fertilizers is
shown below:
0.5 g - 5 g
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL Kjeldahl flask.
analytical sample
← About 10 g catalyst
← 20 mL - 40 mL sulfuric acid
Heating Gently
Heating After bubbles cease to form, ignite

until organic matters are completely digested.
← A small amount of water
Cooling Room temperature

←Water (up to the marked line)
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for total phosphate in fertilizers

　　　(Kjeldahl method procedure (4.1.1) )
87
5g
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.
analytical sample
Charring Heat gently

Incineration Ignite at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC for no less than 4 hours

← A small amount of water, moisten the residue
← About 10 mL of hydrochloric acid
← Water (up to about 20 mL)
Heating Cover with a watch glass, and boil for 5 minutes.
Cooling

Sample solution

　　(Incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling procedure (4.1.2))
88
5g
analytical sample

Incineration Ignite at 450 ºC ± 5 ºC for 8 - 16 hours

← About 10 mL of nitric acid
Heating Cover with a watch glass to digest
Heating Slightly move the watch glass and remove acid

← 25 mL - 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5)
Heating Cover with a watch glass to dissolve
Standing to cool

Sample solution

　　(Incineration-aqua regia digestion orocedure (4.1.3))
89
Sample solution
Aliquot
(predetermined 100-mL volumetric flask
amount)
← 1-2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL)

← Ammonia solution (1+1) [neutralization]
← Nitric acid (1+10) [slightly acidic]
← A proper amount of water
← 20 mL of coloring reagent solution
Measurement Spectrophotometer (420 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total phosphate in fertilizers

　　　(Coloring and measurement procedure)
90
4.2.1.b Quinoline gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing organic matters. It is suitable for the
fertilizers with relatively a high content of phosphoric acid. This testing method is classified as
Type E and its symbol is 4.2.1.b-2017 or T-P.b-1.
Add sulfuric acid, potassium sulfate and copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate to an analytical sample.
Pretreat by the Kjeldahl method to convert the total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) to phosphate ion, and
measure the mass of quinolinium phosphomolybdate formed by the reaction with quinoline,
molybdic acid and nitric acid to obtain the total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) in an analytical sample.

quality.
b) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed (HNO3 60 % (mass fraction)) Reagent specified in JIS K 8541
c) Sodium molybdate solution (1): Dissolve 70 g of sodium molybdate dihydrate in 150 mL of
water.
d) Quinoline solution (1): Add 5 mL of quinolone specified in JIS K 8279 to the mixture solution
of 35 mL of nitric acid and 100 mL of water.
e) Quimosiac solution (1): Add 60 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 to the
mixture solution of 85 mL nitric acid and 150 mL of water to dissolve. Add gradually total
volume of the sodium molybdate solution to mix. Add gradually the total volume of the
quinoline solution while mixing the solution. After leaving at rest overnight, filter the total
volume with Type 3 filter paper. Add 280 mL of acetone specified in JIS K 8034, and further
add water to make 1000 mL.
f) Catalyst (2): Mix potassium sulfate specified in JIS K 8962 and copper (II) sulfate

a) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 60 ºC - 65 ºC.
b) Drying apparatus: A drying apparatus that can be adjusted to 220 ºC ± 5 ºC.
c) Crucible type glass filter: A crucible type glass filter 1G4 specified in JIS R 3503. Let it
stand to cool in a desiccator after heating at 220 ºC ± 5 ºC in advance and measure the mass to
the order of 1 mg.
d) Digestion flask: Kjeldahl flask
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 0.5 g - 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 300-mL
digestion flask.
heat gently.
250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water.
91
f) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line

g) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Comment 1 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1) in 4.2.1.a. In
addition, the sample solution prepared in (4.1.2) in 4.2.1.a and (4.1.3) in 4.2.1.a can
also be used.

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 10 mg - 30 mg as P2O5 and no more than
5 mL as sulfuric acid) of sample solution to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 5 mL of nitric acid and add water to make about 80 mL.
c) Cover with a watch glass. After boiling for about 3 minutes, wash the watch glass and the
inside the tall beaker with water and add water to make about 100 mL.
d) Immediately, add 50mL of quimosiac solution, heat for about 15 minutes while sometimes
mixing in a water bath at 60 ºC - 65 ºC to produce the precipitate of quinonium
phosphomolybdate.
e) After standing to cool down to room temperature while sometimes mixing, filter under
reduced pressure with a crucible type glass filter, wash the tall beaker 3 times with water and
transfer the whole precipitate into a crucible type glass filter, and further wash 7 - 8 times with
water.
f) Transfer the precipitate together with the crucible type glass filter into a drying apparatus and
heat at 220 ºC ± 5 ºC for about 30 minutes.
g) As soon as heating is complete, move it into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
h) After standing to cool, remove the crucible type glass filter from the desiccator and measure
i) Calculate total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) in the analytical sample by the following formula.
Total phosphoric acid (T-P2O5) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

=A × 0.03207 × (V1/V2) × (1/W) × 100
A： Mass (g) of the precipitate in h)

W： Mass (g) of the analytical sample
V1： Constant volume (mL) of sample solution
V2： Volume (mL) of the sample solution transferred in a)
References
92
(5) Flow sheet for total phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for total phosphoric acid in fertilizers
is shown below:
0.5 g- 5 g
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL digestion flask.
analytical sample
← 5 g - 10 g catalyst
← 20 mL - 40 mL sulfuric acid
Heating Gently
After bubbles cease to form,

Heating
ignite until organic matters are completely digested

← Small mount of water
Cooling
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total phosphate in fertilizers

　　　(Kjeldahl method procedure)
93
Sample solution
Aliquot
(predetermined 300-mL tall beaker
volume)
← 5 mL nitrate acid
← Water (to reach about 80 mL)
Cover with a watch glass for 3 minutes
Boiling
Wash a watch glass and inside the tall beaker with water
← Water (to be about 100 mL)
← Quimosiac solution 50 mL
Produce precipitate 60 ºC - 65 ºC, for 15 minutes, sometimes mixing
Filtration
under reduced Crucible type glass filtering apparatus 1G4, 3 times with water
pressure
Washing Wash 7 - 8 times with water
Drying 220 ºC ± 5 ºC for about 30 minutes
Figure 2 The flow sheet for total phosphate in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
94
4.2.2 Soluble phosphoric acid

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that do not contain matter not colored by hydrolysis
with nitrate acids such as phosphonic acid. This testing method is classified as Type C and its
symbol is 4.2.2.a-2017 or S-P.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, then extract by adding an ammonium citric acid
solution, and combine respective pre-determined amounts of extract (equivalent volume). Heat after
adding nitric acid (1+1), hydrolyze nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion and measure the
absorbance of phosphovanadomolybdate salt formed by the reaction with ammonium vanadate (V),
hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid to obtain ammonia alkaline ammonium
citrate-soluble phosphoric acid (soluble phosphoric acid (S-P2O5)) in an analytical sample. In
addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 6.

a) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed (HNO3 60 % (mass fraction)) Reagent specified in JIS K 8541
b) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS
c) Petermans citrate solution: Add 173 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283
in water to dissolve and add gradually an ammonia solution equivalent to 42 g of nitrogen
while cooling. After cooling is complete, add water to make 1000 mL. Additionally, check
that the specific gravity of the solution is 1.082 - 1.083 (15 ºC) and the nitrogen content per 1
mL is 42 mg.
d) Coloring reagent solution (1) (2): Dissolve 1.12 g of ammonium vanadate (V)(3) specified in
e) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium dihydrogen
marked line.
f) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.5 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 50 mL of phosphoric acid

(2) This corresponds to reagent “b” reagent solution in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
(5) Store in an amber bottle. However. the reagent solution cannot tolerate long term
preservation.
Comment 1 The coloring reagent solution in d) can also be prepared by the following method.
Dissolve 2.24 g of ammonium vanadate (V) (3) specified in JIS K 8747 in water, add
300 mL of nitric acid, and add water to make 1000 mL. Separately, add 100 g of
95
hexaammonium heptamolybdate tetrahydrate (4) specified in JIS K 8905 while

dissolving in water, and further add water to make 1000 mL. In the case of usage,
mix equal volumes of the two solutions.
this case, calculate soluble phosphoric acid (S-P2O5) in an analytical sample by
(2.2914).

a) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 65 ºC ± 2 ºC.
b) Hot plate: A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
c) Spectrophotometer: A spectrophotometer specified in JIS K 0115
(4) Test procedures

(4.1)
Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below.
a) Weigh 2.5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a small mortar.
b) Add about 20 mL - 25 mL of water, grind well and filter the supernatant with Type 6 filter
paper into a 250-mL volumetric flask.
c) Further, after repeating procedure in b) 3 times, transfer non-dissolved matter in the small
mortar onto a filter paper and wash with water until the filtrate becomes about 200 mL.
d) Add a small amount of nitric acid to the filtrate, and further add water up to the marked line to
make a sample solution (1).
e) Transfer the non-dissolved matter on the filter paper together with the filter paper to another
250- mL (6) volumetric flask, and add 100 mL of Petermans citrate solution and stopple. Then
shake to mix until the filter paper breaks down.
f) Heat the volumetric flask in e) in water bath at 65 ºC ± 2 ºC for 1 hour while shaking to mix
every 15 minutes.
g) After immediate cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line
h) Filter with Type 6 filter paper to make a sample solution (2).
Note (6) It is recommended to use a 250-mL short-neck volumetric flask.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 4.2.2.b.
Comment 4 When the determination is affected by the coloring of the sample solution of d) and
h), transfer the predetermined volume (equivalent volume) (7) of the sample solution
(1) and the sample solution (2) to a 100-mL volumetric flask, add a few drops of
hydrochloric acid (1+1) to acidify, then add no more than 0.1 g of active carbon.
After leaving at rest for a little while, add water up to the marked line and filter. The
filtrate is to be the mixture solution for the sample solution of (4.2) a). Additionally,
as phosphorus contained in active carbon has the possibility to elute and affects the
determination value, a blank test is required.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 0.5 mg - 6 mg as P2O5 and no more than
the equivalents of 2 mL of Petermans citrate solution) (7) of the sample solution (1) and the
sample solution (2) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add the solution to make Petermans citrate solution equivalent to 2 mL.
96
c) Add 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1) (8), and heat to boil (9).

d) After cooling is complete, add a proper amount of water (10).
e) Add 20 mL of coloring reagent solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
leave at rest for about 30 minutes (8).
Comment 5 The volumetric flask used in the procedure in a) should be distinguished as a flask to
be used for phosphate coloring operation and should not be used for other purposes.
Note (7) The transferred volume of the sample solution (1) and the sample solution (2) should be
equivalent.
(8) When the solution is muddled by adding nitric acid (1+1), conduct centrifugation after
the procedure in e).
(9) When it does not contain non-orthophosphate, the boiling operation is not necessary.
solution is added.
2) Add 2 mL of Petermans citrate solution, 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1) and a proper amount of
water (10), and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) e) to make the P2O5 0.5 mg/100 mL - 6
mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) e), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4) (11).
2) Obtain the phosphoric acid (P2O5) content from the calibration curve, and calculate soluble
phosphoric acid (S-P2O5) in the analytical sample.
Note (11) Measure within 2 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution.
100.6 % and 98.6 % - 103.0 % as soluble phosphoric acid (S-P2O5) respectively.
repeatability.
97

0.08 % (mass fraction).
4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8)
RSD R
9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-B-10 10 8.62 0.04 0.4 0.05 0.6 0.06 0.7
FAMIC-B-14 10 9.18 0.03 0.4 0.04 0.5 0.09 1.0
References
3) Akira SHIMIZU and Shin ABE: Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing
Method for Citrate-Soluble Phosphorus Content by Ammonium Vanadomolybdate
Absorption Photometry, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 180 - 189 (2012)
98
(5) Flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in
fertilizers is shown below:
2.5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a small mortar
Repeat 3 times ← About 20 mL - 25 mL water

Grinding
Supernatant filtration Type 6 filter paper, 250-mL volumetric flask

＜Residue＞
Transfer Transfer residue to a filter paper

← Washing with water, until filtrate reaches about 200 mL
＜Residue＞＜Filtrate＞
← A small amount of nitric acid
Sample solution (1)
Transfer Together with filter paper, 250-mL volumetric flask

← 100 ml of Petermans citrate solution
Shaking to mix Stopple and shake to mix until a filter paler breaks down
Heating At 65 ºC ± 2 ºC for 1 hour while shaking to mix every 15 minutes.
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution (2)
Figure 1 The flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
99
Sample solutions (1)

and (2) Aliquot Transfer the same volume of sample solutions (1)
(predetermined and (2) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
volume)
← Petermans citrate solution, until it reaches the equivalent of 2 mL
← 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1)
Heating Boiling
Cooling
Measurement Spectrophotometer (420nm)
Figure 2 The flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

(Coloring and measurement procedure)
100
4.2.2.b Quinoline gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no Phosphorous acid, etc. It is suitable for
the fertilizers with relatively a high content of phosphoric acid. This testing method is classified as
Type E and its symbol is 4.2.2.b-2017 or S-P.b-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, then extract by adding an ammonium citric acid
solution, and combine respective pre-determined amounts of extract (equivalent volume). Heat after
adding nitric acid and water, hydrolyze nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion and measure
the mass of quinolinium phosphomolybdate formed by the reaction with quinoline, molybdic acid
and nitric acid to obtain ammonia alkaline ammonium citrate soluble phosphoric acid (soluble
phosphoric acid (S-P2O5)) in an analytical sample.

b) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS K
c) Petermans citrate solution: Add 173 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283
in water to dissolve and add gradually an ammonia solution equivalent to 42 g of nitrogen
while cooling. After cooling is complete, add water to make 1000 mL. Additionally, check
that the specific gravity of the solution is 1.082 - 1.083 (15 ºC) and the nitrogen content per 1
mL is 42 mg.
d) Sodium molybdate solution: Dissolve 70 g of sodium molybdate dihydrate in 150 mL of
water.
e) Quinoline solution: Add 5 mL of quinolone specified in JIS K 8279 to the mixture solution
f) Quimosiac solution: Add 60 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 to the
a) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 65 °C ± 2 °C and 60 ºC - 65 ºC.
b) Drying apparatus: A drying apparatus that can be adjusted to 220 °C ± 5 ºC.
the order of 1 mg.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1)
Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below.
a) Weigh 2.5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a small mortar.
b) Add about 20 mL - 25 mL of water, grind well and filter the supernatant with Type 6 filter
paper into a 250-mL volumetric flask.
c) Further, after repeating procedure in b) 3 times, transfer non-dissolved matter in the small
mortar onto a filter paper and wash with water until the filtrate becomes about 200 mL.
d) Add a small amount of nitric acid to the filtrate, and further add water up to the marked line to
e) Transfer the non-dissolved matter on the filter paper together with the filter paper to another
101
250- mL (1) volumetric flask, and add 100 mL of Petermans citrate solution and stopple. Then
shake to mix until the filter paper breaks down completely.
f) Heat the volumetric flask in e) in water bath at 65 ºC ± 2 ºC for 1 hour while shaking to mix
every 15 minutes.
g) After immediate cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line
h) Filter with Type 6 filter paper to make a sample solution (2).
Note (1) It is recommended to use a 250-mL short-neck volumetric flask.
Comment 1 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 4.2.2.a.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 10 mg - 30 mg as P2O5 and no more than
the equivalents of 2 mL of Petermans citrate solution) (2) of the sample solution (1) and the
sample solution (2) to a 300-mL tall beaker.
mixing in a water bath at 60 ºC - 65 ºC to produce the precipitate of quinonium
phosphomolybdate.
water.
i) Calculate soluble phosphoric acid (S-P2O5) in the analytical sample by the following formula.
Soluble phosphoric acid (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= A × 0.03207 × (V1/V2) × (1/W) × 100

W： Mass of an analytical sample (2.5 g)
V1： Predetermined volume (250 mL) of the sample solution
Note (2) The transferred volume of the sample solution (1) and the sample solution (2) should be
equivalent.
References
102
(5) Flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in
2.5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a small mortar
Repeat 3 times ← About 20 mL - 25 mL water

Grinding
Supernatant filtration Type 6 filter paper, 250-mL volumetric flask

＜Residue＞
Transfer Transfer residue to a filter paper

← Wash with water, until filtrate reaches about 200 mL
＜Residue＞＜Filtrate＞
← A small amount of nitric acid
Sample solution (1)
Transfer Together with filter paper, 250-mL volumetric flask

← 100 ml Petermans citrate solution
Shaking to mix Stopple and shake to mix until a filter paler breaks down
Heating At 65 ºC ± 2 ºC for 1 hour while shaking to mix every 15 minutes.
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution (2)
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure)
103
Sample solutions (1)

and (2) Aliquot Transfer the same volume of sample solutions (1)
(predetermined and (2) to 300-mL volumetric flasks
volume)
Boiling
Wash a watch glass and inside a tall beaker with water
← Water (to make about 100 mL)
← 50 mL of quimosiac solution
Forming precipitate 60 ºC - 65 ºC, for 15 minutes, sometimes mixing
Filtration
pressure
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

(Measurement procedure)
104
4.2.3 Citrate-soluble phosphoric acid

(1) Summary
symbol is 4.2.3.a-2018 or C-P.a-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample. Heat after adding nitric acid (1+1),
hydrolyze nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion and measure the absorbance of
phosphovanadomolybdate salt formed by the reaction with ammonium vanadate (V),
hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid to obtain citrate soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5)
in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment
9.

b) Citric acid solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 in
water to make 1000 mL.
c) Coloring reagent solution (1) (2): Dissolve 1.12 g of ammonium vanadate (V)(3) specified in
d) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium dihydrogen
marked line.
e) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.5 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 50 mL of phosphoric acid

Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
(5) Store in an amber bottle. However, the reagent solution cannot tolerate long term
preservation.
Comment 1 The coloring reagent solution in c) can also be prepared by the following method.
105
this case, calculate citrate-soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5) in an analytical sample

by multiplying the concentration (P) of a phosphoric acid standard solution for a
(2.2914).

a) Extractor: Constant-temperature rotary shaker or reciprocating water bath shaker as
described below.
aa) Constant-temperature rotary shaker: A constant-temperature rotary shaker that can rotate
a 250-mL volumetric flask, set up in a thermostat adjustable to 30 ºC ± 1 ºC, upside down at
30 - 40 revolutions/min.
ab) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker: that can be adjusted to
30 °C ± 1 °C and shake a 250-mL volumetric flask, set up vertically on the water surface
using a shaking rack, reciprocate horizontally at 160 times/ minute with amplitude of 25 mm -
40 mm.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1.1) Constant-temperature rotary shaker:
flask.
b) Add 150 mL of citric acid solution heated up to about 30 ºC (6), and shake to mix at 30 - 40
revolutions/min (30 ºC ± 1 ºC) for 1 hour.
c) After immediate cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line
Note (6) Shake to mix the volumetric flask gently and disperse an analytical sample into the
citric acid solution.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1) of 4.2.3.b, (4.1) of
4.2.3.c, (4.1) of 4.2.3.d, (4.1.1) of 4.3.2.a, (4.1) of 4.3.2.b, (4.1) of 4.3.2.c, (4.1.1) of
4.3.2.d, (4.1.1) of 4.6.3.a, (4.1.1) of 4.6.3.b, (4.1.1) of 4.7.2.a, (4.1.1) of 4.7.2.b,
(4.1.1) of 4.8.1.a and (4.1.1) of 4.8.1.b.
(4.1.2) Reciprocating water bath shaker:

flask (6).
b) Add 150 mL of citric acid solution heated up to about 30 ºC (6), and shake to mix by
reciprocating horizontally at 160 times /min with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm (30 ºC ± 1 ºC)
for 1 hour.
Note (7) Use a 250-mL flat-bottom volumetric flask to stabilize the shaking.
Comment 4 The procedure in (4.1.2) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 4.2.3.b, (4.1.2) of
4.2.3.d, (4.1.2) of 4.3.2.a, (4.1.2) of 4.3.2.d, (4.1.2) of 4.6.3.a, (4.1.2) of 4.6.3.b,
(4.1.2) of 4.7.2.a, (4.1.2) of 4.7.2.b, (4.1.2) of 4.8.1.a and (4.1.2) of 4.8.1.b.
106
Comment 5 For a by-product phosphate fertilizer, if the pH of the sample solution in (4.1.1) d)
and (4.1.2) d) is neutral or basic, prepare a sample solution anew by replacing “1 g of
an analytical sample” in the procedures in (4.1.1) a) and (4.1.2) a) with “0.5 g of an
analytical sample”.
Comment 6 The determination may be affected if an analytical sample cakes on the bottom of a
250-mL volumetric flask. Therefore, confirm the status of the non-dissolved matters
after the procedures of (4.1.1) b) and (4.1.2) b).
Comment 7 When the determination is affected by the coloring of the sample solution of (4.1.1)
d) and (4.1.2) d), transfer the predetermined volume of the sample solution to a
100-mL volumetric flask, add a few drops of hydrochloric acid (1+1) to acidify, then
add no more than 0.1 g of active carbon. After leaving at rest for a little while, add
water up to the marked line and filter. The filtrate is prepared as the sample solution
of (4.2) a). Additionally, as phosphorus contained in active carbon has the possibility
to elute and affects the determination value, a blank test is required.

P2O5 and no more than the equivalents of 17 mL of citric acid solution) to a 100-mL
volumetric flask.
b) Add the solution to make citric acid solution equivalent to 17 mL.
c) Add 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1) (8), and heat to boil (9).
d) After cooling is complete, add a proper amount of water (10).
Note (8) When the solution is muddled by adding nitric acid (1+1), conduct centrifugation after
(9) When it does not contain non-orthophosphate, the boiling operation is not necessary.
solution is added.
2) Add 17 mL of a citric acid solution, then add 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1), further add a proper
amount of water (10) and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) e) to make the P2O5 0.5 mg/100
mL - 6 mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation.
107

2) Obtain the phosphoric acid (P2O5) content from the calibration curve, and calculate citrate
soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5) in the analytical sample.
Note (11) Measure within 2 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution.
103.4 % and 102.0 % - 103.8 % as citrate soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5)
respectively.
repeatability.
fertilizers.
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 11 10.05 0.04 0.4 0.05 0.5 0.13 1.3
FAMIC-A-13 10 10.79 0.06 0.6 0.08 0.8 0.09 0.8
References
Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Methods for Phosphorus Content
in Fertilizer by Ammonium Vanadomolybdate Absorption Photometry, Research Report
108
(5) Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for citrate soluble
phosphoric acid in fertilizers is shown below:
1 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 250-mL volumetric flask

← 150 mL of citric acid solution [about 30 ºC]
Shaking to mix Constant-temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min)
30 ºC ± 1 ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers
(Extraction procedure (4.1.1))

Reciprocating water bath shaker (reciprocation horizontally at
Shaking to mix 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 ºC ±
1 ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
109
Sample solution
Aliquot 100-mL volumetric flask

← Citric acid solution, until it reaches the equivalents of 17 mL
← 4 mL of nitric acid(1+1)
Heating Boiling
Cooling
Measurement Spectrophotometer (420nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

110

phosphorous acid or phosphite)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to the fertilizers containing phosphorous acid or phosphite. This
testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 4.2.3.b-2018 or C-P.b-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, add hydrochloric acid - sulfuric acid
to heat, and oxygenate phosphorous acid ion to orthophosphate ion, and then measure the
absorbance of phosphovanadomolybdate salt formed by the reaction with ammonium vanadate (V),
hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid to obtain citrate-soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5)
7.

a) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Citric acid solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 in
marked line.

Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
(5) Store in an amber bottle. However, the reagent solution cannot tolerate long term
preservation.
Comment 1 The coloring reagent solution in d) can also be prepared by the following method.
111

(2.2914).

described below.
using a shaking rack, reciprocating horizontally at 160 times/ minute with amplitude of 25
mm - 40 mm.
b) Hot plate or sand bath: A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedures

flask.

flask (7).
reciprocating horizontally at 160 times/min with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm (30 ºC ± 1 ºC)
for 1 hour.
112


a) Transfer a predetermined amount (up to 25 mL, the equivalents of 0.5 mg - 6 mg as P2O5) of
the sample solution to a 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 3 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of nitric acid.
c) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass (8), heat on a hot plate or sand bath at 200 ºC - 250 ºC
and condense until the solution volume becomes about 2 mL (9).
d) After standing to cool, transfer it with water to a 100- mL volumetric flask (10).
e) Add the citric acid solution to make the equivalents of 17 mL of the citric acid and further add
2 mL of nitric acid (1+1).
f) Add 20 mL of coloring reagent solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
Note (8) A watch glass should not be uncovered when bubbles form while heating because they
may splash.
(9) It is recommended to transfer 2 mL of water to a 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker in
advance and confirm the volume.
(10) The volume of the solution after transferring should be up to about 50 mL.
2) Add 17 mL of a citric acid solution, then add 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1), further add a proper
amount of water (11). Conduct the same procedure as (4.2) f) to make the P2O5 0.5 mg/100 mL
- 6 mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) f), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4) (12).
Note (11) If water is not added, precipitate may form when adding the coloring reagent solution.
(12) Measure within 2 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution in the procedure in
113
(4.2) f).
Comment 7 Additive recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using solid fertilizers
(10 samples) containing the equivalents of 1.03 % (mass fraction) - 51.04 % (mass
fraction) as citrate soluble phosphoric acid. As a result, the average recovery is 99 %
- 100 %.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a solid preparation
sample to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1
shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.
method validation.
Table 1 Analysis results of the repeatability tests on different days

Name of Test days of Repeatability Intermediate precision
sample repeatability Average2) sr
4)
RSD r
5) 6)
s I(T) RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Preparation sample (solid) 1 5 51.01 0.12 0.2 0.16 0.3
1）　The number of test days conducting a duplicate test 6）　Intermediate standard deviation
2）　Average （the number of test days（T ） 7）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
×the number of duplicate testing（2））
4）　Repeatability standard deviation
114

for the test method validation of citrate-soluble phosphoric acid
Number of Mean2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
sr RSD r sR RSD R
Sample name laboratorie
3) 3) 3)
1) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
s
Processed
phosphorus 12 47.21 0.13 0.3 0.69 1.5
fertilizers1
Compund fertilizers 1 11 17.71 0.07 0.4 0.19 1.1
Compund fertilizers 2 12 5.08 0.08 1.6 0.17 3.3
Absorptive mixed
11 14.32 0.06 0.4 0.18 1.2
fertiliser
Regent 11 50.89 0.14 0.3 0.57 1.1
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Toshiaki HIROI, Masayuki YAMANISHI Determination Method for Citric
Acid-Soluble Phosphorus in Solid Fertilizer Containing Phosphonate (Phosphite) using
Spectrophotometer, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.9, p. 43 - 58 (2016)
2) Masayuki YAMANISHI, Toshiaki HIROI and Fumika TAKATSU Determination
Method for Citric Acid-Soluble and Water-Soluble Phosphorus in Solid Fertilizer
Containing Phosphonic Acid or Phosphonate (Phosphite) using Spectrophotometer: A
Collaborative Study, Vol.9, p. 59 - 68 (2016)
115
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble phosphoric acid containing phosphorus acid, etc.: The flow
sheet for citrate-soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers containing phosphorus acid, etc.is
shown below:

← 150 mL of citric acid solution [about 30ºC]
Constant-temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min)
Shaking to mix
30ºC ± 1ºC, 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble phosphoric acid

in fertilizers containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Extraction procedure (4.1.1))

← 150 mL of citric acid solution [about 30ºC]
Reciprocating water bath shaker (reciprocation horizontally at 160
Shaking to mix times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 ºC ± 1 ºC,
for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble phosphoric acid

in fertilizers containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Extraction procedure (4.1.2))
116
Sample solution
Aliquot 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker

← 3 mL of hydrochloric acid
← 1 mL of nitric acid
Mixing
Cover with a watch glass, heat on a hot plate or sand bath

Heating
at 200 ºC - 250 ºC, condense until the solution volume reaches about 2 mL
Standing to cool
Transfer 100-mL volumetric flask, water (solution volume is up to about 50 mL)

← Citric acid solution, until the equivalent of 50 mL
← 2 mL of Nitric acid (1+1)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble phosphoric acid

in fertilizers containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Coloring and measurement procedure)
117
4.2.3.c Quinoline gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no Phosphorous acid, etc. It is suitable for
Type E and its symbol is 4.2.3.c-2017 or C-P.c-1.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample. Heat after adding nitric acid and
water, hydrolyze nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion and measure the mass of
quinolinium phosphomolybdate formed by the reaction with quinoline, molybdic acid and nitric
acid to obtain citrate soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5) in an analytical sample.

c) Sodium molybdate solution: Dissolve 70 g of sodium molybdate dihydrate in 150 mL of
water.
d) Quinoline solution: Add 5 mL of quinoline specified in JIS K 8279 to the mixture solution
e) Quimosiac solution: Add 60 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 to the
a) Constant-temperature rotary shaker: A constant-temperature rotary shaker that can rotate
b) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 60 ºC - 65 ºC.
c) Drying apparatus: A drying apparatus that can be adjusted to 220 ºC ± 5 ºC.
d) Crucible type glass filter: A crucible type glass filter 1G4 specified in JIS R 3503. Let it
the order of 1 mg.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
118
Comment 1 The procedures in (4.1) are the same as in (4.1.1) in 4.2.3.a.

Comment 2 For a by-product phosphate fertilizer or a fertilizer containing a by-product phosphate,
if the pH of the sample solution of d) is neutral or basic, prepare a sample solution
anew by replacing “1 g of an analytical sample” in the procedure in a) with “0.5 g of
an analytical sample”.
after the procedure of (4.1) b).

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 10 mg - 30 mg as P2O5) of sample
solution to a 300-mL tall beaker.
mixing in a water bath at 60 ºC - 65 ºC to produce the precipitate of quinolinium
phosphomolybdate.
water.
i) Calculate citrate soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5) in the analytical sample by the following
formula.
Citrate soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= A × 0.03207 × (V1/V2) × (1/W) × 100

W： Mass of an analytical sample (1 g)
References
119

Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
120
Sample solution
Standing to cool
Aliquot
300-mL tall beaker
← 5 mL nitric acid
Boiling
Wash a watch glass and the inside the tall beaker with water
← Water (to be about 100 mL)
← 50mL of quimosiac solution
Forming precipitation 60 ºC - 65 ºC, for 15 minutes, sometimes mixing
Filtration
pressure
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
121
4.2.3.d ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. It is also suitable for the fertilizers containing
phosphite. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.2.3.d-2018 or C-P.d-1.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, introduce it to an ICP Optical
Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the phosphorus at a wavelength of 178.287 nm to
obtain citric acid-soluble phosphoric acid (citrate-soluble phosphoric acid (C-P2O5)) in an analytical

a) Water: Water of A3 specified in JIS K 0557.
b) Hydrochloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
d) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium dihydrogen
marked line.
e) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of phosphoric acid
standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid
(1+23) up to the marked line.
f) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 20 µg/mL - 0.4 mg/mL) for the calibration
curve preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 40 mL of phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 1
mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask step by step and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line.
g) Phosphoric acid standard solution ((P2O5 5 µg/mL - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 5 mL - 20 mL of phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.1
marked line.
h) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in e) - g).
(2.2914).
Comment 2 There are two modes to observe emission from an ICP-OES, a horizontal observation
mode and an axial observation mode. The range of the concentration of the standard
solution for the calibration preparation curve in f) and g) applies to a horizontal
observation mode. While an axial observation mode can observe a measurement
component of low-level concentrations, it cannot gain the linearity of a calibration
curve in the range of high-level concentrations. Therefore, when using the ICP-OES
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a phosphoric acid
122
standard solution for the calibration curve in the concentration range which is
suitable to a device used.

a) ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry: A spectrophotometer specified in JIS K 0115
1) Gas: Argon gas specified in JIS K 1105 of no less than 99.5 % (volume fraction) in purity
b) Extractor: Constant-temperature rotary shaker or reciprocating water bath shaker as
described below.
ba) Constant-temperature rotary shaker: A constant-temperature rotary shaker that can rotate a
250-mL volumetric flask, set up in a thermostat adjustable to 30 ºC ± 1 ºC, upside down at 30
bb) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker: that can be adjusted
to 30 °C ± 1 °C and shake a 250-mL volumetric flask, set up vertically on the water surface
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure

flask.

flask (3).
for 1 hour.
123
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the ICP Optical
Emission Spectrometry used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Atomic Emission Spectrometer: Set up the
measurement conditions for the ICP Atomic Emission Spectrometer considering the
following:
Analytical line wavelength: 178.287 nm
1) Spray the phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank
test solution for the calibration curve preparation into inductively coupled plasma, and read
the indicated value at a wavelength of 178.287 nm.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the phosphoric acid concentration and the
indicated value of the phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation
and the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.5 mg - 40 mg as
2) Add 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5), and add water up to the marked line.
3) Subject to the same procedure as in b) 1) to read the indicated value.
Comment 7 The simultaneous measurement of multiple elements by an ICP-OES is available. In

this case, transfer a pre-determined amount of phosphoric acid standard solution (P 1
mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), potassium standard solution (K 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL),
magnesium standard solution (Mg 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), manganese standard
solution (Mn 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) and boron standard solution (B 1 mg/mL or 10
mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology to a volumetric flask to mix, add
hydrochloric acid (1+5) to make an acid concentration of 0.5 mol/L and further add
water up to the marked line to prepare a primary mixed standard solution. Transfer a
pre-determined volume of primary mixed standard solution to volumetric flasks
step-by-step, add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line to prepare mixed
standard solutions for calibration curve preparation within the concentration range in
Table 1. In this case, multiply the respective concentrations of mixed standard
solutions for calibration curve preparation or measurement values obtained in (4.2)
by the conversion factors in Table 1 to calculate respective main components in an
analytical sample. The measurement wavelengths of respective elements are
according to Table 1. In addition, when preserving mixed standard solutions for
calibration curve preparation, use a container, which can be sealed tightly, made of
material such as PTFE that boron hardly elutes.
124
Table 1　 Preparation concentration and mesurement wavelength

of mixed standard solutions for calibration curb preparation
Mixed standard solutions for calibration curb preparation
Concentration Concentration Conversion
Test item 1 Wavelength
of element of the equivalents to oxide factor ）
（µg/mL）（µg/mL）（nm）
citrate soluble
P 1 - 200 P2 O5 2.291 - 458.2 2.2914 178.287
phosphoric acid
citrate soluble
K 1 - 200 K2 O 1.205 - 241.0 1.2046 766.491
potassium
citrate soluble
Mg 0.1 - 20 MgO 0.1658 - 33.16 1.6583 279.553
magnesia
citrate soluble
Mn 0.05 - 10 MnO 0.06455 - 12.91 1.2912 257.610
manganese
citrate soluble
B 0.05 - 10 B2 O3 0.1610 - 32.20 3.2199 249.773
boron
1)　Factor to convert an element to an oxcide.
Comment 8 The comparison of the measurement value (yi：1.74 % (mass fraction) - 49.04 %
(mass fraction )) of ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry and the measurement value
(xi) of Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis was conducted to
evaluate trueness using processed phosphorus fertilizers (2 samples), compound
fertilizers (12 samples), home garden-use mixed fertilizers (1 sample), mixed
compost fertilizers (2 samples), mixed phosphate fertilizers (2 samples), designated
blended fertilizers (4samples), blended fertilizers (5 samples), byproduct mixed
fertilizers (1 sample), byproduct phosphorus fertilizers (2 samples), organic
compound fertilizers (1 sample) and fused phosphate fertilizers (1 sample). As a
result, a regression equation was y = − 0.0027 + 1.001x, and its correlation
coefficient (r) was 1.000. In addition, recovery testing was conducted using a
preparation sample. As a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of
0.260 % (mass fraction) - 49.99 % (mass fraction) was 96.3 % - 100.8 %.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using compound fertilizers and
blended fertilizer to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of
variance. Table 2 shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and
repeatability.
125

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
sample repeatability Average sr RSD r s I(T) RSD I(T)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Compound fertilizer 7 20.90 0.13 0.6 0.18 0.9
Blended fertilizer 7 6.44 0.06 0.9 0.06 1.0
References
1) Keisuke AOYAMA: Simultaneous Determination of Water-Soluble Principal Ingredients
(W-P2O5, W-K2O, W-MgO, W-MnO and W-B2O3) in Liquid Fertilizer using
Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectrometry (ICP-OES), Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol.8, p. 1 - 9 (2015)

Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
126

Shaking to mix 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 ºC ± 1
ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Sample solution

← 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5)
Measurement ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (178.287 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

(Mmeasurement procedure)
127
4.2.4 Water-soluble phosphoric acid

(1) Summary
symbol is 4.2.4.a-2017 or W-P.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, add nitric acid (1+1) to heat, and hydrolyze
nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion, then measure the absorbance of
hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid to obtain water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5)
9.

b) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS K
c) Coloring reagent solution (1) (2): Dissolve 1.12 g of ammonium vanadate (V)(3) specified in
d) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K
marked line.

Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
this case, calculate water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) in an analytical sample
(2.2914).
128

a) Extractor: A rotary shaker or a vertical reciprocating shaker as described below.
aa) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 500-mL volumetric flask upside down at 30 -
40 revolutions/min.
ab) vertical reciprocating shaker: A vertical reciprocating shaker that can shake a 250-mL
volumetric flask using an adapter to reciprocate vertically at 300 times/ minute (amplitude of
40 mm).
(4) Test procedure

(4.1.1) Powdery test sample
(4.1.1.1) Rotary shaker:
flask.
Comment 2 In the procedure of (4.1.1.1) a), it is also allowed to weigh 2.5g of an analytical
sample to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 250-mL volumetric flask
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1) of 4.1.2.b, (4.1.1.1)
of 4.2.4.b, (4.1) of 4.2.4.c, (4.1) of 4.2.4.d, (4.1.2.1) of 4.3.3.a, (4.1.2) of 4.3.3.b,
(4.1.2) of 4.3.3.c, (4.1.1.1) of 4.7.3.a, (4.1.1) of 4.9.2.a, (4.1.1) of 4.10.2.a, (4.1.1) of
4.13.1.a and (4.1.1) of 4.14.1.a.
Comment 4 When the determination is affected by the coloring of the sample solution of (4.1.1.1)
d), (4.1.1.2) d) and (4.1.2) d), transfer the predetermined volume of the sample
solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask, add a few drops of hydrochloric acid (1+1) to
acidify, then add no more than 0.1 g of active carbon. After leaving at rest for a little
while, add water up to the marked line and filter. The filtrate is prepared as the
sample solution of (4.2) a). Additionally, as phosphorus contained in active carbon
has the possibility to elute and affects the determination value, a blank test is
required.
(4.1.1.2) Vertical reciprocating shaker:

a) Weigh 2.5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 250-mL volumetric
flask.
b) Add about 200 mL of water, and shake to mix by reciprocating vertically at 300 times/min
(amplitude of 40 mm) for about 30 minutes.
Comment 5 The procedure in (4.1.1.2) is the same as the procedures in (4.1.1.2) of 4.2.4.b,
(4.1.2.2) of 4.3.3.a and (4.1.1.2) of 4.7.3.a.
(4.1.2) Fluid test sample

flask.
b) Add about 50 mL of water, and shake to mix.
129

Comment 6 The procedure in (4.1.2) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 4.2.4.b, (4.1.3) of
4.3.3.a, (4.1) of 4.3.3.d, (4.1) of 4.5.3.b, (4.1) of 4.6.3.b, (4.1.2) of 4.7.3.a, (4.1) of
4.7.3.b, (4.1) of 4.8.2.b, (4.1.2) of 4.9.2.a, (4.1.2) of 4.9.2.b, (4.1.2) of 4.10.2.a, (4.1)
of 4.10.2.b, (4.1.2) of 4.13.1.a, (4.1) of 4.13.1.b, (4.1.2) of 4.14.1.a, (4.1) of 4.14.1.b,
(4.1.2) of 4.14.1.a, (4.1) of 4.14.1.b, (4.1) of 4.15.1.a and (4.1) of 4.15.1.b.

b) Add 4 mL of nitric acid (1+1) (6), and heat to boil (7).
c) After cooling is complete, add 1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL), and
neutralize by adding ammonia solution (1+1) until the color of the solution becomes light
red-purple (14).
d) Add nitric acid (1+10) until the light red-purple color of the solution disappears to make it
slightly acidic, and add a proper amount of water (8).
leave at rest for about 30 minutes (6).
Note (6) When the solution is muddled by adding nitric acid (1+1), conduct centrifugation after
(7) When it does not contain non-orthophosphate, the procedure in b) is not necessary.
solution is added.
2) Add a proper amount of water (8), and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) e) to make the P2O5
0.5 mg/100 mL - 6 mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation.
130
2) Obtain the phosphoric acid (P2O5) content from the calibration curve, and calculate
water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) in the analytical sample.
Note (9) Measure within 6 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution in the procedure in
(4.2) e).
Comment 8 After the procedure in (4.2) a), it is also possible to measure soluble phosphoric acid
at the same time by adding 2 mL of Petermans citrate solution and by conducting the
procedures from (4.2) d) to (4.3) in 4.2.2.a (using b reagent solution in the Official
Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992)).
Further after the procedure in (4.2) a), it is also possible to measure citrate soluble
phosphoric acid at the same time by adding 17 mL of citrate solution and by
conducting the procedures from (4.2) c) to (4.3) in 4.2.3.a (using b reagent solution
in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992)).
101.2 % and 99.0 % - 101.7 % as water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5)
respectively.
repeatability.
The comparison of the measurement value of extraction (yi：0.292 % (mass fraction)
- 40.40 % (mass fraction)) with a vertical reciprocating shaker and the measurement
value of extract with a rotary shaker (xi) was conducted to evaluate trueness of the
extraction of solid fertilizers using fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression
equation was y = − 0.041 + 0.999x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 1.000. Also,
the results of the repeatability tests on different days using compound fertilizers and
designated blended fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way
analysis of variance. Table 2 shows the calculation results of intermediate precision
and repeatability
The comparison of the measurement value of simple extraction (yi：1.92 % (mass
fraction) - 12.21 % (mass fraction )) and the measurement value of extract (xi) with a
rotary shaker was conducted to evaluate trueness of the extraction of fluid fertilizers
using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y =
0.005+1.005x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Also, the results of the
repeatability tests on different days using fluid mixed fertilizers to evaluate the
precision of the extraction of fluid fertilizers were analyzed by the one-way analysis
of variance. Table 3 shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and
repeatability.
fertilizers.
131
Table 1 Analysis results of the collaborative study to determine certified reference material fertilizer
4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8)
RSD R
9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-B-10 9 7.00 0.02 0.3 0.03 0.5 0.07 1.0
FAMIC-B-14 15 6.70 0.02 0.3 0.03 0.5 0.06 0.9

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Designated blended
7 13.77 0.03 0.2 0.06 0.5
fertilizer

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid mixed fertilizer 1 7 12.19 0.02 0.2 0.05 0.4
References
132

Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Method for Citrate-Soluble
Phosphorus Content by Ammonium Vanadomolybdate Absorption Photometry,
Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 167 - 179 (2012)
4) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Simple Extraction Method for Water-Soluble Components in
Liquid Compound Fertilizers, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.9, p. 10 - 20 (2016)
5) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Extraction Method for the Water-soluble Principal Ingredients
in the Solid Fertilizer using a General-purpose Equipment, Research Report of Fertilizer,
Vol.10, p. 1 - 8 (2017)
133
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for water-soluble
phosphoric acid: in fertilizers is shown below:
(powdery)
← Water, about 400 mL
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure (4.1.1.1))
2.5 g analytical sample

(powdery)
Vertical reciprocating shaker(300 times/min, with amplitude
Shaking to mix
of 40 mm), for 30 minutes
Sample solution

(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution

134
Sample solution

← 4 mL of nitric acid(1+1)
Heating Boiling
Cooling
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers

135

phosphorous acid or phosphite)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to the fertilizers containing phosphorous acid or phosphite. This
testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 4.2.4.b-2017 or W-P.b-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, add hydrochloric acid - sulfuric acid to heat, and
oxygenate phosphonic acid ion to orthophosphate ion, and then measure the absorbance of
hexaammonium heptamolybdate and nitric acid to obtain water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5)
6.

equivalent quality.
c) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS K
heptamolybdate tetrahydrate(4) specified in JIS K 8905 dissolved in water, and further add
e) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K
f) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium dihydrogen
marked line.
g) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.5 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 50 mL of phosphoric
acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add 2 mL - 3 mL of
nitric acid, and add water up to the marked line.

Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
Fertilizers (1992).
this case, calculate water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) in an analytical sample
(2.2914).
136

a) Extractor: A rotary shaker or a vertical reciprocating shaker as described below.
aa) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask upside
down at 30 - 40 revolutions/min.
ab) Vertical reciprocating shaker: A vertical reciprocating shaker that can shake a 250-mL
40 mm).
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

flask.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1.1) in 4.2.4.a.

flask.

flask.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 0.5 mg - 6 mg as P2O5) of the sample
solution to a 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 3 mL of hydrochloric acid and 1 mL of nitric acid.
137
c) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, heat on a hot plate or sand bath at 200 ºC - 250 ºC
and condense (7) until the solution volume becomes about 2 mL (6).
d) After standing to cool, transfer it with water to a 100- mL volumetric flask (8).
e) Add 1 - 2 drop (s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL), and neutralize by adding
ammonia solution (1+1) until the color of the solution becomes light red-purple.
f) Add nitric acid (1+10) until the light red-purple color of the solution disappears to make it
slightly acidic.
g) Add 20 mL of coloring reagent solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
Note (6) It is recommended to transfer about 2 mL of water to a 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker in
advance and confirm the volume.
(7) Care should be taken not to dry and harden it. When it dries completely, the
determined value becomes lower than usual in some cases.
(8) The volume of the solution after transferring should be up to about 50 mL.
2) Add a proper amount of water (9), and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) g) to make the
P2O5 0.5 mg/100 mL - 6 mg/100 mL phosphoric acid standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) g), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4) (10).
Note (9) If water is not added, precipitate may form when adding the coloring reagent solution.
(10) Measure within 6 hours after adding the coloring reagent solution in the procedure in
(4.2) g).
Comment 6 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using a fluid preparation sample.
As a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 30 % (mass fraction) -
50 % (mass fraction), 10 % (mass fraction) - 20 % (mass fraction), 4 % (mass
fraction) and 0.2 % (mass fraction) are 101.1 % - 101.8 %, 101.1 % - 101.5 %,
100.8 % and 102.5 % as water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) respectively. In the
case of using a solid preparation sample, the average rate of recovery at the content
138
level of 30 % (mass fraction) - 59 % (mass fraction), 12 % (mass fraction) - 21 %

(mass fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) - 9 % (mass fraction) are 99.5 % - 100.4 %,
99.3 % - 100.3 %, and 96.9 % - 100.4% respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a solid preparation
sample to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1
shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.
Also, table 2 and table 3 show results and analysis results from a collaborative study
for testing method validation using fluid fertilizers and solid fertilizers.
fertilizers.

4)
RSD r
5) 6)
s I(T) RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
139

for the test method validation of water-soluble phosphoric acid
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid mixed
12 33.56 0.25 0.7 0.59 1.8
fertilizers 1
Fluid mixed
12 17.93 0.08 0.5 0.30 1.7
fertilizers 2
Fluid mixed
12 7.99 0.12 1.5 0.31 3.8
fertilizers 3
Fluid mixed
11 11.93 0.13 1.1 0.33 2.8
fertilizers 4
Fluid mixed
11 24.1 0.08 0.3 0.47 2.0
fertilizers 5
3) Mass fraction

for the test method validation of water-soluble phosphoric acid (Solid fertilizer)
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Compound
12 58.47 0.13 0.2 0.42 0.7
fertilizers 1
Compound
12 3.92 0.04 1.0 0.08 2.1
fertilizers 2
Compound
12 13.37 0.10 0.7 0.20 1.5
fertilizers 3
Absorptive mixed
12 7.16 0.03 0.4 0.16 2.3
fertilizers
Blended fertilizers 12 21.80 0.12 0.5 0.18 0.8
3) Mass fraction
140
References
1) Toshiaki HIROI, Masakazu SAIKI and Kimie KATO: Development and Validation of
Spectrophotometry for Determination of Water-Soluble Phosphoric acid in Liquid
Mixed Fertilizer Containing Phosphonic acid, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.1 P. 25
- 33 (2008)
2) Toshiaki HIROI, Masakazu SAIKI and Kimie KATO: Determination of Water-Soluble
Phosphoric Acid in Liquid Mixed Fertilizer Containing Phosphonic Acid by
Spectrophotometry: A Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.1 p. 34 -
40 (2008)
3) Fumihiro ABE, Noriyuki SASAKI and Toshio HIRABARA: Determination of
Water-Soluble Phosphorus in Solid Fertilizer Containing Phosphonic Acid by
Spectrophotometry, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.8, p. 10 - 16 (2015)
4) Masayuki YAMANISHI, Toshiaki HIROI and Fumika TAKATSU Determination
Method for Citric Acid-Soluble and Water-Soluble Phosphorus in Solid Fertilizer
Containing Phosphonic Acid or Phosphonate (Phosphite) using Spectrophotometer: A
Collaborative Study, Vol.9, p. 59 - 68 (2016)
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid containing phosphorus acid, etc.: The flow
sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid in fertilizers containing phosphorus acid, etc.is shown
below:
(powdery)
Sample solution

containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Extraction procedure (4.1.1.1))

(powdery)
Vertical reciprocating shaker(300 times/min, with amplitude of
Shaking to mix
40 mm), for 30 minutes
Sample solution

containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Extraction procedure (4.1.1.2))
141
(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution

containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Extraction procedure (4.12))
Sample solution
Aliquot 100-mL - 200-mL tall beaker

← 3 mL of hydrochloric acid
← 1 mL of nitric acid
Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, heat on a hot plate or sand bath
Heating
at 200 ºC - 250 ºC, condense until the solution volume reaches about 2 mL
Standing to cool
Transfer 100-mL volumetric flask, water


containing phosphorus acid, etc. (Coloring and measurement procedure)
142
4.2.4.c Quinoline gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no phosphorous acid, etc. It is suitable for
Type E and its symbol is 4.2.4.c-2017 or W-P.c-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample. Heat after adding nitric acid and water, hydrolyze
nonorthophosphoric acid to orthophosphate ion and measure the mass of quinonium
phosphomolybdate formed by the reaction with quinoline, molybdic acid and nitric acid to obtain
water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) in an analytical sample.

b) Sodium molybdate solution: Dissolve 70 g of sodium molybdate dihydrate in 150 mL of
water.
c) Quinoline solution: Add 5 mL of quinoline specified in JIS K 8279 to the mixture solution
d) Quimosiac solution: Add 60 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 to the
d) Crucible type glass filter: A crucible type glass filter 1G4 specified in JIS R 3503. Let it
the order of 1 mg.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add about 400 mL of water, and shake to mix at 30 - 40 revolutions/min for about 30 minutes.
Comment 1 In the procedure in a), it is also allowed to weigh 2.5 g of an analytical sample to the
order of 1 mg, and put it into a 250-mL volumetric flask.

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 10 mg - 30 mg as P2O5 and no more than
20 mL as the total solution volume) of sample solution to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 5 mL of nitric acid and add water to make 80 mL.
143
inside the tall beaker with water and add water to make 100 mL.
mixing in a water bath at 60 ºC - 65 ºC to produce the precipitate of quinolinium
phosphomolybdate.
water.
i) Calculate water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) by the following formula.
Soluble phosphoric acid (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= A × 0.03207 × (V1/V2) × (1/W) × 100

W： Mass of an analytical sample (5 g)
References
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid: The flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric
acid: in fertilizers is shown below:

Sample solution

144
Sample solution
Aliquot 300-mL tall beaker

Boiling
Wash a watch glass and the inside the tall beaker with water
← 50 mL quimosiac solution
Forming precipitate 60 ºC - 65 ºC, for 15 minutes, some times mix
Filtration
Crucible type glass filtering apparatus 1G4, 3 times with water
under reduced pressure

145

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fluid mixed fertilizers and the fluid fertilizers of home
garden-use mixed fertilizers. It is also suitable for the fertilizers containing phosphorus acid
(phosphite). This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.2.4.d-2017 or W-P.d-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, introduce it to an ICP Optical Emission
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the phosphorus at a wavelength of 178.287 nm to obtain
water-soluble phosphoric acid W-P2O5) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this
testing method is shown in Comment 5.
(2) Reagent, etc.: Reagents and water are as shown below.

equivalents.
c) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium dihydrogen
marked line.
d) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of phosphoric acid
standard solution (P2O5 10 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid
e) Phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 20 µg/mL - 0.4 mg/mL) for the calibration
curve preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 40 mL of phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 1
marked line.
f) Phosphoric acid standard solution ((P2O5 5 µg/mL - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 5 mL - 20 mL of phosphoric acid standard solution (P2O5 0.1
marked line.
g) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in d), e) and f).
solution (P 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case,
calculate water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5) in an analytical sample by
(2.2914).
Comment 2 There are two modes to observe emission from an ICP-OES, a horizontal
observation mode and an axial observation mode. The range of the concentration of
the standard solution for the calibration preparation curve in d) and e) applies to a
horizontal observation mode. While an axial observation mode can observe a
measurement component of low-level concentrations, it cannot gain the linearity of
a calibration curve in the range of high-level concentrations. Therefore, when using
the ICP-OES of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a
phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve in the concentration
146
range which is suitable to a device used.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1 g of an analytical sample (2) to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric
flask.
b) Add about 50 mL of water, shake to mix and add water up to the marked line.
c) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when there is less phosphoric
acid content in the fertilizers such as a home garden-use fertilizer.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 4.2.4.a.
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Atomic Emission Spectrometer: Set up the measurement
conditions for the ICP Atomic Emission Spectrometer considering the following:
1) Spray the phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the phosphoric acid concentration and the
indicated value of the phosphoric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation
and the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.

this case, transfer a pre-determined amount of phosphoric acid standard solution (P 1
mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), potassium standard solution (K 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL),
magnesium standard solution (Mg 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), manganese standard
solution (Mn 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), boron standard solution (B 1 mg/mL or 10
mg/mL), calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL), iron standard solution (Fe 1
mg/mL), cobalt standard solution (Co 1 mg/mL), copper standard solution (Cu 1
mg/mL), zinc standard solution (Zn 1 mg/mL) and molybdenum standard solution
(Mo 1 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology to a volumetric flask to mix, add
hydrochloric acid (1+5) to make an acid concentration of 0.5 mol/L and further add
water up to the marked line to prepare a primary mixed standard solution. Transfer a
147
pre-determined volume of primary mixed standard solution to volumetric flasks

step-by-step, add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line to prepare mixed
standard solutions for calibration curve preparation within the concentration range in
Table 1. In this case, multiply the respective concentrations of mixed standard
solutions for calibration curve preparation or measurement values obtained in (4.2)
by the conversion factors in Table 1 to calculate respective main components in an
analytical sample. The measurement wavelengths of respective elements are
according to Table 1. In addition, when preserving mixed standard solutions for
calibration curve preparation, use a container, which can be sealed tightly, made of
material such as PTFE that boron hardly elutes.
Table 1　　Preparation concentration and measurement wavelength of mixed standard solution

for calibration curve preparation
Mixed standard solutions for calibration curve preparation
　Concentration Measurement
Concentration of the equivalents to Conversion
Name of test item of element 1) wavelength
oxide(µg/mL) factor
(µg/mL) (nm)
Water-soluble phosphoric acid

P 1~200 P2O5 2.291~458.2 2.2914 178.287
Water-soluble potassium K 1~200 K2 O 1.205~241.0 1.2046 766.491
Water-soluble magnesia Mg 0.1~20 MgO 0.1658~33.16 1.6583 279.553
Water-soluble manganese Mn 0.05~10 MnO 0.06455~12.91 1.2912 257.610
Water-soluble boron B 0.05~10 B2O3 0.1610~32.20 3.2199 249.773
Water-soluble calcium Ca 0.1 - 20 - - 393.366
Water-soluble zinc Zn 0.1 - 20 - - 213.856
Water-soluble copper Cu 0.1 - 20 - - 327.396
Water-soluble iron Fe 0.1 - 20 - - 259.940
Water-soluble molybdenumMo 0.1 - 20 - - 202.030
Water-soluble cobalt Co 0.1 - 20 - - 228.616
1）　Factor to convert an element to oxide
(xi) of Ammonium vanadomolybdate absorptiometric analysis was conducted to
evaluate trueness using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression
equation was y = − 0.022 + 1.008x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999.
Additionally, additive recovery testing was conducted using a fluid mixed fertilizer
(1 brand) and a home garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean
recovery rates at additive level of 10 % (mass fraction) and 1 % (mass fraction) were
98.1 % and 101.9 % respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a fluid mixed fertilizer
and a home garden-use mixed fertilizer to evaluate precision were analyzed by the
one-way analysis of variance. Table 2 shows the calculation results of intermediate
precision and repeatability.
148

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid mixed fertilizer 7 10.83 0.10 0.9 0.14 1.3
Home garder-use
mixed fertilizer 7 0.829 0.008 0.9 0.015 1.8
（fluid)
References
1) Keisuke AOYAMA: Simultaneous Determination of Water-Soluble Principal
Ingredients (W-P2O5, W-K2O, W-MgO, W-MnO and W-B2O3) in Liquid Fertilizer using
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid of the fluid mixed fertilizers is
shown below:

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 The flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid in fluid fertilizers
149
Sample solution
Aliquot 100-mL volmetric flask

Measurement ICP-OES (178.287nm)
Figure 2 The flow sheet for water-soluble phosphoric acid in fluid fertilizers
150
4.3 Potassium
4.3.1 Total potassium
4.3.1.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry or flame photometry
(1) Summary
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.3.1.a-2017 or T-K.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and hydrochloric acid to convert the total potassium
into potassium ion, add an interference suppressor solution, and then spray in an acetylene-air flame,
and measure the atomic absorption with potassium at a wavelength of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm to
quantify the total potassium. Or, determine the intensity of the emission line at a wavelength of
766.5 nm or 769.9 nm produced in flame to obtain the total potassium (T-K2O) in an analytical

equivalent quality.
c) Interference suppressor solution: Weigh 12.5 g of calcium carbonate specified in JIS K
8617 into a 2000-mL beaker, add a small amount of water, gradually add 105 mL of
hydrochloric acid, and heat for a little while. After cooling is complete, add water to make
1000 mL.
d) Potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium chloride specified in JIS K
8121 at 110 ºC ± 2 ºC for about 2 hours, let it stand to cool in a desiccator, and weigh 1.583 g
into a weighing dish. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric
flask, and add water up to the marked line. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a
1000-mL volumetric flask, and add water up to the marked line.
e) Potassium standard solution (K2O 5 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) to
500-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, add about 50 mL of interference suppressor solution
(2)
, and add water up to the marked line.
f) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Transfer about 50 mL of
interference suppressor solution to a 500-mL volumetric flask (2), and add water up to the
marked line.

(2) Add an interference suppressor solution that is 1/10 volume of the volume to be
prepared.
Comment 1 Instead of the potassium standard solution in (2), a potassium standard solution for
the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a potassium standard
solution (K 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case,
calculate total potassium (T-K2O) in the analytical sample by multiplying the
concentration (K) of a potassium standard solution for calibration curve preparation
or a measurement value (K) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion factor (1.2046).

a) Analytical instrument: An atomic absorption spectrometer or a flame photometer as shown
below:
aa) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in
151
JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: A potassium hollow cathode lamp
2) Gas: Gas for heating by flame
(i) Fuel gas: acetylene
(ii) Auxiliary gas: Air sufficiently free of dust and moisture.
ab) Flame photometer:
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

beaker.
10 mL of hydrochloric acid, and further add water to make about 20 mL.
about 5 minutes.
f) After cooling is complete, transfer to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water.

beaker.
concentrate until nearly dried up.
152
(6) Add hydrochloric acid (1+5) so that the hydrochloric acid concentration of the sample
solution will be hydrochloric acid (1+23). For example, when a 100-mL volumetric
flask is used in the procedure in h), about 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5) should be
added.
Comment 3 The procedures in (4.1.2) are the same as in (4.1.3) in 4.2.1.a. and (4.1) a) - h) in
5.3.a.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the atomic
absorption spectrometer or flame photometer used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the atomic absorption spectrometer or flame photometer:
Set up the measurement conditions for the atomic absorption spectrometer or flame
photometer considering the following:
Analytical line wavelength: 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm
1) Spray the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
solution for the calibration curve preparation into a flame, and read the indicated value at a
wavelength of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the potassium concentration and the indicated
value of the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
K2O) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
2) Add about 10 mL of interference suppressor solution (2), and add water up to the marked line.
4) Obtain the potassium content from the calibration curve, and calculate total potassium
(T-K2O) in the analytical sample.
100.1 % and 100.9 % - 103.1 % as total potassium acid (T-K2O) respectively.
repeatability.
fertilizers.
153
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-C-12 11 0.584 0.005 0.9 0.011 1.9 0.038 6.5
conducting flame atomic absorbance spectrometry
References
3) Yasuharu KIMURA and Hisanori ARAYA Verification of Performance Characteristics
of Testing Methods for Potassium Content in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 190 - 200 (2012)
154
(5) Flow sheet for total potassium: The flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers is shown
below:
5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.

Incineration 550 ºC ± 5 ºC, no less than 4 hours

Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers

　　(Incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling procedure (4.1.1))
155
5g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers

　　( Incineration-aqua regia digestion procedure (4.1.2))
Sample solution
Aliquot 100-mL volumetric flask, water

← About 10 mL interference suppressor solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer or flame photometer
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
156
4.3.1.b Sodium tetraphenylborate gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing organic matters. It is suitable for fertilizers
containing relatively a high content of potassium. This testing method is classified as Type D and its
symbol is 4.3.1.b-2017 or T-K.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample by incineration and hydrochloric acid to convert the total potassium
into potassium ion, mask co-existing ammonium and other salts with formaldehyde and
ethylenediamine tetraacetate, and measure the mass of potassium tetraphenylborate formed by the
reaction with tetraphenylborate to obtain the total potassium (T-K2O) in an analytical sample. In

equivalent quality.
b) Formaldehyde solution: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8872 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L) (1): Dissolve 200 g of sodium hydroxide specified in
d) Aluminum chloride solution (1 mol/L) (1): Dissolve 12 g of aluminum chloride (III)
e) Tetraphenylborate solution (1): Transfer 6.1 g of sodium tetraphenylborate specified in JIS K
9521to a 250-mL volumetric flask, dissolve by adding about 200 mL of water and add 10 mL
of aluminum chloride solution. Add a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL) as an indicator, and
neutralize with a sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L) until the color of the solution changes
to yellow, and then add water up to the marked line. Filter with Type 3 filter paper and add 0.5
mL of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L) to the total filtrate. Filter with Type 3 filter paper
in the case of usage.
f) Tetraphenylborate washing solution (1): Dilute 40 mL of tetraphenylborate solution with
g) Ethylenediaminetetraacetate - Sodium hydroxide solution (1): Dissolve 10 g of
ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid disodium dihydrogen dihydrate specified in JIS K 8107 and 8
g of sodium hydroxide specified in JIS K 8576 in a proper amount of water. Add 6 mL - 10
mL of tetraphenylborate solution while mixing according to the potassium content coexisting
as impurity after standing to cool, and then add water to make 100 mL. After leaving at rest
for about 30 minutes while sometimes mixing, filter with Type 3 filter paper.
h) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
in 100 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102.
a) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be adjusted to 550 ºC ± 5 ºC.
the order of 1 mg.
d) Hot plate or sand bath: A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
be set to 250 ºC.
157
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh about 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 200-mL -
300-mL tall beaker.
about 5 minutes.
f) After cooling, transfer to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water.
Comment 1 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 4.2.1.a. In addition,
the sample solution prepared in (4.1) a) - h) in 4.9.1.a can also be used.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 15 mg - 30 mg as K2O) of the sample
b) Add water to the solution to reach 50 mL when the procedure in e) is complete.
c) Add hydrochloric acid (1+9), so that the hydrochloric acid becomes equivalent to 0.2 mL.
d) Add 5 mL of formaldehyde solution, and then add 5 mL of ethylenediamine
tetraacetate−sodium hydroxide solution.
e) Add necessary volume (3) of tetraphenylborate solution at the rate of one or two drop(s) per
second while mixing, and further add 4 mL of the same solution in the same manner.
f) Leave at rest for about 30 minutes while sometimes mixing to form the precipitate of
potassium tetraphenylborate.
g) Filter supernatant under reduced pressure with a crucible type glass filter, wash the tall beaker
5 times with 5 mL of tetraphenylborate washing solution and transfer the whole precipitate to
the crucible type glass filter and further wash 2 times with 2 ml of water.
h) Transfer the precipitate together with the crucible type glass filter into a drying apparatus and
heat at 120 ºC ± 2 ºC for about 1hour.
i) As soon as heating is complete, move it into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
j) After standing to cool, remove the crucible type glass filter from the desiccator and measure
k) Calculate total potassium (T-K2O) in the analytical sample by the following formula.
Total potassium (T-K2O) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= A × 0.1314 × (V1/V2)/W × 100
A： Mass (g) of the precipitate

V1： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1) g)
158
Note (3) About 3 ml of tetraphenylborate solution per 10 mg of K2O is required to form the
precipitate of potassium tetraphenylborate
100.8 % and 99.5 % - 100.6 % as total potassium acid (T-K2O) respectively.
References
2) Keiji YAGI, Aiko YANO and Hideo SOETA: Verification of Performance
159
(5) Flow sheet for total potassium: The flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers is shown
below:
5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.

Incineration Ignite at 550 ºC ± 5 ºC, no less than 4 hours


Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
160
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← Water (add tetraphenylborate solution to reach 50 mL)
← Hydrochloric acid (1+9) (the equivalents of 0.2 mL of hydrochloric acid)
← 5 mL of formaldehyde solution
← 5 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate- sodium hydroxide solution
← Tetraphenylborate solution (necessary volume + 4 mL)
Forming precipitate For 30 minutes, sometimes mixing
Filtration Crucible type glass filtering apparatus 1G4,

under reduced
5 times with 5 mL of tetraphenylborate washing solution
pressure
Washing Wash 2 times with 2 mL of water
Drying 120 ºC ± 5 ºC for 1 hour.
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total potassium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
161
4.3.2 Citrate soluble potassium

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium silicate fertilizers, etc. This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.3.2.a-2018 or C-K.a-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, add an interference suppressor
solution, and then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with
potassium at a wavelength of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm to quantify citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O).
Or, measure the intensity of the emission line at a wavelength of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm produced in
flame to quantify citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) in an analytical sample. In addition, the
performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 5.

equivalent quality.
c) Interference suppressor solution (1): Weigh 12.5 g of calcium carbonate specified in JIS K
hydrochloric acid, and heat for a little while. After standing to cool, add water to make 1000
mL.
flask, and add water up to the marked line.
(2)
marked line.

prepared.
calculate citrate-soluble potassium (C-K2O) in the analytical sample by multiplying
the concentration (K) of a potassium standard solution for calibration curve
preparation or a measurement value (K) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion factor
(1.2046).

a) Extractor: A constant-temperature rotary shaker or a reciprocating water bath shaker as
described below.
162
40 mm
b) Analytical instrument: An atomic absorption spectrometer or a flame photometer as shown
below:
ba) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in JIS
K 0121.
bb) Flame photometer:
(4) Test procedure

flask.

flask (4).
for 1 hour.
Note (4) Use a 250-mL flat-bottom volumetric flask to stabilize the vibration.
163
4) Obtain the potassium content from the calibration curve, and calculate citrate soluble
potassium (C-K2O) in the analytical sample.
101.7 % and 100.4 % - 101.8 % as citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) respectively.
fertilizers.
References
2) Yasuharu KIMURA and Hisanori ARAYA Verification of Performance Characteristics
of Testing Methods for Potassium Content in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 190 - 200 (2012)
164
(5) Flow sheet for citrate soluble potassium: The flow sheet for citrate soluble potassium in
1 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 250-mL volumetric flask.

← 150 mL citrate solution [about 30 ºC]
Constant temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min)
Shaking to mix
30 ºC ± 1 ºC, 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble potassium in fertilizers (Extract procedure 4.1.1)

Shaking to mix 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 ºC ± 1 º
C, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble potassium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
165

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium silicate fertilizers, etc. This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.3.2.b-2017 or C-K.b-1.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, mask co-existing ammonium and
other salts with formaldehyde and ethylenediamine tetraacetate and measure the mass of citric acid
soluble potassium (citrate-soluble potassium (C-K2O)) and the mass of potassium tetraphenylborate
formed by the reaction with tetraphenylborate to obtain citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) in an

a) Citric acid solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 in
equivalent quality.
the order of 1 mg.
(4) Test procedure

166
flask.


a) Transfer 20 mL of sample solution to a 100-mL tall beaker.
b) Add water to the solution to reach 50 mL when the procedure in d) is complete.
c) Add 5 mL of formaldehyde solution, and then add 5 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate -
sodium hydroxide solution.
d) Add necessary volume (2) of tetraphenylborate solution at the rate of one or two drop(s) per
e) Leave at rest for about 30 minutes while sometimes mixing to form the precipitate of
f) Filter supernatant under reduced pressure with a crucible type glass filter, wash the vessel 5
times with 5 mL of tetraphenylborate washing solution and transfer the whole precipitate to
g) Transfer the precipitate together with the crucible type glass filter into a drying apparatus and
heat at 120 ºC ± 2 ºC for about 1hour.
h) As soon as heating is complete, move it into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
i) After standing to cool, remove the crucible type glass filter from the desiccator and measure
j) Calculate citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) by the following formula in the analytical
sample.
Citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

=A×0.1314×(V1/V2)/W×100

V1： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1) c)
100.6 % and 100.6 % - 100.7 % as citrate soluble potassium (C-K2O) respectively.
167

References
(5) Flow sheet for the testing method: The flow sheet for citrate soluble potassium in fertilizers
is shown below:

Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble potassium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
168
Sample solution
Aliquot
100-mL tall beaker
(20 mL)
← 5 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate - sodium hydroxide solution
← Tetraphenylborate solution (the equivalents of potassium + 4 mL)

under reduced
pressure
169
4.3.2.c Sodium tetraphenylborate volumetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium silicate fertilizer, etc. but not
organic matters. This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.3.2.c-2017 or
C-K.c-1.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, mask co-existing ammonium and
other salts with formaldehyde, and make potassium ion and tetraphenylborate react with each other.
Measure unconsumed tetraphenylborate by conducting a precipitate titration to obtain
citrate-soluble potassium (C-K2O) in an analytical sample.

equivalent quality.
c) Sodium hydroxide solution (120 g/L) (1): Dissolve 30 g of sodium hydroxide specified in JIS
K 8576 in water to make 250 mL.
d) Tetraphenylborate solution (1): Transfer 12.2 g of sodium tetraphenylborate to a 1000-mL
volumetric flask, dissolve by adding about 800 mL of water and add 3 mL of sodium
hydroxide (120 g/L) to the total filtrate, and further add water up to the marked line. Filter
with Type 3 filter paper in the case of usage.
e) Benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) (1): Dissolve 3.3 g of benzalkonium chloride
in 500 mL of water.
f) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
g) Titan Yellow solution (0.04 g/100mL): Dissolve 0.04 g of Titan Yellow in 100 mL of water
h) Potassium standard solution (K2O 2 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium chloride specified in JIS K

(4) Test procedure

flask.
170

(4.2) Precipitate formation: Form precipitate as shown below.

a) Transfer 5 mL - 15 mL (no more than the equivalents of 30 mg as K2O) of the extract to a
100-mL volumetric flask.
c) Add about 5 mL of formaldehyde solution and add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (120
g/L).
d) Add 25 mL of tetraphenylborate solution at the rate of one or two drop(s) per second while
shaking to mix.
e) After adding water up to the marked line, leave at rest for 10 minutes.
f) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.

a) Calibration curve preparation
1) Transfer 1 mL - 15 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 2 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step.
2) Conduct the same procedures as (4.2) b) - f) to make K2O 2 mg/100 mL - 30 mg/100 mL of
the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
4) Transfer 40 mL of the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and
the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation to an Erlenmeyer flask
respectively.
5) Add a few drops of Titan Yellow solution.
6) Titrate with a benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) until the color of the solution
changes to light red (2).
7) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the potassium concentration and the volume of
the benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) required for the titration of the potassium
standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for the
b) Sample measurement
1) Transfer 40 mL of the sample solution of (4.2) f) to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
2) Conduct similarly as in a) 5) - 6) to obtain the volume of the benzalkonium chloride solution
(3.3 g/500 mL) required for the titration.
Note (3) If the solution temperature is no more than 20 ºC, the reaction does not advance in
some cases. Therefore, it is recommended to heat the solution up to about 30 ºC.
References
171

Shaking to mix
Standing to cool
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble potassium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
100-mL volumetric flask
(5 mL - 15 mL)
← Water (the volume to reach about 30 mL)
← About 5 mL of formaldehyde solution
← 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (120 g/L)
← 25 mL tetraphenylborate solution
(one or two drop (s) per second while shaking to mix)
Leaving at rest 10 minutes

←A few drops of Titan Yellow solution
Aliquot
100-mL Erlenmeyer flask
(40 mL)
← A few drops of titan yellow solution
Benzaikonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL)
Titration
(until the solution changes to light red)
172

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type D and its
symbol is 4.3.2.d-2018 or C-K.b-1.
Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the potassium at a wavelength of 766.491 nm to
obtain citric acid-soluble potassium (citrate-soluble potassium (C-K2O)) in an analytical sample. In

equivalents.
e) Potassium standard solution (K2O 20 µg/mL - 0.16 mg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 16 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, add about 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5), and add
water up to the marked line.
f) Potassium standard solution (K2O 2 µg/mL - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 0.1 mg/mL) to
in the procedures in e) and f).
calculate citrate-soluble potassium (C-K2O) in the analytical sample by multiplying
(1.2046).
mode and an axial observation mode. The axial observation mode does not apply to
potassium since interference is serious.

b) Extractor: A constant-temperature rotary shaker or a reciprocating water bath shaker as
described below.
173
bb) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker that can be adjusted to
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure

flask.

flask (3).
for 1 hour.
following:
1) Spray the potassium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
solution for the calibration curve preparation into inductively coupled plasma, and read the
indicated value at a wavelength of 766.491 nm.
value of the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the
174
blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.

1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.2 mg - 16 mg
as K2O) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.

that case, see 4.2.3.d Comment 7.
(xi) of Flame atomic absorption spectrometry analysis was conducted to evaluate
trueness using compound fertilizers (9 samples), mixed compost fertilizers (1
sample), designated blended fertilizers (1sample), blended fertilizers (4 samples),
and byproduct mixed fertilizers (1 sample). As a result, a regression equation was y =
− 0.0058 + 1.0027x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. In addition,
recovery testing was conducted using a preparation sample. As a result, the average
rate of recovery at the content level of 0.329 % (mass fraction) - 63.18 % (mass
fraction) was 98.0 % - 100.3 %.
blended fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of
repeatability.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Compound fertilzier 7 16.17 0.13 0.8 0.15 1.0
175

Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← 25 mL hydrochloric acid (1+5)
Measurement ICP-OES (766.491 nm)
176
4.3.3 Water-soluble potassium

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium salts. This testing method is
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.3.3.a-2017 or W-K.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, add an interference suppressor solution, and then
spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with potassium at a wavelength
of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm to quantify water-soluble potassium (W-K2O). Or, determine the intensity
of the emission line at a wavelength of 766.5 nm or 769.9 nm produced in flame to quantify
water-soluble potassium (W-K2O) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this

equivalent quality.
b) Interference suppressor solution: Weigh 12.5 g of calcium carbonate specified in JIS K
hydrochloric acid, and heat for a little while. After cooling is complete, add water to make
1000 mL.
c) Potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium chloride specified in JIS K
d) Potassium standard solution (K2O 5 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(2)
e) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Transfer about 50 mL of
marked line.

prepared.
calculate water-soluble potassium (W-K2O) in the analytical sample by multiplying
(1.2046).

a) Extractor: A constant-temperature rotary shaker or a vertical reciprocating shaker as
described below.
aa) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 500-mL volumetric flask upside down at 30
ab) Vertical reciprocating shaker: A vertical reciprocating shaker that can vibrate a 250-mL
177
40 mm).
b) Analytical instrument: An atomic absorption spectrometer or a flame photometer as shown
below:
ba) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in
JIS K 0121.
bb) Flame photometer:
c) Hot plate : A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

(4.1.1) Compound fertilizers containing potassium salts and magnesium potassium sulfate
a) Weigh 2.5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add about 200 mL of water, and cover with a watch glass and heat on a hot plate to boil for
about 15 minutes.
c) Immediately transfer it with water to a 250- mL volumetric flask.
d) After immediate cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line
Comment 2 In the procedure in a), a 250-mL volumetric flask can be used instead of a 300-mL
tall beaker. However, the volumetric flask used should be distinguished as an
extraction flask and should not be used for the other purposes. Additionally, “cover
with a watch glass” in b) is replaced by “place a funnel”. Skip “transfer to a 250-mL
volumetric flask with water” in the procedure in c).
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1.1) is the same as the procedures in (4.1.1) of 4.3.3.b, (4.1.1) of
4.3.3.c and (4.1) of 4.8.2.a.
(4.1.2) Compound fertilizers containing no magnesium potassium sulfate

flask.

flask.
178


flask.
Comment 7 The procedure in (4.1.3) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 4.2.4.a.
4) Obtain the potassium content from the calibration curve, and calculate water soluble
potassium (W-K2O) in the analytical sample.
100.2 % and 97.3 % - 100.6 % as water soluble potassium (W-K2O) respectively.
repeatability.
The comparison of the measurement value of extraction (yi：2.69 % (mass fraction) -
26.64 % (mass fraction )) with a vertical reciprocating shaker and the measurement
equation was y = 0.022 + 1.001x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 1.000. Also,
179
designated blended fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way

and repeatability
The comparison of the measurement value of extraction (yi：2.69 % (mass fraction) -
26.64 % (mass fraction )) with a vertical reciprocating shaker and the measurement
extraction of fluid fertilizers using fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression
equation was y = 0.022 + 1.001x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 1.000. Also,
the results of the repeatability tests on different days using fluid mixed fertilizers to
evaluate the precision of the extraction of fluid fertilizers were analyzed by the
fertilizers.
4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8)
RSD R
9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 11 13.59 0.08 0.6 0.09 0.6 0.16 1.2
FAMIC-A-13 10 13.07 0.08 0.6 0.11 0.8 0.16 1.2
FAMIC-B-10 9 8.85 0.04 0.4 0.07 0.7 0.12 1.4
FAMIC-B-14 14 8.32 0.03 0.4 0.07 0.8 0.13 1.6
conducting frame atomic absorption spectrometry

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Designated
7 6.50 0.07 1.1 0.07 1.1
blended fertilizer
180

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
References
2) Yasuharu KIMURA and Hisanori ARAYA Verification of Performance
Characteristics of Testing Methods for Potassium Content in Fertilizer by Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 5, p. 190 - 200 (2012)
3) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Simple Extraction Method for Water-Soluble Components
in Liquid Compound Fertilizers, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.9, p. 10 - 20
(2016)
4) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Extraction Method for the Water-soluble Principal
Ingredients in the Solid Fertilizer using a General-purpose Equipment , Research
(5) Flow sheet for water soluble potassium: The flow sheet for water soluble potassium in
2.5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL tall beaker
(potassium salts, etc.)
Heating Cover with a watch dish, boil for 15 minutes
Cooling Immediately
Transfer Water, 250-mL volumetric flask

Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fertilizers

181
Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min)
Shaking to mix
For 30 minutes
Sample solution


Vertical reciprocating shaker(300 times/min, with amplitude of 40
Shaking to mix
mm), for 30 minutes
Sample solution

Analytical sample
(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution

182
Sample solution
Aliquot
volume)
← About 10 mL of interference suppressor solution
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
183

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium salts. This testing method is
classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.3.3.b-2017 or W-K.b-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, mask co-existing ammonium and other salts with
formaldehyde and ethylenediamine tetraacetate and measure the mass of potassium
tetraphenylborate formed by the reaction with tetraphenylborate to obtain water-soluble potassium
(W-K2O) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in
Comment 5.

equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.
the order of 1 mg.
d) Hot plate : A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

184
about 15 minutes.

flask.
Comment 4 The procedure in (4.1.2) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1.1) in 4.2.4.a.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 15 mg - 30 mg as K2O) of the sample
b) Add water to the solution to reach 50 mL when the procedure in e) is complete.
c) Add 2 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+9).
d) Add 5 mL of formaldehyde solution, and then add 5 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate -
sodium hydroxide solution.
e) Add necessary volume (2) of tetraphenylborate solution at the rate of one or two drop(s) per
f) Leave at rest for about 30 minutes while sometimes mixing to form the precipitate of
g) Filter supernatant under reduced pressure with a crucible type glass filter, wash the vessel 5
times with 5 mL of tetraphenylborate washing solution and transfer the whole precipitate to
h) Transfer the precipitate together with the crucible type glass filter into a drying apparatus
adjusted to 120 ºC ± 2 ºC and heat for 1 hour.
i) As soon as heating is complete, move it into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
j) After standing to cool, remove the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle from the desiccator,
k) Calculate water soluble potassium (W-K2O) in the analytical sample by the following formula.
Water-soluble potassium (W-K2O) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

=A × 0.1314 × (V1/V2)/W × 100
185

V1： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1.1) d) or (4.1.2) c)
100.8 % and 99.3 % - 102.2 % as water soluble potassium (W-K2O) respectively.
References

Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL tall beaker
Heating Cover with a watch glass, boil for 15 minutes
Cooling Immediately

Sample solution

186
Shake to mix
For 30 minutes
Sample solution

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← 5 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate-sodium hydroxide solution
← Tetraphenylborate solution (the equivalents of potassium + 4 mL)

under reduced
pressure
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fertilizers

187
4.3.3.c Sodium tetraphenylborate volumetric analysis

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing potassium salt but not organic matters.
This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.3.3.c-2017 or W-K.c-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, mask co-existing ammonium and other salts with
formaldehyde, and make potassium ion and tetraphenylborate react with each other. Measure
unconsumed tetraphenylborate by conducting a precipitate titration to obtain water-soluble
potassium (W-K2O) in an analytical sample.

a) Formaldehyde solution: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8872 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
b) Sodium hydroxide solution (120 g/L) (1): Dissolve 30 g of sodium hydroxide specified in JIS
K 8576 in water to make 250 mL.
c) Tetraphenylborate solution (1): Transfer 12.2 g of sodium tetraphenylborate to a 1000-mL
volumetric flask, dissolve by adding about 800 mL of water and add 3 mL of sodium
hydroxide (120 g/L) to the total filtrate, and further add water up to the marked line. Filter
with Type 3 filter paper in the case of usage.
d) Benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) (1): Dissolve 3.3 g of benzalkonium chloride
in 500 mL of water.
e) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
f) Titan Yellow solution (0.04 g/100mL): Dissolve 0.04 g of Titan Yellow in 100 mL of water
g) Potassium standard solution (K2O 2 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium chloride specified in JIS K

b) Hot plate : A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

about 15 minutes.
188


flask.

a) Transfer 5 mL - 15 mL (no more than the equivalents of 30 mg as K2O) of the extract to a
c) Add about 5 mL of formaldehyde solution and add 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (120
g/L).
d) Add 25 mL of tetraphenylborate solution at the rate of one or two drop (s) per second while
shaking to mix.
e) After adding water up to the marked line, leave at rest for 10 minutes.
f) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.

a) Calibration curve preparation
1) Transfer 1 mL - 15 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 2 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
2) Conduct the same procedures as (4.2) b) - f) to make K2O 2 mg/100 mL - 30 mg/100 mL of
the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
4) Transfer 40 mL of the potassium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and
the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation to an Erlenmeyer flask
respectively.
5) Add a few drops of Titan Yellow solution.
6) Titrate with a benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) until the color of the solution
changes to light red (2).
7) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the potassium concentration and the volume of
the benzalkonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL) required for the titration of the potassium
standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for the
b) Sample measurement
1) Transfer 40 mL of the sample solution of (4.2) f) to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
2) Conduct similarly as in a) 5) - 6) to obtain the volume of the benzalkonium chloride solution
(3.3 g/500 mL) required for the titration.
189
Note (2) If the solution temperature is no more than 20 ºC, the reaction does not advance in
some cases. Therefore, it is recommended to heat the solution up to about 30 ºC.
References

Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL tall beaker
Cooling Immediately

Sample solution

Shake to mix
For 30 minutes
Sample solution

190
Sample solution
Aliquot
(5 mL to 15 mL)
← Water (the liquid volume to reach about 30 mL)
← About 5mL of formaldehyde solution
← 25 mL tetraphenylborate solution
(one or two drop (s) per second while shaking to mix)
Leaving at rest 10 minutes
Aliquot
100-mL Erlenmeyer flask
(40 mL)
← A few drops of Titan Yellow solution
Benzaikonium chloride solution (3.3 g/500 mL)
Titration
(until the solution changes to light red)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fertilizers

(Precipitate formation and measurement procedure)
191

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fluid mixed fertilizers and the fluid fertilizers of home
garden-use mixed fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is
4.3.3.d-2017 or W-K.d-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract, introduce it to an ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer
(“ICP-OES”) and measure the potassium at a wavelength of 766.491 nm to obtain water-soluble
potassium acid (W-K2O). In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment
5.

equivalents.
c) Potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium chloride specified in JIS K
d) Potassium standard solution (K2O 20 µg/mL - 0.16 mg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 16 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 1 mg/mL) to
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of potassium standard solution (K2O 0.1 mg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
f) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in e).
calculate water-soluble potassium (W-K2O) in the analytical sample by multiplying
(1.2046).
mode and an axial observation mode. The axial observation mode does not apply to
potassium since interference is serious.
a) ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry: An Optical Emission Spectrometer specified in JIS K
0116.
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1 mg of an analytical sample (2) to the order of 1 g, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric
flask.
192
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when there is less potassium
content in the fertilizers such as a home garden-use fertilizer.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement according to JIS K 0116 and as shown below. Specific
measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the ICP Optical Emission
Spectrometry used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer: Set up the
measurement conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer considering the
following:
1) Spray the potassium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test

(mass fraction)) of ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry and the measurement value
(xi) of Flame atomic absorption spectrometry was conducted to evaluate trueness
using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = − 0.021
+ 0.969x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive recovery
testing was conducted using a fluid compound fertilizer (1 brand) and a home
garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean recovery rates at additive
level of 5 % (mass fraction) and 0.4 % (mass fraction) were 102.3 % and 104.0 %
respectively.
precision and repeatability.。
193

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use mixed
7 2.29 0.02 0.8 0.04 1.6
fertilizer（liquid)
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble potassium of the fluid mixed fertilizers is shown
below:
Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fluid fertilizers

Sample solution

Measurement ICP-OES (766.491nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble potassium in fluid fertilizers
194
4.4 Silicic acid

4.4.1 Soluble silicic acid
4.4.1.a Potassium fluoride method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no silica gel fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.4.1.a-2017 or S-Si.a-1.
Extract by adding hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, add hydrochloric acid,
potassium fluoride solution and potassium chloride and cool in a refrigerator, and then filter after
forming precipitate as potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6). Put the precipitate in water and heat, and
measure potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6) dissolved by precipitation titration to obtain the
hydrochloric acid (1+23) soluble silicic acid (soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2)) in an analytical sample.

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C)

titration

equivalent quality.
c) Potassium chloride: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8121 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
d) Potassium chloride solution (1): Add 250 mL of ethanol specified in JIS K 8101 to 750 mL of
water to mix, and add 150 mL of potassium chloride to dissolve. Add a few drops of methyl
red solution (0.1 g/100 mL) as an indicator and drop hydrochloric acid until the color of the
solution becomes red to make it acidic. After leaving at rest for 1 day, neutralize with the 0.1
mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution.
e) Potassium fluoride solution (1): Dissolve 58 g of potassium fluoride specified in JIS K 8815
195
in 1000 mL of water (2).


(2) Store in a container made of polymer that contains no silicon.
c) Beaker made of polymer: A beaker made of polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material
which prevents silicic acid from eluting in the extract procedure in (4.1).
d) Filter made of polymer: A Gooch crucible made of polymer (compatible filter diameter: 25
mm) or a funnel for reduced pressure filtering made of polymer (compatible filter diameter:
21 mm) A Gooch crucible made of polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material which prevents
silicic acid from eluting in the extract procedure in (4.1).
Comment 2 A funnel for reduced pressure filtering made of polymer (compatible filter diameter:
21 mm) is sold under the name Polyethylene Kiriyama Funnel SB-21.
(4) Test procedure

flask.
b) Add 150 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23) heated up to about 30 ºC (3), and shake to mix at 30 -
40 revolutions/min (30 ºC ± 1 ºC) for 1 hour.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 4.4.1.d.

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 20 mg - 50 mg as SiO2 and no more than
25 mL of liquid volume) to a 200-mL beaker made of polymer.
b) Add about 10 mL of hydrochloric acid and about 15 mL of potassium fluoride solution, and
further add about 2 g of potassium chloride to dissolve, and then cool in a refrigerator for
196
about 30 minutes or more (4) to form the precipitate of potassium fluoride.

c) Filter under reduced pressure with a filter made of polymer (5) topped with Type 6 filter paper,
and wash the container 3 times with a potassium chloride solution, then move the whole
precipitate into the filter, and further wash 6 - 7 times with a small amount of potassium
chloride solution (6).
d) Move the precipitate on the filter together with the filter paper into a 300-mL tall beaker with
water, and further add water to make about 200 mL and heat it up to 70 ºC - 80 ºC on a hot
plate.
e) Add a few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) to the sample solution as an
indicator and titrate with the 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color
of the solution becomes light red.
f) Calculate soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2) by the following formula.
Soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= V4 × C × f × (V5/V6) × (15.021/W2) × (100/1000)
titration
V5： Predetermined volume (mL) of the extract in (4.1) c)
V6： Volume (mL) of the extract transferred in (4.2) a)
Note (4) To be no more than 10 ºC

(5) Filter paper pulp can be stuffed to restrain precipitate from outflowing.
(6) Until the filtrate becomes neutral.
40 % (mass fraction) and 10 % (mass fraction) are 98.4 % - 100.5 % and 101.0 % as
soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2) respectively.
References
2) Yasushi MIYASHITA Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Method
for Soluble Silicic Acid in Fertilizer by Potassium Fluoride Method, Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol. 7, p. 123 - 130 (2014)
197
5) Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid: The flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers is
shown below:
1 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 250-mL volumetric flask.

← About 150 mL hydrochloric acid (1+23) [about 30 ºC]
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
(predetermined 200-mL beaker made of polymer
amount)
← About 10 mL hydrochloric acid
← About 15mL potassium fluoride solution
← About 2 g of potassium chloride
Cooling For 30 minutes or more in a refrigerator
Filtration under
reduced Filter made of polymer, Type 6 filter paper
pressure
Washing Wash 6 - 7 times with potassium chloride solution
Transfer 300-mL tall beaker, water

← Water (until the liquid volume reaches about 200 mL)
Heating 70 ºC - 80 ºC
← A few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL)
Titration
(Until the solution becomes light red)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
198
4.4.1.b Potassium fluoride method (Silica gel fertilizers, etc.)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to silica gel fertilizers and silica hydrogel fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 4.4.1.b-2017 or S-Si.b-1.
Extract by adding hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, add hydrochloric acid,
potassium fluoride solution and potassium chloride and cool in a refrigerator, and then filter after
forming precipitate as potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6). Put the precipitate in water and heat, and
measure potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6) dissolved by precipitation titration to obtain the sodium
hydroxide (20 g/L) soluble silicic acid (soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2)) in an analytical sample. In

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C)

titration
b) Sodium hydroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8576 or a reagent of

equivalent quality.
c) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
d) Potassium chloride: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8121 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Potassium chloride solution (1): Add 250 mL of ethanol specified in JIS K 8101 to 750 mL of
f) Potassium fluoride solution (1): Dissolve 58 g of potassium fluoride specified in JIS K 8815
199

g) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
h) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K

(2) Store in a container made of polyethylene, etc. that contains no silicon.
a) Water bath: A water bath that can be adjusted to 65 ºC ± 2 ºC.
c) Volumetric flask and beaker made of polymer: A flask and a beaker that are made of
polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material which prevents silicic acid from eluting in the
extract procedure in (4.1).
d) Gooch crucible made of polymer: A Gooch crucible made of polymer (compatible filter
diameter: 25 mm) or a funnel for reduced pressure filtering made of polymer (compatible
filter diameter: 21 mm) A Gooch crucible made of polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material
(4) Test procedure

flask made of polymer.
b) Add about 150 mL of sodium hydroxide solution heated up to about 65 ºC, and heat for 1 hour
while shaking to mix at every 10 minutes in a water bath at 65 ºC ± 2 ºC.

about 30 minutes (3) to form the precipitate of potassium fluoride.
plate.
e) Add a few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) as an indicator and titrate with the
200
0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the solution becomes light
red.

= V4 × C × f × (V5/V6) × (15.021/W2) × (100/1000)
titration

Comment 3 Table 1 shows results and analysis results from a collaborative study for testing
method validation.

for the test method validation of soluble silicic acid in silica gel fertilizers
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Silica gel fertilizers 1 8 79.37 0.23 0.3 0.55 0.7

2) Mean (n = number of laboratories × number of samples (2))
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Takeshi HASHIMOTO, Akira SHIMIZU and Kaori OKADA: Validation of a Method
of Potassium Fluoride for Determination of Sodium Hydroxide-Soluble Silicic Acid in
Silica Gel Fertilizer, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.3, p. 19 - 24 (2010)
2) Akira SHIMIZU, Shin ABE and Jun ITO: Determination of Solubility Silicic Acid in
Silica gel Fertilizer and Silica gel-including Fertilizer by Potassium Fluoride Method: A
201
Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.5, p. 31 - 40 (2012)
shown below:
1g Weigh to the order of 1 mg

analytical sample into a 250-mL volumetric flask made of polymer.
← About 150 mL sodium hydroxide (20 g/L) [about 65 ºC]
Heating 65 ºC ± 2 ºC, 1 hour, shaking to mix every 10 minutes
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in silica gel fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Filtration under
reduced Gooch filter made of polymer, Type 6 filter paper
pressure

Titration
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in silica gel fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
202
4.4.1.c Potassium fluoride method (Fertilizers containing silica gel fertilizers)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing silica gel fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type B and its symbol is 4.4.1.c-2017 or S-Si.c-1.
Mix the equivalent volumes of the extract which is extracted by adding hydrochloric acid (1+23) to
an analytical sample and the liquid by extracting non-dissolved matter on a filter paper with sodium
hydroxide (20 g/L), and add hydrochloric acid, a potassium fluoride solution and potassium
chloride. Cool it in a refrigerator, and then filter after forming precipitate as potassium silicofluoride
(K2SiF6). Then transfer water in the precipitate, heat and measure potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6)
dissolved by precipitation titration to obtain soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2) in an analytical sample. In

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C)

A： Purity (% ) of sulfamic acid
titration

equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.
d) Potassium chloride: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8121 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Potassium chloride solution (1): Add 250 mL of ethanol specified in JIS K 8101 to 750 mL of
203
f) Potassium fluoride solution (1): Dissolve 58 g of potassium fluoride specified in JIS K 8815
g) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
h) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K

(2) Store in a container made of polymer that contains no silicon.

a) Water bath: A water bath that can be adjusted to 65 ºC ±2 ºC.
c) Volumetric flask and beaker made of polymer: A flask and a beaker that are made of
polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material which prevents silicic acid from eluting in the
extract procedure in (4.1).
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 150 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23) warmed up to about 30 ºC, and warm it in a water
bath at 30 ºC ± 2 ºC while stirring every 10minutes with a glass rod for 1 hour.
c) After immediate cooling is complete, filter with Type 6 filter paper to a 250-mL volumetric
flask as an acceptor. Wash the tall beaker with water, then move the whole residue on the filter
paper and add water up to the marked line to make a sample solution (1).
d) Transfer the non-dissolved matter on the filter paper together with the filter paper to a 250-
mL volumetric flask made of polymer.
e) Add 150 mL of sodium hydroxide solution heated up to about 65 ºC, and heat for 1 hour while
shaking to mix at every 10 minutes in a water bath at 65 ºC ± 2 ºC.
f) After immediate cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line and filter with Type 3
filter paper to make a sample solution (2).

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 20 mg - 50 mg as SiO2) (3) of the sample
solution (1) and (2) to a 200-mL beaker made of polymer.
204
plate.
e) Add a few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) as an indicator and titrate with the
0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the solution becomes light
red.

= V4 × C × f × (V5/V6) × (15.021/W2) × (100/1000)
titration
C： Estimated concentration (mol/L) of sodium hydroxide solution (0.1 mol/L - 0.2
mol/L)
Note (3) The transferred volume of the sample solution (1) and the sample solution (2) should
be equivalent.
(4) To be no more than 10 ºC
Comment 3 Table 1 shows results and analysis results from a collaborative study for testing
method validation.
205
Table 1 Results and analysis results from a collaborative study for the test method validation
of soluble silicic acid in fertilizers including a silica gel fertilizer
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Mixed phosphate
8 24.99 0.16 0.6 0.33 1.3
fertilizer 1
Mixed phosphate
8 34.50 0.26 0.7 0.48 1.4
fertilizer 2
Compound
8 30.30 0.13 0.4 0.60 2.0
fertilizers 1
Compound
8 33.34 0.13 0.4 0.47 1.4
fertilizers 2
Compound
8 15.76 0.11 0.7 0.21 1.3
fertilizers 3
2) Total mean (n = number of laboratories × number of replication(2))
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Akira SHIMIZU, Jun ITO and Shin ABE: Method Validation of Potassium Fluoride
Method for Determination of Acid-Soluble and Base-Soluble Silicic Acid in Fertilizer
containing Silica gel, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.4, p. 1 - 8 (2011)
2) Akira SHIMIZU: Method Validation of Potassium Fluoride Method for Determination
of Acid-Soluble and Base-Soluble Silicic Acid in Fertilizer containing Silica Gel,
Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.6, p. 1 - 8 (2013)
3) Shinji KAWAGUCHI and Akira SHIMIZU: Determination of Soluble Silicic Acid in
Fertilizers Containing Silica Gel Fertilizer by Potassium Fluoride Method: A
Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 7, p. 36 - 42 (2014)
206
(5) Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid: The flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers
including silica gel fertilizers is shown below:
1g Weigh to the order of 1 mg
analytical sample into a 300-mL tall beaker
← About 150 mL hydrochloric acid (1+23) [30 ºC]
1 hour in water bath at 30 ºC ± 2 ºC
Warming
(Stir at every 10 minutes)
Cooling Immediately
Filtration Type 6 filter paper, a 250-mL volumetric flask

(supernatant)
Transfer Move the whole residue to a filter paper

← Wash with water
<Residue> <Filtrate>
← Wash (up to the marked line)
Sample solution (1)
Put 250-mL volumetric flask made of polyer

together wiyh a filter paper
← Add about 150 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (20 g/L) [65ºC] to stopple.
Then, shake to mix until the filter paper completely breaks down
Heating 65 ºC ± 2 ºC, while shaking to mix
at every 10 minutes for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution (2)
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers

207
Sample solution (1)

Transfer the equal volume of the sample (1) and (2)
and (2) Aliquot
to a 200-mL beaker made of polymer
(predetermined amount)
← About 15 mL of potassium fluoride solution
Cooling For 30 minutes in a refrigerator
Filtration under Filter made of polymer

reduced pressure Type 6 filter paper

Titration
(Until the color of solution becomes light red)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers

208
4.4.1.d Perchloric acid method

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing no silica gel fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.4.1.d-2017 or S-Si.d-1.
Extract by adding hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, add perchloric acid and heat,
and then measure the formed silicic acid anhydride to obtain hydrochloric acid (1+23) soluble
silicic acid (soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2)) in an analytical sample.
(2) Reagents
equivalent quality.
b) Perchloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8223 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be adjusted to 1000 ºC - 1100 ºC.
d) Crucible: After heating a chemical analysis porcelain crucible specified in JIS R 1301 in an
electric funnel at 1000 ºC - 1100 ºC, let it stand to cool in a desiccator and measure the mass
to the order of 1 mg.
(4) Test procedure

flask.
b) Add 150 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23) heated up to about 30 ºC, and shake to mix at 30 - 40

a) Transfer a predetermined volume to a 100-mL tall beaker.
b) Add about 10 mL of perchloric acid and heat.
c) When white smoke from the perchloric acid starts evolving, cover with a watch glass, then
heat for 15 - 20 minutes to form precipitate of silicone dioxide.
d) After standing to cool, add about 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+4) and cover with a watch
glass and heat at 70 ºC - 80 ºC on a hot plate for several minutes.
e) Immediately after heating, filter with Type 5-C filter paper, wash the container with heated
hydrochloric acid (1+10) and move the whole precipitate to a filter paper.
f) Wash the precipitate and the filter paper 2 times with heated hydrochloric acid (1+10), and
further wash several times with hot water (1).
g) Put the precipitate together with the filter paper into the crucible.
h) Put the crucible into a drying apparatus and dry at about 120 ºC for 1 hour.
i) After standing to cool, put the crucible into an electric funnel and heat gently to char (2).
j) Ignite at 1000 ºC - 1100 ºC for 1 hour (2).
209
k) After ignition, move the crucible to a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
l) After standing to cool, remove the crucible from the desiccator and measure the mass to the
order of 1 mg.
m) Calculate soluble silicic acid (S-SiO2) by the following formula.

= A × (V1/V2)/W × 100

Note (1) Wash until no reaction by chloride appears in the filtrate.

(2) Example of charring and incineration procedure: After raising the temperature from
1 hour and further raise to 1000 °C - 1100 °C in 1 to 2 hours.
References
shown below:

← About 150 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23) [about 30 ºC]
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
210
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
←About 10 mL of perchloric acid
When white smoke of perchloric acid starts evolving,
Heating
cover with a watch glass, heat for 15 - 20 minutes
Standing to cool Immediately

←About 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+4)
Cover with a watch glass,
Heating
heat at 70 ºC - 80 ºC for several minutes
Type 5-C filter paper

Filtration
←Wash 2 times with hydrochloric acid (1+10)

←Wash several times with hot water
Drying Drying apparatus, about 120 ºC, 1 hour
Standing to cool
Charring Heat gently in an electric furnace

Incineration 1000 ºC - 1100 ºC for no less than 1 hour
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
211
4.4.2 Water-soluble silicic acid

4.4.2.a Potassium fluoride method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to liquid potassium silicate fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.4.2.a-2017 or W-Si.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, add hydrochloric acid, a potassium fluoride
solution and potassium chloride and cool in a refrigerator, and then filter after forming precipitate as
potassium silicofluoride (K2SiF6). Put the precipitate in water and heat, and measure potassium
silicofluoride (K2SiF6) dissolved by precipitation titration to obtain the water-soluble silicic acid
(W-SiO2) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in
Comment 5.

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C)

titration

equivalent quality.
c) Potassium chloride: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8121 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
d) Potassium chloride solution (1): Add 250 mL of ethanol specified in JIS K 8101 to 750 mL of
e) Potassium fluoride solution (1): Dissolve 58 g of potassium fluoride specified in JIS K 8815
212

(2) Store in a container made of polyethylene, etc. that contains no silicon.

c) Beaker made of polymer: A beaker made of polyethylene, etc. of a quality of material
(4) Test procedure

flask.
Comment 4 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1.1) in 4.2.4.a.

213
plate.
e) Add a few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) to the sample solution as an
indicator and titrate with the 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color
of the solution becomes light red.
f) Calculate water soluble silicic acid (W-SiO2) by the following formula.
Water soluble silicic acid (W-SiO2) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= V4 × C × f × (V5/V6) × (15.021/W2) × (100/1000)
titration

12 % (mass fraction) - 20% (mass fraction) are 100.7 % and 99.5 % - 100.5 as
water-soluble silicic acid (W-SiO2) respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a liquid potassium
silicate fertilizer to evaluate precision were analyzed by the one-way analysis of
repeatability.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Liquid potassium silicate fertilizer 1 7 24.01 0.07 0.3 0.08 0.4
Liquid potassium silicate fertilizer 2 7 16.07 0.03 0.2 0.04 0.3
2）　Average （the number of test days （T ） 7）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
References
2) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Method
214
for Water-Soluble Silicic Acid in Fertilizer by Potassium Fluoride Method, Research

5) Flow sheet for water-soluble silicic acid: The flow sheet for water-soluble silicic acid in
5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 500-mL volumetric flask.

Shaking to mix
30 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Filtration under Filter made of polymer

reduced pressure Type 6 filter paper

Titration
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble silicic acid in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
215
4.5 Lime, calcium and alkalinity

4.5.1 Total lime
4.5.1.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry
(1) Summary
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.5.1.a-2017 or T-Ca.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and hydrochloric acid, add an interference
suppressor solution, and then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption
with calcium at a wavelength of 422.7 nm to quantify total lime (T-CaO) in an analytical sample. In

equivalent quality.
b) Interference suppressor solution (1): Weigh 60.9 g - 152.1 g of strontium chloride
hexahydrate (2) specified in JIS K 8132 into a 2000-mL beaker, add a small amount of water,
add gradually 420 mL of hydrochloric acid to dissolve, and further add water to make 1000
mL.
c) Calcium standard solution (CaO 1 mg/mL) (1): Heat calcium carbonate specified in JIS K
into a weighing dish. Transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask with a small amount of water,
add 20 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+3) to dissolve, and add water up to the marked line.
d) Calcium standard solution (CaO 5 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of a calcium standard solution (CaO 1 mg/mL) to
(3)
, and add water up to the marked line (4).
marked line.

(2) 29 g of lanthanum oxide (atomic absorption analysis grade or equivalents) can also be
used.
prepared.
(4) For storage, use a sealable container made of materials which are not likely to dissolve
calcium, such as borosilicate glass-1 specified in JIS R 3503 or Teflon.
Comment 1 Instead of the calcium standard solution in (2), a calcium standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a calcium standard solution
(Ca 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case, calculate
total lime (T-CaO) in the analytical sample by multiplying the concentration (Ca) of
the calcium standard solution for calibration curve preparation or a measurement
value (Ca) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion factor (1.3992).

a) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in
JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: A calcium hollow cathode lamp
216

be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

beaker.
about 5 minutes.
f) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with
water.

beaker.
217
added.
5.3.a.
absorption spectrometer used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the atomic absorption spectrometer: Set up the measurement
conditions for the atomic absorption spectrometer considering the following:
1) Spray the calcium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
wavelength of 422.7 nm.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the calcium concentration and the indicated value
of the calcium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
solution for the calibration curve preparation.
CaO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the calcium content from the calibration curve, and calculate total lime (T-CaO) in the
analytical sample.
1 % (mass fraction) are 101.8 % and 97.9% as total lime (T-CaO) respectively.
repeatability.
218
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-C-12 11 5.82 0.07 1.2 0.11 2.0 0.29 5.0
References
2) Kimie KATO, Masayuki YOSHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: 3) Kimie KATO,
Masayuki YOSHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: Systematization of Determination Methods
of Major Components in Sludge Fertilizer, Compost and Organic Fertilizer, Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol.3 p. 107 - 116 (2010)
3) Souichi IGARASHI and Yasuharu KIMURA: Verification of Performance
Characteristics of Testing Methods for Calcium Content in Fertilizer by Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry: Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 183 - 192 (2013)
219
(5) Flow sheet for total lime: The flow sheet for total lime in fertilizers is shown below:
5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 200-mL- 300-mL tall beaker.

Incineration Ignite at 550 ºC ±5 ºC, no less than 4 hours

← Small amount of water, moisten the residue

Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for total lime in fertilizers.

　　(Incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling prorcedure (4.1.1))
220
5g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for total lime in fertilizers

　　(Incineration-aqua regia digestion procedure (4.1.2))
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
←About 10 mL interference suppressor solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer or frame photometer
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total lime in fertilizers (Measurement)
221
4.5.2 Soluble lime

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that guarantee alkalinity. This testing method is
classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.5.2.a-2017 or S-Ca.a-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, boil to extract, and add an interference
with calcium at a wavelength of 422.7 nm to quantify hydrochloric acid (1+23) soluble lime
(soluble lime (S-CaO)) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method
is shown in Comment 5.

equivalent quality.
mL.
c) Calcium standard solution (CaO 1 mg/mL) (2): Put calcium carbonate specified in JIS K
8617 in a drying apparatus, heat at 110 ºC ± 2 ºC for about 2 hours, let it stand to cool in a
desiccator, and weigh 1.785 g into a weighing dish. Transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask
with a small amount of water, add 20 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+3) to dissolve, and add
d) Calcium standard solution (CaO 5 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of a calcium standard solution (CaO 1 mg/mL) to
(3)
marked line (4).
Note (1) 29 g of lanthanum oxide (atomic absorption analysis grade or equivalents) can also be
used.
prepared.
(Ca 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case, calculate
soluble lime (S-CaO) in the analytical sample by multiplying the concentration (Ca)
of the calcium standard solution for calibration curve preparation or a measurement
value (Ca) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion factor (1.3992).

JIS K 0121.
222

(4) Test procedure

b) Add about 20 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23), cover with a watch glass, and boil on a hot
plate for about 5 minutes (5).
c) After immediate cooling is complete, transfer to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with
water.
d) Immediately add water up to the marked line
Note (5) Be aware that an analytical sample should not solidify in the bottom of a beaker.
Comment 2 In the case of a by-product magnesia fertilizer or a fertilizer containing a by-product

magnesia, if the pH of the sample solution of d) is neutral or basic, prepare a sample
solution anew by replacing “2 g of an analytical sample” in the procedure in a) with
“1 g - 1.5 g of an analytical sample”.
extraction flask and should not be used for the other purposes. In addition, “cover
with a watch glass” in b) is replaced by “place a funnel”, and “transfer to a 250-mL -
500 mL volumetric flask with water” in the procedure in c) is skipped.
Comment 4 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as in (4.1) in 4.6.1.a and 4.7.1.a
CaO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the calcium content from the calibration curve, and calculate soluble lime (S-CaO) in
the analytical sample.
223
1 % (mass fraction) are 100.9 % and 101.1% as soluble lime (S-CaO) respectively.
References
(5) Flow sheet for soluble lime: The flow sheet for soluble lime in fertilizers is shown below:
2 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 500-mL tall beaker.

← About 200 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23)
Cooling Immediately
Transfer Water, 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble lime in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble lime in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
224
4.5.3 Water-soluble calcium

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that indicate calcium content as a response modifier.
This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.5.3.a-2017 or W-Ca.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, and add an interference suppressor solution, and
then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with calcium at a
wavelength of 422.7 nm to quantify water-soluble calcium (W-Ca) in an analytical sample. In

equivalent quality.
mL.
c) Calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL): Calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL)
d) Calcium standard solution (Ca 5 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of a calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL) to
(3)
marked line (4).

used.
prepared.
(Ca 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
Comment 2 Instead of the calcium standard solution in (2), a calcium standard solution (CaO 5
µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation prepared in (2) in 4.5.1.a
can be used. In this case, calculate water-soluble calcium (W-Ca) in the analytical
sample by multiplying the concentration (CaO) of a calcium standard solution for
calibration curve preparation or a measurement value (CaO) obtained in (4.2) by a
conversion factor (0.7147).

b) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in
JIS K 0121.
225

(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it in a 500-mL volumetric flask.
Ca) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the calcium content from the calibration curve, and calculate water-soluble calcium
(W-Ca) in the analytical sample by the following formula.
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction) - 5 %
(mass fraction) is 98.1 % - 101.1% as water-soluble calcium (W-Ca) respectively.
fertilizers.
References
226
(5) Flow sheet for water soluble calcium: The flow sheet for water soluble calcium in fertilizers
is shown below:
1.00 g
analytical sample
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min), for 30 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble calcium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer (422.7 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble calcium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
227
4.5.3.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fluid mixed fertilizers, liquid microelement mixed fertilizers
and the fluid fertilizers of home garden-use mixed fertilizers. This testing method is classified as
Type D and its symbol is 4.5.3.b-2017 or W-Ca.b-1.
(“ICP-OES”) and measure the calcium at a wavelength of 393.366 nm to obtain water-soluble
calcium (W-Ca). In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 5.

equivalents.
c) Calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL): Calcium standard solution (Ca 1 mg/mL)
d) Calcium standard solution (Ca 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of calcium standard solution
(Ca 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
e) Calcium standard solutions (Ca 1 µg/mL - 20µg /mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of calcium standard solution (Ca 0.1 mg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked
line.
f) Calcium standard solutions (Ca 0.1 µg/mL - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of calcium standard solution (Ca 10 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric
acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
(Ca 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
solution for the calibration preparation curve in e) and f) applies to a horizontal
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a calcium standard
solution for the calibration curve in the concentration range which is suitable to a
device used.
(4) Test procedure

228
flask.
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when the content in the
analytical sample is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble calcium.
1) Spray the calcium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
Ca) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the calcium content from the calibration curve, and calculate water-soluble calcium
(W-Ca) in the analytical sample by the following formula.

(xi) of flame atomic absorbance spectrometry was conducted to evaluate trueness
using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = 0.005 +
0.978x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive recovery
garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean recovery at additive level
of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were105.9 % and 106.4 %
respectively.
229

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
（fluid)
References
1) Keisuke AOYAMA: Simultaneous Determination Method for Effect-Development
Promoting Agent (Ca, Fe, Co, Cu, Zn and Mo) in Liquid Compound Fertilizer using
Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectrometer (ICP-OES), Research
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble calcium of the fluid mixed fertilizers is shown
below:

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 The flow sheet for water-soluble calcium in fluid fertilizers

Sample solution

Figure 2 The flow sheet for water-soluble calcium in fluid fertilizers
230
4.5.4 Alkalinity
4.5.4.a Ethylenediamine tetraacetate method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that guarantee alkalinity. This testing method is
classified as Type E and its symbol is 4.5.4.a-2017 or AL.a-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, boil to extract, and mask with
2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol and a potassium cyanide solution, add a 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine
tetraacetate standard solution, and conduct a chelatometric titration with a 0.01 mol/L magnesium
standard solution to obtain alkalinity (AL). Or after masking, conduct a chelatometric titration with
an ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution to obtain alkalinity (AL) in an analytical sample.

equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.
c) Ascorbic acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 9502 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) 2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol (1): A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8663 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Acetone: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8034 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
f) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed (NH3 28 % (mass fraction)) reagent specified in JIS K
g) 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution: Dissolve 3.72 g of
ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid dihydrogen disodium dihydrate in water to make 1000 mL.
Standardization: Wash zinc reference material for volumetric analysis specified in JIS K
8005 with hydrochloric acid (1+3), water, ethanol (99.5) specified in JIS K 8101, and diethyl
ether specified in JIS K 8103 successively, and immediately leave at rest in a desiccator for
about 12 hours under no more than 2 kPa to dry, and then weigh about 0.65 mg to the order
of 0.1 mg, transfer it to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add about 10 mL of hydrochloric acid
to dissolve and then add water up to the marked line. Transfer 25 mL of the solution to a
200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add about 15 mL of water and about 5 mL of
ammonium chloride buffer solution, and titrate with a 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine
tetraacetate standard solution, while adding Eriochrome Black T solution as an indicator,
until the color of the solution becomes blue. Calculate the factor of a 0.01 mol/L
ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution by the following formula.
Factor of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution (f1)

= W1 × (A/100) × (1/65.409) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)
= W1 × A× (1/65.409) × (0.25/V3)
W： Mass (g) of d zinc sampled

A： Purity (% (mass fraction)) of zinc
V1： Volume (25 mL) of zinc solution transferred
V2： Constant volume (1000 mL) of zinc solution
V3： Volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution needed
for titration
C1: Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate
standard solution
231
h) 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution: Put 0.24 g of magnesium specified in JIS K
8875 into a 1000-mL beaker, add about 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to dissolve, add a proper
amount of water, and while adding a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL) as an indicator,
neutralize with an ammonia solution (1+3) until the color of the solution becomes yellow, and
then add water to make 1000 mL.
Standardization: Transfer 25 mL of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution to a 200-mL -
300-mL Erlenmeyer flask, add about 15 mL of water and about 5 mL of ammonium chloride
buffer solution, and while adding an Eriochrome Black T solution as an indicator, titrate
with 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution until the color of the solution
becomes blue. Calculate the factor of a 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution by the
following formula.
Factor of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution (f2)

= (C1 × f1 × V4) × (1/V5) × (1/C2)
= (f1 × V4) × (1/V5)
C1 ： Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate

standard solution
C2 ： Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution
f1 ： Factor of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
V4： Volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
needed for titration
V5： Volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution transferred.
i) Ammonium chloride solution: Dissolve 70 g of ammonium chloride specified in JIS K

8116 and 570 mL of ammonia solution in water to make 1000 mL.
j) 2-aminoethanol solution: Add 400 mL of water to 150 mL of 2-aminoethanol specified in
JIS K 8109, add gradually hydrochloric acid to a pH 10.6.
k) Potassium cyanide solution: Dissolve 100 g of potassium cyanide specified in JIS K 8443
in water to make 1000 mL.
l) Eriochrome Black T solution: Dissolve 0.5 g of Eriochrome Black T specified in JIS K
8736 and 4.5 g of hydroxyl-ammonium chloride in methanol−water (95+5) to make 100 mL.
m) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.10 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896
n) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
o) Citric acid solution (2): Dissolve 20 g of citric acid monohydrate specified in JIS K 8283 in
Note (1) The reagent corresponds to triethanolamine in the Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers (1992).
Comment 1 Instead of a 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution in (2) g), a 0.1
mol/L ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid dihydrogen disodium solution conforming to
ISO/IEC 17025 can be used.

a) Hot plate: A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
232
(4) Test procedure

b) Add about 200mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23), cover with a watch glass, and boil on a hot
c) Immediately transfer to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water.
d) Immediately add water up to the marked line (4).
(4) Conduct the procedure in Comment 5 when there is much manganese content in the
fertilizers.
Comment 2 In the case of a by-product magnesia fertilizer, if the pH of the sample solution of d)
is neutral or basic, prepare a sample solution anew by replacing “2 g of an analytical
sample” in the procedure in a) with “1 g - 1.5 g of an analytical sample”.
Comment 5 Add a predetermined volume of filtrate in (4.1) e), add a drop of methyl red solution
as an indicator and drop ammonia water (28 % (mass fraction)) specified in JIS K
8085 until the color of the solution changes light yellowish red from purplish red.
Add 20 mL of ammonium peroxodisulfate to boil (5). Immediately transfer it to a
100-mL - 200-mL volumetric flask with water. After immediate cooling is complete,
add water up to the marked line. Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample
solution.
Note (5) Precipitation of manganese oxide, etc. is formed.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below. Two examples of titration are shown
as follows.
(4.2.1) Measurement (A): Titration with a magnesium standard solution (0.01 mol/L)
a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 5 mg - 20 mg as CaO + MgO) of sample
solution to a 200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add a proper amount of water, add a drop of methyl red solution as an indicator and drop
sodium hydroxide (5 g/100 mL) to neutralize until the color of the solution becomes yellow.
c) Add 0.1 g of ascorbic acid, 1 ml - 10 mL of 2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol−water (1+3) and 1 mL -
10 mL of potassium cyanide solution (6).
d) Add a predetermined volume of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution (7).
e) Add 20 mL of ammonium chloride solution or 2-aminoethanol solution.
f) Add several drops of Eriochrome Black T solution, and titrate with a 0.01 mol/L magnesium
standard solution until the color of the solution becomes red.
g) Calculate the alkalinity (AL) content in an analytical sample by the following formula.
Alkalinity (AL) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= ((C1 × f1 × V6/1000) － (C2 × f2 × V7/1000)) × (56.077/W2) × (V8/V9) × 100
233
= ((f1 × V6) － (f2 × V7)) × (56.077/W2) × (V3/V4) × (1/1000)
C1： Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate

standard solution
C2： Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution
f1： Factor of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
f2： Factor of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution
V6： Additive volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard
solution
V7： Volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution needed for titration
V8： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1) d)
V9： Transferred volume (mL) of the sample solution subjected to titration in (4.2.1)
a).
Note (6) If manganese is present, replace “1 mL - 10 mL of potassium cyanide solution” with

“1g - 5g of potassium cyanide”.
(7) Add excess volume since 1.8 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
(0.01 mol/L) is required for 1 mg of CaO.
(4.2.2) Measurement (B): Titration with an ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution (0.01
mol/L)
a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 5 mg - 20 mg as CaO+MgO) of sample
solution to a 200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add a proper amount of water and 5 mL of citric acid solution (8), add a drop of methyl red
solution as an indicator and drop sodium hydroxide (5 g/100 mL) to neutralize until the color
of the solution becomes yellow.
c) Add 0.1 g of ascorbic acid, 1 ml - 10 mL of 2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol−water (1+3) and 1 mL -
10 mL of potassium cyanide solution (6).
d) Add 20 mL of ammonium chloride solution or 2-aminoethanol solution.
e) Add several drops of an Eriochrome Black T solution, and immediately titrate with a 0.01
mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution until the color of the solution becomes
blue-green.
f) Calculate the alkalinity (AL) content in an analytical sample by the following formula.

= (C1 × f1 × V10/1000) × (56.077/W3) × (V11/V12) × 100
= (f1 × V10) × (56.077/W3) × (V11/V12) × (１/1000)
C1： Set concentration (0.01 mol/L) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate

standard solution
f1： Factor of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
V10： Volume (mL) of 0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
needed for titration
V11： Predetermined volume (mL) of the sample solution in (4.1) d)
V12： Transferred volume (mL) of the sample solution subjected to titration in (4.2.2)
a).
Note (8) When the sample solution does not contain phosphate, silicate, etc., it is not necessary
234
to add citric acid.
Comment 6 Care should be fully taken in the case of using potassium cyanide and its solution in
accordance with the Safety Data Sheet (SDS). In addition, observe laws and
ordinances concerned such as the Poisonous and Deleterious Substance Control Law.
Criteria of the abolition in the Poisonous and Deleterious Substance Control Law (for
reference): Add a sodium hydroxide solution to make it alkalinity more than pH 11,
and further add an oxidizer (sodium hypochlorite, bleaching powder) solution to
conduct oxidative degradation processes. After dissolving CN ingredient, neutralize
with sulfuric acid, and discard it after diluting it with a large amount of water. Take
enough time to dissolve the CN ingredient with alkalinity.
References
(5) Flow sheet for alkalinity: The flow sheet for alkalinity in fertilizers is shown below:
2 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 500-mL tall beaker

Heating Cover with a watch glass and boil for 5 minutes
Cooling Immediately
Transfer 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for alkalinity in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
235
Sample solution
Aliquot
200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer Flask
← Water (proper amount)

← A drop of methyl-red solution
Sodium hydroxide (5 g/100 mL)
Neutralization
(until the solution becomes yellow )
← 0.1 g ascorbic acid
← 1 mL - 10 mL of 2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol - water (1+3)
← 1 mL - 10 mL potassium cyanide solution
← Predetermined volume of 0.01 mol/L
ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
← 20 mL of ammonium chloride solution or 2-aminoethanol solution
← Several drops of Erio-chrome Black T solution
0.01 mol/L magnesium standard solution
Titration
(until the solution becomes red)
Figure 2-1 Flow sheet for alkalinity in fertilizers (Measurement procedure (4.2.1) (A))
Sample solution
Aliquot
200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer Flask
← Water (proper amount)

← 5 mL citric acid solution
← A drop of methyl-red solution
Sodium hydroxide (5 g/100 mL)
Neutralization
(until the solution becomes yellow )
← 0.1 g of ascorbic acid
← 1 mL - 10 mL of 2,2’,2”-nitrilotriethanol - water (1+3)
← 1 mL - 10 mL of potassium cyanide solution
← 20 mL of ammonium chloride solution or 2-aminoethanol solution
← Several drops of Erio-chrome Black T solution
0.01 mol/L ethylenediamine tetraacetate standard solution
Titration
(until the solution becomes blue-green)
Figure 2-2 Flow sheet for alkalinity in fertilizers (Measurement procedure (4.2.2) (B))
236
4.5.4.b Calculation with soluble lime and soluble magnesia

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that guarantee alkalinity (AL). This testing method is
classified as Type A (Def-C) and its symbol is 4.5.4.b-2017 or AL.b-1.
Multiply the soluble magnesia (S-MgO) obtained in 4.6.2 by the factor (1.3934) and add to the
soluble lime (S-CaO) obtained in 4.5.2 to calculate alkalinity (AL) in an analytical sample.
(2) Calculation of alkalinity

a) Calculate the alkalinity (AL) in a teat sample by the following formula.

= (S-CaO)＋1.3914 × (S-MgO)
S-CaO： Soluble lime (% (mass fraction)) (1) obtained in 4.5.2 in an analytical

sample
S-MgO： Soluble magnesia (% (mass fraction)) (1) obtained in 4.6.2 in an analytical
sample
Note (1) S-CaO and S-MgO use raw data without rounding numerical value
237
4.6 Magnesia
4.6.1 Total magnesia
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to compost, sludge fertilizers (except for calcined sludge fertilizer)
and poultry manure ash. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.6.1.a-2018
or T-Mg.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and hydrochloric acid or nitric acid−hydrochloric
acid (3+1), add an interference suppressor solution, and then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and
measure the atomic absorption with magnesium at a wavelength of 285.2 nm to quantify total
magnesia (T-MgO) in an analytical sample.

b) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8541 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
equivalent quality.
d) Interference suppressor solution (1): Weigh 60.9 g - 152.1 g of strontium chloride
mL.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.603 g of magnesium (powder)
specified in JIS K 8876 into a weighing dish. Transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask with a
small amount of water, add about 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to dissolve, and add water up to
the marked line.
f) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium
standard solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the
marked line.
g) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 µg/mL-10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2.5 mL-25 mL of magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) to
(3)
h) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Transfer about 25 mL of
marked line.

used.
prepared.
Comment 1 Instead of the magnesium standard solution in (2), a magnesium standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a magnesium
standard solution (Mg 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National
Metrology. In this case, calculate total magnesia (T-MgO) in the analytical sample
by multiplying the concentration (Mg) of the magnesium standard solution for
calibration curve preparation or a measurement value (Mg) obtained in (4.2) by a
238
conversion factor (1.6583).

JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: A magnesium hollow cathode lamp
b) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be adjusted to 450 °C ± 5 °C or 550 ºC ± 5 ºC.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

beaker.
about 5 minutes.
f) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with
water.

beaker.
h) After standing to cool, transfer to a 100-mL - 200 mL volumetric flask with water, add water
up to the marked line, and filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
239
added.
5.3.a.
1) Spray the magnesium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
test solution for the calibration curve preparation into a flame, and read the indicated value at
a wavelength of 285.2 nm.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the magnesium concentration and the indicated
value of the magnesium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
MgO) (8) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the total magnesia
(T-MgO) in the analytical sample.
Note (8) If there is a possibility that the concentration of total magnesia in the sample solution
exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, transfer a predetermined amount
of the sample solution and dilute by adding water up to the marked line to make 0.1
mg - 1 mg as MgO.
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 5 % (mass fraction),
1 % (mass fraction) and 0.2 % (mass fraction) are 102.4 %, 101.7 % and 103.0 % as
total magnesia (T-MgO) respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using swine manure compost,
composted sludge fertilizer and poultry manure ash (1 sample for each) to evaluate
precision were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the
calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this test method is about 0.2 %
(mass fraction).
240

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Swine manure compost 5 3.14 0.03 1.1 0.05 1.5
Composted sludge fertilizer 5 0.84 0.01 1.2 0.01 1.3
Poultry manure ash 5 3.97 0.03 0.7 0.04 1.1
(5) Flow sheet for total magnesia: The flow sheet for total magnesia in fertilizers is shown
below:
5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 200-mL- 300-mL tall beaker.

Incineration Ignite at 550 ºC ±5 ºC, no less than 4 hours

← Small amount of water, moisten the residue

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total magnesia in fertilizers.

　　(Incineration-hydrochloric acid boiling prorcedure (4.1.1))
241
5g
analytical sample



Sample solution
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total magnesia in fertilizers

　　(Incineration-aqua regia digestion procedure (4.1.2))
Sample solution
Aliquot
Figure 3 Flow sheet for total magnesia in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
242
4.6.2 Soluble magnesia

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing by-product magnesia fertilizers and
fertilizers that guarantee alkalinity. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is
4.6.2.a-2018 or S-Mg.a-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, boil to extract and add an interference
with magnesium at a wavelength of 285.2 nm to obtain hydrochloric acid (1+23) soluble magnesia
(soluble magnesia (S-MgO)) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

equivalent quality.
mL.
c) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.603 g of magnesium (powder)
the marked line.
d) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium
marked line.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 µg/mL-10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(3)
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure e) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and
add water up to the marked line.

used.
prepared.
Comment 1 Instead of the magnesium standard solution in (2), a magnesium standard solution for
the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a magnesium standard
solution (Mg 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In
this case, calculate soluble magnesia (S-MgO) in the analytical sample by
multiplying the concentration (Mg) of a magnesium standard solution for calibration
curve preparation or a measurement value (Mg) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion
factor (1.6583).

243
JIS K 0121.
(4) Test procedure

d) Immediately add water up to the marked line
Comment 2 In the case of a by-product magnesia fertilizer or a fertilizer containing a by-product

magnesia, if the pH of the sample solution of d) is neutral or basic, prepare a sample
solution anew by replacing “2 g of an analytical sample” in the procedure in a) with
“1 g - 1.5 g of an analytical sample”.
MgO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the soluble magnesia
(S-MgO) in the analytical sample.
244
1 % (mass fraction) are 101.7 % and 99.5% as soluble magnesia (S-MgO)
respectively.
fertilizers.
References
Characteristics of Testing Methods for Magnesia Content in Fertilizer by Atomic
(5) Flow sheet for soluble magnesia: The flow sheet for soluble magnesia in fertilizers is shown
below:

Cooling Immediately

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
245
4.6.3 Citrate-soluble magnesia

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing magnesia hydroxide fertilizers, etc. This
testing method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.6.3.a-2018 or C-Mg.a-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample and add an interference suppressor
solution, and then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with
magnesium at a wavelength of 285.2 nm to obtain citrate-soluble magnesia (C-MgO) in an

equivalent quality.
c) Interference suppressor solution (1): Weigh 60.9 g - 152.1 g of strontium chloride
mL.
d) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.603 g of magnesium (powder)
the marked line.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium
marked line.
f) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 µg/mL-10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(3)
g) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Transfer about 25 mL of
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure f) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and

used.
prepared.
this case, calculate citrate-soluble magnesia (C-MgO) in the analytical sample by
factor (1.6583).

246
described below.
ab) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker: that can be adjusted
40 mm.
b) Flame atomic absorption spectrometer: An atomic absorption spectrometer specified in JIS
K 0121.
(4) Test procedure


flask (5).
b) Add 150 mL of citric acid solution heated up to about 30 ºC (4), and shake to mix horizontally
at amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm (30 ºC ± 1 ºC) at 160 times/min for 1 hour.
Comment 4 For a by-product magnesia fertilizer, if the pH of the sample solution in (4.1.1) d) and
(4.1.2) d) is neutral or basic, prepare a sample solution anew by replacing “1 g of an
analytical sample” in the procedures in (4.1.1) a) and (4.1.2) a) with “0.5 g of an
Comment 6 In some slag silicate fertilizers, the variation of measurement value of citrate
magnesia (C-MgO) may be observed according to the time variation of heating state
after adding a citric acid solution. Therefore, in the case of slag silicate fertilizers, it
247
is necessary to conduct the procedures of (4.1.1) c) - d) and (4.1.2) c) - d) as quickly

as possible after confirming the time of shaking to mix in the procedure in (4.1.1) b)
and (4.1.2) b).
Comment 7 In the case of a fertilizer containing Kieserite (magnesium sulfate fertilizers), wash
the non-dissolved matters with water obtained while preparing the sample solution of
water-soluble magnesia in (4.1) in 4.6.4.a to transfer it to a 250 mL volumetric flask,
and then prepare a sample solution by the procedures in (4.1.1) b) - d) and (4.1.2) b)
- d). Mix the magnesia obtained in (4.2) regarding this sample solution with the
water-soluble magnesia in 4.6.4.a regarding the said fertilizers to make
citrate-soluble magnesia.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the citrate soluble
magnesia (C-MgO) in the analytical sample.
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction) - 5 %
(mass fraction) are 98.9 % - 100.3 % as citrate-soluble magnesia (C-MgO)
respectively.
repeatability.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this test method is about 0.06 %
(mass fraction) for solid fertilizers.
248
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 11 3.28 0.07 2.0 0.08 2.5 0.11 3.3
FAMIC-A-13 9 3.18 0.03 1.0 0.04 1.4 0.12 3.8
References
3) Souichi IGARASHI and Yasuharu KIMURA: Effect of Time during Extraction
Operation on Measurements of Citric Acid-Soluble Magnesium in Silicate Slag
Fertilizer Vol. 7, p. 145 - 156 (2014)
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in

← About 150 mL of citrate solution [about 30 ºC]
Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers

249

Reciprocating water bath shaker (reciprocation
Shaking to mix horizontally at 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm
- 40 mm), at 30 ºC ± 1 ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers
Sample solution
Aliquot
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers

250

(1) Summary
symbol is 4.6.3.b-2018 or C-Mg.b-1.
Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the magnesium at a wavelength of 279.553 nm to
obtain citric acid-soluble magnesia (citrate-soluble magnesia (C-MgO)) in an analytical sample. In

equivalents.
d) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.603 g of magnesium (powder)
the marked line.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium standard
solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up
to the marked line.
f) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 2 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL-16 mL of magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) to
line.
g) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.2 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of magnesium standard solution (MgO 10 µg/mL) for
the calibration curve preparation to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add
hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
solution (Mg 1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In
this case, calculate citrate-soluble magnesia (C-MgO) in the analytical sample by
factor (1.6583).
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a magnesium standard
251
device used.

described below.
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure


flask (3).
reciprocating at amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm (30 ºC ± 1 ºC) at 160 times/min for 1 hour.
Comment 4 For a by-product magnesia fertilizer, if the pH of the sample solution in (4.1.1) d)
Comment 6 In some slag silicate fertilizers, the variation of measurement value of citrate
magnesia (C-MgO) may be observed according to the time variation of heating state
after adding a citric acid solution. Therefore, in the case of slag silicate fertilizers, it
252
is necessary to conduct the procedures of (4.1.1) c) - d) and (4.1.2) c) - d) as quickly

as possible after confirming the time of shaking to mix in the procedure in (4.1.1) b)
and (4.1.2) b).
Comment 7 In the case of a fertilizer containing Kieserite (magnesium sulfate fertilizers), wash
the non-dissolved matters with water obtained while preparing the sample solution of
water-soluble magnesia in (4.1) in 4.6.4.a to transfer it to a 250 mL volumetric flask,
and then prepare a sample solution by the procedures in (4.1.1) b) - d) and (4.1.2) b)
- d). Mix the magnesia obtained in (4.2) regarding this sample solution with the
water-soluble magnesia in 4.6.4.a regarding the said fertilizers to make
citrate-soluble magnesia.
1) Spray the magnesium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
value of the magnesium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the
blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.02 mg - 1.6 mg
as MgO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the citrate soluble
magnesia (C-MgO) in the analytical sample.

Comment 9 The comparison of the measurement value (yi：1.59 % (mass farction) - 15.06 %
using processed phosphorus fertilizers (2 samples), compound fertilizers (11
samples), slag silicate fertilizer (1 sample), mixed compost fertilizer (1 sample),
mixed phosphate fertilizers (2 samples), designated blended fertilizer (1 sample),
blended fertilizers (5 samples), byproduct mixed fertilizer (1 sample), organic
compound fertilizer (1 sample), and fused phosphate fertilizer (1 sample). As a result,
a regression equation was y = 0.0271+1.0124x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was
0.999. In addition, recovery testing was conducted using a preparation sample. As a
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 0.232 % (mass fraction) -
18.81 % (mass fraction) was 94.9 % - 102.7 %.
repeatability.
253


4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Compound
7 1.66 0.03 1.6 0.03 1.8
fertilizer
254
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in

Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Extraction procedure (4.1.1))

C, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Extraction procedure (4.1.2))
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
255
4.6.4 Water-soluble magnesia

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing magnesia sulfate fertilizers, etc. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.6.4.a-2018 or W-Mg.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample and boil to extract. Add an interference suppressor solution, then
spray in an acetylene−air flame and measure the atomic absorption with magnesium at a
wavelength of 285.2 nm to obtain water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO) in an analytical sample. In

equivalent quality.
mL.
the marked line.
d) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium
marked line.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(3)
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure d) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and

used.
prepared.
this case, calculate water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO) in the analytical sample by
factor (1.6583).
JIS K 0121.
256

b) Extraction flask (4): A 500-mL volumetric flask made of borosilicate glass
c) Hot plate : A hot plate whose surface temperature can be adjusted up to 250 ºC.
Note (4) The volumetric flask used for extraction should be distinguished as an extraction flask
and should not be used for the other purposes.
(4) Test procedure

b) Add 400 mL of water, and cover with a watch glass to boil on a hot plate for about 30 minutes
(5)
.
c) Immediately transfer it to a 500- mL volumetric flask with water.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble
magnesia (W-MgO) in the analytical sample.
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction) - 5 %
(mass fraction) are 100.4 % - 100.9 % as water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO)
257
respectively.
References
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble magnesia: The flow sheet for water-soluble magnesia in

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and boil for about 30 minutes.
Cooling Immediately

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble magnesia in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
258

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.6.4.b-2018 or W-Mg.b-1.
(“ICP-OES”) and measure the magnesium at a wavelength of 279.553 nm to obtain water-soluble
magnesia (W-MgO) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 5.

equivalents.
the marked line.
d) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of magnesium standard
solution (MgO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up
to the marked line.
e) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 2 µg/mL - 16 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL-16 mL of magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.1 mg/mL) to
line.
f) Magnesium standard solution (MgO 0.2 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of magnesium standard solution (MgO 10 µg/mL) for
the calibration curve preparation to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add
hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
in the procedures in e) and f).
solution (Mg 1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In
this case, calculate water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO) in the analytical sample by
factor (1.6583).
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a magnesium standard
device used.
259
0116.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1 mg of an analytical sample (2) to the order of 1 g, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric
flask.
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when there is less magnesia
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer: Set up the measurement
conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer considering the following:
1) Spray the magnesium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
as MgO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the magnesium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble
magnesia (W-MgO) in the analytical sample.

+ 0.985x − 0.006, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive
recovery testing was conducted using a fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand) and a home
garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand) and a liquid microelement mixed fertilizer (1
sample). As a result, the mean recovery rates at additive level of 1 % (mass fraction)
and 0.15 % (mass fraction) were 98.7 % - 102.8 % and 102.3 % respectively.
260

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
7 0.392 0.002 0.5 0.008 2.2
mixed fertilizer（liquid)
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble magnesia in fluid fertilizers is shown below:

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble magmesia in fluid fertilizers

261
Sample solution
Aliquot
100-mL volmetric flask
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble magmesia in fluid fertilizers

262
4.7 Manganese
4.7.1 Soluble manganese
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing manganese carbonate fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.7.1.a-2017 or S-Mn.a-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to an analytical sample, boil to extract and add an interference
suppressor solution, and then spray into an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption
with manganese at a wavelength of 279.5 nm to obtain the hydrochloric acid (1+23) soluble
manganese (soluble manganese (S-MnO)) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of
this testing method is shown in Comment 4.

equivalent quality.
mL.
c) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.775 g of manganese powder
(purity no less than 99 % (mass fraction)) into a weighing dish. Transfer to a 1000-mL
volumetric flask with a small amount of water, add about 10 mL of hydrochloric acid to
dissolve, and add water up to the marked line.
d) Manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of manganese standard
solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
e) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 µg/mL-10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2.5 mL-25 mL of manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL) to
(3)
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure e) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and

used.
prepared.
Comment 1 Instead of the manganese standard solution in (2), a manganese standard solution for
the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a manganese standard
solution (Mn 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In
this case, calculate soluble manganese (S-MnO) in the analytical sample by
multiplying the concentration (Mn) of a manganese standard solution for calibration
curve preparation or a measurement value (Mn) obtained in (4.2) by a conversion
factor (1.2912).

263
JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: A manganese hollow cathode lamp
(4) Test procedure

1) Spray the manganese standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the manganese concentration and the indicated
value of the manganese standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
MnO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the manganese content from the calibration curve, and calculate the soluble manganese
(S-MnO) in the analytical sample.
264
0.1 % (mass fraction) are 100.5 % and 101.3 % as soluble manganese (S-MnO)
respectively.
References
2) Keiji YAGI, Natuki TOYODOME, Tokiya SUZUKI and Hideo SOETA: Verification of
Performance Characteristics of Testing Methods for Manganese Content in Fertilizer by
Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 203 - 212
(2013)
(5) Flow sheet for soluble manganese: The flow sheet for soluble manganese in fertilizers is
shown below:

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and boil for about 5 minutes.
Cooling Immediately

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for soluble manganese in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for soluble manganese in fertilizers (Mrasurement procedure)
265
4.7.2 Citrate-soluble manganese

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing manganese carbonate fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.7.2.a-2018 or C-Mn.a-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample and add an interference suppressor
solution, and then spray into an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with
manganese at a wavelength of 279.5 nm to obtain citric acid soluble manganese (citrate-soluble
manganese(C-MnO)) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 5.

equivalent quality.
c) Interference suppressor solution (1): Weigh 60.9 g - 152.1 g of strontium chloride
mL.
d) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.775 g of manganese powder
e) Manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of manganese standard
f) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(3)
g) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Transfer about 25 mL of
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure f) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and

used.
prepared.
this case, calculate citrate-soluble manganese (C-MnO) in the analytical sample by a
multiplying the concentration (Mn) of manganese standard solution for calibration
factor (1.2912).

266
described below.
40 mm.
JIS K 0121.
(4) Test procedure


flask (5).
reciprocating horizontally at amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm (30 ºC ± 1 ºC) at 160 times/min for
1 hour.
267

4) Obtain the manganese content from the calibration curve, and citrate soluble manganese
(C-MnO) in the analytical sample.
0.1 % (mass fraction) are 101.9 % and 100.5 % as citrate-soluble manganese
(C-MnO) respectively.
repeatability.
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 9 0.403 0.004 1.1 0.01 1.3 0.010 2.4
FAMIC-A-13 10 0.356 0.010 2.7 0.01 3.9 0.018 4.9
References
268
(2013)
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese in

← About 150 mL of citrate-solution [about 30 ºC]
Constant-temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese in fertilizers

C, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

269
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese in fertilizers
270

(1) Summary
symbol is 4.7.2.b-2018 or C-Mn.b-1.
Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the manganese at a wavelength of 257.610 nm to
obtain citric acid-soluble manganese (citrate-soluble manganese (C-MnO)) in an analytical sample.

equivalents.
d) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) (1): Weigh 0.775 g of manganese powder
dissolve, and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
e) Manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of manganese standard
solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up
to the marked line.
f) Manganese standard solution (MnO 2 µg/mL - 8 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 8 mL of manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked
line.
g) Manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of manganese standard solution (MnO 10 µg/mL) to
line.
in the procedures in e) and g).
solution (Mn 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case,
calculate citrate-soluble manganese (C-MnO) in the analytical sample by a
factor (1.2912).
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a manganese standard
271
device used.

described below.
bb) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker: that can be adjusted to
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure


flask (3).
1 hour.
following:
272

1) Spray the manganese standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
as MnO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the manganese content from the calibration curve, and calculate the citrate soluble
manganese (C-MnO) in the analytical sample.

Comment 6 The comparison of the measurement value (yi：0.089 % (mass farction) - 1.88 %
trueness using compound fertilizers (7 samples), mixed phosphate fertilizers (2
samples), solid fertilizers (2 samples), blended fertilizers (4 samples) and organic
blended fertilizer (1 sample). As a result, a regression equation was y = 0.0015 +
0.9988x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. In addition, recovery testing
was conducted using a preparation sample. As a result, the average rate of recovery
at the content level of 0.595 % (mass fraction) - 28.94 % (mass fraction) was 98.5 %
- 105.5 %.
repeatability.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
273
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese in

← About 150 mL of citrate-solution [about 30 ºC]
Constant-temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

Shaking to mix 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 ºC ±
1 ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble manganese in fertilizers

274
4.7.3 Water-soluble manganese

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing manganese sulfate fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.7.3.a-2017 or W-Mn.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample and add an interference suppressor solution, and
then spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with manganese at a
wavelength of 279.5 nm to obtain water-soluble manganese (W-MnO) in an analytical sample. In

equivalent quality.
mL.
e) Manganese standard solution (MnO 1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
(3)
interference suppressor solution used in the procedure d) to a 250-mL volumetric flask (3), and

used.
prepared.
this case, calculate citrate-soluble manganese (C-MnO) in the analytical sample by a
factor (1.2912).
(3) Instruments: Instruments are as shown below.

a) Extractor: Constant-temperature rotary shaker or vertical reciprocating shaker as described
below.
aa) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 500-mL volumetric flask upside down at 30
275
ab) Vertical reciprocating shaker: A vertical reciprocating shaker that can shake a 250-mL
volumetric flask using an adapter for a flack to reciprocate vertically at 300 times/ minute
(amplitude of 40 mm).
JIS K 0121.
(4) Test procedure

(4.1.1.1) Rotary shaker
flask.

flask.

flask.
276
4) Obtain the manganese content from the calibration curve, and water-soluble manganese
(W-MnO) in the analytical sample.
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 6 % (mass fraction) and
0.1 % (mass fraction) are 101.2 % and 101.1 % as water-soluble manganese
(W-MnO) respectively.
The comparison of the measurement value of extraction (yi：0.0330 % (mass fraction)
- 6.18 % (mass fraction )) by a vertical reciprocating shaker and the measurement
equation was y = − 0.009 + 1.011x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 1.000. Also,
mixed micro element fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way
and repeatability
The comparison of the measurement value of simple extraction (yi：0.0590 % (mass
fraction) - 1.27 % (mass fraction )) and the measurement value of extract (xi) with a
rotary shaker was conducted to evaluate trueness of the extraction of fluid fertilizers
+ 1.006x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 1.000. Also, the results of the
repeatability tests on different days using fluid compound fertilizers and fluid mixed
micro element fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of
repeatability
277

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Mixed micro element
7 3.57 0.03 0.7 0.05 1.5
fertilizers

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid compound
7 1.28 0.01 0.4 0.02 1.3
fertilizers
Liquid micro element
7 0.230 0.001 0.5 0.003 1.5
compound fertilizers
References
(2013)
4) Shinji KAWAGUCHI: Extraction Method for the Water-soluble Principal Ingredients
in the Solid Fertilizer using a Gneral-purpose Equipment , Research Report of Fertilizer,
Vol.10, p. 1 - 8 (2017)
278
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble manganese: The flow sheet for water-soluble manganese in
Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 500-mL volumetric flask.
(Powdery)
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min), 30 minutes

Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble manganese in fertilizers


(Powdery)
Vertical reciprocating shaker(300 times/min, with amplitude
Shaking to mix
of 40 mm), for 30 minutes
Sample solution

(Fluid)
Shaking to mix

Sample solution

279
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet forwater-soluble manganese in fertilizers

280

(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to fluid mixed fertilizers, liquid microelement mixed fertilizers, liquid
by-product manganese fertilizers and the fluid fertilizers of home garden-use mixed fertilizers. This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.7.3.b-2017 or W-Mn.b-1.
(“ICP-OES”) and measure the manganese at a wavelength of 257.610 nm to obtain water-soluble
manganese (W-MnO) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 5.

equivalents.
dissolve, and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
solution (MnO 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up
to the marked line.
e) Manganese standard solution (MnO 2 µg/mL - 8 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 8 mL of manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 mg/mL) to
line.
f) Manganese standard solution (MnO 0.1 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of manganese standard solution (MnO 10 µg/mL) to
line.
solution (Mn 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case,
calculate water-soluble manganese (W-MnO) in the analytical sample by a
factor (1.2912).
solution for the calibration preparation curve in d) and e) applies to a horizontal
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a manganese standard
device used.
281
0116.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1 mg of an analytical sample (2) to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric
flask.
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when there is less manganese
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer: Set up the measurement
conditions for the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer considering the following:
1) Spray the manganese standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
as MnO) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the manganese content from the calibration curve, and water-soluble manganese
(W-MnO) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 The simultaneous measurement of multiple elements by an ICP-OES is available.

In that case, see 4.2.4.d Comment 4.
using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = −
0.0013 + 1.025x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive
recovery testing was conducted using a fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand) and a home
garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand) and a liquid micro element mixed fertilizer (1
sample). As a result, the mean recovery rates at additive level of 0.15 % (mass
fraction) - 0.2 % and 0.005 % (mass fraction) were 96.3 % - 96.5 % and 107.0 %
282
respectively.
precision and repeatability.。

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid compound
7 5.69 0.02 0.4 0.06 1.1
fertilzier
Home garden-use
mixed fertilizers 7 2.29 0.02 0.8 0.04 1.6
(Liquid)
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble manganese in fluid fertilizers is shown below:

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble manganese in liquid fertilizers

283
Sample solution

Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble manganese in liquid fertilizers

284
4.8 Boron
4.8.1 Citrate-soluble boron
4.8.1.a Azomethine-H method
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers not containing organic matters. This testing method is
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.8.1.a-2018 or C-B.a-2.
Extract by adding a citric acid solution to an analytical sample, mask co-existing copper, iron and
other salts with ethylenediamine tetraacetate and measure the absorbance with azomethine-H borate
formed by the reaction with azomethine-H to obtain citrate soluble boron (C-B2O3) in an analytical

b) Ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution (1): Dissolve 37.2 g of ethylenediaminetetraacetic
acid dihydrogen disodium dihydrate specified in JIS K 8107 in water to make 1000 mL.
c) Ammonium acetate solution (1): Dissolve 250 g of ammonium acetate specified in JIS K
8359 in water to make 500 mL and adjust pH with sulfuric acid (1+4) to pH 5.2 ± 0.1.
d) Azomethine-H solution: Add water to 0.6 g of azomethine-H and 2 g of L (+) – ascorbic
acid specified in JIS K 9502, and heat up to 35 ºC - 40 ºC to dissolve and add water after
cooling to make 100 mL.
e) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) (1): After leaving boric acid specified in JIS K
8863 at rest in a desiccator for about 24 hours to dry, weigh 4.441 g to a weighing dish.
Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask, and add water up
to the marked line.
f) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.05 mg/mL): Dilute the predetermined volume of boron
standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) with water exactly by a factor of 50.
Comment 1 Instead of the boron standard solution in (2), a boron standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a boron standard solution (B 1
mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case, calculate
citrate-soluble boron (C-B2O3) in the analytical sample by multiplying the
concentration (B) of a boron standard solution for calibration curve preparation or a
measurement value (B) obtained in (4.3) by a conversion factor (3.2199).

described below.
ab) Reciprocating water bath shaker: A reciprocating water bath shaker that can be adjusted to
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure

285


flask (3).
1 hour.

P2O5 and no more than the equivalents of 15 mL of citric acid solution) to a 100-mL
volumetric flask.
b) Add the solution to make citric acid solution equivalent to 15 mL.
c) Add 25 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution, and then add 10 mL of ammonium
acetate solution.
d) Add 10 mL of azomethine-H solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
leave at rest for about 2 hours.
Comment 5 If formaldehyde processed urea, a large quantity of aluminum, copper, iron zinc,
organic matters, etc. coexists to affect quantification, transfer a predetermined
amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.05 mg - 1 mg as B2O3, no more
than 10 mL of the solution) to a 100-mL separatory funnel, add 10 mL of
hydrochloric acid (1+3), add water to about 20 mL and add 20 mL of
2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol – 4-methyl-2-pentanone (1+9) to shake to mix with a
shaking apparatus for about 1 minute. After allowing to stand still, remove the
lower layer (aqueous phase) and add 20 mL of sodium hydroxide (20 mg/L) to
shake to mix with a shaking apparatus for about 1 minute. After allowing to stand
still, transfer the lower layer (aqueous phase) to a 100-mL volumetric flask, add a
few drops of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100mL) to neutralize with hydrochloric
acid (1+3) until the color of the solution becomes achromatic, and conduct the
286
procedure in (4.2) b).
1) Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 0.05 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
2) Add 15 mL of citric acid solution and conduct the same procedure as (4.2) c) to make the
B2O3 0.05 mg/100 mL - 1 mg/100 mL boron standard solution for the calibration curve
preparation.
4) Measure absorbance at a wavelength of 415 nm of the boron standard solutions for the
calibration curve preparation using the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation
as the control.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the boron concentration and absorbance of the
boron standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) c), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4).
2) Obtain the boron (B2O3) content from the calibration curve, and calculate citrate soluble
boron (C-B2O3) in the analytical sample.
0.05 % (mass fraction) were 101.5 % and 95.7 % as citrate-soluble boron (C-B2O3)
respectively.
repeatability.
287
2) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-A-10 11 0.209 0.004 2.0 0.005 2.2 0.006 3.1
FAMIC-A-13 10 0.203 0.004 1.8 0.005 2.5 0.009 4.7
conducting Azomethine-H method
References
3) Akira SHIMIZU: Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Methods for
Boron Content by Azomethine H Absorption Photometry, Research Report of Fertilizer
Vol. 6, p. 174 -182 (2013)
288
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron in fertilizers is
shown below:
1 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 250-mL volumetric flask

Constant temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron in fertilizers

for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

289
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← Citric acid solution, until the volume reaches
to the equivalents of 15 mL
← 25 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution
← 10 mL of ammonium acetate solution
← 10 mL of azomethine-H solution
Leaving at rest For about 2 hours

Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron in fertilizers
290

(1) Summary
symbol is 4.8.1.b-2018 or C-B.b-1.
Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the boron at a wavelength of 249.773 nm to
obtain citric acid-soluble boron (citrate-soluble boron acid (C-B2O3)) in an analytical sample. In

equivalents.
d) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) (1): After leaving boric acid specified in JIS K
to the marked line.
e) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 4 mL of boron standard solution
(B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line (2).
f) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2 µg/mL - 16 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 16 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 0.1 mg/mL) to a
100-mL volumetric flask step by step and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line
(2)
.
g) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.2 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 10 µg/mL) to a
(2)
.

(2) When preserving, use a container, which can be sealed tightly, made of material such
as PTFE that boron hardly elutes
citrate-soluble boron (C-B2O3) in the analytical sample by multiplying the
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a boron standard solution
291
for the calibration curve in the concentration range which is suitable to a device used.

described below.
ba) Constant-temperature rotary shaker: A constant-temperature rotary shaker that can rotate
40 mm.
(4) Test procedure


flask (4).
1 hour.
following:
292

1) Spray the boron standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
for the calibration curve preparation into inductively coupled plasma, and read the indicated
value at a wavelength of 249.773 nm.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the boron concentration and the indicated value
of the boron standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution
for the calibration curve preparation.
as B2O3) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the boron (B2O3) content from the calibration curve, and calculate citrate soluble
boron (C-B2O3) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Wash the sample injector of an ICP-OES sufficiently with water because boron easily
causes the memory effect.
trueness using compound fertilizers (7 samples), mixed phosphate fertilizers (1
sample), solid fertilizers (2 samples), blended fertilizers (3 samples) and organic
compound fertilizer (1 sample). As a result, a regression equation was y = − 0.0408 +
1.0456x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.992. In addition, recovery testing
was conducted using a preparation sample. As a result, the average rate of recovery
at the content level of 0.601 % (mass fraction) - 35.51 % (mass fraction) was 97.0 %
- 102.0 %.
repeatability.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
293
(5) Flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron: The flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron in fertilizers is
shown below:

Constant temperature rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min),
Shaking to mix
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

Reciprocating water bath shaker (reciprocation horizontally
Shaking to mix at 160 times /min, with amplitude of 25 mm - 40 mm), at 30 º
C ± 1 ºC, for 1 hour
Cooling Immediately
Sample solution

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)

Figure 2 Flow sheet for citrate-soluble boron in fertilizers
294
4.8.2 Water-soluble boron

4.8.2.a Azomethine-H method
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers containing borate fertilizers, etc. This testing method is
classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.8.2.a-2017 or W-B.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, boil to extract, and mask co-existing copper, iron
and other salts with ethylenediamine tetraacetate and measure the absorbance with azomethine-H
borate formed by the reaction with azomethine-H to obtain water-soluble boron (W-B2O3). In

a) Ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution (1): Dissolve 37.2 g of ethylenediaminetetraacetic
acid dihydrogen disodium dihydrate specified in JIS K 8107 in water to make 1000 mL.
b) Ammonium acetate solution (1): Dissolve 250 g of ammonium acetate specified in JIS K
8359 in water to make 500 mL and adjust pH with sulfuric acid (1+4) to pH 5.2 ± 0.1.
c) Azomethine-H solution (1): Add water to 0.6 g of azomethine-H and 2 g of L (+) – ascorbic
acid specified in JIS K 9502, and heat up to 35 ºC - 40 ºC to dissolve and add water after
cooling to make100 mL.
d) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) (1): After leaving boric acid specified in JIS K
to the marked line.
e) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.05 mg/mL): Dilute the predetermined volume of boron
standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) with water exactly by a factor of 50.
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a boron standard solution (B
1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology. In this case, calculate
water-soluble boron (W-B2O3) in the analytical sample by multiplying the

(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 2.5 g (2) of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg, and transfer to a 300-mL tall
beaker.
about 15 minutes.
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 1 g when there is a high amount of
boric acid content in the fertilizers such as a borate fertilizer and boric acid fertilizer.
295
Comment 2 In the procedure in (4.1.2) a) and (4.1.2) b), a 250-mL volumetric flask can be used
instead of a 300-mL tall beaker. However, the volumetric flask used should be
distinguished as an extraction flask and should not be used for the other purposes.
Additionally, “cover with a watch glass” in b) is replaced by “place a funnel”. Skip
“transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask with water” in the procedure in c).

B2O3) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add 25 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution, and then add 10 mL of ammonium
acetate solution.
c) Add 10 mL of azomethine-H solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
leave at rest for about 2 hours.
Comment 4 If formaldehyde processed urea, a large quantity of aluminum, copper, iron zinc,
organic matters, etc. coexists to affect quantification, transfer a predetermined
amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.05 mg - 1 mg as B2O3, no more
than 10 mL of the solution) to a 100-mL separatory funnel, add 10 mL of
hydrochloric acid (1+3), add water to about 20 mL and add 20 mL of
2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol–4-methyl-2-pentanone (1+9) to shake to mix with a shaking
apparatus for about 1 minute. After allowing to stand still, remove the lower layer
(aqueous phase) and add 20 mL of sodium hydroxide (20 mg/L) to shake to mix
with a shaking apparatus for about 1 minute. After allowing to stand still, transfer
the lower layer (aqueous phase) to a 100-mL volumetric flask, add a few drops of
phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100mL) to neutralize with hydrochloric acid (1+3)
until the color of the solution becomes achromatic, and conduct the procedure in
(4.2) b).
Comment 5 Water-soluble boron can be measured simultaneously with citrate soluble boron by
adding 15 mL of citric acid solution before the procedure in (4.2) b).
1) Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 0.05 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
2) Conduct the same procedures as (4.2) b) to make B2O3 0.05 mg/100 mL - 1 mg/100 mL of the
4) Measure absorbance at a wavelength of 415 nm of the boron standard solutions for the
as the control.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the boron concentration and absorbance of the
296
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) b), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4).
2) Obtain the boron (B2O3) content from the calibration curve, and calculate water-soluble boron
(W-B2O3) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Water-soluble boron can be measured simultaneously with citrate-soluble boron by

adding 15 mL of citric acid solution before the procedure in (4.3) b) 2).
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 10 % (mass fraction)
and 0.05 % (mass fraction) were 101.8 % and 107.1 % as water-soluble boron
(W-B2O3) respectively.
References
3) Akira SHIMIZU: Verification of Performance Characteristics of Testing Methods for
Boron Content by Azomethine H Absorption Photometry, Research Report of Fertilizer
Vol. 6, p. 174 -182 (2013)
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble boron: The flow sheet for water-soluble boron in fertilizers is
shown below:
2.5 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 300-mL tall beaker.
← About 200 mL of Water
Cooling Immediately

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble boron in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
297
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← 25 mL of ethylenediamine tetraacetate solution
← 10 mL of ammonium acetate solution
← 10 mL of azomethine-H solution
Leaving at rest For about 2 hours
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble boron in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
298

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.8.2.b-2017 or W-B.b-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, further dilute the filtered solution, introduce it to an
ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the boron at a wavelength of
249.773 nm to obtain water-soluble boron (W-B2O3) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
c) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) (1): After leaving boric acid specified in JIS K
to the marked line.
d) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 4 mL of boron standard solution
(B2O3 2.5 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line (2).
e) Boron standard solution (B2O3 2 µg/mL - 16 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 16 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 0.1 mg/mL) to a
(2)
.
f) Boron standard solution (B2O3 0.2 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 2 mL - 20 mL of boron standard solution (B2O3 10 µg/mL) to a
(2)
.
in the procedures in d), e) and f) (2).

as PTFE that boron hardly elutes
water-soluble boron (W-B2O3) in the analytical sample by multiplying the
solution for the calibration preparation curve in d) and e) applies to a horizontal
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a boron standard solution
299
0116.
1) Gas: Argon gas specified in JIS K 1105 of no less than 99.5% (volume fraction) in purity
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1 mg of an analytical sample (3) to the order of 1 mg, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric
flask.
Note (3) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when there is less boron content
in the fertilizers such as a home garden-use fertilizer.
following:
1) Spray the boron standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the boron concentration and the indicated value
of the boron standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution
as B2O3) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the boron content from the calibration curve, and calculate water-soluble boron
(W-B2O3) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 Wash the sample injector of an ICP-OES sufficiently with water because boron easily
causes the memory effect.
(xi) of Azomethine-H method was conducted to evaluate trueness using fluid
fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = − 0.0041 + 0.986x,
and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive recovery testing
was conducted using a fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand) and a home garden-use mixed
300
fertilizer (1 brand) and a liquid micro element mixed fertilizer (1 sample). As a result,
the mean recovery rates at additive level of 0.15 % (mass fraction) - 0.2 % and
0.01 % (mass fraction) were 95.5 % - 99.4 % and 96.5 % respectively.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
（liquid)
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble boron in fluid fertilizers is shown below:

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble boron in liquid fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
301
Sample solution

Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble boron in liquid fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
302
4.9 Zinc
4.9.1 Total zinc
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type C and its
symbol is 4.9.1.a-2017 or T-Zn.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and nitric acid-hydrochloric acid (1+3), and then
spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with zinc at a wavelength of
213.9 nm to quantify the total zinc (T-Zn). In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 6.

b) Nitric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or equivalents.
c) Hydrochloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
d) Zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL): A zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
to National Metrology.
e) Zinc standard solutions (Zn 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
Comment 1 Instead of the zinc standard solution in (2), a zinc standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a zinc standard solution (Zn 1
mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

JIS K 0121 with the background correction (2) function.
1) Light source: A zinc hollow cathode lamp (when the continuous source method as the
background correction method is used, the light source is a deuterium lamp.)
b) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be adjusted to 450 °C ± 5 ºC.
be set to 250 ºC.
Note (2) There are the continuous source method, the Zeeman method, the non-resonance
spectrum method, and the self-reversal method, etc.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 5.00 g of an analytical sample and transfer to a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.
303

added.
Comment 2 Do not conduct the procedures in (4.1) b) - c) in the case of fertilizers not containing
organic matters.
Comment 3 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 4.9.1.b, (4.1) of
4.10.1.a, (4.1) of 4.10.1.b, (4.1) of 5.3.a, (4.1) of 5.3.b, (4.1) of 5.4.a, (4.1) of 5.4.b,
(4.1) of 5.5.a, (4.1) of 5.5.d, (4.1) of (5.6.a) and (4.1) of 5.6.b. In addition, the
sample solution can be used in 4.2.1.a, 4.2.1.b, 4.3.1.a, 4.3.1.b and 4.5.1.a.
Comment 4 The sample solution prepared in (4.1.3) in 4.2.1.a can also be used.
1) Spray the zinc standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the zinc concentration and the indicated value of
the zinc standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for
the calibration curve preparation.
1) Subject the sample solution (6) to the same procedure as in b) 1) to read the indicated value.
2) Subject the blank test solution to the same procedure as in b) 1) to read the indicated value,
and correct the indicated value obtained for the sample solution.
3) Obtain the zinc content from the calibration curve, and calculate the total zinc (T-Zn) in the
analytical sample.
Note (6) If there is a possibility that the zinc concentration in the sample solution will exceed
the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount with
304
hydrochloric acid (1+23).
Comment 5 The zinc concentration in the analytical sample can also be corrected by subjecting
the blank test solution to the same procedures as in 1) and 3) to obtain the zinc
content in the blank test solution.
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 1.2 % (mass fraction) and
90 mg/kg are 99.5 % and 97.8 % as the total zinc (T-Zn) respectively.
repeatability.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this test method is about 5
mg/kg for solid fertilizers.
2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
1)
material fertilizer p (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
FAMIC-C-12 12 992 11 1.1 17 1.7 32 3.3
conducting Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry
2）　Average （the number of laboratory（p ）×test days （2） 6）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
3）　Repeatability standard deviation 7）　Reproducibility standard deviation
4）　Repeatability relative standard deviation 8）　Reproducibility relative standard deviation
References
2) Kimie KATO, Masayuki YOSHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: 3) Kimie KATO,
Masayuki YOSHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: Systematization of Determination Methods
of Major Components in Sludge Fertilizer, Compost and Organic Fertilizer, Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol.3 p. 107 - 116 (2010)
3) Shin ABE and Yoshiyuki SUNAGA: Verification of Performance Characteristics of
Testing Methods for Zinc in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research
Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 156 -164 (2013)
305
(5) Flow sheet for total zinc: The flow sheet for total zinc in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.
analytical sample

Incineration Ignite at 450 ºC ± 5 ºC, 8 - 16 hours

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and digest
Heating Slightly move a watch glass to remove acid

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and dissolve

Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for total zinc in fertilizers
306

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to sludge fertilizers, etc. This testing method is classified as Type
D and its symbol is 4.9.1.b-2017 or T-Zn.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration, nitric acid−hydrochloric acid (1+3), introduce it to
an ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with zinc at a
wavelength of 206.191 nm to obtain the total zinc (T-Zn) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
d) Zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL): A zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
e) Zinc standard solution (Zn 25 µg/mL) (1): Dilute a predetermined amount of zinc standard
solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a zinc standard solution
(Zn 25 µg/mL).
Comment 1 Instead of the zinc standard solution in (2), a zinc standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a zinc standard solution (Zn 1
mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

0116.
b) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can keep the test temperature at 450 °C ± 5 °C .
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

i) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - h) using another tall beaker to prepare the
307
blank test solution.
added.
organic matters.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement (Standard Addition Method) according to JIS K 0116
and as shown below. Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method
of the ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry used in measurement.
following:
b) Calibration curve preparation and sample measurement
1) Put 5mL of sample solution to three 10-mL volumetric flasks respectively.
2) Add 2mL and 4 mL of zinc standard solution (0.25 μg/mL) to volumetric flasks of 1) above,
then add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line to make a sample solution of
Standard Addition Method.
3) Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line of the remaining volumetric flask of 1)
above to make a sample solution without a standard solution.
4) Spray the sample solution of Standard Addition Method and the sample solution without a
standard solution into the induction plasma, and read the indicated value at a wavelength of
206.191 nm.
5) Transfer 5 mL of blank test solution to a 10-mL volumetric flask, conduct the same
procedures as in 3) - 4) to read the indicated value, and correct the indicated value obtained
from the respective sample solutions.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added zinc concentration and the corrected
indicated value of the sample solution for Standard Addition Method and the sample solution
without a standard solution.
7) Obtain the zinc content from the intercept of the calibration curve to calculate the total zinc
(T-Zn) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 The total zinc (T-Zn) in the analytical sample can also be corrected by subjecting the
blank test solution to the same procedures as in b) 1) - b) 4) and b) 6) - b) 7) to
obtain the zinc content in the blank test solution.
this case, transfer a pre-determined amount of copper standard solution (Cu 0.1
mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or
10 mg/mL), cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL),
nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), chromium standard
solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) and lead standard solution (Pb 0.1
308
mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) to a volumetric flask to mix, add hydrochloric acid

(1+5) to make acid concentration 0.5 mol/L and further add water up to the marked
line to prepare a primary mixed standard solution. Transfer a pre-determined amount
of primary mixed standard solution to a volumetric flask, add hydrochloric acid
(1+23) up to the marked line to prepare a mixed standard solution for addition within
the concentration range in Table 1. The measurement wavelengths of respective
elements are according to Table 1.
In addition, the additive amount of mixed standard solution for addition and the
additive concentrations of respective elements in a sample solution are shown in the
Table below.
Table 1　　The preparation concentration of mixed standard solutions for addition

The additive concentrations and measurement wavelengths
of respective elements in sample solutions
Concentration of Additive concentration of
mixed standard element in sample solution　(µg/mL)
1) 1) 1)
Test item solution for Additive amountAdditive amountAdditive amount Measurement
wavelength
addition (µg/mL) 0 mL 2 mL 4 mL
(nm)
Total zinc Zn 25 0 5 10 206.191
Total copper Cu 25 0 5 10 324.754
Cadmium Cd 0.25 0 0.05 0.1 228.802
Nickel Ni 2.5 0 0.5 1 231.604
Chromium Cr 2.5 0 0.5 1 205.552
Lead Pb 2.5 0 0.5 1 220.351
1)　Additive amount of mixed standard solution for addition
Comment 6 The comparison of the measurement value (xi：65.0 mg/kg - 3310 mg/kg) of ICP
Optical Emission Spectrometry and the measurement value (yi) of Flame Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry was conducted to evaluate trueness using sludge fertilizers
(49 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = −47.6 + 1.080x and its
correlation coefficient (r) was 0.995. Triplicates measurement for each one sample of
sewage sludge fertilizer, human waste sludge fertilizer, industrial sludge fertilizer,
mixed sludge fertilizer, calcined sludge fertilizers and composted sludge fertilizer
was conducted. As a result, a repeatability obtained was 0.1 % - 2.3 % as a relative
standard deviation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is about 8
mg/kg.
References
1) Masahiro ECHI, Tomoe INOUE, Megumi TABUCHI and Tetuya NOMURA:
Simultaneous Determination of Cadmium, Lead, Nickel, Chromium, Copper and Zinc
in Sludge Fertilizer using Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry
(ICP-AES), Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.4, p. 30 - 35 (2011)
309
(5) Flow sheet for total zinc: The flow sheet for total zinc in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample


Heating Cover with a watch glass, and digest for 30 minutes


Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total zinc in fertilizers (Exrtraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot 5 mL 10-mL volumetric flask, 3 flasks

← 0 mL, 2mL and 4 mL of zinc standard solution (25 μg / mL)
←　Hydrochloric acid (1+23) ( up to the marked line)
Measurement ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (206.191nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total zinc in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
310
4.9.2 Water-soluble zinc

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that indicate zinc content as a response modifier. This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.9.2.a-2017 or W-Zn.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, spray in an acetylene−air flame and measure the
atomic absorption with zinc at a wavelength of 213.9 nm to obtain water-soluble zinc (W-Zn) in an

equivalent quality.
c) Zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL): A zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
d) Zinc standard solutions (Zn 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric
e) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in d).
Comment 1 Instead of the zinc standard solution in (2), a zinc standard solution for the calibration
curve preparation can be prepared by using a zinc standard solution (Zn 1 mg/mL or
10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

1) Light source: A zinc hollow cathode lamp (when the continuous source method as the
background correction method is used, the light source is a deuterium lamp.)
(4) Test procedure

Comment 2 In the procedure in (4.1.1) a), it is also allowed to weigh 2.50 g of the analytical
311
sample and transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask.


as Zn) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
2) Add about 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5), and add water up to the marked line.
4) Obtain the zinc content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble zinc
(W-Zn) in the analytical sample.
Comment 5 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using a preparation sample
(solid). As a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 10 % (mass
fraction), 2 % (mass fraction) and 0.01 % (mass fraction) are 101.6 %, 101.9 % and
98.9 % as water-soluble zinc (W-Zn) respectively. In addition, recovery testing was
conducted using a preparation sample (fluid). As a result, the average rate of
recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction), 0.05 % (mass fraction) and 20
mg/kg are 99.6 %, 100.4 % and 100.6 % as water-soluble zinc respectively.
and a liquid microelement mixed fertilizer to evaluate the extract precision of fluid
fertilizers were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the
mg/kg (solid fertilizers) and 0.9 mg/kg (fluid fertilizers).
312

4)
RSD r
5) 6)
s I(T) RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Liquid microelement
7 0.230 0.001 0.5 0.003 1.5
mixed fertilizers
References
Testing Methods for Zinc in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research
Report of Fertilizer Vol. 6, p. 156 -164 (2013)
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc: The flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in fertilizers is
shown below:
5.00 g analytical
sample 500-mL volumetric flask.
(powdery)
← Water, About 400 mL
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure(4.1.1))
313
1.00 g analytical
(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in fertilizers
(Extraction procedure(4.1.2))
Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in fertilizers

314

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.9.2.b-2017 or W-Zn.b-1.
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the zinc at a wavelength of 213.856 nm to obtain
water-soluble zinc (W-Zn) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

equivalents.
c) Zinc standard solution (Zn 1 mg/mL): A zinc standard solution (Zn 1 mg/mL) traceable to
National Metrology.
d) Zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of zinc standard solution (Zn 1
mg/mL) to a 100-mL flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
e) Zinc standard solutions (Zn 1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of zinc standard solution (Zn 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
f) Zinc standard solutions (Zn 0.1 µg - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of zinc standard solution (Zn 10 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
Comment 1 Instead of the zinc standard solution in (2), a zinc standard solution for the calibration
curve preparation can be prepared by using a zinc standard solution (Zn 10 mg/mL)
curve in the range of high-level concentrations. Therefore, in case of using the
ICP-OES of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a zinc standard
device used.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g (2) of an analytical sample, and put it in a 100-mL volumetric flask.
315
Note (2) The sampling amount of the analytical sample is 10 g when the content in the sample
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble zinc.
following:
Zn) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the zinc content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble zinc
(W-Zn) in the analytical sample.

using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y =
−0.0007 + 0.984x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.998. Additionally, additive
recovery testing was conducted using a fluid compound fertilizer (1 brand) and a
home garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean recovery at
additive level of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 91.6 % and
95.9 % respectively.
316

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluidd mixed fertilizer 7 0.0677 0.0004 0.6 0.0005 0.7
Home garder-use
7 0.0107 0.0003 2.3 0.0004 4.2
References
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc: The flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in fluid fertilizers is
shown below:
1.00 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1 mg to a 100-mL volumetric flask

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in liquid fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution

Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble zinc in liquid fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
317
4.10 Copper
4.10.1 Total copper
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type C and its
symbol is 4.10.1.a-2017 or T-Cu.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and nitric acid−hydrochloric acid (1+3), and then
spray in an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with copper at a wavelength of
324.8 nm to obtain the total copper (T-Cu) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of

equivalents.
d) Copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL): A copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL)
e) Copper standard solutions (Cu 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL
volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
Comment 1 Instead of the copper standard solution in (2), a copper standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a copper standard solution
(Cu 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

1) Light source: A copper hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system using
continuous spectrum source, the light source is a deuterium lamp.)
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

318

added.
organic matters.
Comment 4 The sample solution prepared in (4.1.2) in 4.2.1.a can also be used.
1) Spray the copper standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the copper concentration and the indicated value
of the copper standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
3) Obtain the copper content from the calibration curve, and calculate the total copper (T-Cu) in
Note (6) If there is a possibility that the copper concentration in the sample solution will exceed
319
Comment 5 The copper concentration in the analytical sample can also be corrected by subjecting
the blank test solution to the same procedures as in 1) and 3) to obtain the copper
content in the blank test solution.
a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 0.15 % (mass fraction)
and 0.03 % (mass fraction) are 100.4 % and 99.6 % as total copper (T-Cu)
respectively.
repeatability.
mg/kg.
2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
1)
material fertilizer p (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
FAMIC-C-12 11 583 7 1.1 11 1.9 22 3.8
conducting Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry
2）　Average （the number of laboratory（p ）×test days （2） 6）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
3）　Repeatability standard deviation 7）　Reproducibility standard deviation
4）　Repeatability relative standard deviation 8）　Reproducibility relative standard deviation
References
Testing Methods for Copper in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 6, p. 165 - 173 (2013)
320
(5) Flow sheet for total copper: The flow sheet for total copper in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer (324.8nm)
Figure Flow sheet for total copper in fertilizers
321

(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to sludge fertilizers, etc. This testing method is classified as Type D
and its symbol is 4.10.1.b-2017 or T-Cu.b-1.
ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with copper at a
wavelength of 324.754 nm to quantify the total copper (T-Cu) in an analytical sample. In addition,
the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 6.

c) Hydrochloric acid:
d) Copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL): A copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL)
e) Copper standard solutions (Cu 25 µg/mL) (1): Dilute a predetermined amount of copper
standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a copper standard
solution (Cu 25 µg/mL).

0116.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

322
added.
organic matters.
following:
2) Add 2mL and 4 mL of copper standard solution (2.5 μg/mL) to volumetric flasks of 1) above,
then add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line to make a sample solution of Standard
Addition Method.
324.754 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added copper concentration and the corrected
7) Obtain the copper content from the intercept of the calibration curve to calculate the total
copper (T-Cu) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 The copper concentration in the analytical sample can also be corrected by subjecting
the blank test solution to the same procedures as in b) 1) - b) 4) and b) 6) - b) 7) to
obtain the copper content in the blank test solution.
that case, see 4.9.1.b Comment 5.
(49 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = − 5.5 + 1.062x and its
323
standard deviation.
mg/kg.
References
(5) Flow sheet for total copper: The flow sheet for total copper in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total copper in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
324
Sample solution

← 0, 2 and 4 mL of copper standard solution (25 μg / mL)
← Hydrochloric acid (1+23) ( up to the marked line)
Measurement ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (324.754 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total copper in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
325
4.10.2 Water-soluble copper

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers that indicate copper content as a response modifier.
This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.10.2.a-2017 or W-Cu.a-1.
atomic absorption with copper at a wavelength of 324.8 nm to obtain water-soluble copper (W-Cu)
5.

equivalent quality.
c) Copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL): A copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL)
d) Copper standard solutions (Cu 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL

1) Light source: A copper hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system using
(4) Test procedure

326

1) Spray the copper standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
as Cu) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the copper content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble copper
(W-Cu).
102.6 % as water-soluble copper (W-Cu) respectively. In addition, recovery testing
was conducted using a preparation sample (fluid). As a result, the average rate of
recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction), 0.05 % (mass fraction) and 20
mg/kg are 98.8 %, 99.3 % and 101.4 % as water-soluble copper respectively.
mg/kg (solid fertilizers) and 3 mg/kg (fluid fertilizers).
327

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Liquid microelement
7 0.0172 0.0001 0.7 0.0003 1.5
mixed fertilizers
References
Testing Methods for Copper in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 6, p. 165 - 173 (2013)
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble copper: The flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers is
shown below:
5.00 g analytical
(powdery)
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers

328
1.00 g analytical
(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers

Measurement procedure)
329

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.10.2.b-2017 or W-Cu.b-1.
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the copper at a wavelength of 327.396 nm to obtain
water-soluble copper (W-Cu) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

equivalents.
c) Copper standard solution (Cu 1 mg/mL): A copper standard solution (Cu 1 mg/mL)
d) Copper standard solutions (Cu 0.1 mg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 10 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flask, and
add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
e) Copper standard solutions (Cu 1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
f) Copper standard solutions (Cu 0.1 µg - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 10 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
(Cu 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
ICP-OES of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a copper
(4) Test procedure

330
flask.
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble copper.
following:
1) Spray the copper standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
Cu) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the copper content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble copper
(W-Cu).

using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = −
0.0006 + 0.966x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive
recovery testing was conducted using a fluid compound fertilizer (1 brand) and a
home garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean recovery at
additive level of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 93.5 % and
331

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
7 0.00976 0.00006 0.6 0.00033 3.4
References
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble copper: The flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fluid
1.00 g analytical sample 100-mL volumetric flask

Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution

Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble copper in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
332
4.11 Organic carbon and carbon-nitrogen ratio

4.11.1 Organic carbon
4.11.1.a Dichromate oxidation
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to sludge fertilizers and compost, etc. This testing method is
classified as Type C and its symbol is 4.11.1.a-2017 or O-C.a-1.
Add a potassium dichromate-sulfuric acid solution to an analytical sample and heat to oxidize
organic carbon with potassium dichromate. Quantify unconsumed potassium dichromate by
oxidation-reduction titration to obtain organic carbon (O-C). This test method is also referred to as
the Method of Tyulin. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 2.

quality.
c) 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution (1): Weigh 80 g of ammonium iron (II)
sulfate hexahydrate specified in JIS K 8979 into a 2000-mL beaker, and add 1000 mL of
sulfuric acid (1+50) to dissolve.
Standardization: Grind potassium dichromate reference material for volumetric analysis
specified in JIS K 8005 in an agate mortar to powder, heat at 150 ºC ± 2 ºC for 1 hour, let it
stand to cool in a desiccator, and then transfer about 1 g to a weighing dish, and weigh the
mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a 100-mL
volumetric flask, and add water up to the marked line to make the potassium dichromate
standard solution (1) (2). On each day to use a 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution,
transfer 10 mL of the potassium dichromate standard solution to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask,
add about 5 mL of sulfuric acid (1+2), and then conduct the procedures in (4.2) b) - c), and
calculate the factor of a 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution by the following
formula:
Factor (f) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution

= W1 × (A/100) × (6/294.18) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3)/C
= (W1×A/V3) × (30/294.18)
W1： Mass (g) of potassium dichromate weighed

A： Purity (% (mass fraction)) of potassium dichromate
V1： Volume (10 mL) of potassium dichromate solution transferred
V2： Constant volume (100 mL) of potassium dichromate solution
V3： Volume (mL) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution needed for titration
C： Set concentration (0.2 mol/L) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution
d) Potassium dichromate-sulfuric acid solution (1): Weigh 40 g of potassium dichromate

specified in JIS K 8517 to a 3000-mL beaker. Add 1000 mL of water to dissolve, and further
add gradually 1000 mL of sulfuric acid while cooling and mixing.
e) N-Phenylanthranilic acid solution: Dissolve 0.2 g of N-phenylanthranilic acid of no less
than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity and 0.2 g of sodium carbonate specified in JIS K 8625 in a
small amount of water, and add water to make 100 mL.

(2) This corresponds to the standard potassium dichromate solution (0.2 M (1/6 K2Cr2O7)
solution) in 7.1 B 1) in the Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992).
333
b) Sample digestion flask (3): A 100-mL borosilicate glass volumetric flask 100 mL (180 mm
total height, 13 mm mouth diameter)
Note (3) Distinguish the volumetric flask used in digestion as a sample digestion flask and do
not use it for any other purposes.
(4) Test procedure

(4.1) Dichromate oxidation: Conduct oxidation as follows:
a) Weigh 0.05 g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg (4), and transfer to a sample
digestion flask.
b) Add 25 mL of potassium dichromate-sulfuric acid solution.
c) Heat on a hot plate at 200 ºC until organic matters are completely digested (5).
d) After immediate cooling is complete, precisely adjust to 100 mL with water to make a sample
solution.
e) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) and d) using another sample digestion flask to
prepare the blank test solution.
Note (4) Up to about 28 mg as organic carbon (O-C).

(5) Heat for no less than 1 hour after boiling
from a test sample prepared in 2.3.3 Grinding Comment 1.
a) Transfer 20 mL of the sample solution to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add a 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution drop-by-drop until the brown color of
dichromate ion almost disappears from the sample solution.
c) Add about a 0.25 mL of N-phenylanthranilic acid solution (6), and titrate with a 0.2 mol/L
ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution until the color of the solution changes from dark
red-purple to blue-green.
d) Transfer 20 mL of the blank test solution to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask, and conduct the
procedures in b) - c) to titrate.
e) Calculate the organic carbon (O-C) in the analytical sample by the following formula:
Organic carbon (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= (V4－V5) × C × f × (12.011/4)/W2× (100/1000) × (V6/ V7)
= (V4－V5) × f × (12.011/40)/W2
V4： Volume (mL) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution needed for the
titration of the blank test solution
V5： Volume (mL) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution needed for the
titration of the sample solution
C： Set concentration (0.2 mol/L) of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution
f： Factor of 0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution
V6： Predetermined volume (100 mL) of the sample solution and the blank test
solution in (4.1) d)
334
V7： Transferred volume (20 mL) of the sample solution and the blank test solution
subjected to titration in (4.2) a) and (4.2) d)
Note (6) About 5 drops with a 1-mL - 2-mL Komagome pipette. Add the same volume to the
sample solution and the blank test solution.
Comment 2 The results of the collaborative study to determine a certified reference material
fertilizer were analyzed using a three-level nesting analysis of variance. Table 1
repeatability.
4)
RSD r
5) 6)
s I(T) RSD I(T)
7)
sR
8) 9)
RSD R
1) 3) 3) 3) 3)
FAMIC-C-12 12 20.2 0.3 1.5 0.5 2.3 0.6 3.1
conducting Dichromate oxidation
References
1) Yuji SHIRAI, Yuko SEKINE, and Toshiaki HIROI: Validation of Determination Method
for Organic Form Carbon in Sludge Fertilizer and Compost, Research Report of
Fertilizer, Vol.3, p. 117 - 122 (2010)
(5) Flow sheet for organic carbon: The flow sheet for organic carbon in sludge fertilizers and
compost, etc. is shown below:
335
0.05 g Weigh to the order of 0.1 mg into a sample digestion flask.

analytical sample (Up to about 28 mg as organic carbon.)
← 25 mL potassium dichromate-sulfuric acid solution
Heating Boil for about 1 hour, 200 ºC
Cooling Immediately
← Water (fill up to100 mL)
20 mL aliquot 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for organic carbon in sludge fertilizers and compost, etc.
(Dichromate oxidation procedure)
Sample solution
Adding 0.2 mol/L Ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution

drop by drop (until the brown color of dichromate ion
almost disappears from the solution)
← About 0.25 mL N-phenylanthranilic acid solution
0.2 mol/L ammonium iron (II) sulfate solution

Titration
(until the solution becomes blue-green)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for organic carbon in sludge fertilizers and compost, etc.
336
4.11.1.b Combustion method

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to compost and sludge fertilizers. This testing method is classified
as Type B and its symbol is 4.11.1.b-2017 or O-C.b-1.
Drop hydrochloric acid (1+3) to an analytical sample and evaporate inorganic carbon as carbon
dioxide, then thermally decompose carbon compounds using a total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer
by the combustion method to measure carbon dioxide gas with a thermal conductivity detector and
obtain organic carbon (O-C) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

a) Sea sand: Particle diameter 425 µm - 850 µm
equivalent quality.
Comment 1 Sea sand (particle diameter 425 µm - 850 µm) is commercially sold by FUJIFILM
Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd. and YONEYAMA YAKUHIN KOGYO Co., Ltd.

a) Total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method: A total nitrogen-total
carbon analyzer configured on the basis of the principle of the combustion method (modified
Dumas’ method).
1) Turn on the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method (1), and adjust so
that stable indicated values can be obtained.
(i) Combustion gas: Oxygen having purity no less than 99.99 % (volume percentage)
(ii) Carrier gas: Helium having purity no less than 99.99 % (volume percentage)
Note (1) The setup of the program and the parameters of the analyzer are according to the
specification and the operation method of the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the
combustion method used.
(4) Test procedures: Conduct measurement as shown below. However, confirm that there is no
difference from the measured value of organic carbon obtained in advance according to
4.11.1.a by using an analytical sample.
(4.1) Hydrochloric acid treatment

a) Weigh 0.05 g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg, and transfer to a container for
combustion.
b) Cover the analytical sample with about 0.2 g of sea sand and moisten the analytical sample by
dropping a few drops of water.
c) After dropping 0.5 mL - 0.7 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+3) little by little (2), drop about 0.3
mL of water (3) (4).
d) Heat a container for combustion on a hot plate at 100 ºC for 90 minutes to dry and harden it.
e) Put the container for combustion at 105 °C ± 2 °C into a drying apparatus and heat for 30
minutes (5).
f) After heating, let it stand to cool to make a test sample.
Note (2)The additive amount of hydrochloric acid (1+3) is merely a target. It is enough to make
337
the whole analytical sample come into contact with hydrochloric acid. Let it stand for a
short time in the case of producing bubbles.
(3) In some cases, it is not necessary to add water due to the capacity of a container.
(4) Shake calmly the container for combustion to make the analytical sample come into
complete contact with hydrochloric acid.
(5) Remove hydrochloric acid completely
from a test sample prepared in 2.3.3 Grinding Comment 1.
Comment 3 When it is confirmed that, for example, the volatilization of hydrogen chloride is not
detected by using a test paper, etc. and hydrochloric is completely removed in the
procedure d), the procedure e) can be skipped.
(4.2) Measurement: Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of a
total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method.
a) Measurement conditions for the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion
method: Set up the measurement conditions for the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer
considering the following:
Combustion temperature: No less than 870 ºC
1) Turn on the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method (1), and adjust so
that stable indicated values can be obtained.
2) Weigh a predetermined amount of the standard for calibration curves (6) to the order of 0.1 mg
into a combustion vessel.
3) Insert the combustion vessel into the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion
method, and read the indicated value.
4) Conduct the procedure in 3) for another combustion vessel for a blank test, and read the
indicated value.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the carbon content and the indicated value of the
standard for calibration curves and the blank test for calibration curves.
1) Insert the combustion vessel containing the test sample to the total nitrogen-total carbon
analyzer by the combustion method, and read the indicated value.
2) Obtain the carbon content from the calibration curve, and calculate organic carbon in the
analytical sample.
Note (6) Standard for calibration curves: DL-Aspartic acid (purity no less than 99 % (mass
fraction)), EDTA (purity no less than 99 % (mass fraction)), hippuric acid (purity no less
than 98 % (mass fraction)) or other reagents having equivalent purity recommended by
the total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method used.
(mass fraction)) of Combustion method and the measurement value (xi) of
Dichromate oxidation was conducted to evaluate trueness using sludge fertilizers and
compost (total 25 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = 0.004 + 1.009x
and its correlation coefficient (r) were 0.999.
Table 1 shows results and analysis results from a collaborative study for test method
validation.
338
Table 1 Results and statistical analysis results from a collaborative study

for the organic carbon method
Number 2)
sr
4)
RSD r
5)
sR
6)
RSD R
7)
Mean
Sample name of 3) 3) 3)
laboratori (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Human waste sludge
8 34.96 0.07 0.2 0.62 1.8
fertilizer
Industrial sludge
8 15.13 0.20 1.3 0.42 2.8
fertilizer
Calcined sludge
9 9.45 0.17 1.8 0.38 4.0
fertilizer
Composted sludge
9 38.20 0.27 0.7 0.73 1.9
fertilizer
Compost 9 20.50 0.76 3.7 0.94 4.6
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Aiko YANO, Satono AKIMOTO, and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Organic Carbon
in Sludge Fertilizer and Compost by Hydrochloric Acid-Treated Combustion Method,
2) Aiko YANO and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Organic Carbon in Sludge Fertilizer
and Compost by Hydrochloric Acid-Treated Combustion Method: A Collaborative
Study, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 7, p. 22 - 27 (2014)
339
(5) Flow sheet for organic carbon: The flow sheet for organic carbon in sludge fertilizers and
compost, etc. is shown below:
0.05 g Weigh to the order of 0.1 mg into a combustion vessel.

analytical sample
← Cover the analytical sample with 0.2 g of sea sand
and drop a few drops of water.
← Drop 0.5mL - 0.7mL of hydrochloric acid (1+3) little by little
← Drop 0.3mL of water
Heating Heat to make it dry for 90 minutes, at 100 ºC
Drying Heat to make it dry for 30 minutes, at 105 ºC
Test sample
Measurement Total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion method
Figure Flow sheet for organic carbon by the combustion method
340
Reference: Chromatograms of the standard for calibration curves and an analytical sample are
shown below:
1) Total carbon in a standard calibration curve (DL-Aspartic acid)
2) Total carbon in an analytical sample (sludge fertilizer)
Reference figures Chromatograms of organic carbon.
Measurement conditions for total nitrogen-total carbon analyzer by the combustion

method
Combustion gas: Highly pure oxygen, purity no less than 99.99995 % (volume
fraction), flow rate 200 mL/min
Carrier gas: Highly pure helium, purity no less than 99.9999 % (volume fraction),
flow rate 80 mL/min
Separation column: A silica gel stainless column (length 1m)
Detector: Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
Measurement cycle: Purge time = 60 seconds, circulation combustion time = 300
seconds, measurement time = 270 seconds
Current value of Detector: 160 mA
Temperature conditions: Reaction furnace temperature: 870 ºC
Reaction furnace temperature: 600 °C
Detector temperature: 100 °C
341
4.11.2 Carbon-nitrogen ratio

4.11.2.a Calculation with organic carbon and total nitrogen
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to compost and sludge fertilizers. This testing method is classified as
Type A (Def-C) and its symbol is 4.11.2.a-2017 or C/N.a-1.
Calculate carbon-nitrogen ratio (CN ratio) by dividing the organic carbon obtained in 4.11.1 by the
total nitrogen obtained in 4.1.1.
(2) The calculation of carbon-nitrogen ratio

a) Calculate the carbon-nitrogen ratio (CN ratio) in an analytical sample by the following
formula:
Carbon-nitrogen ratio in an analytical sample

= O-C/T-N
O-C： Organic carbon (% (mass fraction)) (1) in the analytical sample obtained in
4.11.1
T-N： Total nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) (1) in the analytical sample obtained in
4.1.1
Note (1) O-C and T-N use raw data without rounding numerical value
342
4.12 Sulfur
4.12.1 Total sulfur content
4.12.1.a Potassium permanganate analysis
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers mainly containing ferrous sulfate (iron (II) sulfate)
(FeSO4)) among sulfur and its compound. This testing method is classified as Type D and its
symbol is 4.12.1.a-2017 or T-S.a-1.
Dissolve an analytical sample in water and diluted sulfuric acid, add phosphoric acid and then titrate
ferrous sulfate (iron (II) sulfate) (FeSO4)) by oxidation-reduction with a potassium permanganate
solution to obtain the total sulfate (T-SO3). In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 1.

quality.
c) Phosphoric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 9005 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
d) 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution: Dissolve 3.16 g of potassium permanganate
specified in JIS K 8247 in about 800 mL of water to boil and add water to make 1000 mL and
leave at rest 1 - 2 day(s). Further filter with a funnel type glass filter (G4) and store in a
colored bottle. Or, a reagent of equivalent quality (volumetric analysis grade) that is
commercially available.
Standardization: Dry sodium oxalate of reference materials for volumetric analysis specified
in JIS K 8005 at 200 ºC for 1 hour and let it stand to cool in a desiccator, and then put about
0.3 g into a weighing dish to measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add about 250 mL of
sulfuric acid (1+20) cooled down to 25 ºC - 30 ºC after boiling and dissolve. Add about 40
mL of 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution while gently shaking for about 1 minute.
Heat up to 55 ºC - 60 ºC after the red color of a potassium permanganate solution disappears.
Titrate with a 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution while keeping the temperature
and continue titrating until the color of the solution becomes light red (1). Calculate the factor
of a 0.02 potassium permanganate solution by the following formula.
Factor (f) of 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution

= W1 × (A/100) × ((2/5)/133.999) × ((1000/V1）/C)
= W1 × (A/V1) × 1.4925
W1： Mass (g) of sodium oxalate sampled

A： Purity (% (mass fraction)) of sodium oxalate sampled
V1： Volume (mL) of 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate needed for titration
C： 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution
Note (1) The endpoint is reached when the color of solution keeps as it is for 30 seconds after
coloring

a) Magnetic stirrer:
(4) Test procedure

343
a) Weigh 0.5 g - 1 g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg, and transfer to a 200-mL tall
beaker.
b) Add about 50 mL of water and about 15 mL of sulfuric acid (1+5) and shake with a magnetic
stirrer to dissolve.
c) Immediately add about 1 mL of phosphate, and then titrate with a 0.02 mol/L potassium
permanganate solution until the color of the solution becomes light red (2).
d) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - c) using another 200-mL tall beaker to titrate
(2)
.
e) Calculate the total sulfur content (T-SO3) in an analytical sample by the following formula.
Total sulfur content (% (mass fraction)) = (5 × 0.02 × f × (V2−V3)/1000×80.064)/W2×100

= (f × (V2−V3))/W2 × 0.80064

f ： Factor of 0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution
Note (2) Titrate using a brown burette.
Comment 1 Recovery testing was conducted using a reagent (ferrous sulfate heptahydrate); as a
result, the average rate of recovery was 29.1 % (mass fraction) as total sulfate
content (T-SO3). The recovery rate to a theoretical value was 101.0 %.
References
1) Yasushi SUGIMURA and Shinjiro IZUKA: Method validation of Redox Titration for
Determination of Sulfur content (as sulfur trioxide) in Fertilizers of Ferrous sulfate and
its mixture materials, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.3, 25 - 29 (2010).
2） JIS K 8978： Iron (II) sulfate heptahydrate (Reagent) (2008)
(5) Flow sheet for total sulfur content: The flow sheet for total sulfur content in fertilizers
mainly containing ferrous sulfate is shown below.
0.5 g - 1g
Weigh to the order of 0.1 mg into a 200-mL tall beaker
analytical sample
←　About 50 mL of water
←　About 15 mL of sulfuric acid (1+5)
Dissolution Shake to mix
←　About 1 mL of phosphate
0.02 mol/L potassium permanganate solution
Titration
(until the solution becomes light red)
Figure Flow sheet for total sulfur content (raw material: ferrous sulfate)
344
4.12.1.b Barium chloride gravimetric analysis

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers mainly containing sulfur or sulfuric acid among sulfur
and its compound. This testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 4.12.1.b-2017 or
T-S.b-1.
Dissolve an analytical sample in a potassium hydroxide-ethanol solution and add hydrogen peroxide
to oxidize, and measure the mass of barium sulfate (BaSO4) formed by reaction with barium
chloride to obtain the total sulfate content (T-SO3). In addition, the performance of this testing

a) Potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution: Dissolve 10 g of potassium hydroxide specified in
JIS K 8574 in 50 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102, further add 50 mL of water.
b) Hydrogen peroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent (30 % (mass fraction)) specified in JIS K
equivalent quality.
d) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed (HNO3 60 % (mass fraction)) Reagent specified in JIS K 8541
e) Barium chloride solution (1): Dissolve 100 g of barium chloride dihydrate specified in JIS K
8155 in water to make 1000 mL.
f) Silver nitrate solution (2 g/100mL): Dissolve 2 g of silver nitrate specified in JIS K 8550 in
c) Crucible: After heating porcelain crucible or platinum crucible in an electric furnace at 800
ºC in advance, let it stand to cool in a desiccator and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
d) Drying apparatus: Drying apparatus that can be adjusted to 110 ºC - 120 ºC.
e) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can be kept at 800 ºC ± 5 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

(4.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as follows (2):
a) Weigh 1 g - 5 g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg, and transfer to a 200-mL tall
beaker.
b) Add about 50 mL of potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution, cover with a watch glass and heat
on a hot plate to boil (3).
c) After standing to cool, transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked
line.
d) Filter with Type 3 filter paper (4) to make a sample solution.
Note (2) Omit extraction if fluid fertilizers are made from only sulfuric acid and all materials are
dissolved
(3) Until sulfur content is dissolved. About 5 minutes when raw materials, etc. are not
dissolved.
345
(4) Omit the procedures in d) when all materials are dissolved.

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 30 mg - 170 mg as SO3) of sample
solution to a 300-mL tall beaker. (5)
b) Add about 50 mL of water and about 5 mL of hydrogen peroxide and heat in a water bath at
80 ºC - 90 ºC for about 1 hour while sometimes shaking (6).
c) After standing cool, add 1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) (7), and add
hydrochloric acid (2+1) until the color of the solution disappears (8).
d) Further add hydrochloric acid (2+1), add water to make about 100 mL and boil on a hotplate
for about 5 minutes.
e) Immediately add about 6 mL of thermal barium chloride solution (9) while sometimes shaking
in a water bath at 80 ºC - 90 ºC (10).
f) After leaving at rest for a few minutes (11), add a few drops of thermal barium chloride solution
and check that new precipitate of barium sulfate is no longer formed.
g) Further add about 2 mL of thermal barium chloride solution (100 g/L) while shaking to mix
(12)
.
h) After heating in a water bath at 80 ºC - 90 ºC for about 2 hours, stop the heat source of water
bath and let it stand to cool for no less than 4 hours.(5)
i) Filter with filter paper (Type 5 - C), wash a container with water and move the whole
precipitate to a filter paper.
j) Wash the precipitate and the filter paper (Type 5 - C) with water several times (13).
k) Put the precipitate together with the filter paper into the crucible.
l) Put the crucible into a drying apparatus and dry at about 110 ºC - 120 ºC for 1 hour.
m) After standing to cool, put the crucible into an electric funnel and heat gently to char (14).
n) Ignite at about 800 ºC ± 5 ºC for 2 hours (14).
o) After ignition (15), move the crucible to a desiccator and let it stand to cool (16).
p) Measure the mass of crucible to the order of 0.1 mg.
q) Calculate the total sulfur content (T-SO3) in an analytical sample by the following formula.
Total sulfur content (% (mass fraction)) = (A × 0.343)/(W × V2/V1) × 100

= 34.3 × A × V1/(W×V2)
A： Mass (g) of the precipitate in p)

V1： Constant volume (mL) of sample solution
V2： Volume (mL) of sample solution transferred
Note (5) Weigh 1g - 5g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg if the fluid fertilizers of the
analytical sample are made from only sulfuric acid and all materials are dissolved.
(6) It can be suspended after the procedures end.
(7) A pH meter can be used for neutralization.
(8) Omit the procedures in c) if fluid fertilizers are made from only sulfuric acid and all
materials are dissolved.
(9) Heated up to 70 ºC - 80 ºC in a water bath in advance.
(10) Add drop-by-drop.
(11) Until precipitate settles.
(12) Add a barium chloride solution slightly excessively to reduce the solubility of barium
sulfate.
(13) Wash the precipitate until a white turbidity is no longer formed when about 5 mL of
346
nitric acid (1+2) and about 1 mL of silver nitrate solution (2 g/100 mL) are added to
about 20 mL of washing.
(14) Example of charring and incineration procedure: After raising the temperature from
(15) To prevent a crucible from chipping, it is recommended to let it stand to cool gently in
an electric furnace until the temperature of an electric furnace falls to no more than
200 ºC.
(16) Time to let it stand to cool in a desiccator should be constant. In the case of a porcelain
crucible, it is about 45 - 60 minutes.
Comment 1 Testing was conducted using sulfur simple substance fertilizers containing no
materials (2 samples); as a result, the quantitative value of the total sulfur content
(T-SO3) was 99.9 % - 100.1 % to a theoretical value.
method validation.

for total sulfur content with the barium chroride gravimetric analysis (analized as surfur (S))
2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Sample Number of Mean Mean sr RSD r sR RSD R
1)
name laboratories (%)
8)
(%)
8)
(%)
8)
(%) (%)
8)
(%)
Surfur
8 8.32 3.33 0.02 0.7 0.05 1.4
material a
Surfur
10 12.71 5.09 0.03 0.6 0.14 2.8
material b
Surfur
9 247.6 99.17 0.24 0.2 1.39 1.4
material c
Surfur
8 245.6 98.37 0.18 0.2 0.30 0.3
material d
Surfur
8 1.41 0.564 0.002 0.4 0.003 0.6
material e
Surfur
9 2.89 1.157 0.001 0.1 0.010 0.9
material f
2) Total mean as surfur trioxid (SO3 ) (n =number of laboratories × number of repetition (2))
3) Total mean as surfur (S) obtained by dividing the total mean in 2) by 2.4969
8) Mass fraction
347
References
1） JIS K 8088： Sulfur (Regent) (2010)
2） JIS K 8217： Iron ores - Methods for determination of sulfur content (1994)
3) Edited by KANTO CHEMICAL CO., INC.: Technique on Chemical Analysis of Regent
- Practical Basic Technique and Knowledge, p. 112 - 120 (2009)

4) Yasushi SUGIMURA Validation of Gravimetric Analysis for Determination of Sulfur
Content (as Sulfur Trioxide) in Sulfur and its Compounds as Fertilizers, Research
Report of Fertilizer, Vol.4, P. 9 - 15 (2011)
5) Shin ABE, Chika SUZUKI and Yuji SHIRAI: Testing Method of the Total Amount of
Sulfur Content (as Sulfur Trioxide): A Collaborative Study, Research Report of
Fertilizer, Vol. 7, p. 28 - 35 (2014)
mainly containing sulfur and sulfuric acid is shown below.
1 g -5 g
Weigh to the order of 0.1 mg into a 200-mL tall beaker
analytical sample
←　About 50 mL of potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution
Heating Cover with a watch glass and boil
Standing to cool

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total sulfur content in fertilizers

348
Sample solution

←　About 5 mL of hydrogen peroxide
Heating 80 ºC - 90 ºC, 1 hour
Standing to cool
←　1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL)
Neutralization Hydrochloric acid (2+1) (until the solution becomes transparent)
←　About 1mL of hydrochloric acid (2+1)
←　Water (the liquid volume to reach about 100 mL)
Heating Boil, for 5 minutes
←　About 6 mL of thermal barium chloride solution, while shaking
Leaving at rest For several minutes
←　A few drops of thermal barium chloride solution
(Check that new precipitate is no longer formed)
←　About 2 mL of thermal barium chloride solution, while shaking
Standing to cool For no less than 4 hours, in a water bath whose heat source is stopped
Filtration Type 5-C filter paper
Transfer Type 5-C filter paper, water

←　Wash with water (until reaction of chloric matters disappears in filtrate)
Put Crucible
Drying Drying apparatus, about 100 ºC - 120 ºC, 1 hour
Standing to cool
Charring Heat gently in an electric furnace

Incineration Ignite at 800 ºC ± 5ºC, 2 hours
Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg

349
4.12.1.c Transmitted light analysis

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers mainly containing sulfur or sulfuric acid among sulfur
and its compound. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.12.1.c-2017 or
T-S.c-1.
Dissolve an analytical sample in a potassium hydroxide-ethanol solution and add hydrogen peroxide
to oxidize, and then measure the intensity of transmitted light of suspension of barium sulfate
(BaSO4) formed by the reaction with barium chloride as the absorbance to obtain total sulfur
content (T-SO3) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 2.
(2) Reagent, etc.: Reagents are as shown below.

b) Potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution: Dissolve 10 g of potassium hydroxide specified in
JIS K 8574 in 50 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102, further add 50 mL of water.
c) Hydrogen peroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent (H2O2 30 % (mass fraction)) specified in JIS
d) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Glycerin – ethanol solution (1+1): Add 250 mL of ethanol (95) specified in JIS K 8102 to
250 mL of glycerin specified in JIS K 8295.
f) Sodium chloride solution (1): Dilute 240 g of sodium chloride specified on JIS K 8150 in
water containing 20 mL of hydrochloric acid specified in JIS K 8180, further add water to
make 1000 mL.
g) Barium chloride solution: Sieve barium chloride dihydrate specified in JIS K 8155 to make
barium chloride whose particle size is between 710 μm - 500 μm.
h) Sulfate standard solution (SO3 2 mg/mL) (1): Heat potassium sulfate specified in JIS K 8962
until it becomes constant weight value at 800 ºC in advance, stand to cool it in a desiccator,
and then transfer 4.3531 g to a weighing dish. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to
a 1000-mL volumetric flask, and add water up to the marked line.
i) Sulfate standard solution (SO3 0.02 mg/mL - 0.1 mg/mL): Transfer 2mL - 10 mL of sulfate
standard solution (SO3 2 mg/mL) to 200-mL volumetric flasks step by step and add water up
to the marked line.
j) Phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 1 g of phenolphthalein specified in JIS K
b) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 30 °C ± 2 °C and 80 ºC - 90 ºC.
c) Magnetic stirrer:
d) Spectrophotometer: A spectrophotometer specified in JIS K 0115
(4) Test procedure

(4.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as follows (2):
a) Weigh 1 g - 2 g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg, and transfer to a 200-mL tall
beaker.
b) Add about 50 mL of potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution, cover with a watch glass and heat
on a hot plate to boil (3).
350
c) After standing to cool, transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked
line.
d) Filter with Type 3 filter paper (4) to make the extract.
Note (2) Omit extraction if fluid fertilizers are made from only sulfuric acid and all materials
are dissolved
(3) Until sulfur content is dissolved. About 5 minutes when raw materials, etc. are not
dissolved.
(4) Omit the procedures in d) when all materials are dissolved.
(4.2) Oxidation: Conduct oxidation as follows:

a) Transfer a predetermined volume (the equivalents of 5 mg - 200 mg as SO3) of sample
solution to a 300-mL tall beaker (5).
b) Add about 50 mL of water and about 5 mL of hydrogen peroxide and heat in a water bath at
80 ºC - 90 ºC for about 1 hour while sometimes shaking (6).
c) After standing cool, add 1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL) (7), and add
hydrochloric acid (2+1) until the color of the solution disappears (8).
d) After standing to cool, transfer to a 200-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked
line.
e) Filter with 0.3μm glass filter paper.
Note (5) Weigh 1g - 5g of an analytical sample to the order of 0.1 mg if the fluid fertilizers of
the analytical sample are made from only sulfuric acid and all materials are dissolved.
(6) It can be suspended after the procedures end.
(7) A pH meter can be used for neutralization.
(8) Omit the procedures in c) if fluid fertilizers are made from only sulfuric acid and all
materials are dissolved.

a) Transfer 50 mL of filtrate to a 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask with screw cap.
b) Add about 10 mL of glycerin – ethanol solution (1+1) and about 5 mL of sodium chloride
solution in the Erlenmeyer flask with screw cap.
c) Warm up on a water bath at 30ºC ± 2 ºC.
d) After warming, add 0.30 g of barium chloride and stir with a magnetic stirrer for about 2
minutes.
e) Warm up on a water bath at 30ºC ± 2 ºC for about 4 minutes.
f) After warming, stir with a magnetic stirrer for about 3 minutes to make a sample solution.
g) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in a) - c) and f) using another 100-mL Erlenmeyer
flask with screw cap to prepare the blank test solution.
1) Transfer 50 mL of sulfate standard solution (SO3 0.02 mg/mL - 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL
Erlenmeyer flask with screw cap and conduct the procedure (4.3) b) - f) to make the SO3 1
mg/65 mL - 5 mg/65 mL sulfate standard solution for the calibration curve preparation.
351
2) Transfer 50 mL of water to another 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask with screw cap and conduct the
same procedures as 1) to make the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.
3) Measure absorbance at a wavelength of 450 nm of the sulfuric acid standard solutions for the
as the control (8) (9).
4) Prepare the calibration curve of the sulfuric acid concentration and absorbance of the sulfuric
acid standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) For the sample solution, conduct procedures similarly as in b) 3) to measure absorbance.
2) For the blank test solution, conduct procedures similarly as in 1) to measure absorbance, and
correct the absorbance obtained for the sample solution.
3) Obtain the sulfate (SO3) content from the calibration curve, and calculate the total sulfur
content (T-SO3) in the analytical sample.
Note (8) Measure right after stirring because barium sulfate easily precipitates.
(9) A spectrophotometer with automatic sample introducing device is preferable.
Comment 1 The range of calibration curve with linearity is SO3 1 mg/65 mL - 5 mg/65 mL and
the curve does not pass through the origin.
Comment 2 Testing was conducted using sulfur simple substance fertilizers containing no
materials (2 samples); as a result, the quantitative value of the total sulfur content
(T-SO3) was 98.4 % - 99.4 % to a theoretical value.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is about 1 %
(mass fraction).
References
1） JIS K 8001： General rule for test methods of reagents (2009)
2） JIS K 8088： Sulfur (Regent) (2010)
3) JAPAN Sewage Works Association: Sewage Sludge Analysis -2007-, p. 132 - 134 Tokyo
(1964)
4) Edited by KANTO CHEMICAL CO., INC.: Technique on Chemical Analysis of Regent -
Practical Basic Technique and Knowledge, p. 131 - 135 (2009)
5) Yasushi SUGIMURA: Method Validation of Turbidimetry for Determination of Sulfur
Content (as Sulfur Trioxide) in Fertilizers of Sulfur, Sulfuric acid and Its Mixture,
352
mainly containing sulfur and sulfuric acid is shown below.
1g-2g
analytical sample Weigh to the order of 0.1 mg into a 200-mL tall beaker
←　About 50 mL of potassium hydroxide/ethanol solution
Heating Cover with a watch glass and boil
Standing to cool

Filtrate
Figure 1 Flow sheet for total sulfur content in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Filtrate

(predetermined
volume)
←　About 5 mL of hydrogen peroxide
Standing to cool
←　1 - 2 drop(s) of phenolphthalein solution (1 g/100 mL)
Neutralization Hydrochloric acid (2+1) (until the color of solution becomes transparent)
Filtration 0.3μm glass filter paper
Filtrate
Figure 2 Flow sheet for total sulfur content in fertilizers (Oxidation procedure)
353
Filtrate
Aliquot Erlenmeyer flask Aliquot Erlenmeyer flask

(50 mL) with screw cap (50 mL) with screw cap
←　About 10 mL of glycerin – ethanol solution (1+1) →

←　About 5 mL of sodium chloride solution →
Warming 30 ºC Warming 30 ºC
←　Barium chloride 0.30 g
Stirring 2 minutes
Warming 30 ºC, 4 minutes
Stirring 3 minutes Stirring 3 minutes
Sample solution Blank test solution
Measurement Measurement
Spectrophotometer(450 nm) Spectrophotometer(450 nm)

(precipitate formation and measurement procedure)
354
4.13 Iron
4.13.1 Water-soluble iron
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers that indicate iron content as a response modifier. This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.13.1.a-2017 or W-Fe.a-1.
atomic absorption with iron at a wavelength of 248.3 nm to obtain water-soluble iron (W-Fe) in an

equivalents.
c) Iron standard solution (Fe 0.1 mg/mL): An iron standard solution (Fe 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
d) Iron standard solutions (Fe 0.5 µg/ mL - 5 µg/ mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of iron standard solution (Fe 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
Comment 1 Instead of the iron standard solution in (2), an iron standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using an iron standard solution (Fe
1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

1) Light source: An iron hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system using
(4) Test procedure

355

1) Spray the iron standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the iron concentration and the indicated value of
the iron standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for
as Fe) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the iron content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble iron (W-Fe)
in the analytical sample.
107.0 % as water-soluble iron (W-Fe) respectively. In addition, recovery testing was
conducted using a preparation sample (fluid). As a result, the average rate of
recovery at the content level of 1 % (mass fraction), 0.1 % (mass fraction) and
0.01 % (mass fraction) are 103.6 %, 105.7 % and 105.1 % as a water-soluble iron
(W-Fe) respectively.
356

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fluid compound fertilzier 7 0.244 0.002 0.6 0.003 1.4
Liquid microelement
7 0.099 0.001 0.5 0.003 2.9
mixed fertilizer
References
(Details), p.252, Yokendo, Tokyo (1988)
2) Shinei TAKAHASHI, Chika SUZUKI and Noriyuki SASAKI: Verification of
Performance Characteristics of Testing Method for Iron in Fertilizer by Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol. 7, p. 131 - 137 (2014)
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble iron: The flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers is
shown below:
5.00 g analytical
(powdery)
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers

357
1.00 g analytical
(Fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers

(Measurement procedure )
358

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.13.1.b-2017 or W-Fe.b-1.
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the iron at a wavelength of 259.940 nm to obtain
water-soluble iron(W-Fe) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

equivalents.
c) Iron standard solution (Fe 1 mg/mL): An iron standard solution (Fe 1 mg/mL) traceable to
National Metrology.
d) Iron standard solution (Fe 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of iron standard solution (Fe 1
mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the marked line.
e) Iron standard solutions (Fe 1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of iron standard solution (Fe 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
f) Iron standard solutions (Fe 0.1 µg - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of iron standard solution (Fe 10 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
Comment 1 Instead of the iron standard solution in (2), an iron standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using an iron standard solution (Fe
ICP-OES of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare an iron
(4) Test procedure

flask.
359
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble iron.
following:
1) Spray the iron standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the iron concentration and the indicated value of
the iron standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for
Fe) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the iron content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble iron (W-Fe)
in the analytical sample.

using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = 0.001 +
0.968x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999. Additionally, additive recovery
of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 96.5 % and 93.9 %
respectively.
360

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
7 0.0485 0.0003 0.5 0.0005 0.9
mixed fertilizer（fluid)
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fluid fertilizers is shown below:
1 g analytical sample Weigh to the order of 1mg into a 100-mL volumetric flask
Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure1 The flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution

Figure 2 The flow sheet for water-soluble iron in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
361
4.14 Molybdenum
4.14.1 Water-soluble molybdenum
4.14.1.a Sodium thiocyanate absorptiometric analysis
(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers that indicate molybdenum content as a response modifier.
This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 4.14.1.a-2017 or W-Mo.a-1.
Extract by adding water to an analytical sample, add sulfuric acid (1+1) and perchloric acid, further
add a sodium thiocyanate solution and a tin (II) chloride solution, and measure the absorbance with
thiocyanate complex formed by the reaction of reduced molybdenum (V) with thiocyanate ion to
obtain water-soluble molybdenum (W-Mo) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of

quality.
b) Perchloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8223 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Iron (III) sulfate solution (1): Dissolve 5 g of iron (III) sulfate specified in JIS K 8981 in
about 10 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1) and a proper amount of water, and further add water to
make 100 mL.
d) Sodium thiocyanate solution (1): Dissolve 50 g of sodium thiocyanate specified in JIS K
e) Tin (II) chloride solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate specified in JIS K
8136 in 80 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+1) while heating, then add water to make 200 mL.
f) Molybdenum standard solution (Mo 1 mg/mL) (1): After leaving at rest molybdenum (VI)
oxide (2) in a desiccator for about 24 hours to dry, put it to a 1,500 g weighing dish. Dissolve
in a small amount of water, transfer to a 1000 mL volumetric flask and add about 5 g of
sodium hydroxide specified in JIS K 8576 to dissolve and add water up to the marked line.
g) Molybdenum standard solution (Mo 0.01 mg/mL): Dilute a predetermined amount of
molybdenum standard solution (Mo 1 mg/mL) precisely by a factor of 100 with water.

(2) A reagent of no less than 99.5 % (mass fraction) in purity is commercially sold as
molybdenum (VI) oxide.
Comment 1 Instead of the molybdenum standard solution in (2), a molybdenum standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a molybdenum
standard solution (Mo 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National
Metrology.

(4) Test procedure
362

Comment 4 When the sample solution in d) contains organic matters that affect the determination,
put a predetermined amount of the sample solution to a 100-mL tall beaker, add a
small amount of sulfuric acid and nitric acid to heat and digest the organic matters
until white smoke of sulfuric acid evolves. After standing to cool, transfer the
solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line to filter.
The filtrate is prepared as the sample solution of (4.2) a).


a) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.01 mg - 0.3 mg
as Mo) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add about 5 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1), about 5 mL of perchloric acid and about 2 mL of iron
(III) sulfate solution.
c) Add about 16 mL of sodium thiocyanate solution and about 10 mL of tin (II) chloride solution
successively while shaking to mix and further add water up to the marked line (3).
Note (3) When the solution becomes muddy, centrifuge after the procedure in c). However, if it
is presumed that copper (I) thiocyanate caused the muddying, centrifuge after leaving
at rest for 1 hour.
1) Transfer 1 mL - 30 mL of molybdenum standard solution (Mo 0.01 mg/mL) to 100-mL
2) Conduct the same procedure as (4.2) b) - c) to make the 0.01 mg/100 mL - 0.3 mg/100 mL
molybdenum standard solution for the calibration curve preparation.
363

4) Measure absorbance at wavelength 460 nm of the molybdenum standard solution for the
as the control.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the molybdenum concentration and the
absorbance of the molybdenum standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) c), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4).
2) Obtain the molybdenum content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble
molybdenum (W- Mo).
result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of 2.5 % (mass fraction) and
0.1 % (mass fraction) are 100.2 % and 100.8 % as water-soluble molybdenum
(W-Mo) respectively.

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Liquid microelement
7 0.0228 0.0001 0.4 0.0002 0.8
mixed fertilizers
References
Performance Characteristics of Testing Method for Water-soluble Molybdenum Content
in Fertilizer by Sodium Thiocyante Absorptiometric Analysis, Research Report of
Fertilizer Vol. 7, p. 138 - 144 (2014)
364
(5) Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum: The flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum
in fertilizers is shown below:
(powdery)
Sample solution
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in fertilizers
1.00 g analytical
(fluid)
Shaking to mix
Sample solution
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in fertilizers

Sample solution
Aliquot
amount)
← About 5 mL of sulfuric acid (1+1)
← About 5 mL of perchloric acid
← About 2 mL of iron (III) sulfate solution
←16 mL of sodium thiocyanate solution (while shaking to mix)
←About 10 mL of tin (II) chloride solution (while shaking to mix)
Leaving at rest Until the red color of iron disappears
Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in fertilizers

365

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.14.1.b-2017 or W-Mo.b-1.
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the molybdenum at a wavelength of 202.030 nm to obtain
water-soluble molybdenum (W-Mo) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this

equivalents.
c) Molybdenum standard solution (Mo 1 mg/mL): A molybdenum standard solution (Mo 1
d) Molybdenum standard solution (Mo 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of molybdenum
standard solution (Mo 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid
e) Molybdenum standard solutions (Mo 1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of molybdenum standard solution (Mo 0.1 mg/mL) to
f) Molybdenum standard solutions (Mo 0.1 µg - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1): Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of molybdenum standard solution (Mo 0.1 mg/mL) to
Comment 1 Instead of the molybdenum standard solution in (2), a molybdenum standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a molybdenum
standard solution (Mo 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a molybdenum standard
device used.
(4) Test procedure

366
flask.
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble molybdenum.
following:
1) Spray the molybdenum standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the molybdenum concentration and the indicated
value of the molybdenum standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
Mo) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the molybdenum content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble
molybdenum (W- Mo).

Comment 5 The comparison of the measurement value (yi ： 0.00342 % (mass fraction) -
0.20374 % (mass fraction)) of ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry and the
measurement value (xi) of the Sodium thiocyanate absorptiometric analysis was
conducted to evaluate trueness using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a
regression equation was y = 0.0004 + 0.982x and its correlation coefficient (r) was
0.999. Additionally, additive recovery testing was conducted using a fluid compound
fertilizer (1 brand) and a home garden-use mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the
mean recovery at additive level of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction)
were 95.4 % and 97.6 % respectively.
367

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
7 0.00359 0.00001 0.3 0.00014 4.0
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in fluid fertilizers is shown below:
Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in liquid fertilizers

Sample solution

Figure 2 Flow sheet for water-soluble molybdenum in liquid fertilizers
368
4.15 Cobalt
4.15.1 Water-soluble cobalt
(1) Summary
Type E and its symbol is 4.15.1.a-2017 or W-Co.a-1.
atomic absorption with cobalt at a wavelength of 240.7 nm to obtain water-soluble cobalt (W-Co) in
an analytical sample.

equivalents.
c) Cobalt standard solution (Co 0.1 mg/mL): A cobalt standard solution (Co 0.1 mg/mL)
d) Cobalt standard solutions (Co 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 25 mL of cobalt standard solution (Co 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric
Comment 1 Instead of the cobalt standard solution in (2), a cobalt standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a cobalt standard solution (Co

1) Light source: An cobalt hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system
using continuous spectrum source, the light source is a deuterium lamp.)
(4) Test procedure

flask.
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble cobalt.
369
1) Spray the cobalt standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the cobalt concentration and the indicated value
of the cobalt standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
Co) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the cobalt content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble cobalt
(W-Co) in the analytical sample.
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in fluid fertilizers is shown below:
Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in fertilizers

Sample solution
Figure 2 The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in fertilizers

370

(1) Summary
Type D and its symbol is 4.15.1.b-2017 or W-Co.b-1.
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the cobalt at a wavelength of 228.616 nm to obtain
water-soluble cobalt (W-Co) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

equivalents.
c) Cobalt standard solution (Co 1 mg/mL): A cobalt standard solution (Co 1 mg/mL) traceable
d) Cobalt standard solution (Co 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of cobalt standard solution
(Co 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line.
e) Cobalt standard solutions (Co 1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of cobalt standard solution (Co 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
f) Copper standard solutions (Cu 0.1 µg - 1 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of copper standard solution (Cu 10 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
Comment 1 Instead of the cobalt standard solution in (2), a cobalt standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a cobalt standard solution (Co
ICP-OES of an axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a cobalt
(4) Test procedure

371
flask.
is less than 0.01 % (mass fraction) as water-soluble cobalt.
following:
1) Spray the cobalt standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the cobalt concentration and the indicated value
of the cobalt standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution
Co) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
4) Obtain the cobalt content from the calibration curve, and calculate the water-soluble cobalt
(W-Co) in the analytical sample.

using fluid fertilizers (12 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = 0.0001
+ 0.927x, and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.996. Additionally, additive recovery
of 0.01 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 94.6 % and 98.4 %
respectively.
372

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garder-use
7 0.0105 0.0003 3.3 0.0005 4.8
References
(5) Flow sheet: The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in fluid fertilizers is shown below:
Shaking to mix
Filtration
Sample solution
Figure 1 The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in liquid fertilizers
Sample solution

Figure 2 The flow sheet for water-soluble cobalt in liquid fertilizers

373
5. Harmful components
5.1 Mercury
5.1.a Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry
(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to fertilizers excluding fluid sludge fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type B and its symbol is 5.1.a-2017 or Hg.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid- perchloric acid, and then reduce mercury (II) in the
solution with tin (II) chloride. Aerate this solution, and measure the atomic absorption for generated
mercury vapor at a wavelength of 253.7 nm to obtain mercury (Hg) in an analytical sample. In

c) Perchloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
d) Sulfuric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or equivalents.
e) Tin (II) chloride solution: To 10 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate (1) specified in JIS K 8136,
add 60 mL of sulfuric acid (1+20), and stir while heating to dissolve. After cooling is
complete, add water to make 100 mL.
f) L-cystein solution: To 10 mg of L-cystein (HSCH2CH(NH2)COOH) of no less than 98.0 %
in purity, add 100 mL of water and 2 mL of nitric acid to dissolve, and further add water to
make 1000 mL. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
g) Tri-n-butyl phosphate (2): A reagent of no less than 98 % in purity.
h) Mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL): A mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL)
i) Mercury standard solution (Hg 10 µg/mL) (3) (4): Transfer 10 mL of mercury standard
solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100 mL of volumetric flask and add an L-cystein solution up to
the marked line.
j) Mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL) (3) (5): Dilute a predetermined amount of
mercury standard solution (Hg 10 µg/mL) with an L-cystein solution to prepare a mercury
standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL).
Note (1) Use a reagent with low mercury content, such as for mercury analysis or for harmful
metal analysis.
(2) Use as an anti-forming agent.
(4) Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 4 months after preparation.
Comment 1 Instead of the mercury standard solution in (2), a mercury standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a mercury standard solution
(Hg 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
a) Mercury atomic absorption spectrometer: Mercury atomic absorption spectrometer using
a method for producing the atomic vapor by reduction specified in JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: Low-pressure mercury lamp
374
be set to 180 °C - 200 °C.

c) Sample digestion flask (6): A 100-mL borosilicate glass volumetric flask 100 mL (180 mm
total height, 13 mm mouth diameter)
Note (6) Distinguish the volumetric flask used in digestion as a sample digestion flask and do
not use it for any other purposes.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and transfer to a sample digestion flask.
b) Add about 10 mL of nitric acid, and heat on a hot plate or sand bath for a short time (7).
c) After standing to cool, add about 10 mL of perchloric acid, and digest by heating on a hot
plate or sand bath at 180 ºC - 200 ºC for about 30 minutes - 1 hour (8).
d) After standing to cool, fill up with water to 100 mL to make a sample solution.
e) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - d) using another sample digestion flask to
prepare the blank test solution.
Note (7) If it foams vigorously, leave at rest overnight.

(8) The sample solution and the blank test solution should be stored when they are cooled
after the procedure in (4.1) c). After filling up the sample solution and the blank test
solution with water, immediately conduct the procedure in (4.2).
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement by cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry specified
in JIS K 0121. Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the
atomic absorption spectrometer used. An example of measurement using a mercury atomic
absorption spectrometer is shown below:
1) Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step, and add water up to the marked line. Transfer 5 mL of these solutions to
respective reduction vessels, add 1 drop of tri-n-butyl phosphate (9), to make mercury standard
solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Add 5 mL of water to another reduction vessel, and add 1 drop of tri-n-butyl phosphate (9), to
make the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation.
3) Connect the reduction vessel to the mercury atomic absorption spectrometer, and introduce
sulfuric acid (1+1) and a tin (II) chloride solution, and circulate air.
4) Read the indicated value at a wavelength of 253.7 nm.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the mercury content (µg) and the indicated value
of the mercury standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
1) Transfer 5 mL of a sample solution to respective reduction vessels, add 1 drop of tri-n-butyl
phosphate (9), and conduct similarly as in b) 3) - 4) to read the indicated value.
2) Transfer 5 mL of the blank test solution to a reduction vessel, add 1 drop of tri-n-butyl
phosphate (9), and conduct similarly as in b) 2) - 4) to read the indicated value, and correct the
indicated value obtained for the sample solution.
3) Obtain the mercury content (µg) from the calibration curve, and calculate mercury (Hg) in the
375
analytical sample.
Note (9) It is not required to add tri-n-butyl phosphate if not needed.
Comment 2 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), mercury (Hg) can be corrected by
obtaining the mercury content in the blank test.
Comment 3 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using an industrial sludge
fertilizer (1 sample), composted sludge (3 samples) and a human waste sludge
fertilizer (1 sample). As a result, the average rate of recovery at the content level of
2 mg/kg and 0.2 mg/kg are 98.7 % - 101.6 % and 100.7 % - 105.4 % as mercury
(Hg) respectively. In addition, recovery testing was conducted using soybean meal,
rape seed meal, compound fertilizers (2 samples) and blended fertilizers. As a result,
the average rate of recovery at the content level of 40 mg/kg and 0.5 mg/kg are
98.5 % - 101.5 % and 100.4 % - 103.3 % as mercury (Hg) respectively.
Table 1 shows results and analysis results from a collaborative study for test
method validation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this test method is about 0.01
mg/kg.

for mercury test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Number of Mean RSD r RSD R
Sample name 1)
laboratories (mg/kg) (%) (%)
Human waste
11 0.651 5.3 11.6
sludge fertilizer A
Human waste
11 1.10 6.3 10.2
sludge fertilizer B
Composted sludge
11 0.489 6.8 10.2
fertilizer A
Composted sludge
11 0.822 8.1 13.1
fertilizer B
Composted sludge
9 0.182 10.6 10.6
fertilizer C
References
1) Fumihiro ABE, Takeshi HASHIMOTO and Yasushi SUGIMURA: Determination of
mercury in sludge fertilizer - Improved decomposition method -, Research Report of
2) Fumihiro ABE, Takeshi HASHIMOTO and Norio HIKICHI: Determination of mercury
in sludge fertilizer - Collaborative Test Results -, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p.
67 - 73 (2008)
3) Akira SHIMIZU, Kaori OKADA, Takeshi HASHIMOTO, Yasuto IDE and Toshiaki
HIROI: Determination of Mercury in Fertilizer- Expanding the scope of application of
improved method -, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.2, p. 12 - 17 (2009)
376
(5) Flow sheet for mercury: The flow sheet for mercury in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g
Sample digestion flask
analytical sample
←　About 10 mL nitric acid
Heating For a short time

Heating on a hot plate or sand bath at 180 ºC - 200 ºC
Decomposition
for 30 minutes -1 hour
Standing to cool
← Water (fill up to 100 mL)
Sample solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer (253.7 nm) for mercury
Figure Flow sheet for mercury in fertilizers
377
5.1.b Cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers)

(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to fluid sludge fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type D
and its symbol is 5.1.b-2017 or Hg.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid- perchloric acid, and then reduce mercury (II) in the
solution with tin (II) chloride. Aerate this solution, and measure the atomic absorption for generated
mercury vapor at a wavelength of 253.7 nm to obtain mercury (Hg) in an analytical sample. In

c) Hydrogen peroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8230 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Tin (II) chloride solution: To 10 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate (1) specified in JIS K 8136,
add 60 mL of sulfuric acid (1+20), and stir while heating to dissolve. After cooling is
complete, add water to make 100 mL.
f) L-cystein solution: To 10 mg of L-cystein (HSCH2CH(NH2)COOH) of no less than 98.0 %
in purity, add 100 mL of water and 2 mL of nitric acid to dissolve, and further add water to
make 1000 mL. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
g) Mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL): A mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL)
h) Mercury standard solution (Hg 10 µg/mL) (2) (3): Transfer 10 mL of mercury standard
solution (Hg 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100 mL of volumetric flask and add an L-cystein solution up to
the marked line.
i) Mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL) (2) (4): Dilute a predetermined amount of
mercury standard solution (Hg 10 µg/mL) with an L-cystein solution to prepare a mercury
standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL).
Note (1) Use a reagent with low mercury content, such as for mercury analysis or for harmful
metal analysis.
(4) Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 1 month after preparation.
Comment 1 Instead of the mercury standard solution in (2), a mercury standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a mercury standard solution
(Hg 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
a) Mercury atomic absorption spectrometer : Mercury atomic absorption spectrometer using
a method for producing the atomic vapor by reduction specified in JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: Low-pressure mercury lamp
b) Pressure vessel decomposing device: A device which pressurizes the inside of a vessel by
putting acid, etc.to heat in the airtight vessel, and decomposes a sample by the interaction of
heating, pressurizing and acid. The following requirements should be met.
1) The main part of a decomposing device: In the case of the microwave heating method, a
device should be able to produce a high-frequency wave using a frequency which is permitted
at an industrial frequency facility. It is desirable to be able to monitor pressure and
378
temperature, etc. in the airtight vessel with a sensor inside the device. The interior of a device
should be acid-resistant treated and should have a high temperature durability and a high level
of safety.
2) Exhaust system: A system which has an exhaust fan of acid-resistant specification, and has
an air-cool function inside the device to allow constant airflow, keeping operating temperature
below a certain temperature level.
3) Airtight vessel: A vessel which is heat-resistance and pressure-tight and has the durability
required to decompose particles, and has resistance to internal contamination. It should have
safety functions such as causing overheat prevention valve to work and internal pressure to
drop by emitting gas, and preventing gas bumping in the case of exceeding a pressure
limitation.
c) Centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at about 1700 × g.
(4) Test procedure

b) Gradually add 2.5 mL of nitric acid and 2 mL of hydrogen peroxide.
c) Put the airtight vessel into the main part of a decomposing device and heat using a microwave
(6)
.
d) Ignite at 240 ºC ±5 ºC for no less than 10 minutes (6) to decompose (7).
e) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 50-mL volumetric flask (8) with water.
f) Add water up to the marked line and transfer it to a 50-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
precipitate tube (8).
g) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (9) and use the supernatant as
the sample solution.
h) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - g) using another airtight vessel to prepare the
Note (5) The maximum limit of solid content, which is converted from moisture content, in the
sampling volume 20.0 g of an analytical sample is about 0.5 g. If solid content is likely
to exceed the limit, reduce sampling volume as necessary.
(6) Condition examples for a microwave decomposing device: 0 min (room temperature)
→ 10min (240 ºC) → 20 min (240 ºC) → 40 min (room temperature), initial output
1400 W
(7) When organic matters still remain, for example the digestion solution is colored,
repeat the procedures in (4.1) b) - c).
(8) The vessel should be made of polypropylene, etc. to not affect the measurement.
(9) 16.5-cm of radius and 3000 rpm of revolutions makes about 1700 × g centrifugal
force.
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) in 5.2.c, 5.3.c, 5.4.c, 5.5.e
and 5.6.c.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement by cold vapor atomic absorption spectrometry specified
in JIS K 0121. Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the
atomic absorption spectrometer used. An example of measurement using a mercury atomic
absorption spectrometer is shown below:
379

1) Transfer 0.4 mL - 10 mL of mercury standard solution (Hg 0.1 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step, and add water up to the marked line. Transfer 5 mL of these solutions to
respective reduction vessels to make mercury standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation.
2) Add 5 mL of water to another reduction vessel to make the blank test solution for the
3) Connect the reduction vessel to the mercury atomic absorption spectrometer, and introduce
sulfuric acid (1+1) and a tin (II) chloride solution, and circulate air.
4) Read the indicated value at a wavelength of 253.7 nm.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the mercury content (µg) and the indicated value
of the mercury standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
1) Transfer 5 mL of a sample solution to respective reduction vessels, and conduct similarly as in
b) 3) - 4) to read the indicated value.
2) Transfer 5 mL of the blank test solution to a reduction vessel and conduct similarly as in b) 2)
- 4) to read the indicated value, and correct the indicated value obtained for the sample
solution.
3) Obtain the mercury content (µg) from the calibration curve, and calculate mercury (Hg) in the
analytical sample.
Comment 3 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), mercury (Hg) can be corrected by obtaining
the mercury content in the blank test.
Comment 4 Triplicates additive recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using fluid
industrial sludge fertilizers (2 samples), and composted sludge fertilizers (6 samples).
As a result, the mean recovery at the concentration level of 0.2 mg/kg - 0.4 mg/kg,
0.01 mg/kg - 0.09 mg/kg and 0.7µg /kg - 7µg /kg are 100.0 % - 109.1 %, 99.0 % -
114.6 % and 100.4 % - 113.4 % as mercury (Hg) in an actual article respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using two kinds of fluid sludge
fertilizers to evaluate precision were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance.
Table 1 shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.。
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is about 0.2
µg/kg.

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
Composted sludge fertilizer 1 5 0.0577 0.0009 1.5 0.0014 2.5
380
References
1) Toshiharu YAGI: Determination of Heavy Metals in Fluid Sludge Fertilizers by ICP-MS
and CV-AAS, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 8, p. 26 - 37 (2015)
(5) Flow sheet for mercury: The flow sheet for mercury in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown
below:
20.0 g analytical sample Airtight vessel

← Nitric acid, 2.5 mL
← Hydrogen peroxide, 2 mL
Microwave
decomposition
Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube,

Centrifugal separation
Anout 1700 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer (253.7nm) for mercury
Figure Flow sheet for mercury in fluid sludge fertilizers
381
5.2 Arsenic
5.2.a Hydride generation atomic absorption spectrometry
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.2.a-2017 or As.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid-sulfuric acid-perchloric acid, and then generate arsenic
hydride by the addition of sodium tetrahydroborate in the acidic condition with hydrochloric acid,
introduce it with argon gas to a heated absorption cell, and measure the atomic absorption with
arsenic at a wavelength of 193.7 nm to obtain arsenic (As) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

c) Sulfuric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or equivalents.
d) Perchloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
e) Hydrochloric acid: Hydrochloric acid for arsenic analysis specified in JIS K 8180, or of
harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or equivalents.
f) Potassium iodide solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of potassium iodide specified in JIS K 8913 in
g) Sodium hydroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8576 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
h) Sodium tetrahydroborate solution (1): Dissolve 10 g of sodium tetrahydroborate (NaBH4)
for atomic absorption spectrometry in a sodium hydroxide solution (4 g/L) to make 1000 mL.
i) Arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL): An arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL)
j) Arsenic standard solution (As 1 µg/mL) (2) (3): Dilute a predetermined amount of arsenic
standard stock solution (As 0.1 mg/mL) accurately with hydrochloric acid (1+100) to prepare
an arsenic standard solution (As 1 µg/mL).
k) Arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 µg/mL) (2) (4): Dilute a predetermined amount of arsenic
standard solution (As 0.1 µg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+100) to prepare an arsenic
standard solution (As 0.1 µg/mL).
Note (1) The concentrations of a potassium iodide solution and a sodium tetrahydroborate
solution vary depending on the instrument used.
(4) Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 1 month after preparation.
Comment 1 Instead of the arsenic standard solution in (2), an arsenic standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using an arsenic standard solution
(As 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

a) Atomic absorption spectrometer : To an atomic absorption spectrometer specified in JIS K
0121, connect a hydride generator and parts shown below. Also, an atomic absorption
spectrometer with a built-in hydride generator can be used.
1) Light source: An arsenic hollow cathode lamp or an arsenic high-intensity discharge lamp.
2) Atomizer: Heated absorption cell (5)
382
3) Gas: Gases for heating the heated absorption cell.

b) Hydride generator: A batch-type or continuous-type hydride generator specified in JIS K
0121. For continuous hydride generators, there is a method to introduce a potassium iodide
solution on-line in addition to a sample solution, hydrochloric acid, and a sodium
tetrahydroborate solution.
1) Argon: Argon of grade 2 specified in JIS K 1105 or equivalents.
be set to no less than 300 °C.
Note (5) For cell heating, there are a method of electric heating and a method of flame heating.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g - 2.00 g of an analytical sample, and transfer to a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add about 10 mL of nitric acid and about 5 mL of sulfuric acid, cover the tall beaker with a
watch glass, and leave at rest overnight.
c) Heat mildly on a hot plate or sand bath at 170 ºC - 220 ºC for no less than 30 minutes. After
bubbles cease to form, set the temperature of the hot plate or sand bath to no less than 300 ºC,
and heat until nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke) is no longer generated (6) (7).
d) After standing to cool, add about 5 mL of perchloric acid.
e) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, and heat on a hot plate or sand bath at no less than
300 ºC for 2 - 3 hours to digest (8).
f) Slightly move the watch glass (9), and keep on heating on the hot plate or sand bath to
concentrate until the liquid volume becomes no more than 2 mL (10).
g) After standing to cool, add about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+10) and about 20 mL of water,
cover the tall beaker with a watch glass and heat mildly to dissolve.
h) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 100-mL - 200-mL volumetric flask with water,
add water up to the marked line, and filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Note (6) Carbonization (degradation) of organic matters by sulfuric acid begins by heating when
nitric acid no longer remains. In this state, As5+ may be reduced to As3+ and
evaporate; therefore, stop heating immediately after the end of the generation of
nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke).
(7) Oxidation of organic matters by perchloric acid progresses extremely rapidly and
explosively. For that reason, add perchloric acid after fully degrading organic matters
with nitric acid to avoid danger.
(8) When the white smoke of perchloric acid is generated, if the solution is colored such
as black-brown or brown, stop heating immediately, and after standing to cool, add
nitric acid, and heat again to degrade remaining organic matters.
(10) The generation of arsenic hydride is inhibited by the presence of nitric acid; therefore,
remove nitric acid by sufficiently generating the white smoke of sulfuric acid.
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as in (4.1) in 5.2.b and 5.5.c. However, the
sampling amount of the analytical sample in (4.1) a) in 5.5.c is 1.00 g.
383
Comment 3 When the analytical sample solidifies in the procedure in (4.1) b), moisten the
analytical sample with a small amount of water as necessary in advance.
Comment 4 It is not necessary to conduct the procedure in (4.1) b) “leave at rest overnight” in the
case of fertilizers not containing organic matters.
absorption spectrometer used. Two examples of measurement procedures with a continuous
hydride generator are shown below.
(4.2.1) Measurement (A): Leaving at rest after adding a potassium iodide solution.
1) Transfer 2.5 mL - 10 mL of arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 µg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric
2) Add 5 mL of hydrochloric acid and 5 mL of potassium iodide solution, leave at rest for about
15 minutes, and then add water up to the marked line, to make 5 ng/mL -20 ng/mL arsenic
standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
3) Conduct the same procedures as 2) for another 50-mL volumetric flask to make the blank test
4) While letting argon flow, introduce the arsenic standard solution for the calibration curve
preparation for each step and the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation
respectively, further introduce hydrochloric acid (1+1) and a sodium tetrahydroborate solution
to the hydride generator to generate arsenic hydride.
5) Separate arsenic hydride and liquid waste, and then introduce the gas containing arsenic
hydride to a heated absorption cell, and read the indicated value at a wavelength of 193.7 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the arsenic concentration and the indicated value
of the arsenic standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution to a 50-mL volumetric flask, and
conduct procedures similarly as in b) 2) and b) 4) - 5) to read the indicated value.
2) Transfer a predetermined amount of the blank test solution to a 50-mL volumetric flask, and
conduct procedures similarly as in b) 2) and b) 4) - 5) to read the indicated value, and correct
the indicated value obtained for the sample solution.
3) Obtain the arsenic content from the calibration curve, and calculate arsenic (As) in the
analytical sample.
(4.2.2) Measurement (B): On-line introduction of a potassium iodide solution.

1) Transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 µg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step, add water up to the marked line, to make the 10 ng/mL - 50 ng/mL arsenic
standard solution for the calibration curve preparation. Use water as the blank test solution for
2) While letting argon flow, introduce arsenic standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation and the blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation, respectively, and
384
further introduce a potassium iodide solution, hydrochloric acid (1+1) and a sodium
tetrahydroborate solution to the hydride generator to generate arsenic hydride.
3) Separate arsenic hydride and liquid waste, and then introduce the gas containing arsenic
hydride to a heated absorption cell, and read the indicated value at a wavelength of 193.7 nm.
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution to a 50-mL volumetric flask, and
conduct procedures similarly as in b) 2) - 3) to read the indicated value.
2) Transfer a predetermined amount of the blank test solution to a 50-mL volumetric flask, add
water up to the marked line, and conduct similarly as in b) 2) - 3) to read the indicated value,
analytical sample.
Comment 5 The coexistence of iron, nickel, and cobalt at over 5, 10, 80 folds amount of arsenic,
respectively, inhibits the generation of arsenic hydride. However, the inhibition of
arsenic hydride generation even in the coexistence of iron at 1000 folds amount can
be removed by adding or introducing a potassium iodide solution.
Comment 6 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), the arsenic (As) in the analytical sample
can also be corrected by obtaining the arsenic content in the blank test solution.
Comment 7 A recovery testing was conducted using industrial sludge fertilizer, composted sludge
fertilizer (3 samples) and human waste sludge fertilizer; as a result, the recovery at
the concentration level of 50 mg/kg and 5 mg/kg were 94.6 % - 100.6 % and 99.9 %
- 103.3 % as arsenic (As), respectively. Also, a recovery testing was conducted using
processed slug phosphate fertilizer, soybean meal, rape seed meal, compound
fertilizer and potassium-magnesium-sulfate fertilizer; as a result, the recovery at the
concentration level of 50 mg/kg and 5 mg/kg were 98.5 % - 109.8 % and 103.5 % -
108.6 %, respectively.
validation.
mg/kg.
385

for arsenic test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Sewage sludge
11 6.42 3.5 10.7
fertilizer
Human waste
10 4.62 4.9 7.0
sludge fertilizer
Industrial sludge
12 0.632 5.7 19.7
fertilizer
Calcined sludge
12 5.08 4.1 9.5
fertilizer
Composted sludge
10 1.23 6.1 11.4
fertilizer
References
1) Naoki ASAO, Yukie ISHIDA, Shinjiro IZUKA and Masakazu SAIKI: Determination of
Arsenic in Sludge Fertilizer - Improved Decomposition Method - Research Report of
2) Naoki ASAO, Shinjiro IZUKA and Norio HIKICHI: Determination of Arsenic in
Sludge Fertilizer - Collaborative Test Results - Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 82
- 89 (2008)
3) Yasushi SUGIMURA, Naoki ASAO and Shinjiro IZUKA: Determination of Arsenic in
Fertilizer- Expanding the scope of application of improved method -, Research Report
of Fertilizer Vol.2, p. 18 - 24 (2009)
386
(5) Flow sheet for arsenic: The flow sheet for arsenic in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g - 2.00 g
200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker
analytical sample
←　A small amount of water to moisten analytical sample
(if needed).
←　About 10 mL nitric acid
←　About 5 mL sulfuric acid
Leaving at rest Cover with a watch glass
overnight
Heat mildly on a hot plate or sand bath

Heating
at 170 ºC - 220 ºC for no less than 30 minutes.
Heat on a hot plate or sand bath at no less than 300 ºC

Heating
until yellow-brown smoke is no longer generated

Cover with a watch glass, and heat on a hot plate or
Heating
sand bath at no less than 300 ºC for 2 - 3 hours
Slightly move the watch glass, and concentrate

Heating
until it becomes no more than 2 mL


Sample solution
Atomic absorption spectrometer

Measurement
with a hydride generator (193.7 nm)
Figure Flow sheet for arsenic in fertilizers
387
5.2.b Silver diethyl dithiocarbamate absorptiometric analysis

(1) Summary
This test method is applicable to fertilizers other than sulfur and its compound. This testing method
is classified as Type E and its symbol is 5.2.b-2017 or As.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid - sulfuric acid - perchloric acid, and then put the
predetermined volume into an arsenic hydride generation bottle, and generate arsenic hydride by
adding a potassium iodide solution, a tin chloride solution and zinc successively in the acidic
condition with hydrochloric acid to react with silver diethyl dithiocarbamate in pyridine. Measure
the absorbance with the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution, the coloring liquid, at a wavelength
of 510 nm or 519 nm to obtain arsenic (As) in an analytical sample.

equivalents.
f) Potassium iodide solution: Dissolve 20 g of potassium iodide specified in JIS K 8913 in
g) Tin (II) chloride solution: Dissolve 15 g of tin (II) chloride dihydrate specified in JIS K
8136 in 100 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+1), add a small amount of granular tin specified in
JIS K 8580 then store in a colored bottle.
h) Ascorbic acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 9502 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
i) Zinc: A reagent of arsenic analysis grade specified in JIS K 8012 or equivalents. (1 mm - 1.5
mm particle diameter)
j) Lead acetate glass wool: Glass wool air-dried after moisturizing with 100 mL of the solution,
where 10 g of lead acetate (II) trihydrate specified in JIS K 8374 is dissolved in water.
k) Silver diethyldithiocarbamate solution: Dissolve 0.5 g of silver N, N-diethyl
dithiocarbamate specified in JIS K 9512 in 100 ml of pyridine specified in JIS K 8777, then
store in cool and dark place
l) Arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL): An arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL)
m) Arsenic standard solution (As 1 µg/mL) (1) (2): Dilute a predetermined amount of arsenic
standard stock solution (As 0.1 mg/mL) accurately with hydrochloric acid (1+100) to prepare
an arsenic standard solution (As 1 µg/mL).


a) Arsenic hydride generator: An arsenic hydride generator specified in 61.1 in JIS K 0102 or
equivalents.
388
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g - 2.00 g of an analytical sample, and transfer to a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.
and heat until nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke) is no longer generated (3) (4).
Note (3) Carbonization (degradation) of organic matters by sulfuric acid begins by heating
when nitric acid no longer remains. In this state, As+5 may be reduced to As+3 and
evaporate; therefore stop heating immediately after the end of the generation of
nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke).
(4) Oxidation of organic matters by perchloric acid progresses extremely rapidly and
(7) The generation of arsenic hydride is inhibited by the presence of nitric acid; therefore,
remove nitric acid by sufficiently generating the white smoke of sulfuric acid.
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 5.2.a.
Comment 4 It is not necessary to conduct the procedure in (4.1) b) “leave at rest overnight” in
the case of fertilizers not containing organic matters.
(4.2) Reaction: Conduct reaction as shown below.

a) Put a predetermined amount (the equivalents of 1 μg - 20 μg of As and liquid volume is no
more than 40 mL) of the sample solution into an arsenic hydride generation bottle.
c) Add hydrochloric acid to make it equivalent to 10 mL of hydrochloric acid.
d) Add about 2 mL of potassium iodide solution, shake and leave at rest for a few minutes.
389
e) Add about 1 mL of tin (II) chloride solution, shake and leave at rest for about 10 minutes (8).
f) Connect arsenic hydride generation bottle, glass tube lightly stuffed with lead acetate glass
wool in advance and 5 mL of silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution (9), and quickly put 2.5g
of zinc into an arsenic hydride generation bottle.
g) Leave at rest at room temperature (15ºC - 25ºC) for about 45 minutes, and allow generated
arsenic hydride to absorb into the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution and color.
h) Transfer a predetermined amount of blank test solution into the arsenic hydride generation
bottle, conduct procedures similarly as in b) - g) to allow generated arsenic hydride to absorb
into the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution and color.
Note (8) When a large amount of iron is contained, add 1 g of ascorbic acid and 2mL of tin (II)
chloride solution and shake to mix to leave at rest for about 10 minutes instead of the
procedure in e).
(9) Apply a small amount of silicone grease, etc. to the connecting parts of an arsenic
hydride generation bottle, glass tube and arsenic hydride absorption tube to maintain
their airtightness.
spectrophotometer used.
Detection wavelength: 510 nm or 519 nm
1) Transfer 2.5 mL - 20 mL of arsenic standard solution (1 µg/mL) to arsenic hydride generation
bottles step-by-step.
2) Conduct procedures similarly as in (4.2) b) - g) and allow them to react.
3) For another arsenic hydride generation bottle, the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution
prepared similarly as in the procedure in 2) is used as the blank test solution for the calibration
curve preparation.
4) Measure the absorbance at wavelength 510 nm of the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution
of the arsenic standard solution for the calibration curve preparation using the blank test
solution for the calibration curve preparation as the control.
1) For the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution of (4.2) g), conduct procedures similarly as in
b) 4) to measure absorbance.
2) For the silver diethyl dithiocarbamate solution of (4.2) h), conduct procedures similarly as in
b) 4) to measure absorbance, and correct the absorbance obtained for the sample solution.
analytical sample.
References
390
(5) Flow sheet for arsenic: The flow sheet for arsenic in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g -2.00 g
200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker
analytical sample
←　A small amount of water to moisten analytical sample (if needed).
←　About 10 mL nitric acid, about 5 mL sulfuric acid
Leaving at rest Cover with a watch glass
overnight
Heat mildly on a hot plate or sand bath

Heating
at 170 ºC - 220 ºC for no less than 30 minutes.
Heat on a hot plate or sand bath at no less than 300 ºC

Heating
until yellow-brown smoke is no longer generated

Cover with a watch glass, and heat on a hot plate or
Heating
sand bath at no less than 300 ºC for 2 - 3 hours
Slightly move the watch glass, and concentrate

Heating
until it becomes no more than 2 mL

← About 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+10), about 20 mL of water

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for arsenic in fertilizers

391
Sample solution
Aliquot Transfer into an arsenic hydride generation bottle

← Water (until liquid volume becomes about 40 mL)
← Hydrochloric acid (until hydrochloric acid becomes equivalent to 10 mL)
← About 2 mL of potassium iodide solution
Shaking to mix
Leaving at rest For a few minutes

←About 1 mL of tin (II) chloride solution
Shaking to mix

←2.5 g of zinc
º º
Generation of Room temperature (15 C - 25 C),
arsenic hydride about 45 minutes
Absorption 5 mL of silver diethyldithiocarbamate solution
Measurement Spectrophotometer (wavelength 510 nm or 519 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for arsenic in fertilizers

(Reaction and measurement procedure)
392
5.2.c ICP Mass Spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers)

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to fluid sludge fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type
D and its symbol is 5.2.c-2017 or As.c-1.
Add nitric acid – hydrogen peroxide to an analytical sample to heat and extract by microwave
irradiation. After adding an internal standard element, introduce it to an ICP Mass Spectrometer
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of arsenic and an internal standard element
with mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain arsenic (As) in the analytical sample from the ratio of
the indicated value for arsenic and the indicated value for an internal standard element. In addition,

c) Nitric acid: Nitric acid used to dilute a standard solution and a sample solution is a highly
pure reagent specified in JIS K 9901.
d) Hydrogen peroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8230 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) Rhodium standard solution (Rh 1 mg/mL): A rhodium standard solution (Rh 1 mg/mL)
f) Rhodium standard solution (Rh 0.1 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
rhodium standard solution (Rh 1 mg/mL) with nitric acid (1+19) to prepare a rhodium
standard solution (Rh 0.1 µg/mL).
g) Rhenium standard solution (Re 1 mg/mL) (4): A rhenium standard solution (Re 1 mg/mL)
h) Rhenium standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3)(4): Dilute a predetermined amount of
rhenium standard solution (Re 1 mg/mL) with nitric acid (1+19) to prepare a rhenium
standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL).
i) Arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL): An arsenic standard solution (As 0.1 mg/mL)
j) Arsenic standard solution (As 5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Transfer 5 mL of arsenic standard solution
(As 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add nitric acid (1+19) to the marked line.
k) Arsenic standard solutions (As 1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of arsenic standard solution (As 5 µg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add 10 mL of rhodium standard solutions (Rh 0.1
µg/mL) as internal standard respectively (5) and add nitric acid (1+19) up to the marked line.
l) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1)(2)(3): transfer 10 mL of rhodium
standard solution (Rh 0.1 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks as internal standard (5) and add
nitric acid (1+19) up to the marked line.

(3) For storage, use a sealable container made of materials such as polypropylene
containing no arsenic.
(4) Use when measuring lead simultaneously.
(5) Add an internal solution that is 1/10 of the volume to be prepared.
393

a) ICP Mass Spectrometer: High-frequency plasma mass spectrometer specified in JIS K 0133.
1) Gas: Argon gas specified in JIS K 1105 of no less than 99.995 % in purity
of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

(7)
.
d) Ignite at 240 ºC ± 5 ºC for no less than 10 minutes (7) to decompose (8).
g) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (10) and use the supernatant
as the sample solution.
sampling volume 20.0 g of an analytical sample is about 0.5g. If solid content is likely
1400 W
repeat the procedures in (4.1) b) - d).
force.
394
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 5.1.b.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement (Internal Standard Method) according to JIS K 0113
of the ICP Mass Spectrometer used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the ICP Mass Spectrometer: Set up the measurement
conditions for the ICP Mass Spectrometer considering the following:
Arsenic: monitor ion (m/z): 75
Rhodium: monitor ion (m/z): 103
1) Spray arsenic standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
for the calibration curve preparation into the inductively coupled plasma, and read the ratio of
the respective ion count number for the monitor ion of an element subjected to measurement
and an internal standard element.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the ratio of the ion count
number of an element subjected to measurement.
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.05 µg - 5 µg as
As) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (9).
2) Add 5mL of internal standard solution (5) and add nitric acid (1+19) to the marked line.
3) Conduct procedures similarly as in b) 1) to read the ratio of the ion count numbers.
4) For blank test solution, conduct procedures similarly as in 1) - 3) to correct the ratio of the ion
count numbers obtained for the sample solution.
analytical sample.
industrial sludge fertilizers (2 samples) and composted sludge fertilizers (6 samples).
As a result, the mean recovery at the concentration level of 1 mg/kg - 9 mg/kg, 0.1
mg/kg - 0.9 mg/kg and 0.02 mg /kg - 0.04 mg /kg are 85.0 % - 105.9 %, 90.6 % -
108.5 % and 95 % as arsenic (As) in an actual article respectively.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this test method is about 3 µg
/kg.
395

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
Comment 5 Simultaneous measurement of multiple elements by an ICP-MS is available. In this

case, transfer a pre-determined amount of cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL,
1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10
mg/mL), nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL), chromium
standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) and arsenic standard
solution (As 0.1 mg/mL, 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology to
a volumetric flask to mix, dilute with nitric acid (1+19) to prepare a mixed standard
solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL, Pb 5 µg/mL, Ni 5 µg/mL, Cr 5 µg/mL, As 5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3).
Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of mixed standard solutions to 100-mL volumetric flasks (9)
step-by-step, add 10 mL of rhodium standard solution (Rh 0.1 µg/mL) and rhenium
standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL) (5) respectively as internal standard and add nitric
acid (1+19) up to the marked line to prepare mixed standard solutions for calibration
curve preparation (1)(2)(3) within the concentration range in Table 2. Conduct
procedures similarly as (4.2) b) - c) under the measurement conditions in Table 2 and
calculate the respective element concentrations in the analytical samples.
Table 2　　Preparation concentration and monitor ion of mixed standard solution

for calibration curve preparation
Materials (element) Internal standard
(1)
subjected to measurement materials (element)
　
　Concentration of
Monitor ion Concentration Monitor ion
Name of test item element
(m /z ) of element (m /z )
(ng/mL)
(ng/mL)
Arsenic As 1 - 100 75 Rh 10 103
Cadmium Cd 0.1 - 10 111, 114 Rh 10 103
Nickel Ni 1 - 100 60, 58 Rh 10 103
Chromium Cr 1 - 100 53, 52, 50 Rh 10 103
Lead Pb 1 - 100 208, 206, 207 Re 10 187
1）　Rh: Rhodium, Re: Rhenium
396
Comment 6 The presence and the extent of interference to the measurement mass number of an
element subjected to measurement and an internal standard element can be estimated
by qualitative analysis using an ICP-MS in advance to quantitation. Select a
measurement mass number considering the extent of interference. However, a mass
number cannot be changed in the measurement of arsenic. A magnetic sector
double-focusing mass spectrometer or a collision reaction cell specified in JIS K0133
can be used as a method to reduce spectrum interference.
References
(5) Flow sheet for arsenic: The flow sheet for arsenic in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for arsenic in fluid sludge fertilizers

Sample solution

← Rhodium standard solution (Rh 0.1µg/mL) 5 mL (internal standard)
← Nitric acid (1+19) (up to the marked line)
Measurement ICP-MS (As: m /z 75, Rh: m /z 103)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for arsenic in fluid sludge fertilizers

397
5.3 Cadmium
5.3.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.3.a-2017 or Cd.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and nitric acid-hydrochloric acid (1+3), spray into an
acetylene-air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with cadmium at a wavelength of 228.8 nm
to obtain cadmium (Cd) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method
is shown in Comment 5.

equivalents.
d) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL): A cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1
e) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 10 µg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of cadmium standard solution
(Cd 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line.
f) Cadmium standard solutions (Cd 0.05 µg - 0.5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1) (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL) to
g) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Hydrochloric acid (1+23)
used in the procedures in e) and f).

(2) Store at room temperature, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
Comment 1 Instead of the cadmium standard solution in (2), a cadmium standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a cadmium standard solution
(Cd 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

1) Light source: A cadmium hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

398

added.
organic matters.
1) Spray the cadmium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the cadmium concentration and the indicated
value of the cadmium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
3) Obtain the cadmium content from the calibration curve, and calculate cadmium (Cd) in the
analytical sample.
Note (7) If there is a possibility that the cadmium concentration in the sample solution will
399
exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount
with hydrochloric acid (1+23).
Comment 4 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), the cadmium (Cd) in the analytical sample
can also be corrected by obtaining the cadmium content in the blank test solution.
Comment 5 Recovery testing was conducted using industrial sludge fertilizer and composted
sludge fertilizer (5 samples); as a result, the recovery at the concentration level of 5
mg/kg and 0.5 mg/kg were 97.5 % - 99.2 % and 96.7 % - 99.7 %, respectively.
validation.
mg/kg.

for cadmium test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Sewage sludge
10 1.50 5.5 6.4
fertilizer a
Sewage sludge
10 3.35 1.2 4.2
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
10 1.96 1.0 4.4
fertilizer a
Composted sludge
11 3.81 1.9 3.2
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
10 1.80 3.5 4.9
fertilizer c
References
1) Yoshinari SAKAKIBARA, Manabu MATSUZAKI and Tadao AMANO: Determination
of Cadmium, Lead, Nickel and Chromium in Sludge Fertilizer - Improved
Decomposition Method - Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 41 - 49 (2008)
2) Yoshinari SAKAKIBARA and Manabu MATSUZAKI: Determination of Cadmium,
Lead, Nickel and Chromium in Sludge Fertilizer - Collaborative Test Results - Research
Report of Fertilizer Vol.1, p. 50 - 59 (2008)
3) Hisanori ARAYA and Yoshimi TAKEBA: Validation of atomic absorption spectrometry
for determination of cadmium, lead, nickel and chromium in calcined sludge fertilizer -
400
(5) Flow sheet for cadmium: The flow sheet for cadmium in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample



← About 25 mL - 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5)

Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for cadmium in fertilizers
401
5.3.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.3.b-2017 or Cd.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration, nitric acid - hydrochloric acid (1+3), introduce it to
ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with cadmium at a
wavelength of 228.802 nm to quantify the cadmium (Cd) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
d) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL): A cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1
e) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.25µg/mL) (1) (2): Dilute a predetermined amount of
cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a
cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.25 µg/mL)


0116.
1) Gas: Argon gas specified in JIS K 1105 of no less than 99.5 % (volume fraction) in purity.
b) Electric furnace: An electric furnace that can keep the test temperature at 450 °C ± 5 °C.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

402
added.
organic matters.
following:
2) Add 2mL and 4 mL of cadmium standard solution (0.25 μg/mL) to volumetric flasks of 1)
above, and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line to make a sample solution
of Standard Addition Method.
228.802 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added cadmium concentration and the
corrected indicated value of the sample solution for Standard Addition Method and sample
solution without a standard solution.
7) Obtain the cadmium content from the intercept of the calibration curve to calculate cadmium
(Cd) in the analytical sample
Comment 6 The comparison of the measurement value (xi：0.003 mg/kg - 3.32 mg/kg) of ICP
403
standard deviation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is 0.2
mg/kg.
References
5.00 g
analytical sample

Incineration Ignite at 450 ºC ± 5 ºC



Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for cadmium in sludge fertilizers

404
Sample solution

← 0, 2 and 4 mL of cadmium standard solution (0.25 μg / mL)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for cadmium in sludge fertilizers

405

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.3.c-2017 or Cd.c-1.
Add nitric acid – hydrogen peroxide to an analytical sample to heat and extract by microwave
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of cadmium and an internal standard element
with mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain cadmium (Cd) in the analytical sample from the ratio of
the indicated value for cadmium and the indicated value for an internal standard element. In

equivalent quality.
i) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL): A cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1
j) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
cadmium standard solution (Cd 1 mg/mL) with nitric acid (1+19) to prepare a cadmium
standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL).
k) Cadmium standard solutions (Cd 0.1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL) to

(2) Store in cool and dark place, and do not use after 1 month after preparation.
containing no cadmium.
406

1) Gas: Argon gas specified in JIS K 1105 of no less than 99.995 % in purity.
of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

(7)
.
1400 W
force.
407
Cadmium: monitor ion (m/z): 111, 114
1) Spray cadmium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
the respective ion count numbers for the monitor ion of an element subjected to measurement
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.005 µg - 0.5 µg
as Cd) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (9).
3) Conduct procedures similarly as in b) 1) to read the ratio of the ion count numbers.
count number obtained for the sample solution.
analytical sample.
industrial sludge fertilizers (2 samples), and composted sludge fertilizers (6 samples).
As a result, the mean recovery at the concentration level of 0.1 mg/kg - 0.9 mg/kg,
0.01 mg/kg - 0.09 mg/kg and 2 µg /kg - 4 µg /kg are 89.4 % - 108.5 %, 91.0 % -
112.0 % and 96.3 % - 108.5 % as cadmium (Cd) in an actual article respectively.
Table 1 shows the calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.
/kg.
408

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
Comment 5 Simultaneous measurement of multiple elements by an ICP-MS is available. In that

case, see 5.2.c Comment 5.
References
(5) Flow sheet for cadmium: The flow sheet for cadmium in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown
below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for cadmium in liquid sludge fertilizers

409
Sample solution

Measurement ICP-MS (Cd: m /z 111,114 Rh: m /z 103)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for cadmium in liquid sludge fertilizers

410
5.3.d ICP Mass Spectrometry

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to sludge fertilizers excluding fluid sludge fertilizers. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 5.3.d-2017 or Cd.d-1.
Add nitric acid–hydrogen peroxide to an analytical sample to heat and extract by microwave
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of cadmium and an internal standard element
with mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain cadmium (Cd) in the analytical sample from the ratio of
the indicated value for cadmium and the indicated value for an internal standard element. In

equivalent quality.
g) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1 mg/mL): A cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.1
h) Cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
cadmium standard solution (Cd 1 mg/mL) with nitric acid (1+19) to prepare a cadmium
standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL).
i) Cadmium standard solutions (Cd 0.1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of cadmium standard solution (Cd 0.5 µg/mL) to
j) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1)(2)(3): transfer 10 mL of rhodium

containing no cadmium.

411
of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 0.20 g of an analytical sample, and put it into an airtight vessel.
b) Gradually add 2.5 mL of nitric acid and 2 mL of hydrogen peroxide (5).
(6)
.
g) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (9) and use the supernatant as
Note (5) Leaving at rest overnight is preferable.

1400 W
force.
Cadmium: monitor ion (m/z): 111
412

1) Spray cadmium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
1) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.005 µg - 0.5 µg
as Cd) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (8).
3) Conduct procedures similarly as in b) 1) to read the ratio of the ion count number.
analytical sample.
Comment 3 The comparison of the measurement value (xi：0.18 mg/kg - 3.02 mg/kg) of ICP-MS
and the measurement value (yi) of Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry was
conducted to evaluate trueness using sludge fertilizers (26 samples). As a result, a
regression equation was y = 0.0402 + 1.01x and its correlation coefficient (r) was
0.997.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using two kinds of sludge
mg/kg.

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
measurement mass number considering the extent of interference. A magnetic sector
413

References
1) Toshiharu YAGI, Kenta SAKUMA, Yoshimi HASHIMOTO: Determination of Heavy
Metals in Sludge Fertilizers using Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometer
(ICP-MS), Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 9, p. 21 - 32 (2016)
(5) Flow sheet for cadmium: The flow sheet for cadmium in splid sludge fertilizers is shown
below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for cadmium in solid sludge fertilizers

Sample solution

Measurement ICP-MS (Cd: m /z 111 Rh: m /z 103)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for cadmium in solid sludge fertilizers

414
5.4 Nickel
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.4.a-2017 or Ni.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and nitric acid−hydrochloric acid (1+3), spray into
an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with nickel at a wavelength of 232.0 nm
to obtain nickel (Ni) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 5.

equivalents.
d) Nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL): A nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL)
e) Nickel standard solutions (Ni 0.5 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1) (2)
: Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL
f) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Hydrochloric acid (1+23)
used in the procedures in e).

Comment 1 Instead of the nickel standard solution in (2), a nickel standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a nickel standard solution (Ni

1) Light source: A nickel hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system using
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

415

added.
organic matters.
1) Spray the nickel standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the nickel concentration and the indicated value
of the nickel standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
3) Obtain the nickel content from the calibration curve, and calculate nickel (Ni) in the analytical
sample.
Note (7) If there is a possibility that the nickel concentration in the sample solution will exceed
416
Comment 4 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), the nickel (Ni) in the analytical sample can
also be corrected by obtaining the nickel content in the blank test solution.
sludge fertilizer (5 samples); as a result, the recovery at the concentration level of
300 mg/kg and 30 mg/kg were 98.5 % - 100.3 % and 97.1 % - 99.9 %, respectively.
validation.
mg/kg.

for nickel test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Sewage sludge
11 56.9 1.1 4.6
fertilizer a
Sewage sludge
11 21.8 2.2 3.9
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
11 28.9 1.3 6.4
fertilizer a
Composted sludge
11 28.5 1.8 4.4
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
12 58.3 1.6 4.4
fertilizer c
References
417
(5) Flow sheet for nickel: The flow sheet for nickel in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for nickel in fertilizers
418

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.4.b-2017 or Ni.b-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and nitric acid−hydrochloric acid (1+3), and then
introduce it to an ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with
nickel at a wavelength of 231.604 nm to obtain nickel (Ni) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
d) Nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL): A nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL)
e) Nickel standard solutions (Ni 2.5 µg/mL) (1) (2): Dilute a predetermined amount of nickel
standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a nickel standard
solution (Ni 2.5 µg/mL)


0116.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

419
added.
organic matters.
following:
2) Add 2 mL and 4 mL (0.25 μg/mL) of nickel standard solution to volumetric flasks of 1) above,
Addition Method.
231.604 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added nickel concentration and the corrected
7) Obtain the nickel content from the intercept of the calibration curve to calculate nickel (Ni)
concentration in the analytical sample.
420
was conducted. As a result, a repeatability obtained was1.0 % - 2.6 % as a relative
standard deviation.
mg/kg.
References
(5) Flow sheet for nickel: The flow sheet for nickel in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for nickel in sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
421
Sample solution

← 0, 2 and 4 mL of nickel standard solution (0.25 μg / mL)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for nickel in sludge fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
422

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.4.c-2017 or Ni.c-1.
Add nitric acid−hydrogen peroxide to an analytical sample to heat and extract by microwave
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of nickel and an internal standard element
with mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain nickel (Ni) in the analytical sample from the ratio of the
indicated value for nickel and the indicated value for an internal standard element. In addition, the

equivalent quality.
i) Nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL): A nickel standard solution (Ni 0.1 mg/mL)
j) Nickel standard solution (Ni 5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Transfer 5 mL of nickel standard solution (Ni
0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add nitric acid (1+19) to the marked line.
k) Nickel standard solutions (Ni 1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of nickel standard solution (Ni 5 µg/mL) to

containing no nickel.
423

of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 20.0 g (6) of an analytical sample, and put it into an airtight vessel.
(7)
.
1400 W
force.
424
Nickel: monitor ion (m/z): 60, 58
1) Spray nickel standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution for
the calibration curve preparation into the inductively coupled plasma, and read the ratio of the
respective ion count numbers for the monitor ion of an element subjected to measurement and
an internal standard element.
Ni) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (9).
5) Obtain the nickel content from the calibration curve, and calculate nickel (Ni) in the analytical
sample.
As a result, the mean recovery at the concentration level of 10 mg/kg - 60 mg/kg, 1
mg/kg - 9 mg/kg and 0.1 mg /kg - 0.9 mg /kg are 89.6 % - 99.2 %, 91.5 % - 114.7 %
and 96.1 - 103.7 % as nickel (Ni) in an actual article respectively.
/kg.
425

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)

References
(5) Flow sheet for nickel: The flow sheet for nickel in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for nickel in fluidsludge fertilizers

426
Sample solution

Measurement ICP-MS (Ni: m /z 60, 58 Rh: m /z 103)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for nickel in fluidsludge fertilizers

427
5.5 Chromium
5.5.a Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers containing organic matters)
(1) Summary
classified as Type B and its symbol is 5.5.a-2017 or Cr.a-1.
an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with chromium at a wavelength of 357.9
nm or 359.3 nm to obtain chromium (Cr) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of

equivalents.
d) Interference suppressor solution (1): Dissolve 100 g of potassium disulfate specified in JIS K
e) Chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL): A chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1
mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology
f) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 0.5 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1) (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) to
(3)
, and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
g) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Transfer about 50 mL of
interference suppressor solution (3) to a 500-mL volumetric flask, and add hydrochloric acid
(1+23) used in the procedure in f) to the marked line.

prepared.
Comment 1 Instead of the chromium standard solution in (2), a chromium standard solution for
the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a chromium standard
solution (Cr 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.

1) Light source: A chromium hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system
be set to 250 ºC.
428
(4) Test procedure

added.
Analytical line wavelength: 357.9 nm or 359.3 nm (8)
1) Spray the chromium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
solution for the calibration curve preparation into a flame (9), and read the indicated value at a
wavelength of 357.9 nm or 359.3 nm (8).
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the chromium concentration and the indicated
value of the chromium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank
1) Transfer 25 mL of the sample solution (10) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
2) Add about 10 mL of interference suppressor solution (3), and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to
the marked line.
4) Subject the blank test solution to the same procedure as in 1) - 2) and b) 1) to read the
indicated value, and correct the indicated value obtained for the sample solution.
429
5) Obtain the chromium content from the calibration curve, and calculate chromium (Cr) in the
analytical sample.
Note (8) When background correction is conducted by the Zeeman method, 359.3 nm is
recommended as the analytical line wavelength.
(9) Use low-fuel acetylene−air flame. Acetylene−nitrous oxide flame can also be used.
(10) If there is a possibility that the chromium concentration in the sample solution will
exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, decrease the amount to be
transferred.
Comment 3 In an acetylene−air flame, sensitivity is enhanced in high-fuel flame, but interference

by coexisting substances such as iron and nickel will also be enhanced.
In an acetylene−nitrous oxide flame, such interference hardly affects the result.
Comment 4 Instead of the correction method in c) 4), the chromium (Cr) in the analytical sample
can also be corrected by obtaining the chromium content in the blank test solution.
validation.
mg/kg.

for chromium test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Sewage sludge
12 33.6 5.3 15.6
fertilizer a
Sewage sludge
12 26.3 4.9 18.7
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
11 41.3 2.1 11.0
fertilizer a
Composted sludge
12 30.2 5.5 13.8
fertilizer b
Composted sludge
12 85.0 6.4 12.5
fertilizer c
References
430
3) Yoshinari SAKAKIBARA, Chie INOUE: Validation of determination methods for
chromium in sludge fertilizer - Evaluation of measurement procedure, Research Report
(5) Flow sheet for chromium: The flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers containing organic
matters is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample

Incineration Ignite at 450 ºC ± 5 ºC, 8-16 hours



Aliquot 25 mL 100-mL volumetric flasks

Sample solution
Measurement Atomic absorption spectrometer (357.9 nm or 359.3 nm)
Figure Flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers containing organic matters
431
5.5.b Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers mainly containing molten matters,
slag, etc.)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers mainly containing molten matters, slag, etc. This
testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 5.5.b-2017 or Cr.b-1.
Add ammonium sulfate to prevent the bumping of an analytical sample, pretreat the analytical
sample with nitric acid−sulfuric acid−perchloric acid, and then spray into an acetylene−air flame.
Measure the atomic absorption with chromium at a wavelength of 357.9 nm or 359.3 nm to obtain
chromium (Cr) in an analytical sample. The performance of this testing method is shown in
Comment 4.
In addition, fertilizers containing no organic matters can also be measured by the method of 5.5.c.
However, this method should be used for fertilizers that bump when heating. (Fertilizers made of
molten matters, slag, etc. may bump in many cases).

b) Ammonium sulfate: A reagent of atomic absorption analysis grade or equivalents
c) Nitric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or equivalents.
e) Perchloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
f) Hydrochloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
g) Interference suppressor solution (1): Dissolve 100 g of potassium disulfate specified in JIS K
h) Chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL): A chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1
i) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 0.01 mg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 10 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flask,
and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
j) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 0.5 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1) (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) or
chromium standard solution (Cr 0.01 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, add
about 50 mL of interference suppressor solution (3), and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23)
to the marked line.
k) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Transfer about 50 mL of
(1+23) used in the procedure in i) and j) to the marked line.

prepared.

432

(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample and transfer to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 4 g of ammonium sulfate and moisten the analytical sample with a small amount of
water.
c) Add about 10 mL of nitric acid, about 5 mL of sulfuric acid and about 5 mL of perchloric acid.
Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, heat on a hot plate or sand bath gently at 170 °C -
220 °C for no less than 1 hour, and then warm to raise temperature gradually to no less than
300 °C taking no less than 30 minutes (5) and further heat at no less than 300 °C for 2-3 hours.
d) Slightly move the watch glass (6), and keep on heating on the hot plate or sand bath to
concentrate until the liquid volume becomes about 3 mL (7).
e) After standing to cool, add about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+10) and about 20 mL of water,
cover the tall beaker with a watch glass and heat mildly for about 10 minutes to dissolve (8).
f) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask with water, add
water up to the marked line, and filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
g) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - f) using another tall beaker to prepare the blank
test solution. However, the heating procedure after adding acid in the procedures in c) should
be conducted as shown below. Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, heat on a hot plate or
sand bath at about 170 °C for a while (8), slightly move the watch glass (6) and then heat gently
for no less than 1 hour to vapor nitric acid. After concentrating to about 15 mL (9), heat and
raise the temperature gradually to no less than 300 °C in more than 30 minutes (5). When white
smoke starts evolving, cover the tall beaker with a watch glass and further heat at no less than
300 °C for 2-3 hours.
Note (5) Sudden temperature rise may cause bumping. Therefore, increase the temperature
gradually.
(6) If there is no possibility of bumping, the watch glass can be removed.
(7) Drying and hardening it up may cause the chromium to become insoluble. Therefore,
care should be taken not to concentrate too much.
(8) Heating at high temperature may cause bumping. Therefore, it is recommended to
increase the temperature gradually from about 170 °C to the temperature at which it
boils slightly.
(9) If much nitric acid remains, care should be taken because bumping can occur easily
when heating temperature rises.
433

solution for the calibration curve preparation into a low-fuel acetylene-air flame (11), and read
the indicated value at a wavelength of 357.9 nm or 359.3 nm (10).
the marked line.
analytical sample.
(11) Acetylene−nitrous oxide flame can also be used.
(12) If there is a possibility that the concentration of chromium in the sample solution
exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, transfer no more than 10 mL of
the sample solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add about 10 mL of interference
suppressor solution and about 67 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+17), and add water up to
the marked line.
Comment 2 In an acetylene−air flame, sensitivity is enhanced in high-fuel flame, but interference

Comment 4 The comparison of the measurement value (yi：54 mg/kg - 4649 mg/kg) of this testing
method and the measurement value (xi) of 5.8 Chromium 5.8.2 Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry in Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992) was conducted to
evaluate trueness using fertilizers (29 samples). As a result, a regression equation
was y = − 6.842 + 0.998x and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using fused silicic phosphate
fertilizer slag silicic fertilizer and compound fertilizer (1 sample for each) to evaluate
calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability. Table 2 shows results
and analysis results from a collaborative study for testing method validation.
mg/kg.
434

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
Fused silicic
5 4628 37 0.8 175 3.8
phosphate fertilizer
Compound fertilizer 5 545 5.9 1.1 7.3 1.3
Slag silicic fertilizer 5 319 3.8 1.2 5.7 1.8

for the test method validation of chromium
2) 3） 4） 5） 6）
Mean sr RSD r sR RSD R
Number of
Sample name 1)
laboratories （mg/kg）（mg/kg）（%）（mg/kg）（%）
Slag silicic fertilizer 12 63.75 2.02 3.2 3.87 6.1

Mixed phosphate fertilizer 12 912.9 13.0 1.4 37.3 4.1
Slag manganese fertilizer 12 2962 74 2.5 176 5.9
Fused silicic
10 4662 135 2.9 166 3.6
Compond fertilizers 10 543.6 10.2 1.9 15.4 2.8
References
1) Toshiaki HIROI, Fumika TAKATSU: Evaluation of Digest Method for Determination of
Chromium in Inorganic Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry, Research Report
435
(5) Flow sheet for chromium: The flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers mainly containing
molten matters, slag is shown below:
1.00 g
300-mL tall beaker.
analytical sample
← 4 g of ammonium sulfate
← A small amount of water, moisten the analytical sample
← About 5 mL of sulfuric acid
Cover with a watch glass, and heat mildly on a hot plate
Heating
or sand bath at 170 ºC - 220 ºC for no less than 1 hour
Raise temperature gradually to no less than 300 °C in more than

Heating
30 minutes
Heating Digest on a hot plate or sand bath for 2 -3 hours
Slightly move a watch glass and concentrate

Heating
until the liquid volume becomes about 3 mL

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and dissolve (heat for about 10 minutes)

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers

mainly containing molten matters and slag, etc. (Extraction procedure)
436
Sample solution
Aliquot
(no more than 25 mL) 100-mL volumetric flasks
Figure 2 Flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers

mainly containing molten matters and slag, etc. (Measurement procedure)
437
5.5.c Flame atomic absorption spectrometry (Fertilizers not containing organic matters)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers not containing organic matters (including calcined
sludge fertilizer). This testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 5.5.c-2017 or Cr.c-1.
In addition, for fertilizers mainly made of molten matters, slag, etc., care should be taken because
they may bump while heating. 5.5.b applies to fertilizers that may bump.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid−sulfuric acid−perchloric acid, and then spray into an
acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with chromium at a wavelength of 357.9
nm or 359.3 nm to obtain chromium (Cr) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of

equivalents.
e) Hydrochloric acid: A reagent of harmful metal analysis grade, microanalysis grade or
equivalents.
f) Interference suppressor solution (1): Dissolve 100 g of potassium disulfate specified in JIS K
g) Chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL): A chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1
h) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 0.01 mg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 10 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flask,
and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
i) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 0.5 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1) (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) or
chromium standard solution (Cr 0.01 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, add
about 50 mL of interference suppressor solution (3), and further add hydrochloric acid (1+23)
to the marked line.
j) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Transfer about 50 mL of
(1+23) used in the procedure in h) and i) to the marked line.

prepared.

438

(4) Test procedure

bubbles cease to form, set the temperature of the hot plate or sand bath to no less than 300 ºC
(5)
, and heat until nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke) is no longer generated (6).
Note (5) If there is vigorous bumping, increase the temperature gradually.

(6) Oxidation of carbides by perchloric acid progresses extremely rapidly and explosively.
For that reason, add perchloric acid after fully degrading carbides with nitric acid to
avoid danger.
nitric acid, and heat again to degrade remaining carbides.
(8) If there is no possibility of bumping, the watch glass can be removed.
(9) When drying and hardening it, chromium may not dissolve completely in g) and the
concentration may become a low value.
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1) of 5.2.a.
Comment 4 It is not necessary to conduct the procedures in (4.1) b) “leave at rest overnight”
because the range subjected to analysis does not contain organic matters.
Comment 5 In some cases, about 10 minutes heating in procedure in (4.1) g) is required.
439
solution for the calibration curve preparation into a low-fuel acetylene−air flame (11), and read
the indicated value at a wavelength of 357.9 nm or 359.3 nm (10).
the marked line.
analytical sample.
(11) Acetylene−nitrous oxide flame can also be used.
(12) If there is a possibility that the concentration of chromium in the sample solution
exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, transfer no more than 10 mL of
the sample solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add about 10 mL of interference
suppressor solution and about 67 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+17), and add water up to
the marked line.
Comment 6 In an acetylene-air flame, sensitivity is enhanced in high-fuel flame, but interference

Comment 8 The comparison of the measurement value (yi：52 mg/kg - 4052 mg/kg) of this testing
method and the measurement value (xi) of 5.8 Chromium 5.8.2 Atomic Absorption
Spectrometry in Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers (1992) was conducted to
evaluate trueness using fertilizers (27 samples). As a result, a regression equation
was y = − 0.405 + 0.994x and its correlation coefficient (r) was 0.999.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using mixed phosphate
fertilizer, compound fertilizer and slag silicic fertilizer (1 sample for each) to
evaluate precision were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows
the calculation results of intermediate precision and repeatability.
method validation using calcined sludge fertilizers
mg/kg.
440

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
Mixed
5 3966 96 2.4 107 2.7
Compound fertilizer 5 542 6.1 1.1 8.6 1.6
Slag silicic fertilizer 5 288 7.0 2.4 13 4.4

for chromium test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Calcined sludge fertilizer 1 10 107 5.0 9.7
References
1) Hisanori ARAYA, Yoshimi TAKEBA and Toshiaki HIROI: Evaluation of Digest
Method for Determination of Chromium in Calcined Sludge Fertilizer by Atomic
Absorption Spectrometry - Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.4, p. 23 - 29 (2011)
2) Takeshi UCHIYAMA and Yuji SHIRAI: Evaluation of Digest Method for Determination
of Chromium in Calcined Sludge Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry: A
Collaborative Study. Research Report of Fertilizer Vol.5, p. 41 - 47 (2012)
441
(5) Flow sheet for chromium: The flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers not containing calcined
sludge fertilizer and organic matters is shown below: However, fertilizers that may bump are
excluded from the scope of application.
1.00 g
analytical sample
← A small amount of water, moisten the analytical sample (as necessary)
← About10 mL of nitric acid
Leaving at rest
Cover with a watch glass
overnight
Heating Heat gently on a hot plate or a sand bath at 170 ºC - 220 ºC

for no less than 30 minutes
Heating Heat on a hot plate or sand bath at no less than 300 ºC,
until yellow-brown smoke no longer evolves.

Heating Cover with a watch glass,
digest on a hot plate or a sand bath at 300 ºC for 2-3 hours
Heating Slightly move the watch glass,

concentrate until it becomes no more than 2mL

Heating Cover with watch glass, dissolve

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers not containing calcined sludge fertilizer
and organic matters (Extraction procedure)
(Excluding fertilizers which may bump while heating)
442
Sample solution
Aliquot 25 mL 100-mL volumetric flask

← Hydrochloric acid (1+17) ( up to the marked line)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for chromium in fertilizers not containing calcined sludge fertilizer
and organic matters (Measurement procedure)
(Excluding fertilizers which may bump while heating)
443
5.5.d ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to sludge fertilizers, etc. (except for calcined sludge fertilizer) This
testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 5.5.d-2017 or Cr.d-1.
ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with chromium at a
wavelength of 205.552 nm to quantify the chromium (Cr) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
d) Chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL): A chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1
e) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 2.5 µg/mL) (1) (2): Dilute a predetermined amount of
chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a
chromium standard solution (Cr 2.5 µg/mL)


0116.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

444
added.
following:
2) Add 2mL and 4 mL of chromium standard solution (2.5 μg/mL) to volumetric flasks of 1)
above, then add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line to make a sample solution of
Standard Addition Method.
205.552 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added chromium concentration and the
corrected indicated value of the sample solution for Standard Addition Method and the sample
solution without a standard solution.
7) Obtain the chromium content from the intercept of the calibration curve to calculate
chromium (Cr) in the analytical sample.
(49 samples). As a result, a regression equation was y = 1.74+0.971x and its
445
mixed sludge fertilizer and composted sludge fertilizer was conducted. As a result, a
repeatability obtained was 0.9 % - 2.5 % as a relative standard deviation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of this testing method is 4 mg/kg.
References
5.00 g
analytical sample

Heating Cover with a watch glass, and digest for 30 minutes


Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for chromium in sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
← 0, 2 and 4 mL of chromium standard solution (2.5 μg / mL) respectively
Figure 2 Flow sheet for chromium in sludge fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
446
5.5.e ICP Mass Spectrometry (Fluid sludge fertilizers)

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.5.e-2017 or Cr.e-1.
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of chromium and an internal standard
element with mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain chromium (Cr) in the analytical sample from
the ratio of the indicated value for chromium and the indicated value for an internal standard
element. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 4.

equivalent quality.
h) Rhenium standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
i) Chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL): A chromium standard solution (Cr 0.1
j) Chromium standard solution (Cr 5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Transfer 5 mL of chromium standard
solution (Cr 0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add nitric acid (1+19) to the
marked line.
k) Chromium standard solutions (Cr 1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of chromium standard solution (Cr 5 µg/mL) to
µg/mL) as an internal standard respectively (5) and add nitric acid (1+19) up to the marked
line.

containing no chromium.
447


of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

(7)
.
1400 W
448
force.
Chromium: monitor ion (m/z)：52、53、50
1) Spray chromium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution
Cr) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (9).
analytical sample.
mg/kg - 9 mg/kg and 0.1 mg /kg - 0.9 mg /kg are 92.4 % - 108.8 %, 94.3 % -
115.4 % and 105.8 - 106.8 % as chromium (Cr) in an actual article respectively.
/kg.
449

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)

References
450
(5) Flow sheet for chromium: The flow sheet for chromium in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown
below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for chromium in liquid sludge fertilizers

Sample solution

Measurement ICP-MS (Cr: m /z 53, 52, 50 Rh: m /z 103)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for chromium in liquid sludge fertilizers

Measurement procedure)
451
5.6 Lead
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.6.a-2017 or Pb.a-1.
an acetylene−air flame, and measure the atomic absorption with lead at a wavelength of 217.0 nm
or 283.3 nm to obtain the lead (Pb) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this

equivalents.
d) Lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL): A lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
e) Lead standard solutions (Pb 0.5 µg - 5 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation (1):
Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL) to 500-mL volumetric
f) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1) (2): Hydrochloric acid (1+23)
used in the procedures in e).

Comment 1 Instead of the lead standard solution in (2), a lead standard solution for the calibration
curve preparation can be prepared by using a lead standard solution (Pb 1 mg/mL or

1) Light source: A lead hollow cathode lamp (In case of background correction system using
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure
452

room temperature to about 250°C in 30 minutes to 1 hour, continue heating for about 1
hour and further raise to 450 °C in 1 to 2 hours.
added.
organic matters.
1) Spray the lead standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the lead concentration and the indicated value of
the lead standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test solution for
3) Obtain the lead content from the calibration curve, and calculate lead (Pb) in the analytical
sample.
453
Note (7) If there is a possibility that the lead concentration in the sample solution will exceed
Comment 4 Instead of the correction method in c) 2), the lead (Pb) in the analytical sample can
also be corrected by obtaining the lead content in the blank test solution.
validation.
mg/kg.

for lead test method validation
2) 3) 4)
Sample name 1)
Sewage sludge fertilizer a 10 25.2 4.6 3.9
Sewage sludge fertilizer b 11 29.4 3.7 4.3
Composted sludge fertilizer a 10 18.6 3.2 5.0
Composted sludge fertilizer b 10 22.2 1.8 7.0
Composted sludge fertilizer c 11 86.8 1.3 4.0
References
454
(5) Flow sheet for lead: The flow sheet for lead in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for lead in fertilizers
455

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.6.b-2017 or Pb.b-1.
an ICP Optical Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with lead at a
wavelength of 220.351 nm to obtain the lead (Pb) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
d) Lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL): A lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
e) Lead standard solutions (Pb 2.5 µg/mL) (1) (2): Dilute a predetermined amount of lead
standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL) with hydrochloric acid (1+23) to prepare a lead standard
solution (Pb 2.5 µg/mL).


0116.
be set to 250 ºC.
(4) Test procedure

456
added.
organic matters.
following:
2) Add 2 mL and 4 mL of lead standard (0.25 μg/mL) solution to volumetric flasks of 1) above,
Addition Method.
220.351 nm.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the added lead concentration and the corrected
7) Obtain the lead content from the intercept of the calibration curve, and calculate lead (Pb) in
Comment 6 The comparison of the measurement value (xi：1.1 mg/kg - 69.0 mg/kg) of ICP
457
standard deviation.
mg/kg.
References
(5) Flow sheet for lead: The flow sheet for lead in fertilizers is shown below:
5.00 g
analytical sample




Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for lead in sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
458
Sample solution

← 0 mL, 2 mL and 4 mL of lead standard solution (2.5 μg / mL) respectively
Figure 2 Flow sheet for lead in sludge fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
459

(1) Summary
and its symbol is 5.6.c-2017 or Pb.c-1.
(ICP-MS) and measure the respective indicated values of lead and an internal standard element with
mass/ charge number (m/z) and obtain lead (Pb) in the analytical sample from the ratio of the
indicated value for lead and the indicated value for an internal standard element. In addition, the

equivalent quality.
e) Rhenium standard solution (Re 1 mg/mL): A rhenium standard solution (Re 1 mg/mL)
f) Rhenium standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
g) Rhodium standard solution (Rh 1 mg/mL) (4): A rhodium standard solution (Rh 1 mg/mL)
h) Rhodium standard solution (Rh 0.1 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Dilute a predetermined amount of
i) Lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL): A lead standard solution (Pb 0.1 mg/mL) traceable
j) Lead standard solution (Pb 5 µg/mL) (1)(2)(3): Transfer 5 mL of lead standard solution (Pb
0.1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add nitric acid (1+19) to the marked line.
k) Lead standard solutions (Pb 1 ng/ mL - 100 ng/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (1)(2)(3): Transfer 0.02 mL - 2 mL of lead standard solution (Pb 5 µg/mL) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add 10 mL of rhenium standard solutions (Re 0.1
µg/mL) as an internal standard respectively (5) and add nitric acid (1+19) up to the marked
line.
l) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1)(2)(3): transfer 10 mL of rhenium
standard solution (Re 0.1 µg/mL) to 10-mL volumetric flasks as internal standard respectively
(5)
and add nitric acid (1+19) up to the marked line.

containing no lead.
(4) Use when measuring arsenic, cadmium, nickel or chromium simultaneously.
460

of safety.
limitation.
(4) Test procedure

(7)
.
1400 W
force.
461
Lead: monitor ion (m/z)：208、206、207
Rhenium: monitor ion (m/z): 187
1) Spray lead standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test solution for
the calibration curve preparation into the inductively coupled plasma, and read the ratio of the
respective ion count numbers for the monitor ion of an element subjected to measurement and
an internal standard element.
Pb) to a 50-mL volumetric flask (9).
5) Obtain the lead content from the calibration curve, and calculate lead (Pb) in the analytical
sample.
mg/kg - 5 mg/kg and 0.1 mg /kg - 0.9 mg /kg are 91.2 % - 103.1 %, 85.0 % -
113.9 % and 93.2 - 108.1 % as lead (Pb) in an actual article respectively.
/kg.
462

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (mg/kg) (mg/kg) (%) (mg/kg) (%)
1）　The number of test days conducting a duplicate test
5）　Intermediate standard deviation

References
(5) Flow sheet for lead: The flow sheet for lead in fluid sludge fertilizers is shown below:

Microwave
decomposition

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for lead in liquid sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
463
Sample solution

← Rhenium standard solution (Re 0.1µg/mL) 5 mL (internal standard)
Measurement ICP-MS (Pb: m /z 208, 206, 207 Re: m /z 187)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for lead in liquid sludge fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
464
5.7 Sulfamic acid (amidosulfuric acid)

5.7.a Ion Chromatography
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to ammonium sulfate. This testing method is classified as Type D
and its symbol is 5.7.a-2017 or AS-acid.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract sulfamic acid, introduce it to an Ion Chromatograph
(IC) or a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) to isolate it with an ion exchange
column, then measure the sulfamic acid with an electric conductivity detector to obtain sulfamic
acid (amidosulfuric acid) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing
Sulfamic acid and sulfurized cyanide (ammonium thiocyanate) can be simultaneously quantified by
using this method. (Refer to Comment 4).

b) Phthalic acid: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
c) p-hydroxybenzoic acid: A reagent of no less than 95 % (mass fraction) in purity.
d) 1-sodium octane sulfonate: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
e) 1-sodium hexane sulfonate: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
f) Boric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8863 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
g) Eluent (1) (2): Weigh 0.083 g of phthalic acid, 0.552 g of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, 0.195 g of
1-sodium octane sulfonate, 0.376 g of 1-sodium hexane sulfonate and 6.183 g of boric acid to
a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add about 500 mL of water to dissolve and add water up to the
marked line. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5 µm) made of
hydrophilic PTFE.
h) Sulfamic acid standard solution (1000 mg/L) (1): Put 0.1 g of sulfamic acid, reference
material for volumetric analysis (HOSO2NH2: dried for 48 hours in a silica gel desiccator), in
a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of water to
dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
i) Sulfamic acid standard solution (10 mg/L) (1): At the time of usage, put 2.5 mL of sulfamic
acid standard solution (1000 mg/L) to a 250-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the
marked line.
j) Sulfamic acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (0.3 mg/L - 3
mg/L): At the time of usage, put 3 mL - 30 mL of sulfamic acid standard solution (10 mg/L)
to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.

(2) The concentration of prepared solutions is phthalic acid 0.5 mmol/L,
p-hydroxybenzoic acid 4.0 mmol/L, 1-sodium octane sulfonate 0.9 mmol/L, 1-sodium
hexane sulfonate 2.0 mmol/L and boric acid 100 mmol/L.
a) Ion Chromatograph (IC) or High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC): IC
specified in JIS K 0127 or HPLC specified in JIS K 0124 that satisfies following
requirements.
1) Column: A 4-mm inner diameter 100-mm long stainless-steel column tube filled with
hydrophilic methacrylate-gel, to which 5-μm particle diameter class 4 ammonium group
chemically bonds (3).
2) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 55 ºC - 60 ºC.
465
3) Detection unit: An electric conductivity detector

b) Membrane filters: Pore size is no more than 0.5 μm, made of hydrophilic PTFE
Note (3) A column is commercially sold under the name Shodex IC NI-424, etc.
(4) Test procedure

b) Add about 50 mL of water and shake to dissolve, and then add water up to the marked line.
c) Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution, and dilute exactly by a factor of 12.5 with
water.
d) Filter with a membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.5 μm) to make a sample solution.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the Ion
Chromatograph (IC) or the High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) used in
measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the Ion Chromatograph (IC) or High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph (HPLC): An example of measurement conditions is shown below. Set up
the measurement conditions considering it:
1) Column: A hydrophilic methacrylate-gel column (4-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 5-μm
particle diameter) to which quaternary ammonium group chemically bonds.
2) Column bath temperature: 58 °C
3) Eluent: Prepared by the procedures in (2) g)
4) Flow rate: 1 mL/min
5) Injection volume: 20 µL

1) Inject 20 μL of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation to an IC or
an HPLC, and record the chromatogram of electric conductivity to obtain peak area.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area of electric
conductivity of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
Prepare a calibration curve when the sample is measured.
Comment 1 In the measurement of a sample solution, there is a possibility that the recovery rate
becomes lower than actual due to the influence of matrix if the concentration is calculated with
peak height. Therefore, prepare a calibration curve using peak area.
1) Subject 20 μL of sample solution to the same procedure as in b) 1)
2) Obtain the sulfamic acid content from calibration curve by peak area to calculate the sulfamic
acid (amidosulfuric acid) in the analytical sample.
Comment 2 Calculate the concentration by the peak area similarly as the calibration curve
preparation to prevent the influence of matrix.
Comment 3 Note that it takes time to stabilize the baseline due to the usage of the ion-pairing
reagent in the elute. It is recommended to take about 120 minutes for stabilization
time before starting measurement.
Comment 4 It is possible for the simultaneous measurement of sulfamic acid and ammonium
466
thiocyanate in this testing method. In that case, mix a predetermined amount of

sulfamic acid standard solution (1000 mg/L) and ammonium thiocyanate standard
solution (1000 mg/L), dilute with water to prepare a mixture standard solution (10
mg/L) (1) and use it instead of respective standard solutions (10 mg/L) in (2) i). After
that, conduct the same procedure in (4.2) b) to calculate the respective concentrations
of materials subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Comment 5 A recovery testing of ammonium sulfate (3 brands) was conducted. As a result, the
mean recovery at additive level of 0.25 % (mass fraction) and 0.075 % (mass
fraction) was 94.4 % - 103.5 % and 94.4 % - 100.8 %.
References
1) Toshiaki HIROI and Yuji SHIRAI: Simultaneous Determination of Sulfamic Acid and
Ammonium Thiocyanate in Ammonium Sulfate by Non-suppressed Ion
Chromatography, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.5, p. 1 - 23 (2012)
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for sulfamic acid in ammonium sulfate is
shown below:
1.00 g Weigh into a 100-mL volumetric flask

Shaking to mix Stopple the volumetric flask and dissolve
Dilution Dilute 12.5 times, water
Filtration Membrane filter (no more than 0.5-µm)
Sample solution
Measurement Ion Chromatograph
Figure Flow sheet for sulfamic acid in ammonium sulfate
467
Reference: The IC chromatogram of sulfamic acid and thiocyanic acid of the standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation and sample solution (ammonium sulfate) are
shown below.
(A) Mixture standard solution (the equivalents of 60 ng as sulfamic acid and ammonium
thiocyanate (3 mg/L, 20 μL), respectively)
Enlarged diagram of peak for

sufamic acid １
(B) Sample solution (the equivalents of 0.25 % (mass fraction) as sulfamic acid and
ammonium thiocyanate added in ammonium sulfate (2500 μg/g), respectively)
Reference diagram: IC chromatogram of sulfamic acid and thiocyanic acid.

(Peak: 1. Sulfamic acid, 2. Ammonium thiocyanate)
IC measurement conditions
Column: Shodex IC NI-424 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 5μm-particle
diameter)
Other conditions are according to the example of HPLC measurement conditions in
(4.2) a)
468
5.7.b High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometry

(1) Summary
symbol is 5.7.b-2017 or AS-acid.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract sulfamic acid, introduce it to a High-Performance
Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometer to isolate it with a silica gel column, to which
crosslink-type diol chemically bonds, and measure with a Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) method to
obtain sulfamic acid (amidosulfuric acid) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of

a) Water: Water of A3 specified in JIS K 0557. Note that water of A4 or equivalent quality
should be used as the eluent which is introduced to LC-MS.
b) Acetonitrile: A reagent of LC-MS analysis grade or equivalents.
c) Formic acid: A reagent of LC-MS analysis grade or equivalents.
d) Ammonium formate buffer solution (pH 3.2): Dilute 3.153 g of ammonium formate (no
less than 95 % (mass fraction) in purity) with water to make 500 mL and adjust to pH 3.2 with
formic acid.
e) Sulfamic acid standard solution (1 mg/L): Put 0.1 g of sulfamic acid, reference material for
volumetric analysis specified in JIS K 8005, in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the
order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL
volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
f) Sulfamic acid standard solution (10 μg/L) (1): At the time of usage, put 2.5 mL of standard
solution (1 mg/L) to a 250-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
g) Sulfamic acid standard solution (200 ng/L) (1): At the time of usage, put 5 mL of standard
solution (10 µg/L) to a 250-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
h) Sulfamic acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (10 ng/L - 600
ng/L): At the time of usage, put 2.5 mL - 6 mL of sulfamic acid standard solution (10 µg/L) to
100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line. Similarly put 5
mL - 50 mL of sulfamic acid standard solution (200 ng/L) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.
a) High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer (LC-MS): LC-MS
specified in JIS K 0136 that satisfies the following requirements.
1) High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph
(i) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 30 ºC - 45 ºC.
(ii) Column: A 2-mm - 3-mm inner diameter 100-mm - 150 mm long stainless-steel column
tube filled with silica gel to which 5-μm crosslink-type diol chemically bonds or
polyhydroxymethacrylate. This should comply with the specification of a Mass
Spectrometer.
2) Mass Spectrometer
(i) Ionization method: Electro-Spray Ionization (ESI) method
(ii) Ion detection method: Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) method
b) Magnetic stirrer:
d) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g - 10000
× g.
469
Comment 1 A high Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer (LC-MS/MS) can be

used instead of a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer
(LC-MS). In this case, set up the measurement conditions considering (4.3) a) The
measurement conditions of High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass
spectrometer and confirm that a calibration curve can be prepared by the procedure
in b) in advance.
Comment 2 A column is sold under the name LUNA HILIC or Shodex ODP2 HP-2D.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer
flask.
b) Add 100 mL of water and stir it by using a magnetic stirrer for about 10 minutes.
c) After allowing to stand still, transfer a supernatant solution to a 50-mL ground-in stopper
centrifugal precipitate tube.
d) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (2) and use the supernatant as
the extract.
Note (2) 16.5-cm of rotor radius and 3000 rpm of revolutions makes about 1700 × g centrifugal
force.
Comment 3 Instead of the procedures in (4.1.1) c) and d), it is allowed to filter with Type 3 filter
paper and the filtrate can be the extract.

c) Add water to the marked line to make the extract

a) Transfer 2 mL of the sample solution to a 200-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add water up to the marked line and transfer it to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
c) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (4) and use the
supernatant as the extract.
Note (3) The ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube should be made of polypropylene,
etc. to not affect the measurement.
(4) 7.2-cm - 8.9-cm of rotor radius and 10000 rpm of revolutions makes about 8100 × g -
10000 × g centrifugal force.
Comment 4 Instead of the procedures in (4.2) b) and c), it is allowed to filter with a membrane
filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5 µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the
filtrate can be the sample solution.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of a
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometer used in measurement.
470
a) The measurement conditions of High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass

spectrometer: An example of measurement conditions is shown below. Set up the
measurement conditions considering it:
(i) Column: A silica gel column to which crosslink-type diol chemically bonds or
polyhydroxymethacrylate (2-mm - 3-mm inner diameter, 100-mm - 150-mm long, 5-µm
particle diameter).
(ii) Flow rate: 0.2 mL/min
(iii) Eluent: Ammonium formate buffer solution - Acetonitrile (1+9）
(iv) Temperature of column bath: 40 °C
(v) Injection rate: 1 μL
(vi) Measurement time: About 20 minutes
(ii) Mode: Negative
(iii) Capillary voltage: − 3.5 kv
(iv) Ion source temperature: 300 °C
(v) Nebulizer gas rate: 1.5 L/min
(vi) Desolvation temperature: 250 °C
(vii) Monitor ion: m/z 95.9

1) Inject 1 μL of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation to an LC-MS,
and record the chromatogram of monitor ion (m/z) to obtain peak area.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the sulfamic acid concentration and the peak area
of monitor ion of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Obtain the sulfamic acid content from calibration curve to calculate the sulfamic acid
(amidosulfuric acid) in the analytical sample.
Comment 5 Recovery testing was conducted using samples that sulfamic acid equivalent to 1/5 -
4 times of permissible content are added to ammonium sulfate fertilizer (1 brand),
by-product nitrogen fertilizer (1 brand), by-product mixed fertilizer (1 brand),
compound fertilizer (1 brand) and fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the
mean recovery at the additive level of 0.1 % (mass fraction), 0.025 % (mass fraction)
and 0.005 % (mass fraction) are 97.6 % - 104.2 %, 95.2 % - 107.0 % and 96.4 % -
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using ammonium sulfate
fertilizer, by-product nitrogen fertilizer and by-product mixed fertilizer to evaluate
method validation. In addition, sufficient reproducibility by sulfamic acid
concentration 0.0116 % (mass fraction) was not obtainable. But sufficient
reproducibility was obtained in the scope of sulfamic acid concentration 0.0386 %
(mass fraction) - 0.401 % (mass fraction).
471

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Ammonium sulfate 5 0.0974 0.0011 1.1 0.0027 2.7
By-product
5 0.0656 0.0014 2.1 0.0017 2.6
nitrogen fertilizer
Compound
5 0.005 0.000 2.4 0.00029 5.8
fertilizer

for sulfamic acid testing method validation
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
By-product nitrogen
9 0.401 0.030 7.5 0.035 8.8
fertilizer
By-product mixed
7 0.0957 0.0043 4.5 0.0043 4.5
fertilizer
Compounf fertilizer 9 0.0166 0.0028 16.8 0.0048 29.1
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Kohei ITO, Mariko FUJITA, Yoshimi HASHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination
of Sulfamic Acid in Fertilizer by Liquid Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS),
2) Tomoharu NOZAKI Determination of Sulfamic Acid in Fertilizers using Liquid
Chromatography-Mass Spectrometer (LC-MS): A Collaborative Study, Research Report
472
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for sulfamic acid in fertilizers is shown
below:

200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Extraction Stir to mix, 10 minites

1700 ×g , 5 minutes
Extract
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for sulfamic acid in fertilizers

(Extraxction procedure (4.1.1))
1.00 g
analytical sample (fluid)
Extraction Shake to mix
Extract
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for sulfamic acid in fertilizers

(Extraxction procedure (4.1.2))
Extract
Aliquot (5 mL) 100-mL volumetric flask

Centrifugal separation Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube,
or filtration 8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Measurement Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometer
Figure 2 Flow sheet for sulfamic acid in fertilizers

(Dilution and measurement procedure)
473
Reference: The chromatogram of sulfamic acid for the calibration curve preparation is shown
below.
Sulfamic acid
Sulfamic acid
Retention time Retention time

(A) Standard solution (The equivalent of 0.1 % of mass
(The equivalent of 0.6 ng as sulfamic fraction as sulfamic acid is added to a
acid) compound
(B) fertilizer)
Sample solution
Reference diagram: Chromatogram of sulfamic acid
LC-MS measurement conditions

Column: LUNA HILIC (2.0-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 5-μm particle
diameter)
Other conditions are according to the example of LC-MS measurement conditions
in (4.3) a)
474
5.8 Ammonium thiocyanate (Sulfurized cyanide)

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to ammonium sulfate. This testing method is classified as Type D
and its symbol is 5.8.a-2017 or SCN.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide), introduce
it to an Ion Chromatograph (IC) or a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) to isolate it
with an ion exchange column, then measure the thiocyanic acid with an electric conductivity
detector to obtain ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) in an analytical sample. In addition,
Sulfamic acid and ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) can be simultaneously quantified by

b) Phthalic acid: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
c) p-hydroxybenzoic acid: A reagent of no less than 95 % (mass fraction) in purity.
d) 1-sodium octane sulfonate: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
e) 1-sodium hexane sulfonate: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
f) Boric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8863 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
g) Eluent (1) (2): Weigh 0.083 g of phthalic acid, 0.552 g of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, 0.195 g of
1-sodium octane sulfonate, 0.376 g of 1-sodium hexane sulfonate and 6.183 g of boric acid to
a 1000-mL volumetric flask, add about 500 mL of water to dissolve and add water up to the
marked line. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5 µm) made of
hydrophilic PTFE.
h) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (1000 mg/L) (1): Put 0.1 g of ammonium
thiocyanate (3), specified in JIS K 9000 in weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of
0.1 mg. Add a small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask
and add water up to the marked line.
i) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (10 mg/L) (1): At the time of usage, put 10 mL of
ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (1000 mg/L) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add
j) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (0.3
mg/L - 3 mg/L): At the time of usage, put 3 mL - 30 mL of ammonium thiocyanate solutions
(10 mg/L) to 100-mLvolumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.

(2) The concentration of prepared solutions is phthalic acid 0.5 mmol/L,
p-hydroxybenzoic acid 4.0 mmol/L, 1-sodium octane sulfonate 0.9 mmol/L, 1-sodium
hexane sulfonate 2.0 mmol/L and boric acid 100 mmol/L.
(3) It is recommended to store in a desiccator because of deliquescence.
a) Ion Chromatograph (IC) or High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC): IC
specified in JIS K 0127 or HPLC specified in JIS K 0124 that satisfies following
requirements.
1) Column: A 4-mm inner diameter 100-mm long stainless steel column tube filled with
hydrophilic methacrylate-gel, to which 5-μm particle diameter class 4 ammonium group
chemically bonds (4).
475

b) Membrane filters: Pore size is no more than 0.5 μm, made of hydrophilic PTFE
Note (4) A column is commercially sold under the name Shodex IC NI-424, etc.
(4) Test procedure

b) Add about 50 mL of water and shake to dissolve, and then add water up to the marked line.
c) Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution, and dilute exactly by a factor of 12.5 with
water.
d) Filter with a membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.5 μm) to make a sample solution.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the Ion
Chromatograph (IC) or the High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) used in
measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the Ion Chromatograph (IC) or High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph (HPLC): An example of measurement conditions for an Ion
Chromatograph (IC) is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions considering it:
1) Column: A hydrophilic methacrylate-gel column (4-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 5-μm
particle diameter) to which quaternary ammonium group chemically bonds.
3) Eluent: Prepared by the procedures in (2) g)

1) Inject 20 μL of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation to an IC or
an HPLC, and record the chromatogram of electric conductivity to obtain peak area.
Comment 1 In the measurement of a sample solution, there is a possibility that the recovery rate
becomes lower than actual due to the influence of matrix if the concentration is
calculated with peak height. Therefore, prepare a calibration curve using peak area.
2) Obtain the ammonium thiocyanatecontent from the calibration curve by peak area to calculate
ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) in the analytical sample.
Comment 2 Calculate the concentration by the peak area similarly as the calibration curve
preparation to prevent the influence of matrix.
Comment 3 Note that it takes time to stabilize the baseline due to the usage of the ion-pairing
reagent in the elute. It is recommended to take about 120 minutes for stabilization
time before starting measurement.
476
Comment 4 It is possible for the simultaneous measurement of sulfamic acid and ammonium
thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) in this testing method. In that case, mix a
predetermined amount of sulfamic acid standard solution (1000 mg/L) and
ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (1000 mg/L), dilute with water to prepare a
mixture standard solution (10 mg/L) (1) and use it instead of respective standard
solutions (10 mg/L) in (2) i). After that, conduct the same procedure in (4.2) b) to
calculate the respective concentrations of materials subjected to measurement in the
analytical sample.
Comment 5 A recovery testing of ammonium sulfate (3 brands) was conducted. As a result, the
mean recovery at additive level of 0.25 % (mass fraction) and 0.075 % (mass
fraction) was 101.8 % - 103.7 % and 93.9 % - 97.4 %.
References
1) Toshiaki HIROI and Yuji SHIRAI: Simultaneous Determination of Sulfamic Acid and
Ammonium Thiocyanate in Ammonium Sulfate by Non-suppressed Ion
Chromatography, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.5, p. 1 - 23 (2012)
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in ammonium
sulfate is shown below:
1.00 g Weigh into a 100-mL volumetric flask

Shaking to mix Stopple the volumetric flask and dissolve
Dilution Dilute 12.5 times, water
Filtration Membrane filter (no more than 0.5-µm)
Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in ammonium sulfate
477
Reference: The IC chromatogram of sulfamic acid and thiocyanic acid of the standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation and sample solution (ammonium sulfate) are shown
below.
(A) Mixture standard solution (the equivalents of 60 ng as sulfamic acid and ammonium
thiocyanate (3 mg/L, 20 μL), respectively)
Enlarged diagram of peak for

sufamic acid
１
(B) Sample solution (the equivalents of 0.25 % (mass fraction) as sulfamic acid and
ammonium thiocyanate added in ammonium sulfate (2500 μg/g), respectively)
Reference diagram: IC chromatogram of sulfamic acid and thiocyanic acid.

(Peak: 1. Sulfamic acid, 2. Thiocyanic acid)
IC measurement conditions
Column: Shodex IC NI-424 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 5μm-particle
diameter)
(4.2) a)
478
5.8.b High-Performance Liquid Chromatography

(1) Summary
symbol is 5.8.b-2017 or SCN.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample, extract ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) and adjust
pH as necessary. Introduce it into a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with
a silica gel column to which amino group chemically bonds or a vinyl alcohol polymer column to
which amino group chemically bonds, and measure at wavelength 210 nm to obtain ammonium
thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing
Nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) can be simultaneously quantified by

equivalent quality.
c) Disodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS
d) Sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K
e) Sodium perchlorate monohydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8227 or a
reagent of equivalent quality.
f) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (1 mg/L) (1): Put 0.1 g of ammonium thiocyanate
specified in JIS K 9000 in weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a
small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water
up to the marked line.
g) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (10 mg/L) (1): At the time of usage, put 10 mL of
ammonium thiocyanate standard solution (1 mg/L) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add
h) Ammonium thiocyanate standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (1
μg/mL - 20 μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 20 mL of ammonium thiocyanate
standard solution (100 μg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to
the marked line.
a) High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC): HPLC specified in JIS K 0124 that
satisfies following requirements.
1) Column: A 4-mm to 6-mm inner diameter 150-mm to 250-mm long stainless steel column
tube filled with poly vinyl alcohol or silica gel (2) , to which 5-μm particle diameter amino
group chemically bonds.
3) Detection unit: An absorptiometric detector that can measure at wavelength around 210 nm.
d) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g - 10000
× g.
e) pH test paper: A pH test paper infilled with indicator and dried, which can measure the
479
value from pH 1 to pH 11 and a color change chart with the pH interval value 1 is attached.
Note (2) Remaining silanol group of silica gel affects the measurement of ion in some cases.
Therefore, use a column which does not affect the measurement of sodium thiocyanate
by treating the silanol group. As an example of the treatment, silica gel is to be entirely
covered with the uniform membrane of silicone polymer.
Comment 1 A column is sold under the names CAPCELL PAK NH2 UG80 or Asahipak
NH2P-50 4E.
Comment 2 pH test paper is sold under the name UNIV Test Paper, etc.
(4) Test procedure

the extract.
force.

(4.2) pH adjustment: Conduct pH adjustment as shown below.

a) Transfer a small amount of the extract to confirm pH value using a pH-test paper.
b) If the pH value in a) is pH 5 or more, transfer the extract to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
centrifugal precipitate tube (4) and conduct the procedure in f) to prepare a sample solution.
c) If the pH value in a) is pH 4 or less, transfer 40 mL of the extract to a 100-mL beaker.
d) Add a sodium hydroxide solution (5 mg/mL), adjust it to pH 5 to pH 7 with a pH meter and
transfer to a 50-mL volumetric flask with water.
e) Add water up to the marked line and transfer it to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
f) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (5) and use the
Comment 3 Instead of procedures in (4.2) b) and e) - f), it is allowed to filter with a membrane
filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the
480
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of High-Performance
Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC): An
example of measurement conditions for an Ion Chromatograph (IC) is shown below. Set up
1) Column: A vinyl alcohol polymer column (4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm - 250-mm
long, 5-µm particle diameter) to which amino group chemically bonds or a silica gel column
(4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm - 250-mm long, 5-µm particle diameter) to which
amino group chemically bonds.
2) Column bath temperature: 30 °C - 40 °C
3) Eluent (1): Dissolve 1.79 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, 0.78 g of sodium
dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate and 14.04 g of sodium perchlorate monohydrate in water to
make 1000 mL. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made
of hydrophilic PTFE.
4) Flow rate: 0.9 mL/min - 1.0 mL/min
6) Detection unit: An absorptiometric detector, measurement wavelength: 210 nm

1) Inject 10 µL of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation to an HPLC,
record chromatogram at wavelength 210 nm and obtain the peak area.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area at
wavelength 210 nm of the respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Obtain the ammonium thiocyanate content from the calibration curve by peak area to
calculate ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 This testing method enables the simultaneous measurement of nitrous acid and
ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide). In this case, mix a predetermined
amount of nitrous acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) and ammonium thiocyanate
standard solution (1 mg/mL), dilute with water to prepare a mixture standard solution
(100 μg/mL) (1) and use it instead of (2) h) ammonium thiocyanate standard solution
(100 μg/mL). After that, conduct the same procedure in (4.3) b) to calculate the
respective concentrations of materials subjected to measurement in the analytical
sample.
Comment 5 A recovery testing was conducted using samples that ammonium thiocyanate
equivalent to 1/5 - 5 times of permissible content are added to an ammonium sulfate
fertilizer (1 brand), a coating nitrogen fertilizer (1 brand), a blended fertilizer (2
brands), a compound fertilizer (1 brand) and a fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a
result, the mean recovery at the additive level of 0.025 % (mass fraction), 0.01 %
(mass fraction), 0.005 % (mass fraction) and 0.0025 % (mass fraction) are 95.4 % -
100.5 %, 94.7 % - 103.8 %, 83.8 % - 109.0 % and 87.2 % - 103.3 % respectively.
validation. Ammonium thiocyanate had sufficient reproducibility in the range from
0.00476 % (mass fraction) to 0.204 %. (mass fraction).
481

for the ammonium thiocyanate method
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garden-use mixed
10 0.00476 0.00019 4.1 0.00060 12.7
fertilizer 1
9 0.00976 0.00029 2.9 0.00050 4.7
fertilizer 2
9 0.0506 0.0019 3.7 0.0022 4.3
fertilizer 3
Compound fertilizer 1 10 0.10 0.002 2.3 0.003 2.6
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Kohei ITO, Yasuharu KIMURA, Masanori HASEGAWA and Yuji SHIRAI:
Simultaneous Determination of Nitrous Acid and Thiocyanate in Fertilizer by
High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC), Japanese Journal of Soil Science
and Plant Nutrition, Vol. 87 (2), p.120 - 124 (2016)
2) Masanori HASEGAWA and Yasuharu KIMURA: Determination of Nitrous Acid and
Ammonium Thiocyanate in Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography
(HPLC): A Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 8, p. 70 - 78 (2015)
482
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in fertilizers is
shown below:
1.00 g analytical
sample 200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water

Filtrate
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in fertilizers

1.00 g analytical
sample 100-mL volumetric flask
(fluid)
← 50 mL - 70 mL of water
Filtrate
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in fertilizers

483
Filtrate
pH value confirmation pH test paper

pH 5 or more
pH 4 or less
Aliquot (40 mL) 100-mL beaker
pH adjustment
Sodium hydroxide solution (5 mg/mL)
(pH 5 - pH 7)


8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample
Measurement High Performance Liquid Chromatograph

Figure 2 Flow sheet for ammonium thiocyanate in fertilizers
(pH adjustment andmeasurement procedure)
484
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate are shown
below.
←1
2
↓
Retention time
(A) Mixture standard solution

(The equivalents of 100 ng (10 µg/mL, 10 μL) as nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate,
respectively)
1→
2
↓
Retention time
(B) Sample solution

(The equivalents of 0.1 % (mass fraction) as nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate added in
blended fertilizer respectively)
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate

(Peak: 1. Nitrous acid, 2. Thiocyanate)
Measurement conditions for HPLC

Column: CAPCELL PAK NH2 UG80 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long,
5-μm particle diameter)
Other conditions are according to the example of HPLC measurement conditions
in (4.3) a)
485
5.9 Nitrous acid

5.9.a High-Performance Liquid Chromatography
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.9.a-2017 or NO2.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample, extract nitrous acid and adjust pH as necessary. Introduce it into
a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with a silica gel column to which
amino group chemically bonds or a vinyl alcohol polymer column to which amino group chemically
bonds, and measure at wavelength 210 nm to obtain nitrous acid in an analytical sample. In addition,
Nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide) can be simultaneously quantified by

equivalent quality.
c) Disodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS
d) Sodium dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K
e) Sodium perchlorate monohydrate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8227 or a
f) Nitrous Acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.147 g of sodium nitrite specified in JIS
K 8019 in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount
of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the
marked line.
g) Nitrous acid standard solution (100 μg/mL) (1): At the time of usage, put 10 mL of nitrous
acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the
marked line.
h) Nitrous acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (1 μg/mL - 20
μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 20 mL of nitrous acid standard solution (100 μg/mL)
to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.
1) Column: A 4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter 150-mm - 250-mm long stainless steel column tube
filled with poly vinyl alcohol or silica gel (2), to which 5-μm particle diameter amino group
chemically bonds.
d) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g -
10000 × g.
e) pH test paper: A pH test paper infilled with indicator and dried, which can measure the
value from pH 1 - pH 11 and a color change chart with the pH interval value 1 is attached.
486
Note (2) Remaining silanol group of silica gel affects the measurement of ion in some cases.
Therefore, use a column which does not affect the measurement of nitrous acid by
treating the silanol group. As an example of the treatment, silica gel is to be entirely
covered with the uniform membrane of silicone polymer.
Comment 1 A column is sold under the names CAPCELL PAK NH2 UG80 or Asahipak
NH2P-50 4E.
(4) Test procedure

flask.
the extract.
force.

(4.2) pH adjustment: Conduct pH adjustment as shown below.

a) Transfer a small amount of the extract to confirm pH value using a pH-test paper.
b) If the pH value in a) is pH 5 or more, transfer the extract to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
centrifugal precipitate tube (4) and conduct the procedure in f) to prepare a sample solution.
c) If the pH value in a) is pH 4 or less, transfer 40 mL of the extract to a 100-mL beaker.
d) Add a sodium hydroxide solution (5 mg/mL), adjust it to pH 5 to pH 7 with a pH meter and
transfer to a 50-mL volumetric flask with water.
e) Add water up to the marked line and transfer it to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
f) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (5) and use the
Comment 3 Instead of procedures in (4.2) b) and e) - f), it is allowed to filter with a membrane
filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the
487
example of measurement conditions for an Ion Chromatograph (IC) is shown below. Set up
1) Column: A vinyl alcohol polymer column (4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm - 250-mm
long, 5-µm particle diameter) to which amino group chemically bonds or a silica gel column
(4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm - 250-mm long, 5-µm particle diameter) to which
amino group chemically bonds.
3) Eluent (1): Dissolve 1.79 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate dodecahydrate, 0.78 g of sodium
dihydrogen phosphate dihydrate and 14.04 g of sodium perchlorate monohydrate in water to
make 1000 mL. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made
of hydrophilic PTFE.
4) Flow rate: 0.9 mL/min - 1.0 mL/min

record chromatogram at wavelength 210 nm and obtain the peak area.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area at
wavelength 210 nm of the respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Obtain the nitrous acid content by the peak area using the calibration curve to calculate the
concentration of nitrous acid in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 This testing method enables the simultaneous measurement of nitrous acid and
ammonium thiocyanate (sulfurized cyanide). In this case, mix a predetermined
amount of nitrous acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) and ammonium thiocyanate
standard solution (1 mg/mL), dilute with water to prepare a mixture standard solution
(100 μg/mL) (1) and use it instead of (2) h) nitrous acid standard solution (100
μg/mL). After that, conduct the same procedure in (4.3) b) to calculate the respective
concentrations of materials subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Comment 5 Recovery testing was conducted using samples that nitrous acid equivalent to 1/5 - 5
times of permissible content are added to ammonium sulfate fertilizer (1 brand),
coating nitrogen fertilizer (1 brand), blended fertilizer (2brands), compound fertilizer
(1 brand) and fluid mixed fertilizer (1 brand). As a result, the mean recovery at the
additive level of 0.1 % (mass fraction), 0.04 % (mass fraction), 0.02 % (mass
fraction) and 0.01 % (mass fraction) are 99.0 % - 100.8 %, 100.4 % - 102.0 %,
103.1 % - 106.6 % and 101.2 % - 105.9 % respectively.
validation. Nitrous acid had sufficient reproducibility in the range from 0.0255 %
(mass fraction) to 0.291 %. (mass fraction).
488

for the nitrous acid method
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Number of
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
10 0.0502 0.0005 1.1 0.0009 1.7
fertilizer 1
11 0.0255 0.00070 2.6 0.0009 3.5
fertilizer 2
9 0.150 0.004 2.9 0.005 3.6
fertilizer 3
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Kohei ITO, Yasuharu KIMURA, Masanori HASEGAWA and Yuji SHIRAI:
Simultaneous Determination of Nitrous Acid and Thiocyanate in Fertilizer by
High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC), Japanese Journal of Soil Science
and Plant Nutrition, Vol. 87 (2), p.120 - 124 (2016)
2) Masanori HASEGAWA and Yasuharu KIMURA: Determination of Nitrous Acid and
Ammonium Thiocyanate in Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography
(HPLC): A Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 8, p. 70 - 78 (2015)
489
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for nitrous acid in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g analytical
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water

Filtrate
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for niyrous acid in fertilizers

1.00 g analytical
sample 100-mL volumetric flask
(fluid)
← 50 mL - 70 mL of water
Filtrate
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for niyrous acid in fertilizers
490
Filtrate
pH value confirmation pH test paper

pH 5 or more
pH 4 or less
Aliquot (40 mL) 100-mL beaker
pH adjustment
Sodium hydroxide solution (5 mg/mL)
(pH 5 - pH 7)


8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample
Figure 2 Flow sheet for nitrous acid in fertilizers
491
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate are shown
below.
←1
2
↓
Retention time
(A) Mixture standard solution

(The equivalents of 100 ng (10 µg/mL, 10 μL) as nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate,
respectively)
1→
2
↓
Retention time
(B) Sample solution

(The equivalents of 0.1 % (mass fraction) as nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate added in
blended fertilizer respectively)
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of nitrous acid and ammonium thiocyanate

Column: CAPCELL PAK NH2 UG80 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long,
5-μm particle diameter)
in (4.3) a)
492
5.10 Biuret nitrogen

(1) Summary
symbol is 5.10.a-2017 or B-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract biuret, introduce it to a High-Performance
Chromatograph (HPLC) to isolate it with a weak acid ion-exchange column, and then measure at
wavelength 190 nm to obtain biuret nitrogen (B-N) in an analytical sample. In addition, the
Dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), urea nitrogen (U-N), guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) and guanylurea
nitrogen (GU-N) and can be simultaneously quantified by using this method. (Refer to Comment
5).

b) Potassium dihydrogen phosphate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 9007 or a
equivalent quality.
d) Biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.491 g of biuret [C2H5N3O2] (2)
in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of water,
transfer to a 100-mLvolumetric flask and warm up to 50ºC to dissolve. After standing to cool
(3)
, add water up to the marked line (3).
e) Biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 200 µg/mL): Put 10 mL of biuret nitrogen standard
solution (B-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
f) Biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 50 µg/mL - 100 µg/mL): Put 25 mL - 50 mL of
biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 200 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks and add
g) Biuret nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (B-N 1 μg/mL -
50 μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N
100 μg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.

(2) A reagent of no less than 97 % (mass fraction) in purity is commercially sold as biuret.
(3) If biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 2 mg/mL) is stored in a refrigerator,
precipitates may appear. Therefore, it is recommended to store it at room temperature.
In addition, sudden cooling should be avoided.
Comment 1 Biuret is sold by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
and Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
1) Column: A 7.5-mm inner diameter 100-mm long stainless steel column tube filled with
weak acid ion-exchange resin.
2) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 30 ºC - 45ºC.
c) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g - 10000
493
× g.
Comment 2 A column is sold under the production name Asahipak ES-502C 7C.
(4) Test procedure

flask.
c) After allowing to stand still, transfer a supernatant solution (4) to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
centrifugal precipitate tube (5).
d) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (6) and use the
Note (4) If there is a possibility that the biuret nitrogen (B-N) concentration in the sample
solution will exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a
predetermined amount of supernatant with water.
(5) The ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube should be made of polypropylene,

c) Add water up to the marked line (7) and transfer to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
Note (7) If there is a possibility that the biuret nitrogen (B-N) concentration in the sample
predetermined amount of precisely adjusted solution with water.
Comment 3 Instead of procedures in (4.1.1) c) - d) or (4.1.2) c) - d), it is allowed to filter with a

membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic
PTFE and the filtrate can be the sample solution.
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC) used in measurement.
example of measurement conditions is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions
considering it:
1) Column: A weak acid ion-exchange resin column (7.5-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long,
5-µm - 10-µm particle diameter)
3) Eluent (1): Dissolve 3.92 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate and 0.12 g of phosphoric acid
in water to make 1000 mL. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than
494
0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.

4) Flow rate: 0.6 mL/min
Comment 4 Eluent can be prepared as follows. Dissolve 19.6 g of potassium dihydrogen

phosphate and 0.584 g of phosphoric acid with water to make 500 mL and store in a
refrigerator. At the time of usage, dilute a predetermined volume of the solution by a
factor of 10 and filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than

record chromatogram at wavelength 190 nm and obtain the peak height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the biuret nitrogen (B-N) concentration and the
peak height at wavelength 190 nm of the respective standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
2) Obtain the biuret nitrogen (B-N) content from the peak height using the calibration curve to
calculate the biuret nitrogen (B-N) in the analytical sample.
Comment 5 This testing method enables the simultaneous measurement of biuret nitrogen (B-N),
dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), urea nitrogen (U-N), guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) and
a guanylurea nitrogen standard solution (GU-N). In this case, mix a predetermined
amount of biuret nitrogen (B-N 2 mg/mL), an urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 2
mg/mL), a dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution (Dd-N 2 mg/mL), a guanidine
nitrogen standard solution (Gd-N 2 mg/mL) and a guanylurea nitrogen standard
solution (GU-N 2 mg/mL), dilute with water to prepare a mixture standard solution
(200 μg/mL) (1) and use it instead of (2) e) a biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N
200 μg/mL). After that, conduct the same procedure in (4.2) b) to calculate the
respective concentrations of materials subjected to measurement in the analytical
sample.
Comment 6 Additive recovery testing was conducted using one brand of an acetaldehyde
condensed urea fertilizer, a compound fertilizer, a blended fertilizer, a fluid
compound fertilizer and a home garden-use mixed fertilizer respectively. As a result,
the mean recovery at additive level of 0.2 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass
fraction) and 0.02 % (mass fraction) were 87.0 % - 95.1 %, 90.6 % - 101.1 % and
91.2 % - 105 5 % respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a blended fertilizer, a
compound fertilizer and a home garden-use mixed fertilizer to evaluate precision
were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation
results of intermediate precision and repeatability. Table 2 shows results and analysis
results from a collaborative study for testing method validation.
495

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garden-use
5 0.0103 0.0001 0.9 0.0001 0.9
mixed fertilizer

for the test method validation of biuret nitrogen method
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Nitrogen fertilizer 12 0.832 0.050 6.0 0.086 10.3
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Masahiro ECHI, Yasuharu KIMURA and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Urea Nitrogen,
Biuret Nitrogen, Dicyandiamide Nitrogen, Guanidine Nitrogen and Guanyl urea
Nitrogen in Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography: A
Single-Laboratory Validation, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.10, p. 72 - 85 (2017)
2) Norio FUNAKI and Yasuharu KIMURA: Determination of Urea Nitrogen, Biuret
Nitrogen, Dicyandiamide Nitrogen, Guanidine Nitrogen and Guanyl urea Nitrogen in
Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC): A Collaborative Study,
496
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for biuret nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
1.00 g
analytical sample (powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Stand to cool

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample solution Supernartant
Measurement Liquid Chromatograph
Figure 1 Flow sheet for biuret nitrogen in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure (4.1.1) and measurement)
1.00 g
8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample solution Supernartant
Figure 2 Flow sheet for biuret nitrogen in fertilizers

497
Reference: The chromatogram of the standard solution of biuret nitrogen for the calibration
curve preparation is shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation (10 mg/L for each)
Peak name
(1) Urea nitrogen (2) Biuret nitrogen (3) Dicyandiamide nitrogen
(4) Guanidine nitrogen (5) Guanylurea nitrogen
Column: Asahipak ES-502C 7C (7.5-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 9-μm
particle diameter)
in (4.2) a)
498
5.11 Titanium
5.11.a ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (1)
(1) Summary
symbol is 5.11.a-2017 or Ti.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with nitric acid - sulfuric acid - perchloric acid, introduce it to an ICP
Optical Emission Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with titanium at a
wavelength of 334.941 nm to obtain the titanium (Ti) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

equivalents.
f) Titanium standard solution (Ti 1 mg/mL): A titanium standard solution (Ti 1 mg/mL)
g) Titanium standard solution (Ti 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of titanium standard
solution (Ti 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to
the marked line.
h) Titanium standard solutions (Ti 0.1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of titanium standard solution (Ti 0.1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
i) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation (1): Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in g) and h).
solution for the calibration preparation curve in h) applies to a horizontal observation
mode. While an axial observation mode can observe a measurement component of
low-level concentrations, it cannot gain the linearity of a calibration curve in the
range of high-level concentrations. Therefore, in case of using the ICP-OES of an
axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a titanium standard solution

(4) Test procedure

499
and heat until nitroxide (yellow-brown smoke) is no longer generated (2).
concentrate until the liquid volume becomes no more than 2 mL.
Note (2) Oxidation of organic matters by perchloric acid progresses extremely rapidly and
following:
1) Spray the titanium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the titanium concentration and the indicated
value of the titanium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
titanium) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
2) Add 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
4) Obtain the titanium content from the calibration curve, and calculate titanium (Ti) in the
analytical sample.
500
Comment 3 Additive recovery testing was conducted using an autoclaved lightweight concrete
powdery fertilizer, a mixed phosphate fertilizer, a compound fertilizer, a slag
manganese fertilizer, a solid fertilizer, a fluid compound fertilizer, a mixed compost
compound fertilizer and a blended fertilizer respectively. As a result, the mean
recovery at additive level of 0.01 % (mass fraction) - 0.5 % (mass fraction) were
92.9 % - 99.5 % respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a mixed phosphate
fertilizer and a compound fertilizer to evaluate precision were analyzed by the

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Mixed phosphate fertilizer 7 0.950 0.013 1.7 0.031 4.3
References
1) Keisuke AOYAMA: Determination of Titanium in Fertilizer using Inductively Coupled
Plasma Optical Emission Spectrometry (ICP-OES) , Research Report of Fertilizer,
Vol.10, p. 29 - 40 (2017)
501
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 - 2.00g
analytical sample
← A small amount of water, moisten the analytical sample (as appropriate)
Leave at rest overnight Cover with a watch glass
Heat gently on a hot plate or a sand bath at 170 ºC - 220 ºC

Heating
for no less than 30 minutes
Heat on a hot plate or sand bath at no less than 300 ºC,

Heating
until yellow-brown smoke no longer evolves.

Cover with a watch glass,
Heating digest on a hot plate or a sand bath at 300 ºC or more for 2-3
hours
Slightly move the watch glass,

Heating
concentrate until it becomes no more than 2mL

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
(Predetermined
←　About 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+23)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
502
5.11.b ICP Optical Emission Spectrometry (2)

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to slag silicate fertilizers. This testing method is classified as Type
D and its symbol is 5.11.b-2017 or Ti.b-1.
Melt an analytical sample with ammonium hydrogensulfate, introduce it to an ICP Optical Emission
Spectrometer (“ICP-OES”) and measure the emission with titanium at a wavelength of 334.941 nm
to obtain the titanium (Ti) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

b) Ammonium hydrogensulfate: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
c) Hydrochloric acid: Hydrochloric acid for arsenic analysis specified in JIS K 8180, or of
d) Titanium standard solution (Ti 1 mg/mL): A titanium standard solution (Ti 1 mg/mL)
e) Titanium standard solution (Ti 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 10 mL of titanium standard
solution (Ti 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to
the marked line.
f) Titanium standard solutions (Ti 0.1 µg - 20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation
(1)
: Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of titanium standard solution (Ti 1 mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
solution for the calibration preparation curve in f) applies to a horizontal observation
mode. While an axial observation mode can observe a measurement component of
low-level concentrations, it cannot gain the linearity of a calibration curve in the
range of high-level concentrations. Therefore, in case of using the ICP-OES of an
axial observation mode, it is recommended to prepare a titanium standard solution

0116.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample and transfer to a 200-mL tall beaker.
b) Add about 10 g of ammonium hydrogensulfate (2).
c) Heat on a hot plate at no less than 350 ºC and make the melted ammonium hydrogensulfate
come into complete contact with the analytical sample (3).
d) Cover with a watch glass, and heat at no less than 350 ºC for 1 hour.
e) After standing to cool, add about 25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5), cover the tall beaker with
503
a watch glass and heat mildly to dissolve.

f) After standing to cool, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask with water, add water up to the
marked line, and filter with Type 3 filter paper.
g) Transfer 10 mL of the filtrate to another 100-mL volumetric flask and add hydrochloric acid
(1+23) to the marked line to make a sample solution.
h) As a blank test, conduct the procedures in b) - f) using another tall beaker to prepare the blank
test solution.
Note (2) Ammonium hydrogensulfate is corrosive. Therefore, use a dispensing spoon made of
resin.
(3) After the ammonium hydrogensulfate melts, make it come into contact with the
analytical sample by tilting the tall beaker or conducting a similar procedure.
following:
1) Spray the titanium standard solution for the calibration curve preparation and blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the titanium concentration and the indicated
value of the titanium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
1) Subject the sample solution to the same procedure as in b) 1) to read the indicated value.
2) Obtain the titanium content from the calibration curve, and calculate titanium (Ti) in the
analytical sample.
Comment 2 Recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using slag silicate fertilizers (2
samples). As a result, the average rate of recovery at additive level of 0.1 % (mass
fraction) - 0.2 % (mass fraction) are 95.1 % - 98.2 %.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using slag silicate fertilizers (2
samples) to evaluate precision were analyzed by the one-way analysis of variance.
504

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Slag silicate fertilizer 1 7 0.525 0.005 1.0 0.005 1.0
Slag silicate fertilizer 2 7 0.112 0.002 1.6 0.003 2.4
References
1) Keisuke AOYAMA: Determination of Titanium in Fertilizer using Inductively Coupled
Plasma Optical Emission Spectrometry (ICP-OES) , Research Report of Fertilizer,
Vol.10, p. 29 - 40 (2017)
505
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g
200-mL tall beaker.
analytical sample
← About 10 g of ammonium hydrogensulfate
Heat on a hot plate at no less than 350 ºC
Melting Make the melted ammonium hydrogensulfate
completely come into contact with the analytical sample
Cover with a watc glass, heat on a hot plate

Heating
at no less than 350 ºC for 1 hour

←25 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+5)

Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot 10 mL 100-mL volumetric flask

←　Hydrochloric acid (1+23) (up to the marked line)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for titanium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
506
5.12 Sulfurous Acid

This method is according to 5.3 Sulfurous acid analysis in “The Official Methods of Analysis of
Fertilizers 1992”.
References
Forestry and Fisheries: The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers 1992, p.78 - 79,
Japan Fertilizers Analysis Association, Tokyo (1992)
507
6. Testing relating to the other limitations

6.1 Dicyandiamide nitrogen
6.1.a High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (1)
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to nitrolime and fertilizers containing nitrolime. This testing
method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 6.1.a-2017 or Dd-N.a-1.
Add methanol to an analytical sample to extract dicyandiamide (Dd), introduce it to a
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with an amino propyl silica gel column
and measure at wavelength 215 nm to obtain dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) in an analytical

a) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
b) Methanol: Methanol used in eluent of an HPLC is HPLC analysis grade or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Acetonitrile: A reagent of HPLC grade or equivalents.
d) Dicyandiamide standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.1 g of dicyandiamide [C2H4N4] (2) to
a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of
methanol to dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add the solvent up to the
marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
e) Dicyandiamide standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): Put 10 mL of dicyandiamide standard
solution (1 mg/ mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol up to the marked line.
f) Dicyandiamide standard solution (10 µg/ mL - 50 µg/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: At the time of usage, put 5 mL - 25 mL of dicyandiamide standard solution (0.1
mg/ mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol up to the marked line.
g) Dicyandiamide standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of dicyandiamide standard
solution for the calibration curve preparation (20 µg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks
step-by-step and add methanol up to the marked line.

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity as dicyandiamide is
commercially sold.
Comment 1 Dicyandiamide is commercially sold as dicyanodiamide by FUJIFILM Wako Pure

Chemical Co., Ltd. and Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

1) Column: A column of 4 mm - 6 mm inner diameter and 150 mm - 250 mm long stainless
steel column tube filled with silica gel, to which amino or amino propyl chemically bonds.
b) Shaking apparatus
c) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g -
10000 × g.
Comment 2 A column is sold under production names such as Hibar LiChrosorb NH2, Inertsil
508
NH2, Unison UK-Amino, Mightysil NH2, Shim-pack CLC-NH2, Shodex NH-5A,

Unisil Q NH2, etc.
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200 mL - 200-mL ground-in stopper
Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Immediately add 100 mL of methanol (3) and shake to mix by using a shaking apparatus for
about 10 minutes.
c) After allowing to stand still, transfer a supernatant solution to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
d) Centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about five minutes (5).
e) 1 mL of the supernatant is used as the sample solution.
Note (3) Add methanol immediately as the determined value becomes higher than usual if it is
left in air.
etc. to not affect the measurement
Comment 3 Instead of the procedures in (4.1) c) - e), it is allowed to filter with a membrane filter
(aperture diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made of PTFE and the filtrate can be the
sample solution.
example of measurement conditions for a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC)
is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions considering it:
1) Column: A silica gel column (4-mm - 6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm - 250-mm long, 5-µm
particle diameter) to which amino or amino propyl chemically bonds.
3) Eluent: Acetonitrile - methanol (6+1)
1) Inject 10 µL of respective dicyandiamide standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation to an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 215 nm, and obtain the peak
area or the height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area or the height
at wavelength 215 nm of the respective dicyandiamide standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
2) Obtain dicyandiamide (Dd) content from the calibration curve to calculate the concentration
of dicyandiamide (Dd) in the analytical sample.
3) Calculate the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) by the following formula.
509
Dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

= A × (MW1/MW2)
= A × 0.6664
A： Dicyandiamide (Dd) (% (mass fraction)) in an analytical sample

MW1： 4 atomic weight of nitrogen (56.027)
MW2： Molecular weight of dicyandiamide (84.080)
Comment 4 Recovery testing was conducted using nitrolime (3 samples) and a blended fertilizer
containing nitrolime (2 samples), as a result, the recovery of dicyandiamide at
concentration level of 6 % (mass fraction) and 0.6 % (mass fraction) was 94.9 % -
105.1 % and 95.6 % - 103.5 % respectively.
validation.

for the test method validation of dicyandiamide nitrogen
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Number of
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Nitrolime 1 9 0.0321 0.0010 3.2 0.0012 3.8

Nitrolime 2 10 0.159 0.002 1.3 0.006 3.8
Nitrolime 3 11 0.245 0.002 0.7 0.008 3.3
Blended fertilizers 1 11 0.124 0.001 0.7 0.002 2.0
Blebded fertilizers 2 11 0.410 0.007 1.6 0.008 1.9
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Masakazu SAIKI and Miyuki ASAO: Validation of High-Performance Liquid
Chromatography for Determination of Dicyandiamide in Nitrolime, Research Report of
Fertilizers, Vol.2, p. 25 - 31 (2009)
2) Masakazu SAIKI and Masayuki YOSHIMOTO: Determination of Dicyandiamide in
Nitrolime by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography: A Collaborative Study,
Research Report of Fertilizers, Vol.2, p. 32 - 37 (2009)
(5) Flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen: The flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen in
nitrolime and fertilizers containing nitrolime is shown below:
510
1.00 g
200-mL - 300-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
analytical sample
←　100 mL of methanol
Extraction Shaking, 10 minutes

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Sample solution Supernatant
Measurement High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph
Figure 　Flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen

in nitrolime and fertilizers containing nitrolime
Reference: HPLC chromatographs of dicyandiamide standard solution and sample solution

(nitrolime) for the calibration curve preparation are shown below.
0.11 0.11
Dd 8.458
Dd 8.541
0.10 0.10
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
AU
AU
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.00 0.00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
min min
1) Standard solution 2) Sample solution
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of dicyandiamide
1) Dicyandiamide standard solution (the equivalents of 100 ng (10 µg/ mL, 10 µL) of
dicyandiamide)
2) Sample solution (nitrolime)

Column: Hibar LiChrosorb NH2 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 25-cm long, 5-µm particle
diameter)
(4.2) a)
511
6.1.b High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (2)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers. In addition, nitrolime is excluded from the scope of
application. This testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 6.1.b-2017 or Dd-N.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract dicyandiamide, introduce it to a High-Performance
wavelength 190 nm to obtain dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) in an analytical sample. In addition,
Biuret nitrogen (B-N), urea nitrogen (U-N), guanidine urea (Gd-N) and guanylurea nitrogen
(GU-N) can be simultaneously quantified by using this method. (Refer to Comment 5).

equivalent quality.
d) Dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution (Dd-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.300 g of
dicyandiamide [C2H4N4] (2) in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
Add a small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add
e) Dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (Dd-N
200 g/mL) (1): Put 10 mL of biuret nitrogen standard solution (B-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL
f) Dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution (Dd-N 50 µg/mL - 100 g/mL) (1): Put 25 mL -
50 mL of dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution (Dd-N 200 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric
flasks and add water up to the marked line.
g) Dicyandiamide nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (Dd-N 1
μg/mL - 50 μg/mL) (1): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of dicyandiamide nitrogen
standard solution (Dd-N 100 μg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity as dicyandiamide is
commercially sold.
Comment 1 Dicyandiamide is sold by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. In addition,

dicyandiamide is commercially sold as dicyanodiamide by FUJIFILM Wako Pure
× g.
512
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200 mL- ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer
flask.
Note (3) If there is a possibility that the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) concentration in the
sample solution will exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a

Note (6) If there is a possibility that the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) concentration in the
predetermined amount of solution with water.

a) Measurement conditions for a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph: An example
of measurement conditions is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions considering it:
3) Eluent (1): Dissolve 3.92 g of potassium dihydrogenphosphate and 0.12 g of phosphoric acid
513
Comment 4 Eluent can be prepared as follows. Dissolve 19.6 g of potassium

dihydrogenphosphate and 0.584 g of phosphoric acid with water to make 500 mL and
store in a refrigerator. At the time of usage, dilute a predetermined volume of the
solution by a factor of 10 and filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no
more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.

2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) concentration
and the peak height at wavelength 190 nm of the respective standard solutions for the
2) Obtain the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) content from the peak height using the calibration
curve to calculate the dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N) in the analytical sample.
urea nitrogen (U-N), dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), guanidine urea (Gd-N) and
guanylurea nitrogen (GU-N). In that case, see 5.10.a Comment 5.
the mean recovery at additive level of 3 % (mass fraction) and 1.5 % (mass fraction)
and 0.3 % (mass fraction) were 96.3 % - 96.3 %, 94.5 % - 99.7 % and 88.9 % -
results from a collaborative study for testing method validation.
514

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garden-use
5 0.145 0.001 0.9 0.003 2.3
mixed fertilizer

for the test method validation of dicyandiamide nitrogen
4) 5) 6) 7)
Number of Mean2) sr RSD r sR RSD R
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
3) Mass fraction
References
515
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen in fertilizers is
shown below:

(powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Stand still

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 1 Flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen in fertilizers

1.00 g
8000 ×g - 10000 ×g, 5 minutes
Figure 2 Flow sheet for dicyandiamide nitrogen in fertilizers

516
Reference: Chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of

dicyandiamide nitrogen is shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solutions (10 mg/L for
each) for calibration curve preparation
Peak name
particle diameter)
in (4.2) a)
517
6.2 Chlorine
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to potassium sulfate, potassium bicarbonate, magnesium potassium
sulfate, fish cakes powder, fish cakes and compost. This testing method is classified as Type D and
its symbol is 6.2.a-2017 or Cl.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract chloride ions, introduce them to an Ion Chromatograph
(IC) to isolate it with an ion exchange column, and then measure with an electric conductivity
detector to obtain chlorine (Cl) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

b) 1 mol/L sodium carbonate solution: Solution for ion chromatography.
c) Phthalic acid: A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity.
d) 6-aminohexanic acid (1): A reagent of no less than 97 % (mass fraction) in purity.
e) Phenylboronic acid: A reagent of no less than 97 % (mass fraction) in purity.
f) Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 1 mg/mL): A chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 1000
g) Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 100 µg/mL) (2): Put a predetermined amount of chloride
ion standard solution (Cl- 1 mg/mL) to a volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
h) Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 5 µg/ mL - 50 µg/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (2): Put 5 mL - 50 mL of Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 100 µg/mL) to a
100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
i) Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 1 µg/ mL - 2 µg/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (2): Put 5 mL - 10 mL of Chloride ion standard solution (Cl- 20 mg/mL) to a
100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line.
j) Eluent for suppressor method (2): Put 6.4 mL of 1 mol/L sodium carbonate solution to a
1000-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line. Then filter with membrane
type filter (pore size: no more than 0.5 μm) made of hydrophilic PTFE (2).
k) Eluent for non-suppressor method (2): Put 0.349 g of phthalic acid, 0.380 g of
6-aminohexanic acid and 0.732 g of phenylboronic acid to a 1000-mL volumetric flask and
add about 500 mL of water to dissolve. Add water up to the marked line and filter with
membrane type filter (pore size: no more than 0.5 μm) made of hydrophilic PTFE (3).
Note (1) It is also known as “6-amino-n-caprotic acid”.

(3) A solution concentrated by a factor of 10 can be prepared in advance and the solution
can be diluted by a factor of 10 at each usage.
Comment 1 Instead of the chloride ion standard solution in (2), a chloride ion standard solution
for the calibration curve preparation can be prepared by using a chloride ion standard
solution (Cl- 0.1 mg/mL) traceable to National Metrology.
b) Centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 1700 × g.
c) Ion Chromatograph (IC): IC specified in JIS K 0127 that satisfies following requirements.
1) Column: In case of a suppressor method, a 4-mm inner diameter 250-mm long 5-μm particle
diameter column tube filled with poly vinyl alcohol porous particles, to which quaternary
518
ammonium group chemically bonds (4).

In case of non-suppressor method, a 4.6-mm inner diameter 100-mm long column tube filled
with hydrophilic polymethacrylate-gel, to which quaternary ammonium group chemically
bonds (5).
2) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 40 ºC.
3) Suppressor: Cation exchange membrane or resin should be used.
d) Membrane filters: Pore size is no more than 0.45 μm, made of hydrophilic PTFE
Note (4) A column is commercially sold under the name Shodex IC SI-52 4E, etc.
(5) A column is commercially sold under the name Shodex IC NI-424, etc.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
the extract.
e) Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution, and dilute exactly by a factor of 20 with
water (7).
f) Filter with a membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.45 μm) to make a sample solution.
force.
(7) In case of exceeding the calibration curve, dilute by a factor of more than 20.
Comment 2 Instead of the procedures in (4.1.1) c) and d), it is allowed to filter with Type 3 filter
paper and the filtrate can be the extract.
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of an Ion
Chromatograph (IC) used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for Ion Chromatograph (IC): An example of measurement
conditions is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions considering it:
aa) Suppressor method

1) Column: A polyvinyl alcohol porous particles column (4-mm inner diameter 250-mm long
5-μm particle diameter) to which quaternary ammonium group chemically bonds.
3) Eluent: Prepared in the procedure in (2) j).
ab) Non-suppressor method

1) Column: A hydrophilic polymethacrylate-gel column (4.6-mm inner diameter 100 mm long)
to which quaternary ammonium group chemically bonds.
519

3) Eluent: Prepared in the procedure in (2) k).

1) Inject 20 μL of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation to an IC and
record the chromatogram of electric conductivity to obtain peak area.
2) Obtain the chloride ion concentration from calibration curve by peak area to calculate the
chlorine (Cl) in the analytical sample.
Comment 3 Additive recovery testing was conducted with a suppressor method using samples
that 1.8 % (mass farction) – 33.4 % (mass fraction) of sodium chloride as chlorine is
added to potassium sulfate, magnesium potassium sulfate, potassium bicarbonate,
cow dung compost and fish cakes powder. As a result, the mean recovery at the
chlorine additive level of 33.4 % (mass fraction), 10 % (mass farction) - 13.4 %
(mass fraction) and 1.8 % (mass farction) - 9.1 % (mass fraction) are 100.8 %,
98.6 % - 101.1 % and 96.2 % - 103.2 % respectively. With a non-suppressor method,
they are 100.2 %, 96.4 % - 97.2 % and 93.3 % - 101.4 %.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using potassium sulfate,
magnesium potassium sulfate, potassium bicarbonate, cow dung compost and fish
cakes powder to evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of variance.
520

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
<Suppressor method>
Pottasium sulfate 5 9.93 0.01 0.1 0.03 0.3
Fish cakes powder 5 6.13 0.03 0.5 0.07 1.1
<Non-supprresor
method>
Pottasium sulfate 5 4.86 0.01 0.2 0.08 1.7
Magnesium pottasium
5 4.89 0.02 0.4 0.06 1.2
sulfate
Pottasium bicarbonate 5 4.85 0.02 0.4 0.06 1.3
Cow dung compost 5 13.15 0.04 0.3 0.16 1.2
References
1) Satoko SAKAIDA, Mariko FUJITA and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Chloride in
Fertilizers by Ion Chromatography (IC), Research Report of Fertilizers, Vol.8, p. 50 - 60
(2015)
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for chlorine in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g
analytical sample
←　100 mL of water
Extraction Magnetic stirrer, 10 minutes

Dilution 20 times of dilution, water
Filtration Hydrophilic PTFE membrane filter (0.45 μm)
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for chlorine in fertilizers
521
Reference: IC chromatographs of sample solutions (magnesium potassium sulfate and fish

cakes powder) are shown below.
Cl- Cl-
(A) Chromatograph of magnesium (B) Chromatograph of magnesium

potassium sulfate potassium sulfate
(Suppressormethod) (Non-suppressor method)
Cl- Cl-
(C) Chromatograph of fish cakes powder (D) Chromatograph of fish cakes powder
(Suppressor method) (Non-suppressor method)
Reference diagram: IC chromatogram of chloride ion

(Peak：1.chloride ion (Cl-))
522
6.2.b Silver nitrate method

(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to potassium sulfate, potassium bicarbonate and magnesium
potassium sulfate. This testing method is classified as Type E and its symbol is 6.2.b-2017 or
Cl.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract chloride ions and titrate (precipitate) with a 0.1 mol/L
silver nitrate standard solution to obtain chlorine (Cl) in an analytical sample.

b) Nitric acid: A JIS Guaranteed (HNO3 60 % (mass fraction)) Reagent specified in JIS K
c) 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution (1): Weigh 17 g of silver nitrate specified in JIS K 8550 to a
2000-mL beaker, add 1000 mL of water to dissolve and store in a colored bottle.
Standardization: Heat a sodium chloride reference material for volumetric analysis specified
in JIS K 8005 at 600 ºC ± 25 °C for 1 hour, let it stand to cool in a desiccator, and then
transfer about 1.5 g to a weighing dish, and weigh the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve
in a small amount of water, transfer to a 250-mL volumetric flask, and add water up to the
marked line to make the sodium chloride solution (1). On each day to use a 0.1 mol/L silver
nitrate solution, transfer 10 mL of the sodium chloride solution to a 200-mL Erlenmeyer
flask, add a few drops of potassium chromate solution (5 g/100 mL) as an indicator, and
titrate with a 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution until the color of the solution becomes reddish
brown. Calculate the factor of a 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution by the following formula:
Factor (f) of 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution

= W1× (A/100) × (1/58.44) × (V1/V2 × (1000/V3)) × (1/C)
= (W1×A/V3) × (4/58.44)
W1： Mass (g) of sodium chloride weighed

A： Purity (% (mass fraction)) of sodium chloride
V1： Volume (10 mL) of sodium chloride solution transferred
V2： Constant volume (250 mL) of sodium chloride solution
V3： Volume (mL) of 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution needed for titration
C： Set concentration (0.1 mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution
(1)
d) Potassium chromate (5 g/ 100 mL) : Dissolve 5 g of potassium chromate in 100 mL of
water.
b) pH test paper: A pH test paper infiltrated with indicator and dried, which can measure the
value from pH 1 to pH 11 and a color change chart with the pH interval value 1 is attached.
(4) Test procedure

523
flask.

a) Transfer 25 mL of sample solution to a 200-mL tall beaker.
b) Confirm the pH of the solution with a pH-test paper. If the pH is basic, neutralize with nitric
acid (1+10).
c) Add a few drops of potassium chromate solution (5 g/100 mL) to the sample solution as an
indicator and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution until the color of the solution
becomes reddish brown.
d) Calculate chlorine (Cl) by the following formula.
Chlorine (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= V4 × C × f × (35.45)/W2 × (100/1000) × (V5/ V6)
= V4 × f × (35.45/25)/W2
V4： Volume (mL) of the 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution required for titration
C： Set concentration (0.1 mol/L) of 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution
f： Factor of 0.1 mol/L silver nitrate solution
V5： Liquid volume of water (100 mL) subjected to extraction in (4.1) b).
V6： Transferred volume (25 mL) of the sample solution subjected to titration in
(4.2) a).
References
524
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for chlorine in potassium sulfate is shown
below:
1.00 g analytical sample 200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask

← 100 mL of water
Extraction Magnetic stirrer, 10 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for chroline in potassium sulfate (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot (25 mL) 200-mL tall beaker
pH confirmation pH-test paper

← Nitric acid (1+10) [neutralize in case of basic]
← Several drops of potassium chromate (5 g/100 mL)
0.1 mol/L siver nitrate solution
Titration
(until the solution becomes reddish brown)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for chroline in potassium sulfate (Measurement procedure)
525
6.3 Urea nitrogen

6.3.a Urease method
(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to fertilizers containing urea or urea compounds such as acetaldehyde
condensed urea, etc. However, in some cases, it is not applicable to the fertilizers that contain such
compounds as nitrolime that digests by heating. This testing method is classified as Type D and its
symbol is 6.3.a-2017 or U-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract and add urease to a predetermined amount of the
extract to hydrolyze urea into ammonium ion. Add sodium hydroxide to alkalize the solution and
subject it to steam distillation. Collect isolated ammonia with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and titrate
(neutralize) surplus sulfuric acid using 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution and correct
separately the titers of urease blank test and urease undigested blank test to obtain urea nitrogen
(U-N) in the analytical sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution and titrate
(neutralize) the ammonium ion using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and similarly correct to obtain
ammonia nitrogen (A-N) in the analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing

adding in small portions while cooling, seal tightly and leave at rest for 4 - 5 days. Transfer
5.5 mL -11 mL of the supernatant to a ground-in stoppered storage container, and add 1000
mL of water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
b) Magnesium oxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8432 or a reagent of

equivalent quality.
c) Sulfuric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid (1) (2): Add about 14 mL of sulfuric acid to a beaker containing 100
526
(1).
Or, calculate the factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula (2):
Volume (B) of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL of
0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
e) Boric acid solution (40 g/L): Dissolve 40 g of boric acid specified in JIS K 8863 in water to
make 1000 mL.
f) Urease: A reagent which completely digests 0.25 g of urea by 0.5 g of urease.
g) Sodium hydroxide solution (5 g/L) (1): Dissolve 5 g of sodium hydroxide specified in JIS K
h) Hydrochloric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8180 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
i) Bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of bromothymol blue specified
j) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896 in
k) Methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methylene blue specified in JIS K
l) Methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution: To 2 volumes of methyl red solution (0.1
m) Bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.5 g of bromocresol green specified
n) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL),

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
527
Comment 2 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid in (2) d) can be replaced with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
Comment 3 Refined products of urease made from sword beans are commercially sold. The
degree of activation may degrade even if stored in a refrigerator. Therefore, it is
recommended to test similarly and confirm activation by using urea specified in JIS
K 8731 in advance.
a) Extractor: Rotary shaker or magnetic stirrer as described below
aa) Rotary shaker: A rotary shaker that can rotate a 500-mL volumetric flask upside down at 30 -
40 revolutions/min.
ab) Magnetic stirrer:
b) Steam distillation apparatus
d) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 40 ºC - 45 ºC.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1.1) Rotary shaker
(4.1.2) Magnetic stirrer:

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200- mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer
flask.
c) Filter with Type 3 filter paper to make the extract.
Comment 6 The procedure in (4.1.2) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.1) in 6.3.c.
(4.2) Hydrolysis by urease: Conduct hydrolysis as shown below.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of the extract (the equivalents of 10 mg or more as U- N, the
equivalents of 10 mg - 100 mg as N) to a 300-mL distillation flask.
c) Add a few drops of methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL), and add a sodium hydroxide solution
(5 g/L) or hydrochloric acid (1+200) until the color of the solution becomes light yellowish
red (6).
d) Add a sufficient amount of urease to digest urea in the extract (7) (8), seal tightly and heat in the
water bath at 40 ºC - 45 ºC.
e) Let it stand to cool to make a sample solution.
f) As an extract blank test, conduct the procedures in a) (9) using another distillation flask to
prepare the undigested test solution.
g) As a urease blank test, conduct the procedures in b), d) and e) (8) (10) using another distillation
528
flask to prepare the blank test solution.
Note (6) pH 5.6 - pH 5.8

(7) An example of the additive volume of urease is shown in Comment 10.
(8) Wash urease off with a small amount of water if it adheres to the surface of a vessel.
(9) Aliquot the same amount of extract as the prepared sample solution.
(10) Add the same amount of urease as the preparation of the sample solution used.
b) Add 2 g - 3 g of magnesium oxide to a distillation flask containing the sample solution (13),
and connect this distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
f) Subject the undigested test solution to the same procedure as in a) - e) to obtain the distillate
from the undigested test solution.
g) Subject the blank test solution to the same procedure as in a) - e) to obtain the distillate from
the blank test solution.
Note (11) 5 mL - 20 mL
Comment 7 Immediately conduct the procedure in (4.3) b) not to emit ammonia gas in a vessel.

b) Subject the distillate from the undigested test solution to the same procedure as in a) to titrate.
c) Subject the distillate from the blank test solution to the same procedure as in a) to titrate.
d) Calculate the urea nitrogen (U-N) in an analytical sample by the following formula:
Urea nitrogen (U-N) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= ((B × V6－V7) －(B × V6－V8)－(B × V6－V9)) × C1 × f1 × (V10/V11) × (14.007/W2) ×
(100/1000)
= (－(B × V6) － (V7－V8－V9)) × C1 × f1 × (V10/V11) × (1.4007/W2)
B： Volume of 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution equivalent to 1 mL of

529
titration in (4.4.1) a)
titration in (4.4.1) b)
titration in (4.4.1) c)
V10： Predetermined volume (mL) of the extract in (4.1.1) c) or additive volume of
water in (4.1.2) b)
V11： Transferred amount (mL) of the extract subjected to hydrolysis in (4.2) a)
W2： Mass (g) of the analytical sample in (4.1.1) a) or (4.1.2) a)

red (14).
b) Subject the distillate from the undigested test solution to the same procedure as in a) to titrate.
c) Subject the distillate from the blank test solution to the same procedure as in a) to titrate.
d) Calculate the urea nitrogen (U-N) in an analytical sample by the following formula:
Urea nitrogen (U-N) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

= (V12－V13－V14) × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V10/V11) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (V12－V13－V14) × C2 × f2 × (V10/V11) × (2.8014/W2)
V12： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration in (4.4.2) a)
V13： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration in (4.4.2) b)
V14： Volume (mL) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid needed for titration in (4.4.2) c)
V10： Predetermined volume (mL) of the extract in (4.1.1) c) or additive volume of
water (mL) in (4.1.2) b)
Comment 8 If it is hard to confirm the endpoint due to the carbon dioxide resulting from
carbonate in the extract when magnesium oxide is used, it is recommended to boil
the extract for 1-2 minute(s) after distilling and cool, and then titrate.
Comment 9 The titration procedures in (2) a) Standardization, (2) d) Standardization and (4.4)
Comment 10 An example of the additive volume and titter of urease is shown below.
If the urea content can be estimated, calculate the volume of urea in the transferred
volume of the extract in (4.2) a) by the following formula.
Estimated urea content (mg) in the transferred volume of the extract

= (D1/100) × W2 × (V11/ V10)
530
D1： Estimated urea content (% ( mass fraction)) in the analytical sample

V10： Predetermined volume (mL) of the extract in (4.1.1) c) or (4.1.2) c)
If the urea content can not be estimated, subtract ammoniacal nitrogen and nitrate
nitrogen from the total nitrogen of the permissible content or the display component
content of the urea nitrogen in a urea compound to obtain nitrogen content. The obtained
nitrogen content is calculated as around the maximum content of urea nitrogen (U-N). In
this case, calculate the volume of urea in the transferred volume of the extract in (4.1.1) or
(4.2) a) after the procedures in (4.1.1) by the following formula.
Estimated urea content (mg) in the transferred volume of the extract

= (D2/100) × (60.056/(14.007 × 2)) × W2 × (V11/ V10)
= (D2/100) × 2.1438 × W2 × (V11/ V10)
D2： Estimated urea nitrogen (U-N) content (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical
sample
V10： Predetermined volume (mL) of the extract in (4.1.1) c) or (4.1.2) c)
The specification of urease shows that “No more than 0.5 g of urease completely digests
0.25 g of urea”. Therefore about 2 mg of urease is required to digest 1 mg of urea.
Assuming that the estimated urea content or the calculated urea content in the transferred
volume of the extract is about 43 mg (about 20 mg as urea nitrogen), about 86 mg of
urease is required. When adding 0.2 g of urease (potency 130 unit - 150 unit), the extract
containing the equivalents of 10 mg - 100 mg as urea nitrogen (U-N) can be hydrolyzed.
In addition, when about 20 mg is transferred as urea nitrogen, the differences between
the titer of the distillate from the sample solution ((4.4.1) a) or (4.4.2) a)) and the titer of
the distillate from the undigested test solution ((4.4.1) b) or (4.4.2) b)) are estimated as
follows: About 14 mL, when a 0.1 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution is used as a titrant,
about 7 mL, when 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide is used as a titrant and about 3 mL, when
0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid is used as a titrant.
Comment 11 Additive recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using samples
prepared by adding urea to sulfur, a compound fertilizer, isobuttyraldehude
condensed urea, a mixed fertilizer containing formaldehyde processed urea (one
sample for each). As a result, the average rate of recovery at additive level of 1.58 %
(mass fraction) - 39.96 % (mass fraction) are 98.7 % to 103.7 %
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using urea and a compound
fertilizer containing UF (one sample for each), to evaluate precision were analyzed
by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of
intermediate precision and repeatability.
531

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Urea 5 43.17 0.36 0.8 0.43 1.0
Compound fertilizer
5 2.39 0.07 2.9 0.12 5.2
containing UF
1）　Gross average (the number of test days (5)
6）　Intermediate standard deviation
× duplicate analysis)
2）　Average （the number of test days（T ）
7）　Intermediate relative standard deviation
× the number of duplicate testing（2））
References
2) Toshifumi FUJITA, Kimie KATO, Toyokazu NIIMI, Yasuharu KIMURA, Kohei ITO
and Yuji SHIRAI: Determination Method for Urea Nitrogen in Fertilizer by Urease,
(5) Flow sheet for urea nitrogen testing method: The flow sheets for urea nitrogen test method
in fertilizers are shown below:
5.00 g
Weigh into a 500-mL volumetric flask
Analytical sample
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min), 1 hour
Extract
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen
532
1.00 g
Weigh into a 200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
Analytical sample
← 100 mL of water
Shaking to mix Magnetic stirrer, 10 minures
Extract
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen
Extract
Aliquot
(predetermined 300-mL digestion flask
volume)
←Water (Until the solution reaches about 50 mL)
← A few drops of methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL)
← Hydrochloric acid (1+200) or sodium hydroxide solution (5 g/L)
(until the color of the solution becomes light yellowish red)
← Urease (a sufficient amount of urease to hydrolyze transferred urea)
Standing to cool
Sample solution
← 2 g - 3 g of magnesium oxide
Receiver: 200-mL - 300-mL Erlenmeyer flask or
200-mL - 300-mL beaker. A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
Steam distillation
and a few drops of methyl red-methylene blue mixture solution,
apparatus
or boric acid solution (40 g/L),

Figure 2 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen
(Hydrolysis by urease, distillation and measurement procedure)
533
6.3.b High-Performance Liquid Chromatography

(1) Summary
symbol is 6.3.b-2017 or U-N.b-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract urea, introduce it to a High-Performance
wavelength 190 nm to obtain urea nitrogen (U-N) in an analytical sample. In addition, the
Biuret nitrogen (B-N), dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), guanidine urea (Gd-N) and guanylurea
nitrogen (GU-N) can be simultaneously quantified by using this method. (Refer to Comment 4).

equivalent quality.
d) Urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.429 g of urea specified in JIS K
8731 in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of
water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked
line.
e) Urea nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-N 200 µg/mL):
Put 10 mL of urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask
f) Urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 50 µg/mL - 100 µg/mL): Put 25 mL - 50 mL of urea
nitrogen standard solution (U-N 200 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks and add water up to
the marked line.
g) Urea nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-N 1 μg/mL - 50
μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 0.1
mg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.
× g.
(4) Test procedure

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200 mL-ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer
534
flask.
Note (2) If there is a possibility that the urea nitrogen (U-N) concentration in the sample

Note (5) If there is a possibility that the urea nitrogen (U-N) concentration in the sample solution
will exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount
of supernatant with water.

considering it:

535


2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the urea nitrogen (U-N) concentration and the
peak height at wavelength 190 nm of the respective standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
2) Obtain the urea nitrogen (U-N) content from the peak height using the calibration curve to
calculate the urea nitrogen (U-N) in the analytical sample.
When Asahipak ES-502C 7C is used as a column for HPLC to analyze urea nitrogen
(U-N) in a mixed fertilizer containing formaldehyde processed urea (UF), the peak of
the urea nitrogen (U-N) and the peak of the impurity components originating from
UF are not separated, so that urea nitrogen (U-N) cannot be measured. In this case,
the peak of the urea nitrogen (U-N) and the peak of the impurity components
originating from UF are separated by using PRP-X200 as a column for HPLC instead
to be able to analyze the urea nitrogen(U-N) in the compound fertilizer containing
UF. However, when the PRP-X200 column is used as a column for HPLC, the
simultaneous measurement of urea nitrogen (U-N) and biuret nitrogen (B-N), etc. is
impossible.
the mean recovery at additive level of 6 % (mass fraction) and 3 % (mass fraction)
and 0.6 % (mass fraction) were 98.3 % - 102.9 %, 98.9 % - 105.2 % and 92.3 % -
results from a collaborative study for test method validation.
536

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Home garden-use
5 0.315 0.003 0.9 0.005 0.9
mixed fertilizer

for the test method validation of urea nitrogen
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
3) Mass fraction
References
537
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
1.00 g analytical
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Stand still

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes

Figure 1 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers
1.00 g
8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 2 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers

538
Reference: Chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of urea
nitrogen is shown below.
Reference diagram 1 HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solutions (10 mg/L for
each) for calibration curve preparation
Peak name
particle diameter)
in (4.2) a)
539
Reference diagram 2 HPLC chromatogram of the urea nitrogen standard solutions (20 mg/L)
and a formaldehyde processed urea fertilizer for calibration curve
preparation
Peak name
(1) Urea nitrogen (2) Biuret nitrogen
Column: PRP-X200 (4.1-mm inner diameter, 150-mm long, 10-µm particle
diameter)
in (4.2) a)
540
6.3.c p-dimethylaminobenzaldehide absorptiometry

(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing urea nitrogen. However, isobutyraldehyde
condensed urea fertilizers, formaldehyde processed urea fertilizers, nitrolime, sludge fertilizers, etc.,
and special fertilizers are excluded. This testing method is classified as Type D and its symbol is
6.3.c-2018 or U-N.c-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract urea and measure the coloration formed by the reaction
with dimethylaminobenzaldehide by absorbance to obtain urea nitrogen (U-N) in an analytical

b) Coloring reagent solution (1): Dissolve 20 g of p-dimethylaminobenzaldehide specified in JIS
K 8101 in 1000 mL of ethanol (99.5) specified in JIS K 8101 and 100 mL of hydrochloric acid
specified in JIS K 8180 and leave at rest overnight (2).
c) Urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.429 g of urea specified in JIS K
8731 in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of
water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked
line.
d) Urea nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-N 200 µg/mL)
(1)
: Put 10 mL of urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask

(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
c) After allowing to stand still, filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample solution.
Comment 1 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) of 6.3.a.
Comment 2 When the determination is affected by the coloring of the sample solution of (4.1) c),
add about 0.5 g of active carbon and filter with Type 3 filter paper to make a sample
solution from which the coloring disappears.

U-N) to a 50-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add 20 mL of coloring reagent solution, and further add water up to the marked line, and then
541

1) Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of urea nitrogen standard solution (U-N 200 µg/mL) to 50-mL
2) Conduct the same procedures as (4.2) b) to make U-N 0.5 mg/50 mL - 5 mg/50 mL of the
urea nitrogen standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
3) Conduct the same procedures as 2) for another 50-mL volumetric flask to make the blank test
4) Measure absorbance at a wavelength of 450 nm of the urea nitrogen standard solutions for the
as the control.
5) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the urea nitrogen (U-N) concentration and the
absorbance of the urea nitrogen standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
1) Regarding the solution in (4.2) b), measure absorbance by the same procedure as b) 4).
2) Obtain the urea nitrogen (U-N) content from the calibration curve to calculate the urea
nitrogen (U-N) in the analytical sample.
Comment 3 Additive recovery testing was conducted using a compound fertilizer, crustacea
grade fertilizer powdery and a preparation sample. As a result, the mean recovery at
additive level of 20 % (mass fraction), 10 % (mass fraction) and 3 % (mass fraction)
were 100.0 % - 102.4 %, 100.5 % - 102.0 % and 98.0 % - 103.3 % as urea nitrogen
(U-N) respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using urea, a designated
blended fertilizer and a compound fertilizer to evaluate precision were analyzed by
the one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Urea 7 45.9 0.89 1.9 0.91 2.0
Designated
7 7.45 0.16 2.1 0.20 2.7
blended fertilizer
542
References
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
1.00 g
Analytical sample 200-mL Erlenmeyer flask
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Extract Stir for 10 minutes
Stand still
Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Sample solution
Aliquot
(predetermined 50-mL Volumetric flask
volume)
Leave at rest About 30 minutes
Figure 2 Flow sheet for urea nitrogen in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
543
6.4 Guanidine nitrogen

(1) Summary
symbol is 6.4.a-2017 or Gd-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract guanidine, introduce it to a High-Performance
wavelength 190 nm to obtain guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) in an analytical sample. In addition, the
Biuret nitrogen (B-N), dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), urea nitrogen(U-N) and guanylurea nitrogen
(GU-N) can be simultaneously quantified by using this method. (Refer to Comment 5).

equivalent quality.
d) Guanidine nitrogen standard solution (Gd-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.515 g of guanidine sulfate
[C2H10N6･H2SO4] (2) in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a
small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water
e) Guanidine nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (Gd-N 200
µg/mL) (1): Put 10 mL of guanidine nitrogen standard solution (Gd-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL
f) Guanidine nitrogen standard solution (Gd-N 50 µg/mL - 100 µg/mL) (1): Put 25 mL - 50
mL of guanidine nitrogen standard solution (Gd-N 200 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
g) Guanidine nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (Gd-N 1
μg/mL - 50 μg/mL) (1): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of guanidine nitrogen standard
solution (Gd-N 100 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the
marked line.

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity as guanidine sulfate is
commercially sold.
Comment 1 Guanidine sulfate is commercially sold by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd.,
Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
× g.
544
(4) Test procedure

flask.
Note (3) If there is a possibility that the guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) concentration in the sample

b) Add about 50 mL of water (6), and shake to mix.
c) Add water up to the marked line and transfer it to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
Note (6) If there is a possibility that the guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) concentration in the sample

membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5 µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE
and the filtrate can be the sample solution.
considering it:
in water to make 1000 mL. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than 0.5
µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.
545


more than 0.5 µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.

2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) concentration and
the peak height at wavelength 190 nm of the respective standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
2) Obtain the guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) content from the peak height using the calibration curve
to calculate the guanidine nitrogen (Gd-N) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Additive recovery testing was conducted using a preparation sample for a guanylurea
fertilizer (one brand). As a result, the mean recovery at additive level of 3.71 %
(mass fraction), 1.85 % (mass fraction) and 0.371 % (mass fraction) were 91.2 %,
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a guanylurea fertilizer to
evaluate precision were analyzed by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the

4)
RSD r
5)
s I(T)
6)
RSD I(T)
7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Guanylurea fertilizer 5 1.81 0.01 0.8 0.04 2.0
546

for the test method validation of guanidine nitrogen
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Guanylurea fertilizer 11 5.13 0.21 4.0 0.19 3.6
3) Mass fraction
References
547
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for guanidine nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
1.00 g
analytical sample 200-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
(powdery)
← 100 mL of water
Stand still

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 1 Flow sheet for guanidine nitrogen in fertilizers

1.00 g
Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate,
8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 2 Flow sheet for guanidine nitrogen in fertilizers

548
Reference: Chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of guanidine
nitrogen is shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solutions (10 mg/L for
each)
Peak name
particle diameter)
in (4.2) a)
549
6.5 Cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen (water-soluble nitrogen)

6.5.a Cold buffer solution method
(1) Summary
The test method is applicable to formaldehyde processed urea fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type A (Def-M) and its symbol is 6.5.a-2017 or Buf(C)-N.a-1.
Add a phosphate solution (cold buffer solution) to an analytical sample to extract, add copper (II)
sulfate pentahydrate, sulfuric acid and potassium sulfate, pretreat by the Kjeidahl method to change
cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen to ammonium ion and add a sodium hydroxide solution to
solution to obtain cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen (water-soluble nitrogen) in the analytical
sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by
(neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain cold buffer solution soluble
nitrogen (water-soluble nitrogen) in the analytical sample.

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
550
=V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
f) Bromothymol blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of bromothymol blue specified
g) Methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methyl red specified in JIS K 8896 in
h) Methylene blue solution (0.1 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.1 g of methylene blue specified in JIS K
i) Methyl red−methylene blue mixture solution: To 2 volumes of methyl red solution (0.1
j) Bromocresol green solution (0.5 g/100 mL): Dissolve 0.5 g of bromocresol green specified
k) Methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution: To a methyl red solution (0.1 g/100 mL),
l) Phosphate solution: Dissolve 3.63 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate specified in JIS K
9007 and 5.68 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate specified in JIS K 9020 in 1000 mL of
water (5). When it is used, adjust the liquid temperature at about 25 ºC (cold buffer solution).

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
(5) pH 7.0 ± pH 0.2
551
c) Digestion flask: A Kjeldahl flask which can be connected to a steam distillation apparatus.
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample (6), and put it into a 250 mL- Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add about 200 mL of phosphate solution and shake to mix at the rate of 30 - 40
revolutions/min for about 30 minutes.
Note (6) Prepare the test sample according to Comment 3.
Comment 3 Crush a laboratory sample with a mortar or a pestle, etc. until it completely passes
through an 850 µm aperture sieve.
Comment 4 If there is no possibility for an analytical sample to hydrolyze, it is allowed to use
water instead of a phosphoric acid solution.
Comment 5 The temperature of a solution in the procedure in (4.1) b) - d) should be no more
than 26 ºC.

a) Transfer a predetermined amount of the sample solution (the equivalents of 0.5 g or less as
cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen) to a 300-mL distillation flask.
b) Add 0.1 g of copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate (7) specified in JIS K 8962, and further add 5 mL
of sulfuric acid, shake to mix and heat gently to evaporate moisture.
c) After standing to cool, add 1 g of potassium sulfate specified in JIS K 8962 and heat to digest.
d) Ignite further for 30 minutes.
e) After standing to cool, add water while shaking to mix until liquid volume reaches about 30
mL and cool it to make the digestion solution.
Note (7) Crush into powder as appropriate.
a) Transfer a predetermined amount (8) of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to an acceptor, (9) add a few
an acceptor, (9) add a few drops of methyl red−bromocresol green mixture solution, and
b) Add a proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (10), and immediately
connect this digestion flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
552
Note (8) 5 mL - 20 mL

b) Calculate the cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen in the analytical sample by the following
formula:
Cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= (B × V6－V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6－V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W2)

titration
V9： Transferred amount (mL) of the extract subjected to the Kjeldahl method in
(4.2) a)

red (11).
b) Calculate the cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen in the analytical sample by the following
formula:
Cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W2)
V12： Transferred amount (mL) of the extract subjected to the Kjeldahl method in
(4.2) a)
553
References
(5) Flow sheet for cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method: The flow sheets for
cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method in formaldehyde processed urea
fertilizers are shown below:
1.00 g
Weigh into a 250-mL volumetric flask.
analytical sample
←150 mL phosphate solution
Shaking to mix Rotary shaker (30 - 40 revolutions/min), 1 hour
← small amount of water
Extract
Figure 1 Flow sheet for cold buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method
in formaldehyde processed urea fertilizers
Extract
Aliquot 300-mL digestion flask
(predetermined
volume)
← 0.1 g copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate
← 5 mL sulfuric acid
Heating Gently
Standing to cool
← 1 g potassium sulfate
Heating After digestion, ignite further for 30 minutes
Standing to cool
← Water (until liquid volume reaches about 30 mL)
Cooling
Digestion solution
(Kjeldahl method procedure)
554
Digestion solution
A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and
Steam distillation
apparatus
or boric acid solution (40 g/L), several drops of

(Distillation and measurement procedure)
555
6.6 Heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen (hot-water soluble nitrogen)

6.6.a Heat buffer solution method
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to methylolurea polymerization fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type A(Def-M) and its symbol is 6.6.a-2017 or Buf(H)-N.a-1.
Add a heat phosphate solution (heat buffer solution) to an analytical sample to elute heat buffer
solution soluble nitrogen, add copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate, sulfuric acid and potassium sulfate,
pretreat non-dissolved matter by Kjeidahl method to change heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen to
ammonium ion and add a sodium hydroxide solution to subject to steam distillation. Collect isolated
ammonia with 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and measure surplus sulfuric acid by (neutralization)
titration using a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution to obtain the nitrogen which is
insoluble in a heat buffer solution in the analytical sample. Or collect isolated ammonia with a boric
acid solution and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization) titration using 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid
to obtain the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer solution in the analytical sample. Subtract
the nitrogen whichi is insoluble in a heat buffer solution from the separately obtained total nitrogen
(T-N) according to the method in 4.1.1 to calculate the nitrogen which is soluble in a heat buffer
solution (hot water-soluble nitrogen).

adding in small portions while cooling, seal tightly and leave at rest for 4 - 5 days. Transfer
5.5 mL -11 mL of the supernatant to a ground-in stoppered storage container, and add 1000
mL of water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
556
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
m) Heat phosphate solution: Dissolve 3.63 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate specified in
JIS K 9007 and 5.68 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate specified in JIS K 9020 in 1000 mL
of water (7). When it is used, heat until it reaches boiling point (heat buffer solution).

(3) 5 mL - 10 mL
blue-purple.
(7) pH 7.0 ± pH 0.2
557
a) Water bath: A water bath which can boil water.
d) Distillation flask: A Kjeldahl flask or round bottom flask that can be connected to a steam
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample (8) and transfer to a 300-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 100 mL of heat phosphate solution and stir it gently.
c) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, and heat in a boiling water bath while stirring at
ten-minute intervals for about 30 minutes.
d) Immediately filter with Type 3 filter paper, move the whole non-dissolved matter in a vessel
on the filter paper with 100 mL of heat phosphate solution and wash the non-dissolved matter
with hot water.

a) Put the non-dissolved matter in (4.1) d) together with the filter paper into a 300-mL - 500-mL
digestion flask.
heat gently.
f) After standing to cool, add water up to the marked line to make the digestion solution.
558

proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (13), and immediately connect
this distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
Note (11) 5 mL - 20 mL

b) Calculate the heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen in the analytical sample by the following
formula:
c) Subtract the nitrogen whichi is insoluble in a heat buffer solution from the separately obtained
total nitrogen (T-N) according to the method in 4.1.1 to calculate the nitrogen which is soluble
in a heat buffer solution (14).
Heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W2)

titration
(4.3) b)
Note (14) The total nitrogen (T-N) and the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer solution
use raw data without rounding numerical value.

red (15).
b) Calculate the heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen in the analytical sample by the following
formula:
559
c) Subtract the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer solution from the separately obtained
total nitrogen (T-N) according to the method in 4.1.1 to calculate the nitrogen which is soluble
in a heat buffer solution
Heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
= V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W2)
(4.3) b)
References
(5) Flow sheet for heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method: The flow sheets for
heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method in methylolurea polymerization fertilizers
are shown below:
1.00 g
Weigh into a 300-mL tall beaker
analytical sample
←150 mL heat phosphate solution
Stirring Gently
Heating Boiling water bath

while stirring at 10-minute intervals for 30 minutes

Transfer with 100 mL heat phosphate solution
←Wash with hot water
Non-dissolved matter
Figure 1 Flow sheet for heat buffer solution soluble nitrogen testing method
in methylolurea polymerization fertilizers
560
Non-dissolved matter
Put 300-mL - 500-mL digestion flask

←5 g - 10 g catalyst
Heating Gently
Heating After bubbles cease to form,

Standing to cool
Transfer 250-mL - 500-mLvolumetric flask, water
Cooling
← Water (up to the marked line )
Digestion solution
( Kjeldahl method procedure)
Digestion solution

(predetermined
volume)
Steam distillation A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and
apparatus or boric acid solution (40 g/L), several drops of

( Distillation and measurement procedure)
561
6.7 Activity coefficient of nitrogen

6.7.a Buffer solution method
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to formaldehyde processed urea fertilizers. This testing method is
classified as Type A(Def-M) and its symbol is 6.7.a-2017 or AI-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to elute cold water-soluble nitrogen, add potassium sulfate
copper (II) sulfate pentahydrate and sulfuric acid, pretreat non-dissolved matter by Kjeidahl method
to change cold water-soluble nitrogen to ammonium ion and add a sodium hydroxide solution to
solution to obtain cold water insoluble nitrogen in the analytical sample. Or collect isolated
ammonia with a boric acid solution and measure ammonium ion by (neutralization) titration using
0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid to obtain cold water-soluble nitrogen in the analytical sample. Separately
add a heat phosphate solution (heat buffer solution) to an analytical sample to elute the nitrogen
which is soluble in a heat buffer solution and conduct the same procedures as above to obtain the
nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer solution in the analytical sample. Subtract the nitrogen
which is insoluble in a heat buffer solution from cold water non-dissolved matter and calculate the
activity coefficient of nitrogen by dividing the subtracted value by the cold water non-dissolved
matter.

water.

= (W1 × A × 0.01/97.095) × (V1/V2) × (1000/V3) × (1/C1)

titration
quality.
562
and titrate with a 0.1 mol/L - 0.2 mol/L sodium hydroxide solution until the color of the
(1)
. Or, calculate the factor of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid by the following formula (2):
mol/L sulfuric acid
= V4/V5 ………. (1)

= (f1 × C1 × V4/V5)/(C2 × 2) ………. (2)
titration
make 1000 mL.
m) Heat phosphate solution: Dissolve 1.43 g of potassium dihydrogen phosphate specified in
JIS K 9007 and 9.10 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate specified in JIS K 9020 in 1000 mL
of water (7). When it is used, heat until it reaches boiling point (heat buffer solution).

(3) 5 mL -10 mL
blue-purple.
563

(7) pH 7.5 ± pH 0.2
a) Water bath: A water bath which can boil water.
d) Distillation flask: A Kjeldahl flask or round bottom flask that can be connected to a steam
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below. Subject the non-dissolved matters of (4.1.1)
f) and (4.1.2) d) to (4.2) Kjeidahl method respectively.
(4.1.1) Extraction by cold water
a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample (8) and transfer to a 50-mL beaker.
b) Add a small amount of ethanol specified in JIS K 8101 to moisten and add 20 mL of water at
25ºC ± 2ºC to stir.
c) Leave at rest for 15 minutes while stirring at 5-minute intervals.
d) Filter the supernatant with Type 2 filter paper
e) Wash non-dissolved matter with water at 25ºC ± 2ºC five times and filter the supernatant.
f) Transfer the whole non-dissolved matter on the filter paper using water at 25ºC ± 2ºC and
wash the non-dissolved matter using water at the same temperature until filtrate reaches 250
mL.
(4.1.2) Extraction by heat phosphate solution

a) Weigh an analytical sample (8) equivalent to 0.12 g of cold non-resolved matter and put it in a
200-mL tall beaker.
b) Add 100 mL of heat phosphate solution and stir it.
c) Cover the tall beaker with a watch glass, and heat in a boiling water bath while stirring at
ten-minute intervals for about 30 minutes.
d) Immediately filter with Type 2 filter paper (9), transfer the whole non-dissolved matter in a
vessel on the filter paper using boiling water and wash the non-dissolved matter using 100 mL
of boiling water.
Note (9) If it takes 4 minutes or more for filtrating, conduct extracting anew according to
Comment 4.
Comment 4 After conducting the procedures in (4.1.2) a) - c), add 1 g of diatomaceous earth to
stir and conduct the procedure in (4.1.2) d).
564

a) Put the non-dissolved matter in (4.1.1) f) and (4.1.2) d) together with the filter paper into
respective 300-mL - 500-mL digestion flasks.
heat gently.
f) After cooling is complete, add water up to the marked line to make the digestion solution.
proper amount of sodium hydroxide solution (200 g/L - 500 g/L) (14), and immediately connect
this distillation flask to the steam distillation apparatus.
Note (12) 5 mL - 20 mL

b) Calculate the cold-water insoluble nitrogen (N1) and the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat
buffer solution (N2) in the analytical sample by the following formula (3):
c) Obtain the activity coefficient of nitrogen in the analytical sample by the following formula
(4) (15).
Cold water insoluble nitrogen (N1) or the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer
solution (N2) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
565
= (B × V6 － V7) × C1 × f1 × (V8/V9) × (1.4007/W2) ・・・・・ (3)

titration
(4.3) b)
Activity coefficient of nitrogen (%)

= ((N1－N2)/N1) × 100 ・・・・・ (4)
N1： Cold water insoluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction))

N2： Heat buffer solution insoluble nitrogen (% (mass fraction))
Note (15) Cold water insoluble nitrogen (N1) or the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer
solution (N2) uses raw data without rounding numerical value.

red (16).
b) Calculate the cold-water insoluble nitrogen (N1) and the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat
buffer solution (N2) in the analytical sample by the following formula (5):
c) Obtain the activity coefficient of nitrogen in the analytical sample by the formula (4) in (4.4.1)
(14)
.
Cold water insoluble nitrogen (N1) or the nitrogen which is insoluble in a heat buffer
solution (N2) (% (mass fraction)) in the analytical sample
= V10 × C2 × 2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (14.007/W2) × (100/1000)
=V10 × C2 × f2 × (V11/V12) × (2.8014/W2) ・・・・・ (3)
(4.3) b)
566
References
(5) Flow sheet for the activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method: The flow sheets for the
activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method in formaldehyde processed urea fertilizers are
shown below:
1.00 g
Weigh into a 50-mL beaker
analytical sample
←A small amount of ethanol
←150 mL water [25ºC±2ºC]
Stirring
Leaving at rest For 15 minutes

while stirring at 5-minute intervals

Move with water [25ºC±2ºC]
←Wash with 100 mL of water [25ºC±2ºC]
(until filtrate reaches about 250 mL)
Cold water
non-dissolved mater
Figure 1-1 Flow sheet for the activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method
(Extraction procedure by cold water (4.1.1))
Analytical sample
(equivalent to 0.12 g
Weigh into a 200-mL tall beaker
of cold water soluble
nitrogen)
←150 mL heat phosphate solution
Stirring
Boiling water bath

Heating
while stirring at 10-minute intervals for 30 minutes

Move with water (boiling)
←Wash with 100 mL of water (boiling)
Heat buffer solution
non-dissolved matter
Figure 1-2 Flow sheet for the activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method
(Extraction procedure by heat phosphate solution (4.1.2))
567
Cold water
Subject Cold water non-dissolved mater or
non-dissolved mater or
heat buffer solution non-dissolved matter to
heat buffer solution non-
Kjeldahl method, disttilation and measurement respectively
dissolved matter
Transfer
(together with filter 300-mL - 500-mL digestion flask
paper)
←5 g - 10 g catalyst
Heating Gently
After bubbles cease to form,

Heating
Standing to cool
Transfer 250-mL - 500-mLvolumetric flask, water
Cooling
← Water (up to the marked line )
Digestion solution
Figure 2 Flow sheet for the activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method
(Kjeldahl method procedure)
568
Digestion solution
Aliquot (predetermined
300-mL distillation flask
volume)
Steam distillation A predetermined amount of 0.25 mol/L sulfuric acid and
apparatus or boric acid solution (40 g/L), several drops of

Figure 3 Flow sheet for the activity coefficient of nitrogen testing method
(Distillation and measurement procedure)
569
6.8 Initial elution rate

6.8.a Standing-in-water method
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to coated fertilizer. This testing method is classified as Type
A(Def-E) and its symbol is 6.8.a-2017 or SDR.a-1.
An initial elution rate is a quick- acting component of coated fertilizers. Target components include
total nitrogen (T-N), ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N), nitrate nitrogen (N-N), water-soluble phosphoric
acid (W-P2O5), water- soluble potassium (W-K2O) and water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO).
Add water to a laboratory sample, leave it at rest while maitaining in water at 30ºC for 24 hours and
obtain the initial elution flow of a target component. Separately measure the corresponding
component content by 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.3.3 or 4.6.3. Calculate an initial elution rate
dividing the initial elution flow of a target component by the corresponding component content.

a) Reagent solutions for total nitrogen: Reagents corresponding to clauses in 4.1.1 when
determining total nitrogen.
b) Reagent solutions for ammoniacal nitrogen: Reagents corresponding to clauses in 4.1.2
when determining ammoniacal nitrogen.
c) Reagent solutions for nitrate nitrogen: Reagents corresponding to clauses in 4.1.3 when
determining nitrate nitrogen.
d) Reagent solutions for water-soluble phosphoric acid: Reagents corresponding to clauses in
4.2.4 when determining water-soluble phosphoric acid.
e) Reagent solutions for water-soluble potassium: Reagents corresponding to clauses in 4.3.3
when determining water-soluble potassium.
f) Reagent solutions for water-soluble magnesia: Reagents corresponding to clauses in 4.6.3
when determining water-soluble magnesia.
a) Incubator: An incubator whose temperature is 30 ºC ± 1 ºC.
b) Total nitrogen: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in 4.1.1 when
determining total nitrogen.
c) Ammonium nitrogen: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in 4.1.2 when
determining ammoniacal nitrogen.
d) Nitrate nitrogen: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in 4.1.3 when
determining nitrate nitrogen.
e) Water-soluble phosphoric acid: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in
4.2.4 when determining water-soluble phosphoric acid.
f) Water-soluble potassium: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in 4.3.3
when determining water-soluble potassium.
g) Water-soluble magnesia: Apparatus and instruments corresponding to clauses in 4.6.3 when
determining water-soluble magnesia.
(4) Test procedures

flask (1).
b) Add 250 mL of water at 30ºC ± 1ºC, put it into an incubator at 30ºC ± 1ºC and leave it at rest
for 24 hours (2).
c) Filter with Type 3 filter paper (3) and shake to mix the filtrate to make a sample solution.
570
Note (1) Since no grinding is conducted and inhomogeneous laboratory samples are used, it is
desirable to heighten the reliability of determined values by conducting tests using 3 -
5 laboratory samples.
(2) Since an initial elution flow is estimated to be higher than usual if the laboratory
sample vibrates in water, water should be added gently. Do not shake to mix the
sample solution until the filtering in c) is completed.
(3) Filter most of the solution so that non-dissolved matter remains in the Erlenmeyer
flask.
(4.2) Measurement: Conduct the measurements of the initial elution flow of a target component as
specified in respective clauses in a) - f). In addition, specific measurement procedure for each
component is carried out according to a corresponding clause.
a) Total nitrogen: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and quantitate total
nitrogen according to respective clauses in 4.1.1 to make the initial elution flow.
b) Ammonium nitrogen: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and quantitate
ammoniacal nitrogen according to respective clauses in 4.1.2 to make the initial elution flow.
c) Nitrate nitrogen: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and quantitate nitrate
nitrogen according to respective clauses in 4.1.3 to make the initial elution flow.
d) Water-soluble phosphoric acid: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and
quantitate water-soluble phosphoric acid according to respective clauses in 4.2.4 to make the
initial elution flow.
e) Water-soluble potassium: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and
quantitate water-soluble potassium according to respective clauses in 4.3.3 to make the initial
elution flow.
f) Water-soluble magnesia: Transfer a predetermined amount of sample solution and
quantitate water-soluble magnesia according to respective clauses in 4.6.3 to make the initial
elution flow.
(5) Calculation of initial elution rate

a) Calculate an initial elution rate (%) by the following formula using the initial elution flow of a
target component obtained in (4.2) and separately determine (4) the corresponding component
content (5).
Initial elution rate (%)

= (C1/C2) × 100
C1： Initial elution rate of a target component (% (mass fraction))
C2： Corresponding component content (% (mass fraction))
Note (4) Determine total nitrogen (T-N), ammoniacal nitrogen (A-N), nitrate nitrogen (N-N),
water-soluble phosphoric acid (W-P2O5), water-soluble potassium (W-K2O) and
water-soluble magnesia (W-MgO) in 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.3.3 or 4.6.3 using test
samples prepared in 2.3 Preparation of test samples.
(5) Initial elution flow and corresponding component content use raw data without
rounding numerical value.
References
571
(6) Initial elution rate testing method: The flow sheet for initial elution rate testing method in
coated fertilizers is shown below:
12.5 g
300 mL Erlenmeyer flask
laboratory sample
←250 mL water [30ºC±1ºC]
Extract 30ºC±1ºC, 24 hours
Determination of Initial elution rate

a target component of a target component
Figure Flow sheet for initial elution rate testing method

of coated fertilizers
572
6.9 Humic acid (Acid insoluble - alkali soluble component)

6.9.a Gravimetric analysis
(1) Summary
The testing method is applicable to humic acid chloride fertilizers. This testing method is classified
as Type A(Def-M) and its symbol is 6.9.a-2017 or H-acid.a-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+9) to elute acid dissolved matter, filter non-dissolved matter and measure
the mass of non-dissolved matter to obtain acid non-dissolved matter in the analytical sample.
Separately add hydrochloric acid (1+9) to elute acid dissolved matter, add a sodium hydroxide
solution (10 g/L) to non-dissolved matter to elute alkali dissolved matter, and filter the
non-dissolved matter to obtain acid non-dissolved alkali non-dissolved matter in the analytical
sample. Subtract acid non-dissolved alkali non-dissolved matter from acid dissolved matter to
calculate humic acid (acid insoluble alkali soluble component).

equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.

a) Shaking apparatus
b) Drying apparatus: A drying apparatus that can be adjusted to 105 ºC - 110 ºC.
stand to cool in a desiccator after heating at 105 ºC - 110 ºC in advance and measure the mass
to the order of 1 mg.
d) Ground-in stopperweighing bottles (1): Low-form weighing bottles, 50 mm × 30 mm,
specified in JIS R 3503. Let it stand to cool in a desiccator after heating at 105 ºC - 110 ºC in
advance and measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.
Note (1) Aluminum weighing dishes described in the Handbook of the Feed Analysis Standards
-2009- can also be used.
(2) A rotary shaker that can rotate a 100-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube
upside down at 30 - 40 revolutions/min may also be used.
(4) Test procedures

(4.1) Acid non-dissolved matter
(4.1.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below.
a) Weigh 1 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg and put it in a 100-mL ground-in
stopper centrifugal precipitate tube.
b) Add 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+9) and shake to mix by using a shaking apparatus (2) for
about 1 hour.
c) Centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove supernatant (4).
d) Add water to stir (5) and centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove
supernatant (4).
e) Repeat the procedure in d) 3 times.
Note (2) When using a rotary shaker, it should be adjusted to 30 - 40 revolutions/min.

force.
(4) Remove using Komagome pipet, etc.
573
(5) Stir with a glass rod, wash non-dissolved matter which may have adhered to the glass
rod with water and add wash to a centrifugal precipitate tube.
(4.1.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below.

a) Transfer the whole non-dissolved matter in (4.1.1) e) to a crucible type glass filter and filter
under reduced pressure.
b) Put the non-dissolved matter together with the crucible type glass filter into a drying apparatus
and heat at 105 ºC - 110 ºC for 3 hours.
c) As soon as heating is complete, move it into a desiccator and let it stand to cool.
d) After standing to cool, remove the crucible type glass filter from the desiccator and measure
(4.2) Acid non-dissolved - alkali non-dissolved matter

(4.2.1) Extraction: Conduct extraction as shown below.
a) Weigh 1 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg and put it in a 100-mL ground-in
stopper centrifugal precipitate tube.
b) Add 50 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+9) and shake to mix by using a shaking apparatus (2) for
about 1 hour.
c) Centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove supernatant (4).
d) Add water to stir (5) and centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove
supernatant (4).
e) Repeat the procedure in d) 3 times.
f) Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide (10 g/L) and shake to mix by using a shaking apparatus (2)
for about 1 hour.
g) Centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove supernatant (4).
h) Add water to stir (5) and centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (3) to remove
supernatant (4).
i) Repeat the procedure in h) 3 times.
(4.2.2) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below.

a) Put the non-dissolved matter together with a ground -in stopper weighing bottle into a drying
apparatus and heat (6).
b) After standing to cool, transfer the non-dissolved matter into the ground -in stopper weighing
bottle.
c) Put the non-dissolved matter together with a ground -in stopper weighing bottle into a drying
apparatus and heat at 105 ºC - 110 ºC for 3 hours.
d) After heating, fit the stopper into the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle, and immediately
transfer to a desiccator to let it stand to cool.
e) After standing to cool, remove the ground-in stoppered weighing bottle from the desiccator,
Note (6) Heat at the temperature to enable the procedure in (4.2.2) b).
(5) Calculation of humic acid

a) Calculate humic acid by the following formula
Humic acid (% (mass fraction))

= (A1/W1) × 100 － (A2/W2) × 100 ・・・・・ (1)
A1： Mass (g) of the acid non-dissolved matter determined in (4.1.2) d)

574
W1： Mass (g) of the analytical sample sampled in (4.1.1)a)

A2： Mass (g) of the acid non-dissolved - alkali non-dissolved matter determined in
(4.2.2) e)
W2： Mass (g) of the analytical sample sampled in (4.2.1)a)
References
(6) Humic acid testing method: The flow sheet for humic acid testing method is shown below:
1g Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 100-mL

analytical sample ground-in stopper cetrifugal precipitate tubu
←About 50 mL hydrochloric acid (1+9)
Shaking to mix Shaking, 1 hour
Centrifugal separation Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube

About 1700 × g , 5 minutes
Removing supernatant
←Water
Stirring
Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube

Further repeat 3 times
Transfer Crucible type glass filter 1G4, water
Heating 105 ºC – 110 ºC, 3 hours
Measurement Weigh to the order of 1 mg

Figure 1 Flow sheet for humic acid testing method in humic acid salt fertilizers
(Measurement procedure of acid non-dissolved matter (4.1))
575
1g Weigh to the order of 1 mg into a 100-mL

analytical sample ground-in stopper cetrifugal precipitate tubu
← 50 mL hydrochloric acid (1+9)

←Water
Stirring

← 50 mL sodium hydroxide (10 g/L)

←Water
Stirring

Heating Drying
Transfer Ground-in stopper weighing bottle
Heating 105 ºC – 110 ºC, 3 hours
Measurement Weigh to the order of 1 mg
Figure 2 Flow sheet for humic acid testing method in humic acid salt fertilizers
(Testing procedure of acid insoluble - alkali non-dissolved matter (4.2))
576
6.10 Sulfate
This method is according to 5.29.2 Sulfate analysis in “The Official Methods of Analysis of
References
Forestry and Fisheries: The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers 1992, p.145 -
147, Japan Fertilizers Analysis Association, Tokyo (1992)
577
6.11 Carbon dioxide

This method is according to 5.20 Carbon dioxide analysis in “The Official Methods of Analysis of
References
Forestry and Fisheries: The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers 1992, p.121 -
123, Japan Fertilizers Analysis Association, Tokyo (1992)
578
7. Nitrification inhibitor
7.1 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine (AM)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine
(AM). This testing method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 7.1.a-2017 or AM.a-1.
Add methanol − water (1+1) to an analytical sample to extract
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine, introduce it into a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph
(HPLC), isolate with an octadecyl silylation silica gel column, and measure at wavelength 295 nm
to obtain 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine (AM) in an analytical sample. In addition, the

b) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
c) Methanol: Methanol used in eluent of an HPLC is HPLC analysis grade or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
d) 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.1 g of
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine [C5H6ClN3] (2) in a weighing dish and measure the
mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add methanol - water (1+1) to dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL
volumetric flask and add the same solvent up to the marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do
not use after 6 months after preparation.
e) 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): In the case of
usage, transfer 10 mL of 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (1 mg/mL)
to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol - water (1+1) up to the marked line.
f) 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (10 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (0.1 mg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol - water (1+1) up to the
marked line.
g) 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol - water (1+1) up to the
marked line.

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity is commercially sold as
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine.
Comment 1 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine is commercially sold by FUJIFILM Wako

Pure Chemical Co., Ltd. and Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

filled with silica gel, to which octadecyl chemically bonds.
579
10000 × g.
e) Acidic alumina cartridge column: Link a 10-mL cylinder to a column (3) that is filled with
500 mg - 1 g of acidic alumina, put 3 mL of methanol and let it flow down.
Note (3) A cartridge with a 3-mL - 6-mL column filled with 500 mg - 1 g of silica gel can be
used.
Comment 2 A column is sold under production names such as Inertsil ODS, Mightysil RP-18,
L-column ODS, Shim-pack VP-ODS, Silica C18M 4D, Puresil C18, COSMOSIL
5C18-MS-II, etc.
Comment 3 An acidic alumina cartridge is commercially sold under production names such as
Bond Elut AL-A, Sep-Pak Alumina-A, Supelclean LC-Alumina-A.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of methanol - water (1+1) and stir it by using a magnetic stirrer for about 30
minutes.
d) Centrifuge it at about 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (4) and use the
supernatant (5) as the extract.
force.
(5) If there is a possibility that the 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine in the sample
solution exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined
amount of extract with methanol water (1+1).
(4.2) Cleanup: Conduct cleanup as shown below:

a) Transfer the extract to an acidic alumina cartridge column.
b) Dispose of about the first 3 mL of effluent and then transfer about the next 2 mL to a test tube.
c) Transfer the effluent to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube (6).
Comment 4 Instead of the procedures in (4.2) c) - d), it is allowed to filter with a membrane filter
sample solution.
580
Comment 5 The test is possible by the following procedures in the case of fertilizers not
containing organic matters.
The procedures in (4.1) c) - d) and (4.2) a) - b) are omitted and “Transfer effluent” in
(4.2) c) is replaced with the “After allowing to stand still, transfer supernatant” to
operate.
particle diameter) to which octadecyl chemically bonds.
3) Eluent: Methanol - water (4+6)
1) Inject 10 µL of respective 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solutions for the
calibration curve preparation to an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 295 nm and
obtain the peak area or height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area or height at
wavelength 295 nm of the respective 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard
2) Obtain 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine content from the calibration curve to calculate
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine (AM) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 A recovery testing was conducted using compound fertilizer (1 sample) and blended
fertilizer (2 samples), as a result, the mean recovery rate of
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine at concentration level of 1.0 % (mass fraction),
0.4 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 99.1 % - 100.5 %, 99.3 % -
101.6 % and 100.2 % - 100.7 %.
References
1) Yuji SHIRAI: The volumetric analysis of 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine in
fertilizers with High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph, Validation Report of
Fertilizers (in Japanese), 44 (3), p. 26 - 41(1991)
581
(5) Flow sheet for 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine: The flow

sheet for 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g
200-mL of ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask
analytical sample
←　100 mL of methanol-water (1+1)
Extraction Stirring, 30 minutes

1700 × g , 5 minutes
Cleanup Acidic alumina cartridge column

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylprimidine (AM) in fertilizers.
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine (AM) standard

solution for the calibration curve preparation is shown below.
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of 2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine

(AM) standard solution
Column: Mightysil RP-18 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 150-mm long, 5-µm particle
diameter)
2-amino-4-chloro-6-methylpyrimidine standard solution (the equivalents of 100 ng)
(4.3) a)
582
7.2 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU). This testing
method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 7.2.a-2017 or ASU.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract 1-amidino-2-thiourea, introduce it into a
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with an octadecyl silylation silica gel
column, and measure at wavelength 262 nm to obtain 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) in an analytical

equivalent quality.
c) 1-sodium hexasulfonate: A reagent of ion pair chromatography analysis grade or equivalents.
d) Acetic acid: A reagent of HPLC grade or equivalents.
e) 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.1 g of 1-amidino-2-thiourea
[C2H6N4S] (2) in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add water to
dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up to the marked line. Store in a
refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
f) 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): In the case of usage, transfer 10 mL
of 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add
g) 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (10 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard
solution (0.1 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the marked
line.
h) 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard
solution (20 µg/mL) for the calibration curve preparation to 50-mL volumetric flasks
step-by-step and add water up to the marked line.

1-amidino-2-thiourea.
Comment 1 1-amidino-2-thiourea is sold under the name guanylthiourea by Tokyo Chemical

Industry Co., Ltd, and under the name amidino thiourea by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

10000 × g.
583
5C18-MS-II, etc.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
Note (3) If there is a possibility that the 1-amidino-2-thiourea concentration in the sample
amount of supernatant with water.
sample solution.
3) Eluent: Dissolve 0.94 g of sodium 1-hexasulfonic acid in 1000 mL of methanol water (2+8),
adjust to pH 3.15 with acetic acid and filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no
more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE (1).

1) Inject 10 µL of respective 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation to an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 262 nm and obtain the peak
area or height.
wavelength 262 nm of the respective 1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solutions for the
584
2) Obtain the 1-amidino-2-thiourea content from the calibration curve to calculate

1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 A recovery testing with triplicates measurement was conducted using compound
fertilizer (2 samples), as a result, the mean recovery rate of 1-amidino-2-thiourea at
concentration level of 1.0 % (mass fraction), 0.5 % (mass fraction) and 0.25 % (mass
fraction) were 99.0 % - 104.3 %, 97.7 % - 100.7 % and 99.7 % - 101.3 %.
validation.

for the test method validation of 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU)
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)

3) Mass fraction
References
1) Kazunori CHIBA： Analysis method of 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) of Nitrification
inhibitor in fertilizers with High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph, Validation Report
of Fertilizers (in Japanese), 43 (4), p. 15 - 22 (1990)
2) Shigehiro KAI and Erina WATABE: Determination of 1-Amidino-2-thiourea as a
Nitrification Inhibitor in Compound Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid
Chromatography: A Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizers, Vol.6, p. 36 -
42 (2013)
585
(5) Flow sheet for 1-amidino-2-thiourea: The flow sheet for 1-amidino-2-thiourea in fertilizers
is shown below:

←　100 mL of water

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) in fertilizers.
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) standard solution for the

calibration curve preparation is shown below.
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of 1-amidino-2-thiourea (ASU) standard solution

diameter)
1-amidino-2-thiourea standard solution (the equivalents of 200 ng)
(4.2) a)
586
7.3 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride
(ATC) but not containing organic matters. This testing method is classified as Type C and its
symbol is 7.3.a-2017 or ATC.a-1.
Add methanol to an analytical sample to extract 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride, introduce it
into a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with an aminopropyl silica gel
column, and measure at wavelength 220 nm to obtain 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC)
4.

a) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
equivalent quality.
c) Acetonitrile: Acetonitrile used in eluent of an HPLC is a reagent of HPLC analysis grade or
equivalents.
d) 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1)(2): Transfer 0.1 g of
4-amino-1,2,4-triazole [C2H4N4] (3) to a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of
0.1 mg. Add methanol to dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL amber volumetric flask and add
methanol to the marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after
preparation.
e) 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): In the case of usage, transfer 10 mL
of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solution (1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add
methanol up to the marked line.
f) 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solution (10 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard
solution (0.1 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol up to the
marked line.
g) 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard
Note (1) The solution contains 1.434 mg/mL as 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride.

4-amino-1,2,4-triazole.
Comment 1 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole is sold under production names such as 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole

by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., and Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd,
and 4-amino-4H-1,2,4-triazole by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.

587

b) Magnetic stirrer
10000 × g.
Unisil Q NH2, etc.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of methanol and stir it with using a magnetic stirrer for about 10 minutes.
c) After allowing to stand still, transfer a supernatant solution to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
sample solution.
1) Inject 10 µL of respective 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solutions for the calibration curve
area or height.
wavelength 220 nm of the 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole standard solutions for the respective
588
2) Obtain the amount of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole from the calibration curve to calculate

4-amino-1,2,4-triazole in the analytical sample.
3) Calculate the 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC) by the following formula.
4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride in the analytical sample (% (mass fraction))

= A × 1.434
A： 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride in the analytical sample (% (mass fraction))
Comment 4 A recovery testing was conducted using compound fertilizer (2 samples), as a result,
the mean recovery rate of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride at concentration level
of 0.5 % (mass fraction), 0.3 % (mass fraction) and 0.2 % (mass fraction) were
100.2 % - 104.9 %, 100.8 % - 103.0 % and 100.7 % - 104.2 %.
References
1) Koichi SAKAGAMI: Analysis methods of 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride with
High-Performance Liquid Chromatography, Validation Report of Fertilizers (in
Japanese), 40 (4), p.9 - 16 (1987)
(5) Flow sheet for 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC): The flow sheet for
4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride in fertilizers is shown below:

←　100 mL of Methanol

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole hydrochloride (ATC) in fertilizers
589
7.4 N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid
(DCS) but not containing organic matters. This testing method is classified as Type C and its
symbol is 7.4.a-2017 or DCS.a-1.
Add methanol - phosphoric acid (996+4) and water to an analytical sample to extract
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS), introduce it into a High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with octadecyl silylation silica gel column, and measure at
wavelength 246 nm to obtain N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) in an analytical sample.

quality.
equivalent quality.
d) Phosphoric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 9005 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
e) N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 0.1 g of
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid [C10H9Cl2NO3] to a weighing dish and measure the
mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add methanol to dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask
and add methanol to the marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months
after preparation.
f) N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): In the case of usage,
transfer 10 mL of N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (1 mg/mL) to a
100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol up to the marked line.
g) N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (10 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (0.1 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step and add methanol up to the marked line.
h) N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation
(20 µg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol up to the marked line.

b) Magnetic stirrer
10000 × g.
590
5C18-MS-II, etc.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of methanol - phosphate (996+4) and stir it with a magnetic stirrer for about 30
minutes.
Note (2) If there is a possibility that the N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid concentration in
the sample solution exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a
predetermined amount of the outflow solution with methanol.
sample solution.
3) Eluent: Methanol - water (5) (55 + 45)
Note (5) Adjust the water used to pH 3 with phosphpric acid in advance.

1) Inject 10 µL of respective N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solutions for the
calibration curve preparation to an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 246 nm and
obtain the peak area or height.
wavelength 246 nm of the respective N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution
591

2) Obtain the N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid content from the calibration curve to
calculate N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) in the analytical sample.
Comment 3 Recovery testing was conducted using compound fertilizer (2 samples) and blended
fertilizer (1 sample), as a result, the mean recovery rate of N-2,5-dichlorophenyl
succinamic acid at concentration level of 0.4 % (mass fraction), 0.2 % (mass
fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 100.9 % - 101.4 %, 100.8 % - 101.4 % and
101.2 % - 103.4 %.
References
1) Akira KUBO: Analysis methods of N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) of
Nitrification suppression materials in fertilizers with High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph, Validation Report of Fertilizers (in Japanese), 44 (4), p.25 - 36 (1991).
(5) Flow sheet for N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS): The flow sheet for
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) in fertilizers is shown below:

←　100 mL of methanol phosphoric acid (996+4)

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) in fertilizers.
592
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) standard

solution for the calibration curve preparation is shown below.
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid

diameter)
N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid standard solution (the equivalents of 100 ng)
(4.2) a)
593
7.5 Dicyandiamide (Dd)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing dicyandiamide (Dd). This testing method
is classified as Type B and its symbol is 7.5.a-2017 or Dd.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample, leave at rest for a little while and add methanol to extract
dicyandiamide. After removing interfering substances with a silica gel cartridge column, introduce
it into a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with an aminopropyl silica gel
column, and measure at wavelength 215 nm to obtain dicyandiamide (Dd) in an analytical sample.

quality.
equivalent quality.
d) Acetonitrile: A reagent of HPLC grade or equivalents.
e) Dicyandiamide standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.1 g of dicyandiamide [C2H4N4] (2) to
a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Add a small amount of
methanol to dissolve, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add the solvent up to the
marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
f) Dicyandiamide standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): At the time of usage, put 10 mL of
dicyandiamide standard solution (1 mg/ mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol
g) Dicyandiamide standard solution (10 µg/ mL - 50 µg/ mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: At the time of usage, put 5 mL - 25 mL of dicyandiamide standard solution (0.1
mg/ mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol up to the marked line.
h) Dicyandiamide standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of dicyandiamide standard
i) Sodium sulfate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8987 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % in purity is commercially sold as dicyandiamide.
Comment 1 Dicyandiamide is commercially sold as dicyanodiamide by FUJIFILM Wako Pure


594
10000 × g.
e) Silica gel cartridge column: Link a 10-mL cylinder to the column (3) filled with 500 mg - 1
g of silica gel, add 3 mL of methanol to let it flow down.
Note (3) A cartridge with a 3-mL - 6-mL column filled with 500 mg – 1 g of silica gel can be
used.
Unisil Q NH2, etc.
Comment 3 A silica gel cartridge column is commercially sold under production names such as
Sep-Pak Plus Silica, InertSep Si.
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 1.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200 mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer
flask.
b) Add 1 mL of water (4) and leave at rest for 5 minutes.
c) Add 100 mL of methanol and shake to mix with a shaking apparatus for about 10 minutes.
d) Add an appropriate amount of sodium sulfate (5).
e) After allowing to stand still, transfer a supernatant solution to a 50-mL ground-in stopper
f) Centrifuge it at about 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (6) and use the
supernatant (7) as the extract.
Note (4) Mix well until the whole sample comes in contact with water.
(5) About 5 g - 10 g.
(6) 16.5-cm of rotor radius and 3000 rpm of revolutions makes about 1700 × g centrifugal
force.
(7) If there is a possibility that the concentration of dicyandiamide in the sample solution
exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount of
extract with methanol.

a) Transfer extract to a silica gel cartridge column.
sample solution.
595
4) Flow rate: 0.5 mL/min - 1 mL/min
1) Inject 10 µL of respective dicyandiamide standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation to an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 215 nm, and obtain the peak
area or the height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area or the height
at wavelength 215 nm of the respective dicyandiamide standard solutions for the calibration
curve preparation.
2) Obtain dicyandiamide content from the calibration curve to calculate dicyandiamide (Dd) in
Comment 5 Recovery testing was conducted using inorganic compound fertilizer (2 samples) and
organic compound fertilizer (3 samples), as a result, the mean recovery at the
concentration level of 2 % (mass fraction) and 0.2% (mass fraction) were 101.2 % -
102.6 % and 98.4 % - 100.6 %.
validation.
596

for the test method validation of dicyandiamide
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
3) Mass fraction
References
1) Masakazu SAIKI: Development of High-Performance Liquid Chromatography for
Determination of Dicyandiamide as a Nitrification Inhibitor in Fertilizer. Research
2) Masakazu SAIKI: Determination of Dicyandiamide as a Nitrification Inhibitor in
Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography: Collaborative Study, Research
597
(5) Flow sheet for dicyandiamide: The flow sheet for dicyandiamide in fertilizers is shown
1.00 g
analytical sample
←　1 mL of water
Leave at rest 5 minutes
←　100 mL of methanol
Shaking 10 minutes
←　An adequate amount of sodium sulfate
1700　× g , 5 minutes
Cleanup Silica gel cartridge column
1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube,

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for dicyandiamide (Dd) in fertilizers
598
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of dicyandiamide standard solution for the calibration curve
preparation and sample solution (compound fertilizer) are shown below.
0.20 0.20
0.18 0.18
8.607 Dd
0.16 0.16
0.14 0.14
0.12 8.605 Dd 0.12

AU
AU
0.10 0.10
0.08 0.08
0.06 0.06
0.04 0.04
0.02 0.02
0.00 0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
min min
1) Standard solution 2) Sample solution
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of dicyandiamide (Dd)
1) Dicyandiamide standard solution (the equivalents of 100 ng (10 µg/ mL, 10 µL) of
dicyandiamide)
2) Sample solution (compound fertilizer)

Column: Inertsil NH2 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long, 5-µm particle
diameter)
Flow rate: 0.5 mL/min
(4.3) a)
599
7.6 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers containing 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST). This testing
method is classified as Type C and its symbol is 7.6.a-2017 or ST.a-1.
Add methanol−water (1+1) to an analytical sample to extract 2-sulfanilamide thiazole, introduce it
into a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with an octadecyl silylation silica
gel column, and measure at wavelength 285 nm to obtain 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST) in an

quality.
equivalent quality.
d) 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 0.1 g of 2-sulfanilamide
thiazole [C9H9N3O2S2] (2) to a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
Add water to dissolve, transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask and add methanol−water (1+1)
to the marked line. Store in a refrigerator, and do not use after 6 months after preparation.
e) 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (0.1 mg/mL): In the case of usage, transfer 10
mL of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (100 µg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask
and add methanol−water (1+1) up to the marked line.
f) 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (10 µg/mL - 50 µg/mL) for the calibration
curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 5 mL - 25 mL of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole
standard solution (0.1 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add methanol -
water (1+1) up to the marked line.
g) 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration
curve preparation: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole
standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (20 µg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks
step-by-step and add methanol−water (1+1) up to the marked line.

2-sulfanilamide thiazole.
Comment 1 2-sulfanilamide thiazole is sold under the production name sulfathiazole by Tokyo
Chemical Industry Co., Ltd, FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., and Kanto
Chemical Co., Inc.

600
10000 × g.
e) Acidic alumina cartridge column: Link a 10-mL cylinder to a column (3) that is filled with
500 mg - 1 g of acidic alumina, put 3 mL of methanol and let it flow down.
Note (3) A cartridge with a 3-mL - 6-mL column filled with 500 mg – 1 g of silica gel can be
used.
5C18-MS-II, etc.
Comment 3 An acidic alumina cartridge is commercially sold under production names such as
Bond Elut AL-A, Sep-Pak Alumina-A, Supelclean LC-Alumina-A.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of methanol - water (1+1) and stir it by using a magnetic stirrer for about 15
minutes.
d) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (4) and use the supernatant (5)
as the extract.
force.
(5) If there is a possibility that the 2-sulfanilamide thiazole concentration in the sample
amount of the extract with methanol.

a) Transfer the extract to an acidic alumina cartridge column.
sample solution.
Comment 5 The test is possible by the following procedures in the case of fertilizers not
containing organic matters.
The procedures in (4.1) c) - d) and (4.2) a) - b) are omitted and “Transfer effluent” in
(4.2) c) is replaced with the “After allowing to stand still, transfer supernatant” to
601
operate.
3) Eluent: Methanol−water (2+8)
1) Inject 10 µL of respective 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solutions for the calibration curve
area or height.
wavelength 285 nm of the respective 2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solutions for the
2) Obtain the 2-sulfanilamide thiazole content from the calibration curve to calculate
2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Recovery testing was conducted using compound fertilizer (1 sample) and blended
fertilizer (2 sample), as a result, the mean recovery rate of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole at
the concentration level of 1.0 % (mass fraction), 0.4 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 %
(mass fraction) were 101.2 % - 102.1 %, 99.6 % - 101.7 % and 99.4 % - 101.0 %.
References
1) Yuji SHIRAI: The volumetric analysis of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole in fertilizers with
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph, Validation Report of Fertilizers (in Japanese),
44 (1), p. 10 - 20 (1991)
602
(5) Flow sheet for 2-sulfanilamide thiazole: The flow sheet for 2-sulfanilamide thiazole in

←　100 mL of methanol - water (1+1)

1700 × g , 5 minutes
Cleanup Acidic alumina cartridge column

8000 × g - 10000 × g , 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure 　Flow sheet for 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST) in fertilizers.
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST) standard solution for the
calibration curve preparation is shown below.
Reference diagram: HPLC chromatogram of 2-sulfanilamide thiazole (ST)

diameter)
2-sulfanilamide thiazole standard solution (the equivalents of 200 ng)
(4.3) a)
603
8. Others
8.1 Melamine and its degradation products
(1) Summary
symbol is 8.1.a-2017 or Mel.a-1.
Extract melamine and its derivative substances (hereinafter referred to as “melamine derivations”)
in organic matters and fertilizers containing organic matters with diethylamine−water−acetonitrile
(1+4+5) and derivatize with BSTFA−TMCS (99+1) and then measure with a gas
chromatography/mass spectrometer to obtain melamine deviations in an analytical sample. In
Comment 1 The structural formula of melamine and its degradation products is shown in the
figure 1. During the production process of melamine, a by-product that replaces
“-NH2” of R1 - R3 with “-OH” is formed in some cases.
R1 R1 R2 R3 MW
Melamine NH2 NH2 NH2 126.12
N N Ammeline OH NH2 NH2 127.10
Ammelide OH OH NH2 128.09
R2 N R3 Cyanuric acid OH OH OH 129.07
Figure 1 Structural formula of melamine and its degradation products

b) Acetonitrile: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration:
no less than 300) specified in JIS K 8039 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
c) Diethylamine: A guaranteed reagent or a reagent of equivalent quality.
d) Pyridine (dehydration) (1): A reagent of organic synthesis grade of no less than 99.5 % (mass
fraction) in purity and no more than 0.05 mg/mL in moisture or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
e) Derivatization reagent (2): Bis (trimethylsilyl) trifluoroacetamide−trimethylchlorosilane
(99+1).
f) Melamine derivations standard solution (0.5 mg/mL): Put about 0.05 g of melamine
[C3H6N6] (3), ammeline [C3H5N5O] (3), ammelide [C3H4N4O2] (3) and cyanuric acid
[C3H3N3O3] (3) into a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve in a
small amount of diethylamine−water (1+4), transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask respectively,
and add the solvent up to the marked line.
g) Mixture standard solution (50 µg/mL) (3): Put 5 mL of respective melamine derivations
standard solutions (0.5 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks and add
diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5) up to the marked line.
Note (1) After it is opened once, add a proper amount of sodium sulfate (anhydrous) and seal
tightly to store.
(2) A mixed derivatization reagent is commercially sold under the name BSTFA−TMCS
(99+1).
(3) The respective standard reagents of melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid
604
are commercially sold.
Comment 2 BSTFA−TMCS (99+1) is sold as 1-mL ampoule by SUPELCO. After it is opened

once, use it on the same day.
Comment 3 The standard reagent of melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid are sold
by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd. and Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and
Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries., Ltd.

a) Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer (GC/MS): GC/MS specified in JIS K 0123 that
satisfies the following requirements.
1) Gas Chromatograph
(i) Sample injector: An injector that enables split less system.
(ii) Capillary column: A capillary column (0.25-mm - 0.32-mm inner diameter and 30-m
long) made of fused silica. 5 % phenyl 95 % methyl polysiloxane chemically bonds to the
inner surface of a capillary column with 0.25 µm thickness. The column is according to
the specification of mass spectrometer.
(ii) Carrier gas: High purity helium of no less than 99.999 % (volume fraction) in purity.
(i) Ionization method: Electron-Impact ionization (EI) method
(ii) Ion detection method: Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) method
b) Ultrasonic generator: An ultrasonic washer can be used.
10000 × g.
d) Concentrator: A Centrifugal evaporator that can be adjusted to 70 ºC ± 2 ºC.
e) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 70 ºC ± 2 ºC.
Comment 4 A capillary column is commercially sold under the names such as DB-5ms, Rtx-5ms,
HP-5ms, SLB-5ms, BPX-5, CP-Sil 8CB low Bleed/MS and TC -5HT for GC/MS.
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 0.50 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200 mL - 200-mL ground-in stopper
Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add 160 mL - 200 mL of diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5), and subject to
ultra-sonication for about 30 minutes using an ultrasonic generator.
c) Transfer about 1.5 mL to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube (4), and
centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about 5 minutes (5).
d) Transfer 1 mL of the supernatant solution to 5-mL - 50-mL volumetric flasks, add
diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5) up to the marked line to make the extract.
Note (4) Confirm that the tube is made of polypropylene, etc. to not affect testing results.
Comment 5 Grind until it completely passes through a sieve of 500 µm aperture to prepare the
test sample.
Comment 6 Weigh 0.5 g of an analytical sample, extract with 200 mL of
diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5). If it is diluted 50 times in the procedure in
d), the quantitative range of melamine derivations in the analytical sample is 0.2 %
605
(mass fraction) - 10 % (mass fraction). In the case of measuring melamine

derivations which do not reach the quantitative range, make the dilution factor in the
procedure in d) decrease. In addition, if the contents of melamine derivations exceed
10 % (mass fraction) respectively, the sampling volume of an analytical sample
should be reduced.
(4.2) Derivatization: Conduct derivatization as shown below.

a) Transfer 0.2 mL of the extract to a 5-mL - 10-mL test tube with a screw stopper.
b) Place a test tube in a concentrator, concentrate under reduced pressure at 70 ºC ± 2 ºC and
vaporize the solvent completely (6).
c) Add 0.3 mL of pyridine (dehydration) (1) and 0.2 mL of derivatization reagent (2) to the residue
to mix, and then stopple to seal tightly.
d) After heating in a water bath at 70 ºC ± 2 °C for about 45 minutes (7), let it stand to cool to
Note (6) A spraying type concentrator can be used.

(7) If moisture remains after the procedure in b) or the reagent used in the procedure in c)
contains moisture, the reaction of the derivatization in d) does not advance enough in
some cases.
(8) If necessary, transfer the sample solution into a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
precipitate tube (4) to centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about 5 minutes (5).
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of the gas
chromatograph/ mass spectrometer used in measurement.
a) Measurement conditions for the gas chromatograph/ mass spectrometer: Set up the
1) Gas Chromatograph
(i) Sample injection method: split less injection method (1min)
(ii) Temperature of sample injector: 280 °C
(ii) Capillary column: A capillary column (0.25-mm - 0.32-mm inner diameter, 30-m long,
0.25 µm layer thickness) made of fused silica. 5 % phenyl 95 % methyl polysiloxane
chemically bonds to the inner surface of the capillary column.
(iv) Temperature of column bath: 100 °C (1 min) → (15 °C /min) → 320 °C (3 min)
(v) Temperature of GC/MS coupling portion: 250 °C
(vi) Carrier gas: helium, flow rate: 1.5 mL/min
(i) Ionization method: Electron-Impact ionization (EI) method
(ii) Ionization voltage: 70 V
(iii) Temperature of ion source: 230 °C
(iv) Ion detection method: Selected Ion Monitoring (SIM) method
(v) Measurement of ion: Shown in table 1
606
Table 1　Fragment ion of materials to be measured

Materials Measured fragment ion (m /z)
to be measured Determination Validation Validation Validation Validation
Melamine 342 344 327 285 213
Ammeline 328 345 343 285 214
Ammelide 344 346 329 214 198
Cyanuric acid 345 347 330 215 188
DACP(I.S.) 288 289 290 273 275

1) Transfer 5 mL of mixture standard solution (50 µg/mL) to a 50-mL volumetric flask and add
diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5) up to the marked line to make the mixture standard
solution (5 µg/mL).
2) Transfer 1 mL - 20 mL of the mixture standard solution (5 µg/ mL) to 50 mL volumetric
flasks step-by-step and add diethylamine−water−acetonitrile (1+4+5) up to the marked line to
make the mixture standard solution (0.1 µg/mL - 2 µg/mL).
3) Conduct the procedures of (4.2) b) - d) for the mixture standard solution (0.1 µg/mL - 2
µg/mL) to make the mixture standard solution, the equivalents of 0.04 µg/mL - 0.8 µg/mL, for
calibration curve.
4) Inject 1 µL of respective mixture standard solutions for calibration curve to GC/MS and
record the chromatogram of ion (m/z) for determination and ion (m/z) for validation of
materials subjected to measurement to obtain the peak area or height.
5) Calculate the peak area ratio or height ratio of ion (m/z) for determination and ion (m/z) for
validation of respective materials subjected to measurement.
6) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration of material subjected to
measurement and the peak area or height of ion (m/z) for determination of respective mixture
1) Subject 1 µL of the sample solution to the same procedure as in b) 4) - 5) (9).
2) Obtain the content of respective materials subjected to measurement from the calibration
curve to calculate respective materials subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Note (9) Confirm that the ratio against the peak area ratio or height ratio of the standard
solution is within the range of about ± 30 %. In addition, the peak area ratio or height
ratio depends on the concentration.
Comment 7 If the variation of sensitivity of melamine derivations is observed, conduct

measurement by the following method of a) or b).
a) In the procedure in (4.3) c) 1), inject the sample solution into GC/MS
predetermined times, and then correct the calibration curve according to (4.3) b)
4) - 6).
b) Add 2,6-diamino-4-chloropyrimidine (the equivalents of 0.5 µg) as an internal
reference material to the standard solution and the sample solution, conduct the
same procedures as (4.2) c) - d), (4.3) b) 4) - 6) and c) 1). However, prepare the
calibration curve from the peak area ratio or height ratio of ion (m/z) for
determination of respective materials subjected to measurement and internal
reference material, and calculate the concentration of respective materials
607
subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Comment 8 Recovery testing of melamine derivations was conducted using soybean meal, fish
meal, fish waste processed fertilizer, mixed organic fertilizer, blended fertilizer and
compound fertilizer, as a result, the mean recovery rate at additive level of 10 %
(mass fraction) and 0.2 % (mass fraction) were 92.1 % - 102.9 % and 90.3 % -
102.2 %.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of melamine derivations of the test
method is about 0.01 % (mass fraction).
References
1) Yuji SHIRAI, Jun OKI: Validation of Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry for
Determination of Melamine and Its Degradation Products in Fertilizers, Research
608
(5) Flow sheet for melamine derivations: The flow sheet for melamine derivations in fertilizers
is shown below.
0.50 g analytical sample 200-mL - 300-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask

← 160 mL - 200 mL of diethylamine - water - acetonitrile（1+4+5）
Extraction Ultrasonic extraction for 30 minutes
Ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitation tube

8000 × g - 10000 × g, 5 minutes
Extract
Figure 1　　Flow sheet for melamine derivations in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Extract
Transfer 1 mL to 5-mL - 50-mL volumetric flasks,

Dilution
add diethylamine−water−acetonitrile（1+4+5）up to the marked line
0.2 mL Aliquot 5-mL - 10-mL test tube with a screw stopper
concentration
under reduced pressure Centrifugal evaporator (70 ºC ± 2 ºC)
/ Drying up
←　0.3 mL of pyridine (dehydration)
←　0.2 mL of derivatization reagent (BSTFA−TMCS (99+1))
　Stopple and seal.
Derivatization 70 ºC ± 2 ºC, 45 minutes
Standing to cool
Sample solution
Measurement Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer
Figure 2　　Flow sheet for melamine derivations in fertilizers

(Derivatization and measurement procedure)
609
Reference: Total Ion Chromatogram (TIC) of GC/MS of mixture standard solution for
calibration curve preparation of melamine derivations is shown below.
↓a ↓b ↓c ↓d
Figure 3 Total Ion Chromatogram (TIC) of GC/MS for melamine derivations

Measurement conditions of GC/MS
Capillary column: Rtx-5ms (0.25-mm inner diameter, 30-m long, 0.25 µm layer
thickness)
(4.3) a)
Peak name of respective total ion chromatograms
a) Cyanuric acid b) Ammelide
c) Ammeline d) Melamine
Sample and amount injected into GC/MS
Injected sample: Mixture standard solutions (the equivalents of 2 µg/mL) for the
calibration curve preparation of respective melamine derivations.
Injected amount: 1 µL (the equivalents of 2 ng of respective melamine derivations)
610
8.1.b
611
8.1.c High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (Fertilizers not containing organic matters)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fertilizers not containing organic matters. This testing method is
classified as Type B and its symbol is 8.1.c-2017 or Mel.c-1.
Add hydrochloric acid (1+15) to an analytical sample, extract melamine and its degradation
products (hereinafter referred to as “melamine derivations”), introduce them into a
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with a silica gel column to which
carbamoyl chemically bonds, and measure at wavelength 214 nm to obtain melamine derivations in
an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is shown in Comment 4.

b) Acetonitrile: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8032 or a reagent of equivalent
quality. In addition, acetonitrile used in eluent of an HPLC is a reagent of HPLC analysis
grade.
c) Hydrochloric acid: A guaranteed reagent or a reagent of equivalent quality.
d) Phosphate buffer solution (1): Dissolve 0.237 g of disodium hydrogen-phosphate specified in
JIS K 9020 and 0.520 g of sodium dihydrogenphosphate dihydrate specified in JIS K 9009 in
water to make 1000 mL (2). If it is used for eluent of HPLC, filter with a membrane filter (pore
size: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.
e) Melamine derivations standard solution (0.5 mg/mL): Put about 0.05 g of melamine
[C3H6N6] (3), ammeline [C3H5N5O] (3), ammelide [C3H4N4O2] (3) and cyanuric acid
[C3H3N3O3] (3) into a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve
them with a small amount of hydrochloric acid (1+15), transfer to 100 mL volumetric flasks
respectively, and add the solutions up to the marked line.
f) Mixture standard solution (50 µg/mL) (1): Transfer 5 mL of respective melamine derivations
standard solutions (0.5 mg/mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks and add acetonitrile - phosphate
buffer solutions (4+1) up to the marked line.
g) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (1 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL): In the
case of usage, transfer 1 mL - 5 mL of mixture standard solution (50 µg /mL) to 50-mL
volumetric flasks step-by-step and add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solutions (4+1) up to the
marked line.
h) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.05 µg/mL - 0.5 µg/mL):
In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of mixture standard solution (1 µg /mL) to
50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solutions (4+1)

(2) The phosphate buffer solution becomes pH 6.7 ± pH 0.2.
(3) The respective standard reagents of melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid
are commercially sold.
Comment 1 The standard reagent of melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid are sold
by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd. and Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and
Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries., Ltd.

612
filled with silica gel, to which carbamoyl chemically bonds.

2) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 40 ºC ± 1 ºC.
10000 × g.
Comment 2 Column is sold under the production name TSKgel Amide-80, etc. A column which
has actually isolated melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid should be
used.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+15) and conduct ultra-sonication for about 30 minutes
using an ultrasonic generator.
the extract.
e) Transfer 5 mL of the extract (5) into a 50-mL volumetric flask, and add an
acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solution (4+1) up to the marked line to dilute.
f) Transfer dilution liquid to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube (6).
g) Centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about 5 minutes (7) to make supernatant as the sample
solution
force.
(5) If there is a possibility that the concentration of melamine derivations in the sample
solution exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curb, the amount of a
supernatant solution to be transferred should be1 mL - 2.5 mL.
Comment 3 Instead of the procedures in (4.1) f) - g), it is allowed to filter with a membrane filter
(pore size: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the filtrate can be
particle diameter column) to which carbamoyl chemically bonds.
613
2) Column bath temperature: 40 °C ± 1 °C

3) Eluent: Acetonitrile - phosphate buffer solution (4+1)
1) Inject 10 µL of respective mixture standard solutions for calibration curve preparation into an
HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 214 nm and obtain the peak area or height.
wavelength 214 nm of respective mixture solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Obtain the melamine derivations content from the calibration curve to calculate respective
melamine derivations in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 Recovery testing was conducted using 3 brands of nitrolime, 1 brand of compound
fertilizer containing nitrolime, 2 brands of compound fertilizers not containing
nitrolime, 1 brand of ammonium sulfate and 1 brand of urea, as a result, the recovery
rate of melamine derivations at concentration level of 4 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 %
(mass fraction) were 90.5 % - 106.3 % and 92.2 % - 107.0 %.
validation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of the test method is about 0.02 %
(mass fraction) for melamine and cyanuric acid and about 0.01 % (mass fraction) for
ammeline and ammelide. In the case of ammelide and cyanuric acid, the sufficient
reproducibility was observed in the range of 0.188 % (mass fraction) - 1.10 % (mass
fraction) and 0.105 % (mass fraction) - 1.15 % (mass fraction) respectively.
614

for the test method validation of melamine deivations
2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Agrichemical Number of Mean sr RSD r sR RSD R
Sample name 1)
name laboratories (%)
7)
(%)
7)
(%) (%)
7)
(%)
Melamine Nitrolime 1 9 2.83 0.04 1.4 0.12 4.3
Nitrolime 2 10 0.391 0.003 0.8 0.023 5.8
Compound fertilizer
9 0.845 0.019 2.2 0.036 4.2
containing nitrolime
Compounf ferttilizer 11 0.198 0.005 2.6 0.012 6.2
Ammeline Nitrolime 1 9 1.60 0.02 1.3 0.06 3.8
Nitrolime 2 10 0.105 0.001 1.3 0.002 2.3
Compound fertilizer
9 0.629 0.027 4.3 0.023 3.7
Ammelide Nitrolime 1 9 1.10 0.02 2.1 0.08 7.6
Nitrolime 2 11 0.361 0.008 2.2 0.023 6.5
Compound fertilizer
9 0.188 0.004 2.2 0.014 7.5
Cyanuric acid Nitrolime 1 9 1.15 0.06 4.8 0.09 7.7
Nitrolime 2 10 0.390 0.018 4.5 0.029 7.4
Compound fertilizer
9 0.105 0.003 2.9 0.014 13.2
2) Gross mean (n = number of laboratories × number of repeated tests (2))
7) Mass fraction
References
1) Etsuko BANDO and Yuji SHIRAI: Validation of High-Performance Liquid
Chromatography (HPLC) for Determination of Melamine and Its Related Substances in
Fertilizer, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.6, p. 27 - 35 (2013)
2) Etsuko BANDO and Sigehiro KAI: Determination of Melamine and Its Related
Substances in Fertilizer by High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC): A
Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.7, p. 10 - 21 (2014)
615
is shown below.

←100 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+15）

1700 × g, 5 minutes
Transfer 5 mL to a 50-mL volumetric flask,

Dilution
add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solution (4+1) up to the marked line

8000 × g - 10000 × g, 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for melamine derivations in fertilizers
616
Reference: HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solution for calibration curve
preparation of melamine derivations is shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of melamine derivations
The names of materials for respective peaks

(1) cyanuric acid (2) ammelide (3) melamine (4) ammeline
Column: TSKgel Amide-80 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long, 5-µm particle
diameter)
Mixture standard solutions (respective equivalents of 10 ng (1 µg/mL, 10 µL)) for
calibration curve preparation of respective melamine derivations
(4.2) a)
617
8.1.d High-Performance Liquid Chromatography (Fertilizers containing organic matters)

(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to organic fertilizers and fertilizers containing organic matters.
This testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 8.1.d-2017 or Mel.d-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract melamine, introduce it into a High-Performance
Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC), isolate with a silica gel column to which carbamoyl chemically
bonds, and measure at wavelength 214 nm to obtain melamine in an analytical sample. However,
cyanuric acid, ammelide and ammeline which are melamine derivations are excluded from
components subjected to measurement. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 4.

b) Acetonitrile: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8032 or a reagent of equivalent
quality. In addition, acetonitrile used in eluent of an HPLC is a reagent of HPLC analysis
grade.
c) Phosphate buffer solution (1): Dissolve 0.237 g of disodium hydrogen-phosphate
specified in JIS K 9020 and 0.520 g of sodium dihydrogenphosphate dihydrate specified
in JIS K 9009 in water to make 1000 mL (2). If it is used for eluent of HPLC, filter with a
membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.
d) Melamine standard solution (0.5 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.05 g of melamine [C3H6N6] (3) to a
weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve it with a small
amount of water, transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask and add the solution up to the
marked line.
e) Melamine standard solution (50 µg/mL) (1): Transfer 5 mL of melamine solution (0.5
mg/mL) to a 50-mL volumetric flask and add acetonitrile - phosphate buffer solutions
f) Melamine standard solution for calibration curve preparation (1 µg/mL - 5 µg/mL):
In the case of usage, transfer 1 mL - 5 mL of melamine standard solution (50 µg /mL) to
50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solutions
g) Melamine standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.05 µg/mL - 0.5
µg/mL): In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of melamine standard solution (1
µg/ mL) to 50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer
solutions (82+18) up to the marked line.

(2) The phosphate buffer solution becomes pH 6.7 ± 0.2.
(3) A standard reagent as melamine is commercially sold.
Comment 1 A standard reagent of melamine is sold by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd.,
Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries., Ltd.

filled with silica gel, to which carbamoyl chemically bonds.
2) Column bath: A column bath whose temperature can be adjusted to 40 ºC ± 1 ºC.
618

10000 × g.
Comment 2 Column is sold under the production name TSKgel Amide-80, etc. A column which
has actually isolated melamine, ammeline, ammelide and cyanuric acid should be
used.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of water and conduct ultra-sonication for about 10 minutes using an
ultrasonic generator.
d) Centrifuge it at 1700 × g centrifugal force for about 10 minutes (4) and use the supernatant
as the extract.
e) Transfer 5 mL of the extract (5) into a 50-mL volumetric flask, and add an
acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solution (82+18) up to the marked line to dilute.
f) Transfer dilution liquid to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube (6).
g) Centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about 5 minutes (7) to make supernatant as the
sample solution
force.
(5) If there is a possibility that the concentration of melamine derivations in the sample
solution exceeds the maximum limit of the calibration curb, the amount of a
supernatant solution to be transferred should be1 mL - 2.5 mL.
Comment 3 Instead of the procedures in (4.1) f) - g), it is allowed to filter with a membrane filter
(pore size: no more than 0.5 µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the filtrate can be
particle diameter column) to which carbamoyl chemically bonds.
2) Column bath temperature: 40 °C ± 1 °C
3) Eluent: Acetonitrile - phosphate buffer solution (82+18)
619

1) Inject 10 µL of respective melamine standard solutions for calibration curve preparation into
an HPLC, record a chromatogram at wavelength 214 nm and obtain the peak area or height.
wavelength 214 nm of respective melamine solutions for the calibration curve preparation.
2) Obtain the melamine content from the calibration curve to calculate melamine in the
analytical sample.
Comment 4 Additive recovery testing was conducted to evaluate trueness using rape seed meal,
soybean meal, compound fertilizer containing lime nitrogen and organic matter,
compound fertilizer containing organic matter and blended fertilizer containing
organic matter (1 brand for each). As a result, the mean recovery rate at additive level
of 2 % (mass fraction), 0.4 % (mass fraction) and 0.1 % (mass fraction) were 94.6 %
- 99.8 %, 92.4 % - 98.5 % and 93.1 % - 98.4 % respectively.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using soybean meal and
compound fertilizer containing organic matter, to evaluate precision were analyzed
by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Soybean meal 5 1.91 0.03 1.7 0.04 2.2
Compound
fertilizer containing 5 0.100 0.001 1.4 0.002 2.5
organic matter
References
1) Etsuko FUNAMIZU: Determination Method for Melamine in Organic Fertilizer and
Fertilizer Containing Organic Matter using High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph
(HPLC), Research Report of Fertilizers, Vol.9, p. 33 - 42 (2016)
620
is shown below.

←100 mL of water

1700 × g, 10 minutes
Transfer 5 mL to a 50-mL volumetric flask,

Dilution
add acetonitrile−phosphate buffer solution (82+18) up to the marked line

8000 × g - 10000 × g, 5 minutes
Sample solution
Figure Flow sheet for melamine in fertilizers containing organic matter

Reference: HPLC chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of
melamine is shown below.
←melamin
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of melamine

Column: TSKgel Amide-80 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long, 5-µm particle
diameter)
Melamine standard solution (the equivalents of 10 ng (1 µg/mL, 10 µL) for each)
in (4.2) a)
621
8.2 Clopyralid and its degradation products

8.2.a High-Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry
(1: Simultaneous analysis of three components for clopyralid, etc.)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to compost and composted sludge fertilizers. This testing method
is classified as Type B and its symbol is 8.2.a-2017 or CLP.a-1.
Extract clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram with methanol under alkaline condition, refine with a
cleanup cartridge by taking advantage of characteristics that the behavior of elution varies between
acidity and alkaline, and then measure with a High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph Tandem
Mass Spectrometer to obtain clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram in an analytical sample. In
Comment 1 Structural formulas of clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram are as shown in Figure
1.
Figure 1 Structural formula of clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram

a) Water: Water of A3 specified in JIS K 0557. Note that water of A4 should be used as the
eluent which is introduced to LC-MS/MS.
c) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) Methanol: Methanol used in eluent of LC-MS/MS is a reagent of LC-MS analysis grade or
equivalents.
e) Sodium hydroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8576 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.
g) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent of 28 % (mass fraction) specified in JIS K
h) formic acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8264 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
i) Ammonia solution (0.0028 % (mass fraction)) (1): Add 0.1 mL of ammonia solution to 1000
mL of water.
j) Respective agrichemical standard solutions (0.1 mg/mL) (1): Put about 0.01 g of clopyralid
[C6H3Cl2NO2] (2), aminopyralid [C6H4Cl2N2O2] (2), picloram [C6H3Cl3N2O2] (2) to weighing
dishes and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve with a small amount of
622
acetonitrile, transfer to 100-mL volumetric flasks and add the solvent up to the marked line.
k) Mixture standard solution (100 ng/mL) (1): Dilute a predetermined amount of respective
agrichemical standard solutions (0.1 mg/mL) with formic acid (1+1000) to prepare mixture
standard solution (100 ng/mL).
l) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (5 ng/mL - 50 ng/mL) (1): In
the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of mixture standard solution (100 ng/mL) to 50 mL
volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add formic acid (1+1000) up to the marked line.
m) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.5 ng/mL - 5 ng/mL) (1): In
the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of mixture standard solution (10 ng/mL) to 50 mL
volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add formic acid (1+1000) up to the marked line.

(2) A standard reagent is commercially sold.
Comment 2 Standard reagents of clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram are sold by FUJIFILM
Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Hayashi Pure
Chemical Industries., Ltd.
a) High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer (LC-MS/MS)：
LC-MS/MS specified in JIS K 0136 that satisfies the following requirements.
(ii) Column: A 2-mm - 3-mm inner diameter 50-mm - 150-mm long 1.6-µm - 2.2-µm
particle diameter stainless steel column tube filled with silica gel to which octadecyl
chemically bonds. The specification is according to the mass spectrometer specification.
(ii) Ion detection method: Selected Reaction Monitoring
c) Manifold
d) Centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at about 1700 × g.
e) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g -
10000 × g.
f) Concentrator: An evaporator that can adjust to 40 ºC ± 2 ºC.
g) Copolymer cartridge column: A divinylbenzene-N-vinylpyrrolidone copolymer mini
column (200 mg)
Comment 3 Column is sold under the production name ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18, etc.
Comment 4 A copolymer cartridge is sold under the production names such as Oasis HLB 6cc
(200 mg), Oasis PRiME HLB Plus Short Cartridge (225 mg).
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 5.00 g of an analytical sample, and put it into a 200-mL - 300-mL ground-in stopper
Erlenmeyer flask.
b) Add 1 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L) and 99 mL of methanol (3), shake to mix
with a shaking apparatus for about 30 minutes.
623
(4)
d) Centrifuge it at about 1700 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes and use the
Note (3) It is also allowed to add 100 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol
[1+99]
force.
test sample.
(4.2) Cleanup (1) (5): Conduct cleanup (1) as shown below.

a) Wash a cartridge column with about 5 mL of methanol and 5 mL of water in advance.
b) Place a 100-mL round-bottom flask (6) under the cartridge column, transfer 5 mL or 7 mL (7) of
the extract to the cartridge column and allow the extract to overflow until the surface of the
liquid reaches the top of the packing materials.
c) Add about 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (0.4 g/L)−methanol (1+1) to the cartridge
column 2 times and allow the liquid to overflow in the same manner in b).
d) Add 5 mL of methanol.
Note (5) Use a pressure reducing device in the procedure in (4.2) and (4.3) as appropriate.
(6) When pretreating many analytical samples, a free-standing type vessel that can contain
a solution with a liquid volume of 20 mL may be used. In this case, instead of
procedure d), put an effluent into a round-bottle flask, wash the vessel 2 times with 2.5
mL of methanol and add washing to the previous effluent.
(7) When using Oasis HLB 6cc (200 mg), add 5 mL of the extract 2 times.

a) Wash a new cartridge column with about 5 mL of acetonitrile and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid
(1+120) in advance.
b) After conducting vacuum concentration of the effluent in (4.2) c) until no more than 5 mL on
a water bath at no more than 40 °C, add 3 mL of hydrochloric acid (1 +11).
c) Put the concentrated effluent into the cartridge column and allow the effluent to overflow until
the surface of liquid reaches the top of packing materials.
d) Wash a round-bottom flask with about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120) 2 times and add
washing into the cartridge successively.
e) Then, add about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)−acetonitrile (9+1) and about 5 mL of
water into the cartridge successively and allow the liquid to overflow.
f) Place a 5-mL volumetric flask under the cartridge column, add 4 mL of ammonia solution
(0.0028 % (mass fraction))−acetonitrile (9+1) to the cartridge column and allow clopyralid,
aminopyralid and picloram to elute quickly.
g) Add formic acid (1+1000) up to the marked line (8) and transfer it to 1.5-mL ground-in stopper
h) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (10) and use the
supernatant as the sample solution
Note (8) If there is a possibility that the clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram concentration in
the sample solution exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a
predetermined amount of effluent with formic acid (1 +1000).
624

spectrometer: An example of measurement conditions for a High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions
considering it:
(i) Column: A silica gel column (2-mm - 3-mm inner diameter, 50-mm - 150-mm long,
1.6-µm - 2.2-µm particle diameter column) to which octadecyl chemically bonds.
(ii) Flow rate: 0.2 mL/min - 0.5 mL/min
(iii) Eluent: A: Formic acid (1+1000) B: Methanol:
(iv) Gradient: 0 min (5 %B) → 5 min (60 %B) → 6 min (95 %B) → 7 min (5 %B)
(v) Temperature of column bath: 40 °C
(vi) Injection volume: 5 µL
(ii) Mode: Positive
(iii) Capillary voltage: 1.0 kV
(v) Desolvation temperature: 400 °C
(vi) Cone voltage: Shown in table 1
(vii) Collision energy: Shown in table 1
(viii) Monitor ion: Shown in table 1
Table 1 Monitor ion, etc. of respective agrichemicals

Substance Precussor Product ion Product ion Cone voltage Collision Collision
name ion (Determination) (Validation) (v) energy energy
(m/z) (m/z) (m/z) (Determination) (Validation)
(eV) (eV)
Clopyralid 192 146 110 20 20 30
Aminipyralid 207 161 189 22 22 16
Oicrloram 241 195 223 28 22 16

1) Inject 5 μL of respective mixture standard solutions for calibration curve into the LC-MS/MS,
record the chromatogram of ion (m/z) for determination and ion (m/z) for validation of
clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram and obtain respective peak areas.
validation of clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram.
3) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration of respective agrichemicals and
the peak area of ion (m/z) for determination of respective mixture standard solutions for the
625
2) Obtain the content of material subjected to measurement from the calibration curve to
calculate the material subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Additive recovery testing of clopyralid, aminopyralid and picloram was conducted
using cow dung compost (2 kinds), composted sludge fertilizers containing cow
manure (2 kinds) and composted sludge fertilizers containing pig manure (1 kind), as
a result, the mean recovery rates at additive level of 1000 µg/kg, 400 µg/kg and 40
µg/kg were 78.1 % - 90.0 %, 81.0 % - 117.6 % and 71.2 % - 101.3 % respectively.
method validation.
Additionally, the minimum limits of quantification of clopyralid, aminopyralid and
picloram of the test method are about 10 µg/kg respectively.
626

for the test method validation of clopyralid and its degradation products
2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Agrichemical
Sample name 1)
name laboratories (µg/kg) (µg/kg) (%) (µg/kg) (%)
Clopyralid Compost 1 10 128 6 4.5 21 16.4

Compost 2 10 835 41 4.9 100 11.9
Composted sludge
9 16.2 1.7 10.6 5.2 31.8
fertilizer 1
Composted sludge
10 89.6 11.3 12.6 11.3 12.6
fertilizer 2
Composted sludge
10 339 28 8.3 28 8.3
fertilizer 3
Aminopyralid Compost 1 8 324 15 4.5 39 12.0
Compost 2 8 21.2 5.2 24.7 6.4 30.3
Composted sludge
7 5.39 1.41 26.2 2.22 41.2
fertilizer 1
Composted sludge
10 701 146 20.8 263 37.6
fertilizer 2
Composted sludge
9 59.5 8.9 15.0 16.6 28.0
fertilizer 3
Picloram Compost 1 10 840 50 5.9 175 20.8
Compost 2 9 37.7 3.5 9.4 10.3 27.3
Composted sludge
9 90.2 11.1 12.3 30.3 33.5
fertilizer 1
Composted sludge
8 341 19 5.6 67 19.8
fertilizer 2
Composted sludge
8 182 16 8.6 56 31.0
fertilizer 3
2) Grossl mean (n = number of laboratories × number of repeated tests (2))
References
1) Toshiharu YAGI, Yuko SEKINE, Yuji SHIRAI: Determination of Clopyralid in
Fertilizer by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS),
2) Hisanori ARAYA, Toshiharu YAGI, Yoshimi HASHIMOTO and Yuji SHIRAI:
Determination of Clopyralid, Aminopyralid and Picloram in Compost and Composted
Sludge Fertilizer by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS/MS),
3) Kenji KOZUKA, Mayu OSHIMA, Yoshimi HASHIMOTO, Naoko TAMARU, and Yuji
SHIRAI: Determination of Clopyralid, Aminopyralid and Picloram in Compost and
627
Composted Sludge Fertilizer by Liquid Chromatography-Tandem Mass Spectrometry

(LC-MS/MS): A Collaborative Study, Research Report of Fertilizer Vol. 10, p. 61 - 71
(2017)
628
(5) Flow sheet for clopyralid and its derivative substances: The flow sheet for clopyralid and
its derivative substances in compost and composted sludge fertilizer is shown below:
5.00 g analytical sample 200-mL - 300-mL ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask

← 99 mL of methanol
shaking 30 minutes
Centrifugal separation 50 mL centrifugal precipitate tube, 1700 × g, 5 minutes
Extract
Figure 1 Flow sheet for clopyralid and its derivative substances in compost
and composted sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
Extract
← 10 mL of extract
copolymer cartridge column (1)
Cleanup (1)
(Wash with about 5 mL of methanol, then 5 mL of water in advance）
　　[Collection, 100-mL eggplant-shaped flask]
← About 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (0.4 g/L)−methanol [1+1] × 2 times
　　[Collection, same as above vessel]
← About 5 mL of methanol
Concentration
under reduced 40 ºC, until the volume reaches about 5 mL
pressure
Cleanup (2) (Wash with about 5 mL of acetonitrile,
then 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120) in advance)
← Wash the vessel 2 times with about 5mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)
← Wash with about 5mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)−acetonitrile [9+1]
← Wash with about 5mL of water
← 4 mL of ammonia solution (0.0028 w/v %)−acetonitrile [9+1]
　[Elute, 10-mL centrifugal precipitate tube]
Elute
Figure 2 Flow sheet for clopyralid in compost and composted sludge fertilizers
(Cleanup (1) and cleanup (2) and measurement procedure)
629
References: Selected Reaction Monitoring chromatograms of mixture standard solution for

calibration curve preparation and sample solution (cow dung compost) are shown
below
Peak No.
1
Intensity / arb.units
0 5
Retention Time / min
Peak No.1: Picloram

No.2: Aminipyralid
No.3: Clopyralid
Reference diagram: SRM chromatograms of respective agrichemicals

Mixture standard solution (the equivalents of 200 pg as respective
agrichemicals)
LC-MS/MS measurement conditions

Column: ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18 (2.1-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 1.8-µm
particle diameter)
Other conditions are according to the examples of the measurement conditions in (4.4)
a) LC-MS/MS.
630
8.2.b High-Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry

(2: microanalysis for clopyralid)
(1) Summary
This testing method is applicable to compost and composted sludge fertilizers. This testing method
is classified as Type B and its symbol is 8.2.b-2018 or CLP.b-1.
Extract clopyralid in compost and composted sludge fertilizer with methanol under alkaline
condition, refine with a cleanup cartridge and dichloromethane by taking advantage of
characteristics that the behavior of elution varies between acidity and and then measure with a
High-Performance Liquid Chromatograph Mass Spectrometer to obtain clopyralid in an analytical
Comment 1 Structural formula of clopyralid is as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Structural formula of clopyralid

eluent which is introduced to LC-MS/MS.
c) Methanol: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration: no
less than 300) or a reagent of equivalent quality.
d) Methanol: Methanol used in eluent of LC-MS/MS is a reagent of LC-MS analysis grade or
equivalents.
e) Sodium hydroxide: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8576 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
equivalent quality.
g) Ammonia solution: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent of 28 % (mass fraction) specified in JIS K
h) Formic acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8264 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
i) Formic acid: Formic acid used in eluent of LC-MS/MS is a reagent of LC-MS analysis
grade or equivalents.
j) Dichloromethane: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade
(concentration: no less than 300) specified in JIS K 8117 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
k) Sulfuric acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8951 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
l) Acetone: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration: no
less than 300) specified in JIS K 8040 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
m) Ammonia solution (0.0028 % (mass fraction)) (1): Add 0.1 mL of ammonia solution to 1000
mL of water.
n) Clopyralid standard solution (0.1 mg/mL) (1): Put about 0.01 g of clopyralid [C6H3C12NO2]
631
(2)
in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve with a small
amount of acetonitrile, transfer to 100-mL volumetric flasks and add the solvent up to the
marked line.
o) Clopyralid standard solution (250 ng/mL) (1): Dilute a predetermined amount of clopyralidl
standard solutions (0.1 mg/mL) with formic acid (1+1000) to prepare clopyralid standard
solution (250 ng/mL).
p) Clopyralid standard solution for calibration curve preparation (5 ng/mL - 50 ng/mL) (1):
In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of clopyralid standard solution (100 ng/mL) to
50 mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add formic acid (1+1000) up to the marked line.
q) Clopyralid standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.5 ng/mL - 5 ng/mL) (1):
In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of clopyralid standard solution (10 ng/mL) to 50
mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add formic acid (1+1000) up to the marked line.

Comment 2 A standard reagent of clopyralid is sold by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Co., Ltd.,
Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Hayashi Pure Chemical Industries., Ltd.
chemically bonds. The specification is according to the mass spectrometer specification.
c) Manifold
d) Centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 700 × g - 2000 × g.
e) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g -
10000 × g.
f) Concentrator: An evaporator that can adjust to 40 ºC ± 2 ºC.
g) Copolymer cartridge column: A divinylbenzene-N-vinylpyrrolidone copolymer mini column
(200 mg or 335 mg)
h) Filter: A funnel for filtering under reduced pressure (compatible filter diameter: 60 mm)
i) Glass fiber filter paper: A filter paper made of glass fiber (filter diameter: 60 mm) that can
keep particle diameter 0.8 µm.
j) Test tube mixer: Vortex mixer
Comment 3 Column is sold under the production name ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18, etc.
Comment 4 A copolymer cartridge is sold under the production names such as Oasis HLB 6cc
(225 mg), Oasis PRiME HLB Plus Short Cartridge (225 mg).
Comment 5 A funnel for filtering under reduced pressure is sold under the production name
KIRIYAMA Funnel SB-60, KIRIYAMA Funnel SU-60, etc.
Comment 6 A glass fiber filter is sold under the production name Glass filter paper GFP-60, etc.
632
(4) Test procedures

a) Weigh 5.00 g of an analytical sample to the order of 1 mg and put it in a 100-mL centrifugal
precipitate tube with a screw cap (3) (4).
b) Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol [1+99] and shake to mix with a
shaking apparatus for about 30 minutes.
c) Centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about 3 minutes (5) and transfer the supernatant to a 100-mL
Erlenmeyer flask.
d) Add 40 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol [1+99] to residue and shake to
mix with a shaking apparatus for about 30 minutes.
e) Centrifuge at about 1700 × g for about five minutes (5).
f) Filter supernatant in c) and e) under reduced pressure with a filter that places a glass fiber
filter paper to a 100-mL short-neck volumetric flask as an acceptor (6).
g) Wash the vessel and residue with a small amount of sodium hydroxide (40 g/L)−methanol
[1+99] several times and transfer the washing to the previous filter to filter under pressure.
h) Add sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L) - methanol [1+99] to the marked line to make the
extract.
Note (3) A vessel used for an extract procedure should be made of glass or polypropylene and it
must enable vibration and centrifugation procedure.
(4) A 100-mL - 200-mL ground-in stopper or screw cap Erlenmeyer flask can also be
used. In this case, however, suspension should be transferred to a ground-in stopper or
screw cap centrifugal precipitate tube before the procedure c) and e).
force.
(6) An Erlenmeyer flask can also be used. In this case, however, filtrate should be
transferred to a 100-mL volumetric flask before the procedure h).
test sample.

a) Wash a cartridge column with about 5 mL of methanol and 5 mL of water in advance.
b) Place a 100-mL round-bottom flask (8) under the cartridge column, transfer 9 mL (9) of the
extract to the cartridge column and allow the extract to overflow until the surface of the liquid
reaches the top of the packing materials.
c) Add about 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (0.4 g/L)−methanol [1+1] to the cartridge
column 2 times and allow the liquid to overflow in the same manner in b).
d) Add 5 mL of methanol.
Note (7) Use a pressure reducing device in the procedure in (4.2) and (4.3) as appropriate.
(8) When making a pretreatment of many analytical samples, a free-standing type vessel
that can contain a solution with a liquid volume of 20 mL may be used. In this case,
instead of procedure d), put an effluent into a round-bottle flask, wash the vessel 2
times with 2.5 mL of methanol and add washing to the previous effluent.
(9) When using Oasis HLB 6cc (200 mg), add 5 mL of the extract 2 times.

a) Wash a new cartridge column with about 5 mL of acetonitrile and 5 mL of hydrochloric acid
(1+120) in advance.
633
b) After conducting vacuum concentration of the effluent in (4.2) c) until no more than 5 mL on
a water bath at no more than 40 °C, add 3 mL of hydrochloric acid (1 +11).
c) Put the concentrated effluent into the cartridge column and allow the effluent to overflow until
the surface of liquid reaches the top of packing materials.
d) Wash a round-bottom flask with about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120) 2 times and add
washing into the cartridge successively.
e) Then, add about 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)−acetonitrile (9+1) and about 5 mL of
water into the cartridge successively and allow the liquid to overflow.
f) Place a 10-mL cone shaped centrifugal precipitate tube with a screw cap (10) under the
cartridge column, add 4 mL of ammonia solution (0.0028 % (mass fraction))−acetonitrile
[9+1] to the cartridge column and allow clopyralid to elute.
Note (10) The part under 2 mL from the bottom forms a cone shape.
(4.4) Cleanup (3): Conduct cleanup (3) as shown below.

a) Add 0.1 mL of sodium hydroxide (40 g/L) to the elute in (4.3) f) and shake to mix by using a
test tube mixer.
b) Add about 2 mL of dichloromethane, and shake to mix using a test tube mixer for about 30
minutes.
c) Centrifuge at about 740 × g for about five minutes (11) and remove a low layer by using a
Pasteur pipet (12) or a syringe.
d) Repeat the procedure in b) - c) 1 time.
e) Add about 0.15 mL of sulfuric acid (1+2), and shake to mix using a test tube mixer.
f) Add about 2 mL of dichloromethane, and shake to mix using a test tube mixer for about 30
minutes (13).
g) Centrifuge at about 740 × g for about five minutes (11) and transfer a low layer to a 50mL
round-bottle flask by using a Pasteur pipet (14) or a syringe.
h) Repeat the procedure in f) - g) 2 times. Note that lower layers are added to the same
round-bottle flask.
i) Add 5 mL of acetone.
j) Concentrate under reduced pressure in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until most of the
elute dries up and send a nitrogen gas to dry up.
k) Add 1 mL of formic acid (1+1000) and transfer it to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal
l) Centrifuge it at 8000 × g - 10000 × g centrifugal force for about five minutes (16) and use the
supernatant as the sample solution
force. Confirm the permissible range of centrifugal force of a 10-mL cone shaped
bottle centrifugal precipitate tube with a screw cap used.
(12) When using a Pasteur pipet, use the same Pasteur pipet through a series of procedures
in c) - d).
(13) Disperse dichloromethane sufficiently. If vibration occurs while dichloromethane layer
remains caked, the extraction efficiency of clopyralid deteriorates and mesurements
are affected.
(14) When using a Pasteur pipet, use the same Pasteur pipet through a series of procedures
in g) - h). Do not use the Pasteur pipet used in Note (9).
634

(17) If there is a possibility that the clopyralid concentration in the sample solution exceed
the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount of effluent
with formic acid (1 +1000).
Comment 6 Aa an alternative to the procedures in (4.4) k) - l), filtration is allowed with a

membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE or
conduct centrifugal filtration with a centrifugal type filter unit (Ultrafree-MC PVDF
membrane (0.22 µm), etc) and the filtrate can be the sample solution.
Comment 7 When further concentration is required to ensure minimum quantitation, dissolve
concentrated matters in the procedure in j) by adding acetone, transfer to a nitrogen
concentration tube with the same solvent and send a nitrogen gas to dry up. Then add
0.2 mL of formic acid (1+1000) and conduct centrifugal filtration with a centrifugal
type filter unit (Ultrafree-MC PVDF membrane (0.22 µm), etc) and the filtrate can
be the sample solution. In this case, don not conduct the procedure in i).
considering it:
(iii) Eluent: A: Formic acid (1+1000) B: Methanol:
(ii) Mode: Positive
(vi) Cone voltage: 20 V
(vii) Collision energy: 20 eV for determination, 30 eV for validation
(viii)Monitor ion: Precursor ion m/z 192
Product ion m/z 146 for determination, m/z 110 for validation

1) Inject 5 μL of respective clopyralid standard solutions for calibration curve into the
LC-MS/MS, record the chromatogram of ion (m/z) for determination and ion (m/z) for
validation of clopyralid and obtain respective peak areas.
validation of clopyralid.
3) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration of respective agrichemicals and
the peak area of ion (m/z) for determination of respective mixture standard solutions for the
635
2) Obtain the clopyralid content from the calibration curve to calculate clopyralid in the
analytical sample.
ratio may depend on the concentration.
Comment 8 Additive recovery testing of clopyralid was conducted using cow dung compost (1
kinds), as a result, the mean recovery rates at additive level of 50 µg/kg, 10 µg/kg
and 2 µg/kg were 78.9 %, 78.3 % and 71.5 % respectively. In addition, additive
recovery testing of clopyralid was conducted using swine manure compost, poultry
manure compost and composted sludge fertilizer and (1 sample for each), as a result,
the mean recovery rates at additive level of 200µg/kg, 2 µg/kg and 80µg/kg were
88.6 %, 81.2 % and 94.2 % respectively.
method validation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification of clopyralid of this test method is
about 2 µg/kg.

for the test method validation of clopyralid
2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Sample name 1)
laboratories (µg/kg) (µg/kg) (%) (µg/kg) (%)
Cow dung compost 1 10 128 10 7.9 15 11.4
Cow dung compost 2 10 2.28 0.35 15.3 0.40 17.6
Swine manure compost 9 22.5 2.3 10.3 3.4 15.3
Poultry manure compost 9 1.20 0.06 5.0 0.14 12.0

Composted sludge
9 48.1 1.2 2.5 5.6 11.6
fertilizer
2) Grossl mean (n = number of laboratories × number of repeated tests (2))
References
1) National Research and Development Agency: Institute for Agro-Environmental
Sciences, National Agriculture and Food Research Organization: High-sensitive analysis
636
for clopyralid in cow dung compost (Reference method)

< http://www.naro.affrc.go.jp/publicity_report/pub2016_or_later/pamphlet/tech-pamph/078229.html>
(5) Flow sheet for clopyralid: The flow sheet for clopyralid in compost is shown below:
5.00 g
100-mL centrifugal precipitate tube with a screw cap
analytical sample
← 50 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol [1+99]
Shaking About 30 minutes
Centrifugal separation 1700× g , 5 minutes
Transfer supernatant ［Acceptor, 100-mL Erlenmeyer flask］

（Supernatant）
（Residue）
← 40 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol [1+99]
Shaking 30 minutes
Centrifugal separation 1700× g , 5 minutes
Filter under Glass fiber filter paper

reduced pressure ［Acceptor, 100-mL short-neck volumetric flask］
←Wash the vessel and residue with a small amount of
sodium hydroxide (40 g/L)−methanol [1+98]
←Sodium hydroxide solution (40 g/L)−methanol [1+99]
(up to the marked line)
Extract
Figure 1 Flow sheet for clopyralid in compost

and composted sludge fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
637
Extract
← 10 mL of extract
Cleanup (1)
(Wash with about 5 mL of methanol, then 5 mL of water in advance）
　　[Collection, 100-mL eggplant-shaped flask]
← About 5 mL of sodium hydroxide solution (0.4 g/L)−methanol [1+1] × 2 times
　　[Collection, same as above vessel]
← About 5 mL of methanol
Concentration
under reduced 40 ºC, until the volume reaches about 5 mL
pressure
Cleanup (2) (Wash with about 5 mL of acetonitrile,
then 5 mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120) in advance)
← Wash the vessel 2 times with about 5mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)
← Wash with about 5mL of hydrochloric acid (1+120)−acetonitrile [9+1]
← Wash with about 5mL of water
← 4 mL of ammonia solution (0.0028 w/v %)−acetonitrile [9+1]
　[Elute, 10-mL centrifugal precipitate tube]
Elute
638
Elute
Cleanup (3)
← 0.1 mL of sodium hydroxide (40 g/L)
Shake to mix Vortex
← 2 mL of dichloromethane
Shake to mix Vortex, 30 seconds
Centrifugal separation 740 × g (2000 rpm, 165 mm), 3 minutes
Remove a low layer Pasteur pipet or micro syringe

Repeat 1 time
← 0.15 mL of sulfuric acid (1+2)
Shake to mix Vortex
← 2 mL of dichloromethane
Shake to mix Vortex, 30 seconds
Centrifugal separation 740 × g (2000 rpm, 165 mm), 3 minutes
Pasteur pipet or micro syringe

Transfer a low layer
［Acceptor, 50-mL round-bottle flask］
Repeat 2 times
←5 mL of acetone
Concentration
40 °C
Exsiccation Nitrogen
← 1 mL of formic acid (1+1000)
Transfer 1.5 mL centrifugal precipitate tube made of polymer
Centrifugal separation 8100 × g (10000 rpm, 72.5 mm), 5 minutes
Supernatant
Measurement LC-MS/MS
(Cleanup (3) and measurement procedure)
639
References: Selected Reaction Monitoring chromatogram of clopyralid standard solution for

calibration curve preparation is shown below
Intensity /
Retention
Reference diagram: SRM chromatograms of clopyralid

Clopyralid standard solution (the equivalents of 100 pg as clopyralid)

1) Column: ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18 (2.1-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long,
1.8-µm particle diameter)
a) LC-MS/MS.
640
8.3 Residue agrichemicals (multicomponent)

8.3.1 Residue agrichemicals multicomponent analysis (1)
8.3.1.a High-Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry
(1) Compounds subjected to analysis Abamectin: abamectin B1a, ivermectin: 22, 23-dihydro
avermectin B1a (Another name: ivermectin B1a), eprinomectin: eprinomectin B1a, rotenone:
rotenone, piperonylbutoxide: piperonylbutoxide, pyrethrin: pyrethrin I and pyrethrin II
(2) Summary
This testing method is applicable to fluid home garden-use mixed fertilizer and fluid mixed fertilizer.
This testing method is classified as Type B and its symbol is 8.3.1.a-2017 or AG-C-1.a-1.
Dissolve respective agricultural chemicals in fertilizers with acetonitrile and water, and extract.
Refine by using 2 kinds of cleanup cartridge, and then measure with a High-Performance Liquid
Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer to obtain compounds subjected to analysis in an analytical

c) Methanol: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8891 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) Methanol: Methanol used in eluent of an HPLC is a reagent of LC-MS analysis grade or
equivalents.
e) Ethyl acetate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8361 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
f) Toluene: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8680 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
g) Ammonium formate: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent (no less than 95 % (mass fraction) in
purity) or a reagent of equivalent quality.
h) Ammonium formate solution (0.1 mol/L) (1): Add 6.306 g of ammonium formate into 1000
mL of water.
i) Ammonium formate solution (0.1 mmol/L) (1): Add 1mL of ammonium formate solution
(0.1 mol/L) into 1000 mL water.
j) Formic acid: A JIS Guaranteed Reagent specified in JIS K 8264 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
k) Formic acid solution (0.1 v/ v %) (1): Add 1 mL of formic acid to 1,000 mL of water.
l) Acetonitrile formate solution (0.1 v/v %) (1): Add 1 mL of formic acid to 1,000 mL of
acetonitrile.
m) Respective agricultural chemicals standard solutions (0.1 mg/mL) (1): Put about 0.01 g of
abamectin [C48H72O14] (2), ivermectin [C48H74O14] (2), eprinomectin [C50H75NO14] (2), rotenone
[C23H22O6] (2), piperonylbutoxide [C19H30O5] (2) and pyrethrin [pyrethrin I: C21H28O3 and
pyrethrin II: C22H28O5] (2) to a weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
Dissolve with a small amount of methanol, transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add the
solvent up to the marked line. (However, 0.1 mg/mL of pyrethrin contains total of pyrethrin
I/II)
n) Mixture standard solution (10 µg/mL): Transfer 10 mL of respective agricultural chemicals
standard solutions to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol up to the marked line.
o) Mixture standard solution (1000 ng/mL): Transfer 10 mL of mixture standard solution (10
µg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add methanol up to the marked line.
p) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (50 ng/mL - 500 ng/mL): In
641
the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of mixture standard solution (1000 ng/ mL) to
50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add methanol up to the marked line.
q) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (5 ng/mL - 50 ng/mL): In
the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of mixture standard solution (100 ng/ mL) to
50-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add methanol up to the marked line.

Comment 1 A standard reagent of respective agricultural chemicals is sold by FUJIFILM Wako

Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Hayashi Pure Chemical
Industries., Ltd.
chemically bonds. The specification is according to the mass spectrometer specification
(3)
.
c) Concentrator: An evaporator whose temperature can be adjusted up to 40 ºC.
d) Porous diatomaceous earth cartridge column: A column that is filled with the porous
diatomaceous earth (capacity: 5 mL) (4)
e) Graphite carbon-NH2 laminate cartridge column: A 6-mL cylinder on which 500 mg of
graphite carbon and 500 mg of aminopropyl silylation silica gel is laminated (5).
Note (3) The column is sold under the names ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18, etc.
(4) The column is sold under the names Chem Elut (5 mL), etc.
(5) The column is sold under the names Envi-carb/LC-NH2 (500 mg/500 mg, 6 mL), etc.
(5) Test procedures

a) Put about 5.00 mL (6) of an analytical sample into a 10-mL volumetric flask.
b) Add 3 mL of acetonitrile to the same volumetric flask, and add water up to the marked line to
shake to mix well.
c) Conduct ultra-sonication for about 30 minutes using an ultrasonic generator (7) to make the
extract.
Note (6) After measuring the specific gravity of sample, calculate the concentration of materials
subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
(7) Note that the volume of the solution may expand as a result of ultra-sonication. It is
recommended to leave it at room temperature for a while when it expands.
Comment 2 The specific gravity (density) can be calculated by placing a 10-mL volumetric flask
642
on an electric balance, aligning the scale to zero, transferring 5.00 mL of the

analytical sample to the volumetric flask and reading the weighing value.

a) Put 5 mL of extract into a porous diatomaceous earth cartridge column and keep it in the
column for about 5 minutes.
b) Place a 100-mL round-bottom flask under the same cartridge column, add about 5 mL of ethyl
acetate into the same cartridge column 4 times successively and allow the solution to elute
until the surface of the solution reaches the top of packing materials (8).
c) After conducting vacuum concentration of elute in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until
most of the elute dries up, send a nitrogen gas to dry up the elute (9), and add 2 mL of
acetonitrile−toluene (3+1) to dissolve the residue.
Note (8) Confirm the solution to elute before conducting the testing.
(9) There is a possibility for agricultural chemicals to vaporize if it is dried up excessively.

a) Wash the graphite carbon-NH2 laminate cartridge column with about 10 mL of
acetonitrile−toluene (3+1) in advance
b) Place a 100-mL round-bottom flask under the same cartridge column, put the solution in (5.2)
c) to the same cartridge column, and allow the solution to overflow until the surface of the
solution reaches the top of packing materials.
c) Wash the vessel with about 5 mL of acetonitrile−toluene (3+1) 5 times and add washing to the
same cartridge successively to allow it to overflow.
d) After conducting vacuum concentration of elute in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until
methanol (11) to dissolve the residue. Transfer a predetermined amount of the solution
precisely and dilute with methanol exactly by a factor of 5 to make the solution as the sample
solution.
Note (10) There is a possibility for agricultural chemicals to vaporize if it is dried up excessively.
(11) If there is a possibility that the concentration of agricultural chemicals in the sample
amount of the sample solution with methanol.
considering it:
(iii) Eluent: A: Ammonium formate solution (0.1 mmol/L)−formic acid solution (0.1 v/v%)
[1+1]
B: Acetonitrile formate solution (0.1 v/v%)
643

(ii) Mode: Positive
(vi) Cone voltage: Shown in table 1
(vii) Collision energy: Shown in table 1
(viii)Monitor ion: Shown in table 1
Table 1 Monitoring ion conditions, etc. of respective agrichemicals

Precursor Product ion Product ion Collision
Cone voltage
Agrichemicals ion (determination) (validation) energy
(V)
(m/z ) (m/z ) (m/z ) (eV)
Abamectin B1a 891 305 567 20 25
Ivermectin B1a 893 307 551 25 25
Eprinomectin B1a 915 186 298 20 20
Rotenone 395 213 192 35 25
Piperonylbutoxide 356 177 147 20 15
PyrethrinⅠ 329 161 133 20 10
PyrethrinⅡ 373 161 133 20 10

1) Inject 5 μL of respective mixture standard solutions for calibration curve preparation into the
LC-MS/MS, record the chromatogram of ion (m/z) for determination and ion (m/z) for
validation of materials subjected to measurement.
validation of respective materials subjected to measurement.
3) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration of material subjected to
measurement and the peak area or height of ion (m/z) for determination of respective mixture
solutions for the calibration curve preparation. Prepare a calibration curve when the sample is
measured.
2) Obtain the content of materials subjected to measurement from the calibration curve of the
peak area or height to calculate materials subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
(5.5) Calculation
Calculate the respective concentration of agricultural chemicals in the analytical sample by the
following formula. in the analytical sample by the following formula:
644
Respective concentration of agricultural chemicals in the analytical sample (µg/kg)
= (A × B × 10) /C
A： Concentration (ng/mL) of respective materials subjected to measurement in the final

sample solution obtained from the calibration curve
B： Dilution factor in the case that the final sample solution is further diluted because it
exceeds the upper limit of the calibration curve.
C： Specific gravity of the analytical sample (density) (g/mL)
Comment 3 A recovery testing was conducted using fluid home garden-use mixed fertilizer (3
kinds) and fluid mixed fertilizer (2 kinds), as a result, the mean recovery at additive
level of 4000 µg/kg and 400 µg/kg (However, 4000 µg/kg and 400 µg/kg of
pyrethrin contain total of pyrethrin I/II) were 77.0 % - 104.5 % and 85.6 % - 107.9 %
respectively.
validation.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification for respective agrichemicals of the
test method is about 10 µg/kg.
645
Table 2　 Analysis results of a collaborative study for the testing method validation of multicomponent analysis of
2) Additive 3) 4)
Mean Recovery RSD r RSD R
Agrichemicals Sample name Number of amount
1)
laboratories （µg/kg）（µg/kg）（%）（%）（%）
Abamectin Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 286.8 333.3 86.1 13.3 14.4
B1a Home garden-use mixed fertilizer2 8 358.9 416.7 86.1 13.4 14.8
Home garden-use mixed fertilizer3 8 425.8 500.0 85.2 8.6 11.6
Fluid mixed fertilizer1 8 288.6 333.3 86.6 7.1 8.5
Ivermectin Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 298.9 333.3 89.7 14.9 15.0
Eprinomectin Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 293.5 333.3 88.1 7.0 10.4
Rotenone Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 276.8 333.3 83.1 5.7 7.8
Piperonyl Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 318.2 333.3 95.5 8.1 13.2
butoxide Home garden-use mixed fertilizer2 8 395.6 416.7 94.9 8.4 13.6
2) Gross mean (n = number of laboratories × number of repeated tests (2))
3) Repeatability (relative standard deviation)
4) Reproducibility (relative standard deviation)
Table 2　（Continued）
2) Additive 3) 4)
Mean Recovery RSD r RSD R
Agrichemicals Sample name Number of amount
1)
laboratories （µg/kg）（µg/kg）（%）（%）（%）
Pyrethrin I Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 160.7 186.0 86.4 9.3 11.9
Pyrethrin II Home garden-use mixed fertilizer1 8 131.1 147.3 89.0 6.5 9.7
646
References
1) Toshiharu YAGI, Masayuki YAMANISHI, Yuji SHIRAI: Simultaneous Determination
of Agricultural chemicals in Fluid Fertilizer by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass
Spectrometry, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.4, p. 36 - 48 (2011)
2) Toshiharu YAGI, Masayuki YAMANISHI, Yuji SHIRAI and Masato SHIBATA:
Simultaneous Determination of Six Kind of Agricultural Chemicals in Fluid Fertilizer
by Liquid Chromatograph-Tandem Mass Spectrometer (LC-MS/MS): A Collaborative
Study, Research Report of Fertilizer, Vol.5, p. 48 - 59 (2012)
(6) Flow sheet for simultaneous analysis of 6 kinds of agrichemicals: The flow sheet for
simultaneous analysis of 6 kinds of agrichemicals in fertilizer is shown below.
5.00 mL analytical sample 10-mL volumetric flask

← About 3 mL of acetonitrile
Ultra sonication 5 minutes
Extract
Figure 1 Flow sheet for residue agrichemicals multicomponent analysis

((1) : simultaneous analysis of 6 kinds of agrichemicals) in fertilizers
647
Extract
Aliquot (5 mL)
Keep the extract for 5 minutes

Cleanup (1)
in the cartridge column (1)
← About 5 mL of ethyl acetate ×4 times
　　[elute, 100-mL round-bottom flask ]
Concentration
40 °C
← Dissolve with about 2 mL of acetonitrile−toluene(3+1)
Cartridge column (2)
Cleanup (2) (wash with about 5 mL of acetonitrile−toluene (3+1)
× 2 times in advance)
　[100-mL round-bottom flask]
← Wash the vessel 5 times with about 5 mL of acetonitrile−toluene (3+1)
　[overflow, the same vessel]
Concentration
40 °C
← 5 mL of methanol
Dilution Dilute the solution 5 times
Sample solution
Measurement LC-MS/MS

((1) : simultaneous analysis of 6 kinds of agrichemicals) in fertilizers
648
Reference: Selected Reaction Monitoring chromatograms of mixture standard solution for

calibration curve preparation and sample solution (fluid home garden-use mixed
fertilizer) are shown below.
Peak No.
１
4
Intensity / arb.units
7
0 Retention Time / min 20 0 0 Retention Time / min 20
Peak No.1: AbamectinB1a

No.2: IvermectinB1a
No.3: Eprinomectin B1a
No.4: Rotenone
No.5: Piperonylbutoxide
No.6: Pyrethrin I
No.7: Pyrethrin II
1) Mixed standard solution 2) Sample solution
Reference diagram Selected Reaction Monitoring chromatograms of respective agricultural

chemicals
1) Mixture standard solution (the equivalents of 2,500 pg as respective agrichemicals)

(For pyrethrin, the equivalents of 2,500 pg of the total of pyrethrin I/II)
2) Sample solution (fluid home garden-use mixed fertilizer, additive of the equivalents of 400
µg/ kg in the sample)
(For pyrethrin, the equivalents of 400 µg/kg of the total of pyrethrin I/II)

Column: ACQUITY UPLC HSS C18 (2.1-mm inner diameter, 100-mm long, 1.8-µm
particle diameter)
Flow rate: 0.2 mL/min
a) LC-MS/MS.
649
8.3.2 Residue agrichemicals multicomponent analysis (2)

8.3.2.a Gas Chromatography
(1) Compounds subjected to analysis β-HCH (β-BHC), γ-HCH (γ-BHC), o,p'-DDD,
p,p'-DDD, o,p'-DDE, p,p'-DDE, o,p'-DDT, p,p'-DDT,aldrin,endrin, dieldrin, trans-chlordane,
cis-chlordane, trans-nonachlor, cis-nonachlor,heptachlor, heptachlor epoxide and
hexachlorobenzene
(2) Summary
This testing method is applicable to compost and straw, raw materials of compost. This testing
method is classified as Type D and its symbol is 8.3.2.a-2017 or AG-C-2.a-1.
Extract respective agricultural chemicals in fertilizers or raw materials with acetonitrile and water,
refine by using a porous diatomaceous earth column, a gel permeation chromatograph and a
synthetic magnesium silicate cartridge column, and then measure with an electron capture detector
equipped gas chromatograph to obtain compounds subjected to analysis in an analytical sample. In

c) Hexane: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration: no
d) Sodium chloride: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade or a reagent
of equivalent quality.
e) Cyclohexane: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration:
no less than 300) or a reagent of equivalent quality.
f) Acetone: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration: no
g) Diethyl ether: A reagent of agricultural chemicals residue/PCB testing grade (concentration:
h) 2,2,4-trimethylpentane: A reagent of HPLC grade or a reagent of equivalent quality.
i) Respective agricultural chemicals standard solutions (0.2 mg/mL) (1): Put about 0.02 g of
β-HCH (β-BHC) ［ C6H6Cl6 ］ (2), γ-HCH (γ-BHC) ［ C6H6Cl6 ］ (2), o,p'-DDD ［ C14H10Cl4 ］ (2),
p,p'-DDD［C14H10Cl4］(2), o,p'-DDE［C14H8Cl4］(2), p,p'-DDE［C14H8Cl4］, o,p'-DDT［C14H9Cl5］
(2)
, p,p'-DDT ［ C14H9Cl5 ］ ,aldrin ［ C12H8Cl6 ］ ,endrin ［ C12H8Cl6O ］ , dieldrin ［ C12H8Cl6O ］ (2),
trans-chlordane ［ C10H8Cl6 ］ (2), cis-chlordane ［ C10H8Cl6 ］ (2), trans-nonachlor ［ C10H5Cl9 ］ (2),
cis-nonachlor［C10H5Cl9］(2), heptachlor［C10H5Cl7］(2), heptachlor epoxide［C10H5Cl7O］(2) and
hexachlorobenzene［C6Cl6］(2) to a weighing dish, and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg.
Dissolve them with 20 mL of acetone, transfer to 100 mL volumetric flasks respectively, and
add 2,2,4-trimethylpentane up to the marked line.
j) Mixture standard solution (1 µg/mL) (1): Transfer 1 mL of respective agricultural chemicals
standard solutions to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add 2,2,4-trimethylpentane-acetone (4+1)
k) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.02 µg/mL - 0.2 µg/mL)
(1)
: In the case of usage, transfer 1 mL - 10 mL of mixture standard solution (1 µg/mL) to 50
mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add 2,2,4-trimethylpentane−acetone (4+1) up to the
marked line.
l) Mixture standard solution for calibration curve preparation (0.005 µg/mL - 0.02 µg/mL)
(1)
: In the case of usage, transfer 2.5 mL - 10 mL of mixture standard solution (0.1 µg/mL) to
50 mL volumetric flasks step-by-step, and add 2,2,4-trimethylpentane−acetone (4+1) up to the
650
marked line.

Comment 1 A standard reagent of respective agricultural chemicals is sold by FUJIFILM Wako

Pure Chemical Co., Ltd., Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Hayashi Pure Chemical
Industries., Ltd.
a) Gas Chromatograph (GC): GC specified in JIS K 0114 that satisfies the following
requirements.
1) Sample injector: An injector that enables split less system.
2) Capillary column: A capillary column (0.25-mm inner diameter and 30-m long) made of
fused silica. 14 % cyanopropylphenyl -86 % dimethyl polysiloxane chemically bonds to the
inner surface of a capillary column with 0.25 µm thickness.
3) Detection unit: Electron capture detector (ECD)
b) Gel permeation chromatograph (GPC): Preparative liquid chromatograph specified in JIS
K 0135 that satisfies the following requirements. No detector is required.
1) Sample injector: A sample injector that can inject 5 mL of sample solution.
2) Column: A 20-mm inner diameter 300-mm long stainless-steel column tube filled with
styrendivynylbenzene copolymer system hard gel
3) Guard column: A 20-mm inner diameter 100-mm long stainless steel column tube filled
with styrendivynylbenzene copolymer system hard gel
4) Fraction collector: A fraction collector that can set up a fraction to which agrichemical
components elute.
c) Shaking apparatus
d) Concentrator: An evaporator whose temperature can be adjusted up to 40 ºC.
e) Filter: A funnel for filtering under reduced pressure (compatible filter diameter: 60 mm)
f) Porous diatomaceous earth cartridge column: A column that is filled with the porous
diatomaceous earth (capacity: 20 mL).
g) Synthetic magnesium silicate cartridge column: A cartridge column that is filled with 910
mg of synthetic magnesium silicate.
h) Membrane filters: Made of PTFE (pore size is no more than 0.5 μm)
Comment 2 Column for GC is sold under the production name DB-1701, Rtx-1701, SPB-1701,
etc. A column which has actually isolated compounds subjected to analysis should be
used.
Comment 3 Gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) is a preparative liquid chromatograph that
collects a fraction of a material subjected to measurement sieved and isolated by
packing materials of the column for GPC according to the size of the molecule of the
material. A column for GPC is sold under the production name Shodex CLNpak
EV-2000 AC, etc. In addition, a gurd column for GPC is sold under the production
name Shodex CLNpak EV-G AC, etc.
Comment 4 A funnel for filtering under educed pressure is sold under the production name
KIRIYAMA Funnel SB-60, KIRIYAMA Funnel SU-60, etc.
Comment 5 A porous diatomaceous earth cartridge is commercially sold under production name
Chem Elut (20 mL), etc.
Comment 6 Synthetic magnesium silicate is commercially sold under the production names such
as Sep-Pak Florisil Plus Long Cartridge (910 mg).
651
Comment 7 A membrane filter is sold under the production name HLC-DISK 25 Solvent system
(pore size: 0.45 µm), DISMIC 25JP050, Millex FH (diameter: 25 mm, pore size:
0.45 µm), etc.
(5) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 20 mL of acetonitrile−water (3 +1) to moisten.
c) After leaving at rest for ten minutes, add 100 mL of acetonitrile and shake to mix for about 30
minutes.
d) Place a 300-mL round-bottom flask under the filter and filtrate the extract under reduced
pressure with a filter paper (type 5 B)
e) Conduct cleanup of the previous Erlenmeyer flask and residue with 50 mL of acetonitrile
successively, similarly filtrate under reduced pressure and pool with the filtrate in d) to make
the extract.

a) Concentrate under reduced pressure in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until most of the
extract dries up.
b) Add 20 mL of sodium chloride saturated solution, put into a porous diatomaceous earth
cartridge column and leave it at rest for about 5 minutes.
c) Place a 300-mL round-bottom flask under the same cartridge column, wash the vessel 3 times
with about 20 mL of hexane to add the washing to the same cartridge column successively
and allow the solution to elute until the surface of the solution reaches the top of packing
materials.
d) Further add about 60 mL of hexane into the same cartridge and allow the solution to elute
until the surface of the solution reaches the top of packing materials.
e) After conducting vacuum concentration of elute in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until
cyclohexane−acetone (4+1) to dissolve the residue.
f) Filter with a membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.5 μm).
Note (3) There is a possibility for agricultural chemicals to vaporize if it is dried up excessively.

a) Inject 5 mL of the filtrate in (5.2) e) into a gel permeation chromatograph and transfer a
fraction eluted from respective agrichemicals which are determined according to the
procedure condition in b) into a 100-mL round-bottom flask.
b) Procedure conditions for a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC): An example of
procedure conditions for a gel permeation chromatograph (GPC) is shown below. Set up the
1) Column: A styrendivynylbenzene copolymer column (20-mm inner diameter, 300-mm long,
15-µm particle diameter)
2) Guard column: A styrendivynylbenzene copolymer column (20-mm inner diameter,
100-mm long, 15-µm particle diameter)
3) Eluent: Cyclohexane-acetone (4 +1)
5) Preparative fraction: 70 mL -120 mL
c) After conducting vacuum concentration of elute in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC until
652
most of the elute dries up, send a nitrogen gas to dry up the elute (3), and add 2 mL of hexane
to dissolve the residue.

a) Conduct cleanup of a synthetic magnesium silicate cartridge column (910 mg) with about 5
mL of hexane.
b) Place a 50-mL round-bottom flask under the same cartridge column, put the solution in (5.3)
c) to the same cartridge column, and allow the solution to overflow until the surface of the
solution reaches the top of packing materials.
c) Wash the vessel with about 2 mL of hexane 2 times and add washing to the same cartridge
successively to allow it to overflow.
d) Further add about 15 mL of hexane−diethyl ethel (9+1) into the same cartridge and allow
respective materials subjected to measurement to elute.
e) After conducting vacuum concentration of the elute in a water bath of no more than 40 ºC
until most of the elute dries up, send a nitrogen gas to dry up the elute (3). And add 1 mL of
2,2,4-trimethylpentane−acetone (4+1) (4) to dissolve the residue, making the sample solution.
Note (4) If there is a possibility that the concentration of respective agricultural chemicals in
the sample solution exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a
predetermined amount of the sample solution with 2,2,4-trimethylpentane−acetone
(4+1).
Specific measurement procedures are according to the operation method of a Gas
Chromatograph used in measurement.
a) The measurement conditions of Gas Chromatograph: An example of measurement
conditions for a Gas Chromatograph is shown below. Set up the measurement conditions
considering it:
1) Sample injection method: split less injection method (1min)
2) Temperature of sample injector: 250 °C
3) Capillary column: A capillary column (0.25-mm inner diameter, 30-m long, 0.25 µm layer
thickness) made of fused silica. 14 % cyanopropylphenyl−86 % dimethyl polysiloxane
chemically bonds to the inner surface of the capillary column with 0.25 µm thickness.
4) Column bath temperature: 60 °C (1 min) → (20 °C/min) → 180 °C→ (2 °C/min) →
260 °C→ (5 °C/min) → 275 °C (1 min)
5) Carrier gas: helium, Flow rate: 1.5 mL/min
6) Addition gas: Nitrogen, Flow rate: 60 mL/min
7) Detection unit: Electron capture detector (ECD)
8) Detector temperature: 280 °C

1) Inject 1 µL of respective mixture standard solutions for calibration curve preparation into a
GC, record a chromatogram and obtain the peak area or height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the concentration and the peak area or height of
respective mixture solutions for the calibration curve preparation. Prepare a calibration curve
when the sample is measured.
2) Obtain the content of materials subjected to measurement from the calibration curve of the
653
peak area or height to calculate materials subjected to measurement in the analytical sample.
Comment 8 Additive recovery testing of compounds subjected to analysis in compost was

conducted, as a result, the mean recovery rates at additive level of 20 µg/kg and 50
µg/kg were 82.1 % - 118.1 % and 62.5 % - 120.2 % respectively. The results of the
repeatability tests on different days using compost to evaluate precision were
analyzed by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of
intermediate precision and repeatability. Note that α-HCH (α-BHC), δ-HCH (δ-BHC),
and oxychlordane, which were subjected to simultaneous analysis, were excluded
from the compounds subjected to analysis because sufficient recovery rates were not
obtained.
Additionally, the minimum limit of quantification for respective agrichemicals of the
test method is no more than 20 µg/kg.

2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
1)
T (μg/kg) (μg/kg) (%) (μg/kg) (%)
β -BHC 5 15.7 1.3 8.3 2.0 12.8
γ -BHC 5 14.7 1.3 8.6 1.6 10.9
δ-BHC 5 50 11.8 23.6 14.5 29.1
hexachlorobenzene 5 15.3 1.4 9.3 2.5 16
heptachlor 5 16.9 1.1 6.7 2.4 14.3
aldrin 5 12.8 1.0 7.8 3.4 26.4
oxychlordane 5 32.4 2.8 8.7 2.8 8.6
heptachlor epoxide (1) 5 17.8 2.0 11.1 1.6 9
heptachlor epoxide (2) 5 17.9 1.8 10.1 1.8 10
trans-chlordane 5 17.6 1.7 9.9 1.9 10.8
cis-chlordane 5 17.8 1.3 7.2 2.0 11.3
trans-nonachlor 5 15.9 1.3 8.3 1.5 9.6
cis-nonachlor 5 16.7 1.5 8.8 2.1 12.4
dieldrin 5 16.6 1.4 8.5 2.0 11.9
endrin 5 17.8 1.4 7.9 1.7 9.5
o ,p '-DDE 5 18.7 2.7 14.4 2.7 14.6
p ,p '-DDE 5 16.8 1.6 9.8 1.8 10.9
o ,p '-DDD 5 16.9 1.2 7.3 1.3 7.8
p ,p '-DDD 5 16.3 1.7 10.7 1.8 10.9
o ,p '-DDT 5 17.9 1.4 7.8 2.2 12
p ,p '-DDT 5 16.6 1.4 8.1 2.2 13
References
1) Tomoharu NOZAKI: Determination of Organic Chloride Pesticides in Composts using
Gas Chromatography-Electron Capture Detector (GC-ECD), Research Report of
Fertilizers, Vol.10, p. 41 - 60 (2017)
654
(6) Flow sheet for simultaneous analysis of chloride pesticides: The flow sheet for
simultaneous analysis of chloride pesticides in fertilizer is shown below.
5.00 mL analytical sample 200 mL- ground-in stopper Erlenmeyer flask

← About 20 mL of acetonitrile - water (3 +1)
Leave at rest 10 minutes
← About 100 mL of acetonitrile
Shake to mix 30 minutes
Filter
Filter paper (type 5 B), 300-mL round-bottom flask (1)
under reduced presuure
←Cleanup of the vessel and residue with 50 mL of acetonitrile
Extract Pool washing with the filtrate

((2) : simultaneous analysis of chloride agrichemicals) in fertilizers
Extract
Concentration
40 °C
← 20 mL of sodium chloride saturated solution,
Porous diatomaceous earth cartridge column
Cleanup (1)
Leave at rest for 5 minutes
　　［300-mL round-bottom flask (2)］
←Wash the 300-mL round-bottom flask (1) 3 times with about 20 mL
of hexane, add to the same cartridge column successively
←60 mL of hexane
Concentration
40 °C
Exsiccation Nitrogen gas
←10 mL of cyclohexane−acetone (4+1)
Filter Membrane filter (pore size: no more than 0.45 µm)
Filtrate

(Cleanup (1) procedure)
655
Gel permeation chromatograph

Cleanup (2)
Inject 5 mL of the filtrate
　　［Transfer 70 mL - 120 mL of eluted fraction into a 100-mL round-bottom flask］
Concentration
40 °C
←About 2 mL of hexane
Cleanup (3) Synthetic magnesium silicate cartridge column
　　［50-mL round-bottom flask］

←Wash the 100-mL round-bottom flask 3 times with about 2 mL
of hexane, add to the same cartridge column successively
←About 15 mL of hexane-diethyl ethel (9+1)
Concentration
40 °C
←1 mL of 2,2,4-trimethylpentane−acetone (4+1)
Sample solution
Measurement GC（ECD）

(Cleanup (2) and cleanup (3) and measurementprocedure)
656
8.4 Sodium
(1) Summary
classified as Type D and its symbol is 8.4.a-2017 or Na.a-1.
Pretreat an analytical sample with incineration and hydrochloric acid, spray into an acetylene−air
flame, and measure the atomic absorption with sodium at a wavelength of 589.0 nm or 589.6 nm to
obtain sodium (Na) in an analytical sample. In addition, the performance of this testing method is
shown in Comment 3.

equivalent quality.
b) Sodium standard solution (Na 1 mg/mL) (1): Heat sodium chloride specified in JIS K 8150
at 600 ºC ± 10 ºC for about 1 hour, let it stand to cool in a desiccator, and weigh 2.542 g to a
weighing dish. Dissolve in a small amount of water, transfer to a 1000-mL volumetric flask,
c) Sodium standard solution (Na 0.1 mg/mL) (1): Transfer 20 mL of sodium standard solution
(Na 1 mg/mL) to a 200-mL volumetric flask, and add hydrochloric acid (1+23) up to the
marked line.
d) Sodium standard solutions (Na 1 µg/mL - 10 µg/mL) for the calibration curve
preparation (2): Transfer 2.5 mL - 25 mL of sodium standard solution (Na 0.1 mg/mL) to
line (2).
e) Blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation: Hydrochloric acid (1+23) used
in the procedures in d) (3).

(2) When using a device model which cannot degrade the sensitivity of the device by
tilting the burner head, conduct the model appropriate dilution. (For example, 0.1
µg/mL - 4 µg/mL)
as polypropylene, PTFE, etc. that sodium hardly elutes.
Comment 1 Instead of the sodium standard solution in (2) b), a sodium standard solution (Na 0.1
mg/mL 1 mg/mL or 10 mg/mL for Atomic Absorption Spectrometry traceable to
National Metrology can also be used.

JIS K 0121.
1) Light source: A sodium hollow cathode lamp
be set to 250 ºC.
657
(4) Test procedure

about 5 minutes.
f) After standing to cool, transfer the solution to a 250-mL - 500-mL volumetric flask with water
Comment 2 The procedure in (4.1) is the same as the procedure in (4.1.2) in 4.2.1.a.
1) Spray the sodium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the sodium concentration and the indicated value
of the sodium standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation and the blank test
Na) (5) to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
2) Add hydrochloric acid (1+23) to the marked line.
4) Obtain the sodium content from the calibration curve, and calculate the sodium (Na) in the
analytical sample.
Note (5) Sample a predetermined amount of sample solution according to the device model in
Note (2).
Comment 3 Additive recovery testing with triplicates measurement was conducted using fish
caked powder, fish waste processed fertilizers, rape seed meal and its powder,
composted sludge fertilizers and compost, as a result, the mean recovery rate at the
additive concentration of sodium in the range of 1 % (mass fraction) - 10 % (mass
fraction) was 97.0 % - 103 %.
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using fish caked powder
(sample to which sodium chloride is added) and compost to evaluate precision were
658
analyzed by one-way analysis of variance. Table 1 shows the calculation results of


2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Fish cakes powder 5 9.08 0.06 0.6 0.09 1.0
Compost 5 0.0973 0.0019 2.0 0.0037 3.8
References
1) Kimie KATO, Masaki CHIDA and Toshifumi FUJITA: Method Validation for
Determination of Sodium in Fertilizer by Atomic Absorption Spectrometry , Research
Report of Fertilizers, Vol.8, p. 61 - 69 (2015)
(5) Flow sheet for sodium testing method: The flow sheet for sodium testing method in
5.00 g analytical sample Weigh into a 200-mL - 300-mL tall beaker.

Incineration 550 ºC ± 5 ºC, no less than 4 hours


Sample solution
Figure 1 Flow sheet for sodium in fertilizers (Extraction procedure)
659
Sample solution
Aliquot
100-mL volumetric flask, water
←Hydrochloric acid (1+23) (up to the marked line)
(589.0 nm or 589.6 nm)
Figure 2 Flow sheet for sodium in fertilizers (Measurement procedure)
660
8.5 Guanylurea nitrogen

(1) Summary
symbol is 8.5.a-2017 or GU-N.a-1.
Add water to an analytical sample to extract guanylurea, introduce it to a High-Performance
wavelength 190 nm to obtain guanylurea nitrogen (GU-N) in an analytical sample. In addition, the
Biuret nitrogen (B-N), dicyandiamide nitrogen (Dd-N), urea nitrogen(U-N) and guanidine nitrogen
(Gd-N) can be simultaneously quantified by using this method. (Refer to Comment 5).

equivalent quality.
d) Guanylurea nitrogen standard solution (GU-N 2 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.540 g of guanylurea
sulfate [C4H12N8O2･H2SO4] (2) in a weighing dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1
mg. Add a small amount of water to dissolve, then transfer to a 100-mL volumetric flask and
e) Guanylurea nitrogen standard solution (GU-N 200 g/mL): Put 10 mL of guanylurea
nitrogen standard solution (GU-N 2 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and add water up
to the marked line.
f) Guanylurea nitrogen standard solution (GU-N 50 µg/mL - 100 µg/mL): Put 25 mL - 50
mL of guanylurea nitrogen standard solution (GU-N 200 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks
g) Guanylurea nitrogen standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (GU-N 1
μg/mL - 50 μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of guanylurea nitrogen standard
solution (GU-N 100 µg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add water up to the
marked line.

(2) A reagent of no less than 98 % (mass fraction) in purity as guanylurea sulfate is
commercially sold.
Comment 1 Guanylurea sulfate is commercially sold by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc. and Tokyo
Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
× g.
661
(4) Test procedure

flask.
Note (3) If there is a possibility that the guanyourea nitrogen (GU-N) concentration in the

Note (6) If there is a possibility that the guanyourea nitrogen (GU-N) concentration in the
predetermined amount of solution with water.

considering it:
662



2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the guanylurea nitrogen (GU-N) concentration
and the peak height at wavelength 190 nm of the respective standard solutions for the
2) Obtain the guanylurea nitrogen (GU-N) content from the peak height using the calibration
curve to calculate guanylurea nitrogen (GU-N) in the analytical sample.
Comment 6 Additive recovery testing was conducted using a preparation sample for a guanylurea
fertilizer (one brand). As a result, the mean recovery at additive level of 36.7 %
(mass fraction), 35.2 % (mass fraction) and 33.4 % (mass fraction) were 103.8 %,
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using a guanylurea fertilizer to

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Guanylurea nitrogen
5 37.0 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.8
fertilzier
663

for the test method validation of guanylurea nitrogen
2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
laboratories (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Guanylurea nitrogen
12 30.3 0.4 1.5 1.1 3.6
fertilizers
3) Mass fraction
References
664
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for guanylurea nitrogen in fertilizers is shown
below:
1.00 g
← 100 mL of water
Stand still

8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 1 Flow sheet for guanylurea nitrogen in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure (4.1.1) and mesurement)
1.00 g
8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure 2 Flow sheet for guanylurea nitrogen in fertilizers

(Extraction procedure (4.1.2) and mesurement)
665
Reference: Chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of

guanylurea nitrogen is shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of the mixture standard solutions (10

mg/L for each)
Peak name
particle diameter)
in (4.2) a)
666
8.6 Uric acid

(1) Summary
symbol is 8.6.a-2018 or U-acid.a-1.
Add phosphate solution (pH 8) to an analytical sample to extract uric acid, introduce it to a
High-Performance Chromatograph (HPLC) to isolate it with a multi mode ODS (reverse
phase+strong anion-exchange+strong cation-exchange+normal phase) column, and then measure at
wavelength 290 nm to obtain uric acid (U-acid) in an analytical sample. The performance of this

eluent which is introduced to an HPLC.
b) Potassium dihydrogenphosphate: A reagent specified in JIS K 9007 or a reagent of
equivalent quality.
c) Disodium hydrogenphosphate: A reagent specified in JIS K 9020 or a reagent of equivalent
quality.
d) Phosphate solution: Dissolve 9.073 g of potassium dihydrogenphosphate in water to make
1000 mL and dissolve 9.464 g of disodium hydrogenphosphate in water to make 1000 mL.
Mix these solutions so that pH 8.0 ± 0.1 is reached.
e) Lithium carbonate solution: Dissolve 0.739 g of lithium carbonate (Li2CO3) of no less than
99 % (mass fraction) in purity in water to make 1000 mL.
f) Uric acid standard solution (U-acid 1 mg/mL) (1): Put 0.100 g of uric acid in a weighing
dish and measure the mass to the order of 0.1 mg. Dissolve it with a small amount of lithium
carbonate solution, transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask and add the solution up to the
marked line.
g) Uric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-acid 100 µg/mL):
Put 10 mL of uric acid standard solution (U-acid 1 mg/mL) to a 100-mL volumetric flask and
add phosphate solution up to the marked line.
h) Uric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-acid 10 µg/mL - 50
µg/mL): Put 10 mL - 50 mL of uric acid standard solution (U-acid 100 µg/mL) to a 100-mL
volumetric flask and add phosphate solution up to the marked line.
i) Uric acid standard solution for the calibration curve preparation (U-acid 0.1 μg/mL - 5
μg/mL): At the time of usage, put 1 mL - 50 mL of uric acid standard solution (U-acid 10
μg/mL) to 100-mL volumetric flasks step-by-step and add phosphate solution up to the
marked line.
j) Ammonium acetate: A reagent specified in JIS K 8359 or a reagent of equivalent quality.
k) Methanol: A reagent of HPLC grade or a reagent of equivalent quality.
silica gel, to which octadecyl, ion-exchange group for strong acidity and strong basic
anion-exchange group, chemically bond.
667
b) Water bath: Water bath that can be adjusted to 60 ºC ± 2 ºC.

c) Magnetic stirrer
d) Centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 1700 × g.
e) High speed centrifugal separator: A centrifugal separator that can work at 8000 × g - 10000
× g.
Comment 1 A column is sold under the production name Scherzo SS-C18.
(4) Test procedures

flask.
b) Add 100 mL of phosphate solution (2) and heat for 30 minutes while shaking to mix (3) at every
10 minutes in a water bath at 60 ºC ± 2 ºC.
c) Immediately stir it by using a magnetic stirrer for about 10 minutes.
d) After allowing to stand still, transfer supernatant to a 15-mL or 50 mLground-in stopper
centrifugal precipitate tube (4), and centrifuge at 1700 × g for about 5 minutes (5).
e) Transfer supernatant (6) to a 1.5-mL ground-in stopper centrifugal precipitate tube (4), and
centrifuge at 8000 × g - 10000 × g for about 5 minutes (7) to make supernatant as a sample
solution.
Note (2) Use a silicone stopper instead of a glass stopper as the solution is heated.
(3) Steam easily expels silicon stoppers, so while lightly holding down the stopper from
the top with your finger, shake it so that the water drops on the inside of the flask
come down as much as possible. In addition, conduct this procedure before and after
the heating procedure.
(5) 7.2 cm - 18.9-cm of rotor radius and 3000 rpm of revolutions makes about 1700 × g
centrifugal force.
(6) If there is a possibility that the uric acid (U-acid) concentration in the sample solution
will exceed the maximum limit of the calibration curve, dilute a predetermined amount
of supernatant with phosphate solution.
Comment 2 Instead of the procedures in (4.1) e), it is allowed to filter with a membrane filter
(pore size: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE and the filtrate can be
considering it:
1) Column: A silica gel column, to which octadecyl, ion-exchange group for strong acidity and
strong basic anion-exchange group chemically bond (4.6-mm inner diameter 250-mm long 3-
μm particle diameter )
668
3) Eluent (1): Dissolve 1.54 g of ammonium acetate with water to make 1000 mL. Transfer 900
mL of the solution to mix with 100 mL of methanol. Filter with a membrane filter (aperture
diameter: no more than 0.5-µm) made of hydrophilic PTFE.
Comment 3 Eluent can be prepared as follows. Dissolve 15.4 g of ammonium acetate with water
to make 1000 mL and store in a refrigerator. At the time of usage, dilute a
predetermined volume of the solution by a factor of 10 to mix with methanol of
volume ratio 1/9 and filter with a membrane filter (aperture diameter: no more than

1) Inject 10 µL of respective standard solutions for calibration curve preparation into an HPLC,
record a chromatogram at wavelength 290 nm and obtain the peak area or height.
2) Prepare a curve for the relationship between the uric acid (U-acid) concentration and the peak
area or height at wavelength 290 nm of respective standard solutions for the calibration curve
preparation.
2) Obtain the uric acid (U-A) content from the peak area or height using the calibration curve to
calculate the uric acid (U-A) in the analytical sample.
Comment 4 In addition to uric acid, allantoin and allantoic acid can be measured simultaneously
by this measurement method (when using a Scherzo SS-C18 column). Note that the
detection wavelength of allantoin and allantoic acid is 210 nm.
Comment 5 Additive recovery testing was conducted using one brand of a compound fertilizer, a
composted sludge fertilizer, a mixed compost fertilizer and compost. As a result, the
mean recovery at additive level of 0.1 % (mass fraction), 0.01 % (mass fraction) and
0.005 % (mass fraction) were 92.4 % - 101.8 %, 85.3 % - 105.0 % and 92.5 % -
The results of the repeatability tests on different days using one brand of a compound
fertilizer, a composted sludge fertilizer, a mixed compost fertilizer and compost to
669

2) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1) 3) 3) 3)
T (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
7 0.0102 0.0001 0.7 0.00042 4.2
Composted sludge
7 0.9320 0.0004 0.5 0.0016 1.7
fertilizer
7 0.00938 0.00009 0.9 0.00031 3.3
Mixed compost
7 0.0924 0.0004 0.4 0.0015 1.7
fertilizer
7 0.00921 0.00005 0.6 0.00032 3.5
Compost 7 0.1010 0.001 1.3 0.0029 2.8
7 0.00966 0.00018 1.8 0.00049 5.0
(5) Flow sheet for testing method: The flow sheet for irea acid in fertilizers is shown below:
1.00 g
← 100 mL of phosphate solution
Heat at 60 ºC ± 2 ºC for 30 minutes
Heating
while shaking to mix at every 10 minutes


8000 ×g - 10000 ×g , 5 minutes
Figure Flow sheet for uric acid in fertilizers
670
Reference: Chromatogram of the standard solution for calibration curve preparation of uric acid is
shown below.
Reference diagram HPLC chromatogram of the uric acid standard solution (50
µg/mL) for calibration curve preparation
Peak name (↓) Uric acid

Column: Scherzo SS-C18 (4.6-mm inner diameter, 250-mm long, 3-µm particle
diameter)
in (4.2) a)
671
Appendix. The procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods
(1) Purposes
This article explains the procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods which will be listed
in the Testing Methods of Fertilizers. In addition, when testing institutes conduct a test which is
not included in the Testing Methods of Fertilizers, a procedure to evaluate the validity of the test
method should conform to a method stipulated in this article.
Additionally, this article targets chemical testing methods. However, this article is not applicable to
the extraction method of the content of effective figures (acid-, alkaline-, citrate- and water-soluble)
in a powdery sample or a solidified fertilizer.
Comment 1 The contents of effective figures (acid-, alkaline-, citrate- and water-soluble) are
stipulated in a notification of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries. In
addition, the change of measurement conditions such as an extraction temperature
may affect an observed value in some cases. Therefore, no changes will be
implemented in the extraction method of the contents of effective figures in a
powdery fertilizer and a solidified fertilizer for the present and the application of this
article is limited to the change of a measurement method (including refining of
extract, etc.).
(2) Definition of terminology

The definition of terminology in this article is as shown below.
a) Selectivity: Capability to accurately measure components subjected to analysis under the
existence of materials which seem to exist in a sample.
b) Trueness: The degree of agreement between the mean obtained from multiple measurement
results and the true value (1).
c) Precision: The degree of agreement among the independent measurement results which are
repeatedly measured under the determined conditions.
d) Repeatability: The precision of the measurement results of analytical samples, which are
regarded to be all identical, obtained under condition (repeatability conditions) that
independent measurement results are measured in a short time, using the same method, in the
same laboratory, by the same operator and with the same instrument.
e) Intermediate precision: The precision of a measurement result of analytical samples, which
are regarded to be all identical, obtained under condition (intermediate conditions) that
independent measurement results are measured, using the same method, in the same
laboratory and in different factors (such as different time and a different operator).
f) Reproducibility: The precision of a measurement result of analytical samples, which are
regarded to be all identical, obtained under condition (reproducibility conditions) that
independent measurement results are measured, using the same method, in different
laboratories, by different operators and with different instruments.
g) Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ): The quantifiable lowest volume or minimum
concentration of a component subjected to analysis which is contained in an analytical
sample.
h) Minimum Limit of Detection (LOD): The detectable lowest volume or minimum
concentration of a component subjected to analysis which is contained in an analytical
sample.
i) Reference material: A material which is uniform and stable enough for one or more
prescribed properties, and is made suitable for the purpose of use in a measurement process.
j) Certified reference material: A reference material, whose values of one or more prescribed
properties are characterized by a reasonable metrological procedure, having a certificate of
672
attestation on which the characteristics of prescribed properties and their uncertainty and
metrological traceability are stated.
k) Blank sample: An analytical sample not containing components subjected to analysis (2).
l) Addition sample: An analytical sample the content of whose components subjected to
analysis is known, or an analytical sample to which reference materials are added (3) (4) or
compounded (3).
m) Natural contamination sample: A test sample prepared from fertilizers which naturally
contain the components subjected to analysis such as harmful components.
n) Distribution sample: An analytical sample prepared from fertilizers (5) which are
manufactured in a fertilizer production factory, etc.
o) Surrogate: A material which is added to an analytical sample in order to conduct a
pre-process operation, correct yields in respective steps of measurement procedure and
confirm recovery, whose chemical structure is identical or similar to a target component.
p) SN ratio: Intensity ratio of a signal (response value) S originating from the analysis target and
a signal (usually noise) N based on the other factors.
Note (1) In reality, the certified value of a certified reference material, the chemical composition
of a compound, the added content of a reference material, etc. and others.
(2) Reagents, etc. containing a target matrix can be used in the case that there is no
distribution fertilizer used as a blank sample for a recovery test and the confirmation
of the minimum limit of quantification, etc.
(3) Mix a component subjected to analysis with a mortar, etc. to sufficient uniformity
(4) In the case of adding a standard solution, vaporize the solvent sufficiently conducting
measures such as letting it stand for one night.
(5) A fertilizer containing components subjected to analysis whose formation or form
changed due to a chemical or physical process (a granulation process, etc.).
References
1) JIS K 0211： Technical terms for analytical chemistry (General part) (2013)
2) JIS K 0214： Technical terms for analytical chemistry (Chromatography part) (2013)
3) JIS Q 0035： Reference materials−General and statistical principles for certification (2008)
4) JIS Z 8101-2： Statistics−Vocabulary and symbols−Part 2: Statistical quality control terms
(1999)
5) JIS Z 8402-1： Accuracy (trueness and precision) of measurement methods and results -
Part 1: General principles and definitions (1999)
6) ALINORM 09/32/23 Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Prorgamme: Repot of the Thirtieth
Session of the Codex Committee on Methods of Analysis and Sampling, Codex
Alimentarius Comission Thirty-second Session (2009)
7) ICH Harmonised Tripartite Guideline, Validation of Analytical Procedures: Text and
Methodology Q2(R1), International Conference on Harmonisation of Technical
Requirements for Registration of Pharmaceuticals for Human Use (ICH) (2005)
(3) Validation method

Test necessary items of (3.1) to (3.8) in a planned manner and estimate performance parameters
from the obtained results.
Confirm whether the estimated values of performance parameters are suitable to target values
(performance norm) respectively, and evaluate that the test method is validated if they are all
suitable.
673
(3.1) Scope of application

As a result of a validation test in a single laboratory and a collaborative study, if the result is
suitable up to reproducibility, the test method is evaluated as a validated test method as far as the
kind of a fertilizer used in the test and the range of concentration are concerned. Therefore, a
laboratory where the said test is conducted can use the performance (reproducibility, etc.) as a
validated method through implementing internal quality control, etc.
As a result of a validation test in a single laboratory, if the result is suitable to trueness,
repeatability and intermediate precision, etc., the test method is evaluated as a validated test method
as far as the laboratory where the test was conducted and as far as the kind of a fertilizer used in the
test and the range of concentration are concerned. Therefore, another laboratory which wants to
introduce the test method is required to carry out the validation anew in an individual laboratory
with the above test method.
(3.2) Selectivity
(3.2.1) Case of Chromatography
Conduct a procedure for a blank sample and confirm that there is no peak (interference peak)
which affects the measurement of components subjected to analysis (6). In addition, in the case of
the simultaneous measurement of multi components, confirm that adjacent peaks are sufficiently
separated (6).
Note (6) Resolution (R) should be 1.0 or more at minimum though 1.5 or more is preferable.
Comment 2 Resolution (R) is used as a separation indicator of peaks. If Resolution (R) is 1.5 or
more, the adjacent two peaks are sufficiently separated and they do not affect a
measurement, whether a peak height or a peak area is used. If Resolution (R) is 1.0 or
more, the adjacent two peaks are sufficiently separated and they do not affect a
measurement, whether a peak height or a peak area is used.
Resolution (R) can be obtained using a peak width by the formula (1a). In addition, if
the peak is a normal distribution, it can be obtained using a peak width at half height
by the formula (1b). With the data processing device of a chromatograph, the formula
(1b) is often used to obtain Resolution (R).
−
Resolution ( ) = ･･･(1a)
1
( )
2× +
1.18 × ( − )
Resolution ( ) = ･･･(1b)
,
+ ,
： Retention time of Peak 1 ： Retention time of Peak 2

： Peak widh of Peak 1 ： Peak width of Peak 1
,
： Peak width at half height of Peak 1
,
： Peak width at half height of Peak 2
674
(3.2.2) Case of a method other than Chromatography (7)

Conduct a procedure for a blank sample and confirm that there is no response which originates
from other components than a component subjected to analysis and can be a factor of positive error
of a quantification value (8).
Note (7) A test method such as Molecular absorption spectrometry, Atomic absorption
spectrometry or Titration analysis which does not isolate with a measurement
instrument.
(8) Absorbance, titer, etc.
References
1) AOAC Official Methods of Analysis Appendix K: Guidelines for Dietary Supplements
and Botanicals, AOAC INTERNATIONAL (2012)
2) JIS K 0114： General rules for gas chromatography (2012)
3) JIS K 0124： General rules for high performance liquid chromatography (2011)
4) The notification by the Director of Evaluation and Licensing Division, Pharmaceutical
and Food Safety Bureau, the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare: “Guideline on
Bioanalytical Method Validation in Pharmaceutical Development”, July 11, 2013,
Yaku-shoku-Sinsa-Hatsu-0711 No.1 (2013)
(3.3) Calibration curve

Measure respective standard solutions for the calibration curve preparation of the concentration
or the content (9) of level 6 to 8 a few times (10) to make a figure plotting the obtained signals (11) as a
function of the concentration or the content of a component subjected to analysis and evaluate its
linearity visually using the figure.
If linearity is recognized, calculate the inclination (b) and the intercept (a) of a calibration curve,
its confidence interval and the coefficient of determination (r2) using a statistical method such as the
calculation of a regression equation by the least square method. Moreover make the plot of residuals
(12)
in respective levels.
Note (9) The blank test solution for the calibration curve preparation can be included.
(10) In order to avoid nonlinear confusion due to the variation of sensitivity, etc., conduct
measurements randomly for each replicate determination.
(11) Absorbance, fluorescence intensity, peak height, peak area, etc.
(12) The difference between a signal obtained by measurement and a signal estimated using
a regression equation.
Comment 3 It is recommended that the 95% confidence interval of an intercept (a) includes the
origin (0).
Comment 4 Though it is usable if the coefficient of determination (r2) is 0.99 or more, it is
recommended that the coefficient of determination (r2) is 0.999 or more for a precise
analysis. If it is less than 0.99, use the equation of a higher order or study the
conversion of a numerical value.
Comment 5 The mean of residuals is 0 and the residuals indicate a random pattern.
References
1) AOAC Official Methods of Analysis Appendix K, Guidelines for Dietary Supplements
2) Thompson, M., Ellison, S.L.R, Wood, R., Harmonized guidelines for
single-laboratoryvalidation of methods of analysis, Pure & Appl. Chem. 74 (5), 835-855
675
(2002)
3) CLSI EP9 A2 Ed. 2, Method Comparison and Bias Estimation Using Patient Samples,
Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (2002)
(3.4) Trueness
As the estimation method of trueness, the methods are recommended in the following order. (1)
Use of a certified reference material (3.4.1), (2) Comparison with an observed value by a validated
method (3.4.2) and (3) Recovery test (3.4.3).
In addition, if a surrogate is used, it is recommended that a recovery is about 40% or more.
(3.4.1) Use of a certified reference material

With regard to a component which has matrixes similar to a fertilizer subjected to test and can use
a certified reference material containing components subjected to measurement of the concentration
in a measurement level, conduct repeatability testing using 3 or more analytical samples (n)
according to the test method of the certified reference material. As a result, the mean of the
observed values should be within the warning level to the certified value (characteristic value) or
the absolute value of the difference between the mean of the observed values and the certified value
(characteristic value) should not exceed 2 times of the standard uncertainty composed of respective
uncertainties of the mean of the observed values and the certified value (13).
Comment 6 A warning limit is given using the formula (2) which is obtained from a collaborative
study for the characterization of a certified reference material.
A warning limit for a certified value ( )
= ±2× ( − )+ = ±2× + ･･･(2)
µ： Certified value
： Reproducibility standard deviation in a collaborative study
： Repeatability standard deviation in a collaborative study (14)
n： The number of analytical samples to repeatability test
： Pure between-laboratory standard deviation in a collaborative study
Note (13) The evaluation procedure of the difference between a measurement result and a
certified value (characteristic value) is shown in Reference 1 Procedure to compare
an observed value and a certified value.
(14) It may be expressed as within-laboratory standard deviation ( ) in some cases.
(3.4.2) Use of another validated test method

For a component for which a certified reference material is not usable but another validated test
method (hereinafter referred to as “a standard test method”) is applicable, confirm that the condition
a) or b) is satisfied.
a) In case 12 or more samples are available: Conduct respective tests of 12 or more test
samples composed of addition samples, natural contamination samples or distribution samples
according to a new test method and a standard test method, create the correlation chart of
676
observed values with two methods for each sample and calculate the inclination (b) and the
intercept (a) of a regression line, and a correlation coefficient (r). Further confirm a prediction
interval.
However, in case that the width between the minimum and the maximum observed value is
small, conduct the paired samples t-test to confirm that a significant difference is not
observed.
Comment 7 It is recommended that the 95% confidence interval of an inclination (b) includes 1,
the 95% confidence interval of an intercept (a) includes the origin (0) and the
correlation coefficient (r) is no less than 0.99.
b) In case fewer samples are available: With regard to 3 or more test samples of different
concentration, conduct respective repeatability addition tests using 4 analytical samples
according to the new test method and a standard test method, confirm the homoscedasticity of
the results of 2 groups and conduct a t-test for each concentration to confirm that significant
difference is not observed under the two-sided significant level of 5%.
(3.4.3) In case neither certified reference material nor other validated test methods are usable
For 3 or more test samples of different concentration, conduct respective repeatability tests using
3 analytical samples and evaluate by obtaining the recovery using the mean of the observed values.
The criteria of the trueness are shown in Separate sheet: The target of trueness and the criteria
of precision in respective concentration levels.
References
2) Thompson, M., Ellison, S.L.R, Wood, R.,: Harmonized guidelines for
(2002)
3) Linsinger, T.,: Comparison of a measurement result with the certified value, European
Reference Materials' application note 1, European Commission - Joint Research Centre
Institute for Reference Materials and Measurements (IRMM) (2010)
4) Joint FAO/WHO Food Standards Programme: Procedural manual Twenty-second
edition, Codex Almentarius Comission (2013)
5) ICH Harmonised Tripartite Guideline: Validation of Analytical Procedures: Text and
(3.5) Precision
Evaluate reproducibility and repeatability by a collaborative study (3.5.1). Or evaluate an
intermediate precision and repeatability by a repeatability test (3.5.2).
(3.5.1) Reproducibility and repeatability by a collaborative study

The number of laboratories to obtain effective data should be 8 or more (15). Conduct undisclosed
duplicate collaborative studies for 5 or more kinds of samples with different concentration. Obtain
reproducibility and repeatability from the observed values (16) to evaluate.
Criteria to evaluate these precisions are shown in Separate sheet: The target of trueness and
the criteria of precision in respective concentration levels.
Note (15) In case the number of laboratories which have required facility/instruments is limited,
677
this should be 5 or more.

(16) The calculation method is shown in Reference 2: Calculation of reproducibility or
intermediate precision and repeatability
(3.5.2) Intermediate precision and repeatability by a repeatability test in a single laboratory

on different days
Conduct a duplicate test (17) per test day for 5 to 7 days using two analytical samples of different
concentration which is included in a normal range (18). Obtain intermediate precision and
repeatability from the observed values (19) to evaluate.
Criteria to evaluate these precisions are shown in Separate sheet: The target of trueness and
the criteria of precision in respective concentration levels.
Note (17) The data of internal quality control can be used.

(18) It is not necessary for the same tester to conduct a test through 5 to 7 days.
(19) The calculation method is shown in Reference 2: Calculation of reproducibility or
intermediate precision and repeatability
References
2) Thompson, M., Ellison, S.L.R, Wood, R.,: Harmonized guidelines for
(2002)
3) AOAC Official Methods of Analysis Appendix D: Guidelines for Collaborative Study
Procedures To Validate Characteristics of a Method of Analysis, AOAC
INTERNATIONAL (2005)
4) Horwitz ， W.: Protocol for the Design ， Conduct and Interpretation of
Method-Performance Studies，Pure & Appl. Chem.，67 (2), 331 - 343 (1995)
(3.6) Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ)

Estimate Minimum Limit of Quantification according to (3.6.1) to (3.6.3). Prepare test samples
which include the concentration estimated to be near the Minimum Limit of Quantification step by
step as necessary. And conduct respective repeatability tests using 3 analytical samples and define
the concentration of a prepared test sample as the Minimum Limit of Quantification, where the
mean of the obtained values using the prepared test sample is suitable to the target value of trueness.
Comment 8 In case permissible content and equivalent level is 1.0 mg/kg or more, the Minimum
Limit of Quantification (LOQ) of harmful components and restricted components,
etc. should be no more than 1/5 of the permissible content and equivalent level. In
case permissible content and equivalent level is no more than 1.0 mg/kg, the
Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ) should be no more than 2/5 of the
permissible content. Moreover, it is recommended that the Minimum Limit of
Quantification of main components/major components and material components
should be no more than 1/5 of minimum volume to be contained and the minimum
content of a distribution fertilizer. In addition, in case the Minimum Limit of
Quantification exceeds 1/5 of these minimum volumes, conduct the above-mentioned
repeatability test, confirm the Minimum Limit of Quantification and state clearly the
fact in the applicable range of a test method.
Comment 9 There are some methods to estimate Minimum Limit of Quantification. The methods
differ depending on whether they are based on an instrument analysis or not and
678
depending on instruments used. A method different from the methods shown in

(3.6.1) to (3.6.3) is allowed. However, the definition of a method and Minimum
Limit of Quantification by the method should be clearly stated.
(3.6.1) Estimation method by a repeatability test

With regard to a test sample with concentration near Minimum Limit of Quantification, conduct a
repeatability test using 7 to 10 analytical samples, obtain repeatability standard deviation and
estimate Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ) in an analytical sample by the formula (3).
Estimated value of Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ) = 10 × ・・・(3)
： Repeatability standard deviation
(3.6.2) Estimation method using a calibration curve

In case a calibration curve is linear, estimate Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ) in an
analytical sample by the formula (4) using the standard deviation of the residuals of a calibration
curve or estimated signals in concentration 0 and the inclination of a calibration curve.
10 ×
Estimated value of Minimum Limit of Quantification (LOQ) = ・・・(4)
： The standard deviation of residuals. Or the standard deviation of signasls in

concentration 0, which are estimated from a regression line
： The inclination of a calibration curve
(3.6.3) Estimation method using an SN ratio

In a test method such as Chromatography, etc. which has a baseline noise, calculate from a
concentration in an analytical solution whose SN ratio is 10 to 1 at the peak and estimate Minimum
Limit of Quantification (LOQ) in an analytical sample.
References
and Food Safety Bureau, the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare: The text
(operation method) on Bioanalytical Method Validation”, October 28, 1997, Iyaku-Shin
No. 338 (1997)
(3.7) Minimum Limit of Detection (LOD)

Estimate Minimum Limit of Detection according to (3.7.1) to (3.7.3).
Comment 10 There are some methods to estimate Minimum Limit of Detection. The methods
differ depending on whether they are based on an instrument analysis or not and
depending on instruments used. A method different from the methods shown in
(3.7.1) to (3.7.3) is allowed. However, the definition of a method and Minimum
679
Limit of Detection by the method should be clearly stated.
(3.7.1) Estimation method by a repeatability test

With regard to a test sample or a blank sample with concentration near Minimum Limit of
Quantification, conduct repeatability tests using 7 to 10 analytical samples, obtain repeatability
standard deviation and estimate Minimum Limit of Detection (LOD) in an analytical sample by the
formula (5).
Estimated value of Minimum Limit of of Detection (LOD)in an analytical sample

= 2 × ( − 1, 0.05) × ・・・(5)

( − 1, 0.05): The Student value of Significance Level 5% (one side) (20)
： The number of analytical samples in a repeatability test
Note (20) In case of a repeatability test using 7 analytical samples, the value is 1.94. In case of
using 10 analytical samples, the value is 1.83.
(3.7.2) Estimation method using a calibration curve

In case a calibration curve is linear, estimate Minimum Limit of Detection (LOD) in an analytical
sample by the formula (6) using the standard deviation of the residuals of a calibration curve or
estimated signals in concentration 0 and the inclination (b) of a calibration curve.
Estimated value of Minimum Limit of of Detection (LOD)

2 × ( − 2, 0.05) ×
= ・・・(6)
： The standard deviation of residuals. Or the standard deviation of signasls in

concentration 0, which are estimated from a regression line
： The inclination of a calibration curve
( − 2, 0.05)： The Student value of Significance Level 5% (one side)
： The number of a measurement point on a calibration curve
(3.7.3) Estimation method using an SN ratio

In a test method such as Chromatography, etc. which has a baseline noise, calculate from a
concentration in an analytical solution whose SN ratio is 3 to 1 at the peak and estimate Minimum
Limit of Detection (LOD) in an analytical sample.
References
1) ICH Harmonised Tripartite Guideline: Validation of Analytical Procedures: Text and
680
No. 338 (1997)
(3.8) Robustness
Robustness should be studied when an analysis method is developed, and the estimation method
depends on the type of analysis method to be developed. Robustness expresses the reliability of an
analysis method when its analysis conditions are intentionally changed. If an observed value tends
to be easily affected by the variation of an analysis condition, it is necessary to consider a method to
control an analysis condition appropriately or to state the fact as a precaution in a testing method.
The evaluation of robustness enables the establishment of a series of parameters such as Resolution
related to system conformance. Similarly, the confirmation of these parameters ensures that the
validation of an analysis method is maintained in a daily analysis.
Typical variation factors are as follows.
(3.8.1) Common variation factors: Typical variation factors common to various kinds of test
methods are as follows.
a) Extraction time, extraction temperature
b) Stability of a test solution in respective steps
c) Reagent’s grade
(3.8.2) Variation factors in Chromatography, etc.: Typical variation factors of measurements by

Chromatography or refining by solid phase extraction are as follows.
a) Change of a column or a cartridge (A different lot or a different brand)
b) Influence by the variation of pH and composition of an eluent or a wash
c) Temperature
d) Flow rate
e) Influence of a matrix and effect of dilution
References
No. 338 (1997)
3) Thompson, M., Ellison, S.L.R, Wood, R., : Harmonized guidelines for
(2002)
681
Reference 1: Procedure to compare an observed value and a certified value
Obtain the total mean (m) of the replication test results and the certified value (μ), and the
absolute value ( ) of the difference of the two values by the formula (R1.1). Next, obtain the
standard uncertainty ( ) of the certified value of a certified reference material by the formula
(R1.2), and obtain the standard uncertainty ( ) of the total mean by the formula (R1.3). Calculate
the combined standard uncertainty ( (∆ ) ) of by the formula (R1.4) using the obtained
and . Further, calculate an expanded uncertainty ( ∆ ) by the formula (R1.5) using the
coverage factor ( = 2).
Compare and ∆ to confirm that the criterion (the formula (R1.6)) is satisfied, that is,
is no more than ∆ .
The absolute value ( ) of the difference of the total mean of repeatability test
results and a certified value= | − | ・・・(R1.1)
%
The standard uncertainty ( ) of the certified value = ・・・(R1.2)
The standard uncertainty of the measurement of a total mean ( )= ・・・(R1.3)

√
The combined standard uncertainty (∆ ) of = + ・・・(R1.4)
The expanded uncertainty ∆ of = (∆ ) × (∆ ) = 2× (∆ ) ・・・(R1.5)
Criterion ≦ ∆ ・・・(R1.6)
： The total mean of observed values

µ： A certified value
%： The expanded uncertainty of a certified value
： The coverage factor of an expanded uncertainty of a standard reference material

： The number of repeatability test samples
(∆ ) ： The coverage factor of an expanded uncertainty of ( (∆ ) = 2)
682
Reference 2: Calculation of reproducibility or intermediate precision and repeatability
(1) Structure of an observed value

An observed value (xij) in Table 1, as is shown in the formula (R2.1), consists of a true value (μ), a
variation (β) by a factor and a variation (e) by an accidental error under repeatability conditions
(hereinafter referred to as “an accidental error”). When p laboratories conduct a collaborative study
in which respective laboratories conduct repeatability tests using n samples, the formula (R2.2) is
introduced on the assumption that the distribution of β is equivalent to N(0, ) which depends on
a pure between-laboratory variation and the distribution of e is equivalent to N(0, ) which
depends on an accidental error. In addition, when the same laboratory conducts replicate tests for p
days using n samples on respective test days, the formula (R2.3) is introduced on the assumption
that the distribution of β is equivalent to N(0, ( ) )which depends on test days variation (factor T)
and the distribution of e is equivalent to (0, ) which depends on an accidental error.
Ovserved value = ＋＋・・・ (R2.1)
Ovserved value = ＋ 0, ＋ 0, ・・・ (R2.2)
Ovserved value = ＋ 0, ( ) ＋ 0, ・・・ (R2.3)
： True value
： Variation of a factor ： Accidental error
0, ： Normal distribution of with the mean 0 and standard deviation
0, ： Normal distrubution of with the mean 0 and standard deviation
： Pure between − laboratory variance ： Repeatability variance
0, ( ) ： Normal distribution of with the mean 0 and standard deviation ( )
( ) ： Test days variance
683
Table 1 Test results of collaborative studies or repeatability tests on different days

Laboratory or test day Analytical sample number
(Factor) 1 2 3 ･･･ j ･･･ n
1 x 11 x 12 x 13 ･･･ x 1j ･･･ x 1n
2 x 21 X 22 x 23 ･･･ x 2j ･･･ x 2n
3 x 31 X 32 x 33 ･･･ x 3j ･･･ x 3n
････････････････････････
i xi1 X i2 xi3 ･･･ x ij ･･･ x in
････････････････････････
p xp1 X p2 xp3 ･･･ x pj ･･･ x pn
(2) Calculation procedure of reproducibility and repeatability of the results of a

collaborative study
(2.1) Estimation of true value and variance
In an actual statistical analysis, a true value (μ), a true and pure between-laboratory variance
( ) and a true repeatability variance ( ) are unknown. Therefore, they are replaced with
estimated values obtained from the results of a collaborative study and are expressed as a mean (m),
a pure between-laboratory variance ( ) and a repeatability variance ( ) respectively.
(2.2) One-way analysis of variance

Exclude ineffective observed values which have clearly objective reasons such as deviation from
a protocol and malfunction of instruments from the report values by laboratories which participated
in a collaborative study. Further exclude outliers by conducting Cochran’s test and Grubb’s test.
And conduct one-way analysis of variance for the remaining results to obtain the unbiased variance
(V) of respective variation factors in Table 2.
Table 2 Table of one-way analysis of variance

Variation factor Sum of Degree of Unbiased variance Expectation of variance
squares freedom ( ) ( )
Between-laboratory(L) −1 + ×
Accidental error (e) × ( − 1)
Comment 1 It is possible to conduct one-way analysis of variance easily using a statistical

program or a tool of a spreadsheet program. In this case, it should be noted that
different terminologies may be used (Between-laboratory (L)→ Between-group,
Accidental error (e) → Within-group, Unbiased variance→ Mean square, etc.).
Comment 2 Unbiased variance (V) is calculated by (Sum of squares)/ (Degree of freedom).
(2.3) The calculation of reproducibility and repeatability

The relation of the expectation of variance E (V) of respective factors in Table 2 holds true.
Therefore, calculate repeatability variance (sr2) and pure between-laboratory variance (sL2) by the
formula (R2.4) and (R2.5), and further calculate reproducibility variance (sR2) by the formula (R2.6)
(1) (2)
.
684
Repeatability variance ( ) = ・・・ (R2.4)

−
Pure between − laboratory variance ( ) = ・・・ (R2.5)
Reproducibility variance ( ) = ＋・・・ (R2.6)
： The unbiased variance of a variation factor (accidental error (e))

in the table of one − way analysis of variance (Table 2)
： The unbiased variance of a variation factor (between − laboratories (L))
Calculate a repeatability standard deviation ( ) and a reproducibility standard deviation ( ) by

the formula (R2.7) and (R2.8) using the obtained repeatability variance and reproducibility variance,
and further calculate a repeatability relative standard deviation (RSDr)and a reproducibility relative
standard deviation (RSDR) by the formula (R2.9) and (R2.10) (2) (3).
Repeatability standard deviation ( ) = ・・・ (R2.7)
Reproducibility standard deviation ( ) = ・・・ (R2.8)
Repeatability relative standard deviation ( , %) = × 100 ・・・ (R2.9)
Reproducibility relative standard deviation ( , %) = × 100 ・・・ (R2.10)
： the total mean ( )of the effective data of collaborative study results
Note (1) In case < , assume = (that is, the pure between-laboratory variance
( )= 0 in the formula (R2.5)) and let the formula (R2.6) form = .
(2) The rounding of a numerical value is not executed in the middle of the calculation.
(3) The mean and the standard deviation are expressed rounding to the digit of the
observed value. The relative standard deviation is expressed rounding to the first
decimal place.
(3) Calculation procedure of intermediate precision and repeatability by the replicate test
results on different days
(3.1) Estimation of a true value and a variance
In an actual statistical analysis, a true value (μ), a true test day variance (σ(T)2) and a true
repeatability variance (σr2) are unknown. Therefore, they are replaced with estimated values
obtained from the eplicate test results on different days and are expressed as a mean (m), test days
variance (s(T)2) and a repeatability variance (sr2) respectively.
(3.2) One-way analysis of variance

Conduct one-way analysis of variance for the replicate test results on different days to obtain the
685
unbiased variance (V) of respective variation factors in Table 3.

Variation factor Sum of Degree of Unbiased variance Expectation of variance
squares freedom ( ) ( )
Test days (T) −1 + × ( )
Accidental × ( − 1)
error(e)
Comment 3 It is possible to conduct one-way analysis of variance easily using a statistical

program or a tool of a spreadsheet program. In this case, it should be noted that
different terminologies may be used (Test days (T) → between-group, Accidental
error (e) → within-group, Unbiased variance → Mean square, etc.).
Comment 4 Unbiased variance (V) is calculated by (Sum of squares)/ (Degree of freedom).
(3.3) The calculation of intermediate precision and repeatability

The relation of the expectation of variance E (V) of respective factors in Table 3 holds true.
Therefore, calculate repeatability variance ( ) and test days variance ( ( ) 2) by the formula
(R2.11) and (R2.12), and further calculate intermediate variance ( ( ) ) by the formula (R2.13) (2)
(4)
.
Repeatability variance ( ) = ・・・ (R2.11)

−
Test days variance ( ) = ・・・ (R2.12)
Intermediate Variance ( ) = ( ) ＋・・・ (R2.13)
： The unbiased variance of a variation factor (accidental error (e))

： The unbiased variance of a variation factor (test days (T))
Calculate a repeatability standard deviation ( ) and an intermediate standard deviation ( ( ) ) by

the formula (R2.14) and (R2.15) using the obtained estimated values of repeatability variance and
intermediate variance, and further calculate a repeatability relative standard deviation (RSDr) and an
intermediate relative standard deviation (RSDI(T)) by the formula (R2.16) and (R2.17) (2) (3).
Repeatability standard deviation ( ) = ・・・ (R2.14)
Internediate standard deviation ( ) = ( ) ・・・ (R2.15)
686
Repeatability relative standard deviation ( , %) = × 100 ・・・ (R2.16)
Internediate relative standard deviation ( ), % = × 100 ・・・ (R2.17)
： Total mean of the replicate test results on different days
Note (4) In case < assume = (that is, the test days variance ( ( ) ) in the
formula (R2.12) = 0) and let the formula (R2.13) form ( ) = .
(4) Examples of the calculation of intermediate precision and repeatability by the replicate
test results on different days.
An example of repeatability test results on different days of citric acid-soluble phosphoric acid
using sample 1 and sample 2 containing phosphite is shown in Table 4. Conduct one-way analysis
of variance for the test results of respective samples to obtain the unbiased variance (V) of
respective variation factors (Table 5).
Examples of the calculation of intermediate precision and repeatability for the sample 1 and
sample 2 using the formula (R2.11) to the formula (R2.17) are shown in Table 6-1 and 6-2. In
addition, the results of respective standard deviation are expressed rounding to the digit of the
observed value and the results of the respective relative standard deviations are expressed rounding
to the first decimal place.
Table 4 Example of repeatability test results on different days (mass fraction (%))
Test day (factor) Total
Sample 1 2 3 4 5 6 7) mean
No. ( )1)
51.20 52.15 51.00 51.35 51.35 51.38 51.28
Sample 1 51.38
51.45 51.85 51.09 51.28 51.10 51.38 51.43
5.18 4.90 5.01 5.15 5.14 5.13 5.21
Sample 2 5.10
5.00 5.12 5.06 5.14 5.07 5.11 5.18
1) The mean is expressed rounding to the digit of the observed value.
687

Sample Variation factor Sum of Degree of Unbiased variance Expectation of variance
No. squares freedom ( ) ( )
Teat days (T) 1.0570 6 0.17616 +2× ( )
Sample 1 Accidental
0.1253 7 0.01789
error (e)
Test days (T) 0.0478 6 0.00797 +2× ( )
Sample 2 Accidental
0.0448 7 0.00640
error (e)
Table 6-1 Calculation of intermediate precision and repeatability using the sample 1 replicate test results on
different days1)
Variation factor Unit Formula Calculation Result
Repeatability variance
= = 0.01789 0.01789
( )
Repeatability standard Mass
2) = = √0.01789 0.13
Deviation ( ) fraction (%)
Repeatability relative 0.1338
3)
% = × 100 = × 100 0.3
standard deviation( ) 51.38
− 0.17616 − 0.01789
Test days variance ( ) = = 0.07914
2
Intermediate variance ( ) = ( ) ＋ = 0.07914＋0.01789 0.09703
Intermediate standard Mass
2) = ( ) = √0.09703 0.31
Deviation ( ) fraction (%)
Intermediate relative ( )
= 0.3115
standard % = × 100 0.6
3)
51.38
deviation ( ) × 100
1) The rounding of a numerical value is not executed in the middle of the calculation.
2) The standard deviation is expressed rounding to the digit of the observed value.
3) The relative standard deviation is expressed rounding to the first decimal place.
688
Table 6-2 Calculation of intermediate precision and repeatability using the sample 2 replicate test results on
different days1)
Variation factor Unit Formula Calculation Result
Repeatability variance
= = 0.00640 0.00640
( )
Repeatability standard Mass fraction
2) = = √0.00640 0.08
Deviation ( ) (%)
Repeatability relative
0.0800
standard deviation % = × 100 = × 100 1.6
3)
5.10
( )
− 0.00797 − 0.00640
Test days variance ( ) = = 0.00078
2
Intermediate variance
= ( ) ＋ = 0.00078＋0.00640 0.00718
( )
Intermediate standard Mass fraction

2) = ( ) = √0.00718 0.08
Deviation ( ) (%)
Intermediate relative
( ) 0.0848
standard % = × 100 = × 100 1.7
3)
5.10
deviation ( )
Footnote: Refer to Table 6-1
689
Separate sheet: The target of trueness and the criteria of precision in respective concentration
levels
The target of trueness (recovery) and the criteria of precision in respective concentration levels to
evaluate Chromatography (1) and test methods other than Chromatography are shown in Table 1 and
Table 2. The target of trueness is generally within the recovery of Table 1. As for precision, the
permissible level may exceed them by a factor of 2.0.
Note (1) Gas chromatography, Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry, High-Performance

Liquid Chromatography, High-Performance Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass
Spectrometry, Ion Chromatography, etc.
Table 1 The target of trueness in respective concentration levels

Chromatography Test methods other than
Chromatography
Concentration level Recovery (%) Recovery (%)
≧25% (mass fraction) 90 - 108 98 - 102
≧10% (mass fraction) 90 - 108 97 - 103
≧1% (mass fraction) 85 - 110 96 - 104
≧0.1% (mass fraction) 85 - 110 94 - 106
≧100 mg/kg 80 - 115 92 - 108
≧10 mg/kg 70 - 120 90 - 110
≧1 mg/kg 70 - 120 85 - 115
≧100 μg/kg 70 - 120 85 - 115
≧10 μg/kg 70 - 120 80 - 120
<10 μg/kg 60 - 125 75 - 125
690
Table 2 Criteria of precision 1) in respective concentration levels

Chromatography Test methods other than Chromatography
Reproducibilit Intermediate Reproducibilit Reproducibilit Intermediate Reproducibil
y relative relative y relative y relative relative ity relative
Concentration
standard standard standard standard standard standard
level
deviation deviation deviation (%) deviation deviation deviation
(%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
≧25 % 8 6.5 4 2.5 2 1
(mass
fraction)
≧10 % 8 6.5 4 3 2.5 1.5
(mass fraction)
≧1 % 8 6.5 4 4 3.5 2
(mass fraction)
≧0.1 % 8 6.5 4 6 4.5 3
(mass fraction)
≧100 mg/kg 8 6.5 4 8 6.5 4
≧10 mg/kg 11 9 6 11 9 6
≧1 mg/kg 16 13 8 16 13 8
≧100 μg/kg 22 18 11 22 18 11
≧10 μg/kg 22 18 11 22 18 11
<10 μg/kg 22 18 11 22 18 11
1) As for precision, the permissible level may exceed them by a factor of 2.0.
691

TestingMethodsForFertilizers2018 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TestingMethodsForFertilizers2018 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TestingMethodsForFertilizers2018 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Note: This is an unofficial translation.

Only the original Japanese texts have effect

Testing Methods for Fertilizers

Incorporated Administrative Agency

“The Official Methods of Analysis of Fertilizers” stipulated by the Ministry of

The members of The Technical Committee

1. General Rule .... 1

2. Handling of samples .... 9

3. General tests .... 17

4. Main components, guaranteed components, etc .... 32

4.1.2 Ammoniac nitrogen .... 57

4.4 Silicic acid .... 195

4.8.1 Citrate-soluble boron .... 285

4.15.1 Water-soluble cobalt .... 369

5. Harmful components .... 374

5.10 Biuret nitrogen .... 493

6. Testing relating to the other limitations .... 508

7. Nitrification inhibitor .... 579

7.4 N-2,5-dichlorophenyl succinamic acid (DCS) .... 590

8. Others .... 604

Appendix. The procedure to validate characteristics of testing methods .... 672

(2) General matters in common, procedures and terms

Table 1 Components to be calculated as main component

referred to as “electrically heated atomic absorption spectrometry”) and other atomic

3) Solution + reagent: Describe as solution name a (concentration) - reagent name b [V1+V2].

1) Reference materials provided by National Metrology Institute: Reference materials

1.2 Validity check of testing methods

Table 1 Testing method validation level

Table 2 Classification of an individual testing method

1.3 Procedure of testing methods

1.3.2 Evaluation of test result

2.2 Storage of samples

(3) Procedure: Conduct storage as shown below.

2.3 Preparation of test samples

(3) Procedure: Conduct pre-drying as shown below.

Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) = ((W1 - A)/W1) × 100 ………. (1)

Conversion factor (actual article) = A/W1 ………… (2)

W1： Mass (g) of the sampled laboratory sample

Component content in a laboratory sample (actual article) = B ×C

B： Component content in an analytical sample obtained in each test

250 g – 1 kg of Transfer to a sample drying dish and spread uniformly.

Drying Example: About 70 hours at 40 ºC, no less than 5 hours at 65 ºC

Standing to cool Room temperature

Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 0.1 g

Figure Flow sheet for pre-drying

2.3.2 Reduction (Separation)

(3) Procedure: Conduct reduction (separation) as shown below.

(3) Procedure: Conduct grinding as shown below.

(3) Measurement: Conduct measurement as shown below.

Loss on drying (% (mass fraction)) = ((W1 - A)/W1) × 100 ………. (1)

Conversion factor (drying matter) = W1/A………………………… (2)

W1： Mass (g) of the sampled analytical sample

Moisture (% (mass fraction)) in the laboratory sample (actual article) = B + C × ((100 -

Component content in a drying matter = D ×E

D： Component content in an analytical sample obtained in each test

Table 1 Drying conditions

Heating 100 ºC ± 2 ºC, 5 hours

Standing to cool Desiccator

Measurement Measure the mass to the order of 1 mg.

Table 1　　Testing method validation level

Table 2　　Classification of an individual testing method

Table 1　　Analysis results of the comparison test results of respective methods

Table 2　　Results and analysis results from a collaborative study